Siemens Simodrive 611

Part #
6SN1145-1AA01-0AA0

Part #
6SN11451AA010AA0

6SN1145-1AA01-0AA1

6SN11451AA010AA1

6SN1145-1BA00-0BA0

6SN11451BA000BA0

6SN1145-1BA00-0DA0

6SN11451BA000DA0

6SN1145-1BA01-0BA0

6SN11451BA010BA0

6SN1145-1BA01-0BA1

6SN11451BA010BA1

6SN1145-1BA01-0BA2

6SN11451BA010BA2

6SN1145-1BA01-0DA0

6SN11451BA010DA0

6SN1145-1BA01-0DA1

6SN11451BA010DA1

6SN1145-1BA02-0CA0

6SN11451BA020CA0

Presented by MROELECTRIC.COM

Quote Email: inquiry@MROELECTRIC.COM

Call:

1-800-466-0649

Fax: 919-415-1614

http://www. MROELECTRIC.COM /
Siemens Simodrive 611 MRO ELECTRIC & SUPPLY Company

www.mroelectric.com

SIMODRIVE 611 GLJLWDO

Drive Converter
Configuration Manual 02/2012

SIMODRIVE
s

Preface, Table of Contents

Overview of the
Drive System
System Configuration

SIMODRIVE 611 digital

Motor Selection and

Position/Speed Sensing
Control Units

Drive Converters
Configuration Manual

Power Modules
Infeed Modules
Line Supply Connection
Important Circuit Information
Cabinet Design and EMC
Connection Diagrams
Service and Spare Parts
Dimension Drawings

Valid for
Equipment series 6SN11

Abbreviations and Terminology

References
Certificates/
Declarations of Conformity
Index

02/2012 Edition

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
B
C
D

3ls

SIMODRIVE documentation
Printing history
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The current configuring manual replaces the previous version.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column.
Status code in the Remarks column:
A.... New documentation
B.... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C.... Revised edition with new status
If technical changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a
new edition coding in the header on that page.
Edition

Order No.

Remarks

04.93

6SN10600AA010BA0

08.93

6SN11970AA000BP0

12.94

6SN11970AA000BP1

11.95

6SN11970AA000BP2

02.98

6SN11970AA000BP3

08.98

6SN11970AA000BP4

05.01

6SN11970AA000BP5

02.03

6SN11970AA000BP6

10.04

6SN11970AA000BP7

11.05

6SN11970AA000BP8

02.07

6SN11970AA001BP0

05.08

6SN11970AA001BP1

02.12

6SN11970AA001BP2

Trademarks
All products mentioned may be trademarks or product designations of Siemens AG or their suppliers,
whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights of the trademark owners.

We have checked that the contents of this publication agree with the
hardware and software described here. Nevertheless, differences might
exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical.
The information in this document is regularly checked and necessary
corrections are included in reprints. Suggestions for improvement are also
welcome.

Siemens AG 2012 All rights reserved.

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Subject to change without prior notice.

SiemensAktiengesellschaft

Foreword
Readers note
The Configuration Manual describes a reference state, which when
observed, ensures the required reliable operation and compliance with
the standards that have been taken into account.
For deviations from the requirements laid down in the Configuration
Manual, suitable measures must be applied, for example, measurements, securing or verifying that the required reliable operation is guaranteed and that the standards to be taken into account are complied
with from a regulatory perspective.
The documentation must be completely read, understood and taken
into account before the devices are commissioned.
If parts of the documentation have not been adequately understood,
then please contact your local Siemens person before you continue to
work with the devices.
The contents of this document are neither part of an earlier or existing
agreement, commitment or contractual relationship, nor do they
change this. Siemens is obliged to fulfill all requirements specified in
the applicable sales contract, which also contains all the valid terms of
warranty.
Any statements contained herein neither create new warranties nor
modify the existing warranty.

Structure of the
documentation

The SIMODRIVE documentation is subdivided into the following levels:

Additional information

You can find information on the following topics under the following link:

S General Documentation/Catalogs
S User Documentation
S Manufacturer/Service Documentation
S Ordering documentation/overview of documents
S Links to download documents
S Using documentation online (searching and scanning through manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g., suggestions, corrections), then please send an email to the following address
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com

My Documentation
Manager

Information is provided under the following link as to how you can individually
compile documentation based on Siemens content, and adapt this for your own
machine documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm

Training

Information about SITRAIN Siemens training courses for products, systems

and solutions in automation technology is provided under the following link:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Forword
1.2 Systemkonfiguration 1

FAQs

02.12
05.01

You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under
Product Support:
http//support.automation.siemens.com

Target group

This documentation addresses machine manufacturing companies (OEMs) that

wish to configure, construct and commission a drive lineup based on
SIMODRIVE components.

Technical Support

Local country telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet under Contact:
http://www.siemens.com automation/service&support

Certificates

You will find the certificates for the products described in this documentation in
the Internet: http://www.support.automation.siemens.com
under the Product/Order No. 15257461
or contact the relevant branch office of the A&D MC group of Siemens AG.
All declarations of conformity and certificates such as CE, UL, etc., are performed with the system components described in the associated Configuration
Manuals or catalogs and, thus, are only valid if the described components are
used in the device or facility.
Note
The use of components not released by Siemens may require the user to
prepare new certificates/declarations of conformity.

vi

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Forword

Repairs
Note
Repairs may be performed only by workshops authorized by Siemens who
must use genuine spare parts. Unauthorized repairs and the use of other spare
parts can result in personal injuries and property damage as well as loss of UL
approvals and safety functions, such as Safety Integrated.

!
Proper use

Warning
SIMODRIVE converters are used in high voltage installations and are operated
at voltages that when touched can cause serious injuries or death!

Note the following:

Warning
Siemens products may only be used for the intended use in applications
described in the catalog and the associated technical documentation. If
thirdparty products and components are used, then these must either be
recommended or certified by Siemens. The perfect and safe operation of
products assumes that they have been correctly transported, correctly stored,
located, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated and maintained. The
permissible environmental conditions must be complied with.
Information and instructions in the associated documentation must be
observed.

Definition:
Who are qualified
personnel?

Setup and operation of the device/equipment/system in question must only be

performed using this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/
system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as
referred to in the safety instructions in this documentation are persons authorized to start up, ground, and label devices, systems, and circuits in accordance
with the relevant safety standards.

Objectives

This Configuration Manual provides all of the detailed information required to

use and handle SIMODRIVE components.
Should you wish for additional information or should exceptional problems arise
that are not addressed in sufficient detail in this manual, you can request the
required information from your local Siemens office.
The Configuration Manual describes a modular drive system. It is permissible to
use the constellations and general versions described here. All other combinations must be separately and individually released by Siemens.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

vii

Forword

12.06
11.05
02.07
05.01

Information for
using this Manual

The following should be observed when using this manual:

1. Help: The following help is available for the reader:

S Complete table of contents

S Header line (as orientation):
the main chapter is in the upper header line
the subchapter is in the lower header line

S Appendix with

Abbreviations and List of References

Index
If you require information regarding a specific term, then look for this in
the Appendix under the Chapter Index.
The Chapter number as well as the page number is specified where information on this term can be found.
2. Edition of the documentation:
The history of the document editions is summarized in the printing history.
The header of the document indicates the current edition (12/2006).
Readers note
Only the digital components for a SIMODRIVE group with High Performance/
High Standard and 611 universal modules are described in Edition A10.04 and
higher. Please refer to the overview in Chapter 4.1 regarding from which
software releases, use is possible.
The descriptions for the relevant controls in the Configuration Manual, Edition
02.03, still remain valid for the analog components that have been discontinued
(not for new configurations)!

Safety information

viii

This documentation contains information that must be observed to ensure your

personal safety and to prevent material damage. The instructions for your personal safety are marked by a warning triangle. Instructions relating solely to
material damage are not marked by a warning triangle. The warnings appear in
decreasing order of risk as given below.

Danger
indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Warning
indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not
taken.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

Forword

Caution
with a safety alert signal indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if
proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
indicates that an undesirable result or state may arise if the relevant note is not
observed.

Additional
information
Note
This symbol indicates important information about the product or part of the
document, where the reader should take special note.

Readers note
This symbol is shown, if it relates to important information which the reader
must observe.

Technical information

Warning: High leakage current

As a result of the high switching frequencies, capacitances (parasitic and
integrated) with respect to ground may cause high leakage currents. This is the
reason that a permanent PE connection is required at the control cabinet and
at the line filter!
Measures according to EN 50178/94 Part 5.3.2.1 must be implemented, e.g.
1. Copper protective conductor with a minimum crosssection of 10 mm2
should be connected, or
2. A second conductor should be connected in parallel with the protective
conductor through separate terminals.
This conductor must also fully meet the requirements for PE conductors
according to IEC 3645543.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

ix

Forword

02.12
05.01

Note
The SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system can be directly connected to TN
line supplies with rated voltages 3ph. 380 V AC (with derating), 3ph. 400 V
AC, 3ph. 415 V AC and 3ph. 480 V AC. Matching transformers, which are
tailored to the system, are available to connect the system to other line supply
types, for example, to IT or TT line supplies.
Upstream devices providing protection against hazardous leakage currents or
for fire protection (such as residualcurrent protective devices) must be
AC/DCsensitive in accordance with the requirements of DIN EN 50178. In the
case of other residual current protective devices, a transformer with separate
windings must be connected upstream of the converter for purposes of
decoupling. See Chapter 7.

Warning
When electrical equipment is operated, certain parts of this equipment are
inevitably under dangerous voltage.
Incorrect handling of these units, i.e. not observing the warning information, can
therefore lead to death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage.
Only appropriately qualified personnel may commission/start up this
equipment.
These personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and
maintenance procedures described in these operating instructions.
Perfect, safe and reliable operation of the equipment assumes that it has been
appropriately transported and repaired and professionally stored, mounted and
installed as well as carefully operated and serviced. Failure to observe these
requirements can endanger the user (electrical shock, fire hazard) or damage
the device.
Hazardous axis motion can occur when working with the equipment.
Further, all of the relevant national, local land plant/systemspecific regulations
and specifications must be taken into account.

Caution
The DC link discharge voltage hazard warning in the local language must be
clearly attached to the appropriate modules.

Note
When handling cables, please observe the following:

S are not damaged

S they may not be stressed,
S they may not come into contact with rotating components.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

Forword

Notice
M600 and M500 are not PE voltages. Hazardous voltages of between
300 ... 400 V with respect to PE are present at the terminals. These potentials
(voltages) may not be connected to PE.

Note
The machine builder must ensure that the voltage drop between the start of the
consumers installation and the power drive system (PDS) does not exceed 4%
when operating with rated values.

Warning
The protective separation can only be guaranteed when using the
components permitted/certified by Siemens for the system.
Protective separation can only be guaranteed when it is absolutely certain
that the system components have the appropriate degree of protection.
The ensure protective separation, the shield of the brake cable must be
connected to PE through the largest possible surface area.
Protective separation is required between the temperature sensor and motor
winding.
If these limitations and constraints are not carefully observed then this can
result in injury due to electric shock.

Warning
Startup/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that
the machine in which the components described here are to be installed, fulfills
the regulations/specifications of the Directive 89/392/EEC. If this is not
observed, this can result in injury.

Warning
The information and instructions in all of the documentation supplied and any
other instructions must always be observed to eliminate hazardous situations
and damage.

S For special versions of the machines and equipment, the information in the
associated catalogs and quotations applies.

S Further, all of the relevant national, local land plant/systemspecific

regulations and specifications must be taken into account.

S All work should be undertaken with the system in a novoltage condition!

If this is not observed, this can result in injury.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

xi

Forword

12.07
05.01

Warning
Even after the disconnection of all power, a dangerous residual voltage as high
as 60 V DC can still be present. For capacitor modules, this hazardous voltage
can be present for up to 30 min.
In order to ensure that no hazardous voltages are present, the voltage must be
first carefully measured (generator principle when motors are rotating). If this is
not observed, then this can result in injury due to electric shock.
For this reason, opening the device or removing the cover is permitted only
after up to 30 minutes have elapsed (depending on the degree of expansion)
since the device was switched to the voltagefree state. All covers must be
reattached before the line voltage is switched on. Operation of the plant with
damaged DC link covers is not permitted!
Danger of death!
Touching live terminals, cables or device parts can result in serious injury or
death!

Warning
Do not switch off devices, e.g. using a line supply isolating device (main
switch), before disabling the pulse inhibit (T 48) on the infeed/regenerative
feedback modules. Otherwise, the device can be destroyed along with other
devices in the control cabinet.

Warning
The rated current of the connected motor must match the rated converter
current. If this is not the case, then the protection of the motor cables is no
longer guaranteed. The crosssection of the motor feeder cable must be
dimensioned for the rated drive converter current. If this is not carefully
observed, cables can overheat and can even cause an equipment fire.

Caution
When using mobile radios (e.g. cellular phones, mobile phones, 2way radios)
with a transmission power of > 1 W close to the equipment (< 1.5 m) the
function of the equipment can be disturbed.

Note
This device/module is an opentype device corresponding to UK 50 and, thus,
may only be operated in enclosures/cabinets that ensure protection against
mechanical damage. To ensure protection against mechanical damage, the
devices may only be operated in enclosures/cabinets with degree of protection
IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.

xii

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Forword

Note
The terminal blocks of the SIMODRIVE 611 modules are used for electrical
connection of the particular module. If the terminal blocks are used for another
purpose (e.g. to carry the module), this can damage the module. If the
insulation is damaged, then this can cause injury due to electric shock.

Note
For a minimum fault current, the machine manufacturer must ensure that the
upstream overcurrent protection devices trip within 5 s (see Chapter 7.3; Table
75 and Fig. 78

Note
The following secondary conditions/limitations must be carefully observed if the
machine is subject to a highvoltage test:
1. Powerdown the unit.
2. Withdraw the overvoltage module in order to prevent the voltage limiting
responding.
3. Disconnect the line filter so that the test voltage does not dip.
4. Connect M600 to PE through resistor 100 k (the grounding clip in the NE
modules is open). In the factory, the units are subject to a highvoltage test
at 2.25 kVDC phasePE. The NE modules are shipped with the grounding
clip open.
5. The maximum permissible voltage for a highvoltage machine test is
1.kVDC phasePE.

Danger
The control and drive components for a power drive system (PDS) are allowed
for industrial and commercial use in industrial networks. Their use in public
networks requires a different configuration and/or additional measures.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

xiii

Forword

02.07
05.01

ESDS information
and instructions

ElectroStatic Discharge Sensitive Devices

Components, which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are individual
components, integrated circuits, or boards, which when handled, tested, or
transported, could be destroyed by electrostatic fields or electrostatic
discharge. These components are referred to as ESDS (ElectroStatic
Discharge Sensitive Devices).
Handling ESDS modules:
S When handling devices which can be damaged by electrostatic discharge,
personnel, workstations and packaging must be well grounded!
S Generally, electronic modules may not be touched unless work has to be
carried out on them.
S Personnel may only touch components if
they are continuously grounded through ESDS wristlets,
they wear ESDS shoes, ESDS shoe grounding strips in conjunction with
an ESDS floor surface.
S Boards/modules must only be placed on conductive surfaces (table with
ESDS surface, conductive ESDS foam, ESDS packaging, ESDS transport
container).
S Modules may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television
sets (minimum clearance to the screen > 10 cm).
S Do not bring ESDSsensitive modules into contact with chargeable and
highlyinsulating materials, such as plastic sheets, insulating table tops or
clothing made of synthetic materials.
S Measuring work may only be carried out on the components if
the measuring unit is grounded (e.g. via a protective conductor) or
when floating measuring equipment is used, the probe is briefly
discharged before making measurements (e.g. a baremetal control
housing is touched).

!
!

Warning
If static discharge occurs on surfaces or interfaces that cannot be easily
accessed, malfunctions and/or defects will result.

Warning
When the system boots, this represents a critical operating state with increased
risk. In this phase, especially when activating drives, it is not permissible that
personnel are close to the hazardous area.

Warning
After hardware and/or software components have been modified or replaced, it
is only permissible that the system runsup and the drives are activated with
the protective devices closed (could possibly result in death). Personnel shall
not be present within the danger zone.
It may be necessary to carryout a new, partial or complete acceptance test
after every change or replacement.
Before entering the hazardous area, it should be carefully checked that all of
the drives exhibit stable behavior by briefly moving the drives in both directions
(+/).

xiv

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Forword

05.01

Warning
If the safe standstill function or a stop function, Category 0 in accordance with
EN 602041, is activated, the motor can no longer provide any torque. As a
result of this, potentially hazardous motion can occur, e.g. for:

S
S
S
S

When the drive axes are subject to an external force.

Vertical and inclined axes without weight equalization.
Axes that are moving (coasting down).
Direct drives with low friction and selfclocking behavior.

Possible hazards must be clearly identified using a risk analysis that must be
carried out by the manufacturer. Using the assessment based on this risk
analysis, it must be defined as to which additional measures are required (e.g.
external brakes).

Warning
If the safe standstill function is activated, when a fault condition occurs, the
mechanical axis system can make a jerky movement (possibility of injury,
crushing) as a result of the principle of operation. The magnitude of this
movement depends on the following parameters:

S Design/configuration and mechanical ratios between the motor/mechanical

system.

S Speed and acceleration capability of the motor

S Magnitude of the selected monitoring clock cycle.
S Size of the selected standstill tolerance window.
The danger and warning information above must always be unconditionally observed in order to avoid personal injury and property damage.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

xv

Forword

Health and safety

in the workplace

02.07
05.01

The professional associations for precision and electrical engineering specify

limits for electrical load in the workplace. Compliance with Federal Emission
Control Law is mandatory in the Federal Republic of Germany!
Adherence to the RFI suppression limits for EMC does not also ensure adherence to the requirements for workplaces.
In particular, machine construction, control cabinet structure, shop environment,
infeed conditions and other installations have a substantial impact on adherence to the limits required by the trade association for the respective workplace.
Therefore, the operator must always clarify whether wearers of pacemakers
may be employed at the planned workplace without endangering their health.

xvi

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

Residual risks

Forword

When carrying out a risk assessment of the machine in accordance with the EU
Machinery Directive, the machine manufacturer must consider the following
residual risks associated with the control and drive components of a power drive
system (PDS).
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning, operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example:
Hardware defects and/or software errors in the sensors, controllers,
actuators, and connection technology

Response times of the controller and drive

Operation outside the specification

Errors when parameterizing, programming and wiring

Use of radio devices/cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the

controller

External effects

2. Exceptional temperatures as well as emissions of light, noise, particles, or

gas caused by, for example:
Component malfunctions

Software errors

Operation outside the specification

External effects

3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:

Component malfunctions
Static charges

Operation outside the specification

Condensation/conductive contamination
External effects

4. Electrical, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields that can pose a risk to

people with a pacemaker and/or implants if they are too close.
5. Emission of pollutants if components or packaging are not disposed of
properly.
An assessment of the residual risks (see points 1 to 5 above) established that
these risks do not exceed the specified limit values (risk priority number in
accordance with EN 60812 RPZ = 100).
For additional information, refer to the relevant sections of the Configuration
Manual.
At the present time, other known residual risks are:

S Acceleration of the spindle or axes due to:

Encoder errors, e.g. errors in the absolute measuring system (CD track),
loose contacts in encoder cables or unsuitable encoders.

Cyclically interchanged phases of the motor connections

(VWU instead of UVW).

Interchanged control sense.

Electric faults (defective components, etc.).

Operation of a demagnetized synchronous motor with saturationbased

pole position identification.

Transfer of an incorrect, but plausible actual value in absolute measuring

systems (encoder does not signal an error).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

xvii

Forword

02.12
05.01

S If two power transitions in the inverter are simultaneously destroyed, depending on the motor pole number, this can cause brief axis movement.

Example: Synchronous motor:

For a 6pole synchronous motor, the maximum mechanical motion
on the motor shaft can be 30 degrees.
With a ballscrew that is directly driven (e.g. 10 mm per revolution) this
corresponds to a maximum linear motion of approximately 0.8 mm.

Example, synchronous linear motor:

For a synchronous linear motor, the movement can be a maximum of
one pole width, refer to the Motors Configuration Manual.

S For a 1encoder system, encoder faults are detected by various HW and

SW monitoring functions. It is not permissible that these monitoring functions
are deactivated and they must be parameterized carefully.

S Stop function Category 0 according to EN 602041 means that the spindle/

axes are not braked. Depending on the kinetic energy involved, they can
coastdown for a long time.
This must be integrated in the logic of the protective door interlocking (e.g.
with a logic operation with the signal n < nx).

S Violation of limits may briefly lead to a speed higher than the speed setpoint,
or the axis may pass the defined position to a certain extent, depending on
the dynamic response of the drive and on parameter settings (MD).

S Parameterization and programming errors made by the machinery construction OEM cannot be identified. The required level of safety can only be
assured by a thorough and careful acceptance testing.

S When replacing power modules or motors, the same type must always be
used as otherwise the selected parameters may result in different responses.
When an encoder is replaced, the axis involved must be recalibrated.

S If the line infeed units are connected to the line supply, where the minimum
shortcircuit current is not reached, then the overcurrent protection devices
will not be able to trip within the appropriate time. There is a risk of fire in the
case of a fault!

xviii

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Contents
1

Overview of the Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-25

1.1

Overview of SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-25

1.2

Engineering steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-29

1.3
1.3.1

Engineering a drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculation of the required DC link power (PZK) for dimensioning
the supply system, infeed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculation of the DC link power (engineering sheet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the permissible power supply rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-31
1-33
1-34
1-35
1-36
1-37

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-41

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2

Arrangement of the modules and their mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Arrangement of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting and installing the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-42
2-42
2-45

2.2

Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-46

2.3

Motor selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-48

2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3

Position sensing/actual speed value sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Position sensing, direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position detection, indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-49
2-49
2-50
2-51

2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2

Power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function of the power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectingup the power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-51
2-52
2-52

2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules included in the scope of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCU box for SINUMERIK 840D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-53
2-53
2-53
2-53
2-54

2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3

Infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-55
2-57
2-59
2-60

Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-63

3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2

Motor selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motors with holding brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-63
3-63
3-63

3.2

Motor encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-64

3.3

Indirect position and motor speed sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-68

1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

xix

02.12
05.01

xx

3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4

Direct position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Encoder systems that can be evaluated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder power supply for SSI encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal amplifier electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-68
3-68
3-72
3-74
3-76

3.5

Overview, position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-78

3.6

Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-80

Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-81

4.1
4.1.1

Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interface overview, closedloop drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-83
4-87

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Control board for 1 or 2 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the terminals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-91
4-93
4-98

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3

HLA module control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test sockets (diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-104
4-105
4-107
4-111

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3

ANA module control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-112
4-113
4-115
4-119

Power Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-121

5.1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-121

5.2

Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-123

5.3

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-124

5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4

Current reduction/derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse frequency power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperaturedependent derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation heightdependent derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculation examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-128
5-128
5-130
5-130
5-131

5.5

Operating power modules from an unregulated infeed . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-134

5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3

Interfaces and terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectable cable crosssections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor terminals A1 and A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-136
5-136
5-137
5-138

Infeed Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-141

6.1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-141

6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5

Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface overview, NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 kW UI module interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable crosssections that can be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threeconductor connection (standard circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-147
6-147
6-150
6-152
6-153
6-154

6.3

Function overview and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-162

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissible duty cycles/derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data of the supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-165
6-165
6-169
6-172

6.5
6.5.1

HFD reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment of the HFD reactors/damping resistors to
the NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-174

6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3

Monitoring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration into the overall system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data (supplement to the general technical data) . . . . . . . . .
Mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-179
6-179
6-179
6-181

6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2

DC link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacitor module with 2.8 mF, 4.1 mF or 20 mF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulsed resistor module and unregulated line supply infeed
with pulsed resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External pulsed resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engineering information is applicable for UI 5 kW, 10 kW, 28 kW
and PR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-183
6-183

6.7.3
6.7.4
7

6-175

6-191
6-194
6-197

Line Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-199

7.1

Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed . . . . . . . . . . .

7-199

7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3

7-205
7-205
7-205

7.2.4

Voltage matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line supply types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum crosssections for PE (protective conductor)/equipotential
bonding conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6

Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch . . . . .

Assignment of the line fuses to the NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning autotransformers to the I/R modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning isolating transformers to the I/R modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment of the isolating transformer to the UI modules . . . . . . . . .
Assigning the main switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of a leading contact for line isolating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-215
7-215
7-220
7-224
7-225
7-226
7-226

7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5

Line filters for I/R and UI modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wideband line filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic line filter for I/R modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-230
7-230
7-232
7-234
7-235
7-238

Important Circuit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-239

8.1

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-239

8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3

Infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting several NE modules to a main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application, mode of operation and connection of the line contactor .
Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-242
8-242
8-243
8-244

8.3
8.3.1

Axis expansion using a monitoring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connection example, power supply (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-245
8-245

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-209
7-210

xxi

02.12
05.01

xxii

8.3.2
8.3.3

Connection example, pulse enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-246
8-247

8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2

Drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
611 feed module with High Performance/High Standard . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-249
8-249
8-250

8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7

Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start inhibit applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode of operation of the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectingup the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequence and timing when using the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example safe standstill with contactor safety combination . . . . . . . .
Example, safe standstill for several drive groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-252
8-252
8-253
8-254
8-256
8-257
8-258
8-260

8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3

Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Block diagram of the application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function description of the application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety systems and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-262
8-262
8-263
8-266

8.7
8.7.1

Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Function description, circuit examples =1 to =9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-268
8-280

8.8
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3

Information and instructions regarding applications

with 611 digital/611 universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit example, 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuits with 611 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuits with 611 universal HRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-294
8-295
8-295
8-296

8.9

Master/slave operation, SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-297

8.10

Stardelta mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-298

8.11

Series reactor in the motor lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-301

8.12
8.12.1
8.12.2

Induction motor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating several induction motors in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting individual induction motors 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-303
8-303
8-305

8.13
8.13.1
8.13.2
8.13.3

Operation when the power fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Application and mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC link buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-307
8-307
8-307
8-310

8.14

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-311

8.15
8.15.1
8.15.2

Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

to the line supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Threeconductor connection to the line supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sixconductor connection to the line supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-312
8-312
8-316

8.16
8.16.1
8.16.2
8.16.3

VPM Voltage Protection Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-322
8-322
8-324
8-333

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Cabinet Design and EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-335

9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3

Installation and connectingup regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shielded connecting plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting conditions, internal cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twotier equipment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-335
9-338
9-341
9-344

9.2

Highvoltage test in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-346

9.3

Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according

to EN ISO 138491:2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safetyrelated stop functions of electric drive systems according
to DIN EN 6180052 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control modules safetyrelated circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safetyrelated circuit infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principle of STO in a safety function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Principle of SS1 in a safety function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.3.7
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2

9-347
9-347
9-347
9-348
9-350
9-351
9-352
9-353

Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMERGENCY STOP at a converter SS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a
converter SS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMERGENCY STOP and protective door at several
converters SS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-354
9-354

Using programmable safety components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-377

10

Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-379

11

Spare Parts and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-383

11.1

Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-383

11.2

Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-386

11.3

DC link covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-386

11.4

Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules . . . . . . . . . . .

11-387

12

Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-391

Abbreviations and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A-459

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B-463

Certificates/Declarations of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C-465

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D-479

9.4.3
9.5

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-360
9-372

xxiii

02.12
05.01

xxiv

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Overview of the Drive System

1.1

Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

Supply system

Transformer
(optional)

Switches, contactors, fuses

Chapter 7
Filter

Optional

Reactor
Chapter 6
Infeed
E.g.:
Power module
Chapter 4
Chapter 5

611 digital

Closedloop
Closedl
control
oop
control

611 universal

Cable, reactor,
VPM, cable
protection

Chapter 3

Motor

Motor with position/

speed sensing

Fig. 1-1

Basic system structure

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-25

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

10.04
02.12
05.01

Line supply connection

See Chapter 7

Infeed modules
See Chapter 6

Power modules
See Chapter 5

Damping
resistor

HF commutating
reactors

Infeed/regenerative
feedback module,
internal cooling 1)

Line filter
TN system
3ph. 360 V AC with Derating
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 415 V AC
3ph. 480 V AC

Line filter

HF commutating
reactor for 28 kW
UI module

Unregulated
infeed module

Power module
Internal cooling
with internal fan

Power
module
External
cooling

Mounting frame
with mounted
fan

or
600 V DC
Monitoring module

3ph. 400 V AC

Matching, isolating
transformer
Types, graduated from Capacitor
module
3ph. 200 V AC to
3ph. 575 V AC for
Refer to
Chapter
S TN systems
6.7.1
S TT systems

S
S

Residual current devices

Installation altitude > 2000 m

Fig. 1-2

1-26

External
Pulsed
resistor
pulsed
resistor 2) module
0.3/25 kW

External
pulsed resistor
1.5/25 kW

Power module with

hose cooling

1) Alternatively, external cooling and hose cooling possible.

Version as for the power modules.
2) Only for 28 kW UI module

Overview of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive system

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
10.04
05.01

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

Motors
See Chapter 3

Control units
See Chapter 4

Control units with analog setpoint interface/PROFIBUS

For 1FT6/1FK/1FN/1FW61PH/1FE1 motors

and induction motors

S
S
S
S

Induction motor,
e.g. 1LA

1FK7

1axis version (with resolver only)

2axis version (resolver and motor encoder)
Standard: analog setpoint interface
Option modules: PROFIBUS DP or TERMINALS

1PH4

1PH7

Control units with digital setpoint interface

For 1FT6/1FT7/1FK7/1PH/1PM/2SP1/1FE1 motors

2axis version (with HighStandard control)

for motor encoders
additional measuring system, voltage signals

1PH2

1FW6

For 1FT6/1FT7/1FK7/1FN3/1FW6/1PH/1PM/2SP1/1FE1 motors

1axis version (with HighPerformance control)

for motor encoders
additional measuring system, voltage signals

2axis version (with HighPerformance control)

for motor encoders
additional measuring system, voltage signals
EnDat and SSI encoders

1FE1

2SP1

1FN3

1FT

1PM

For hydraulic linear axes (HLA/ANA)

2axis version

Control valve for hydraulic linear axes

(not included in the scope of supply)

Fig. 1-3

Overview of the drive system

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-27

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

11.05
05.01

Note
Siemens accepts the warranty for satisfactory and reliable operation of the
drive system under the clear understanding that only original SIMODRIVE
system components are used in conjunction with the original accessories
described in this Configuration Manual and in Catalog NC 60.
The user must take the planning and engineering data into consideration.
Combinations that differ from the engineering specifications where relevant,
also in conjunction with thirdparty products, require a special, contractual
agreement.
The converter system is designed for installation in control cabinets which
conform with the relevant standards for processing machines, especially
EN 60204.

Description

The converter system comprises the following modules (refer to Fig. 1-2 and
1-3):

S Transformer
S Switching and protective elements
S Line filter
S Commutating reactors
S Infeed modules
S Power modules
S Control units harmonized to the application technology/process and motor
types

S Special modules and other accessories

Various cooling methods are available for the powerdependent line supply
infeed and drive modules:

S Internal cooling
S External cooling
S Hose cooling

1-28

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

1.2

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.2 Engineering steps

Engineering steps

Note
Depending on the result of a hazard analysis/risk assessment to be performed
according to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC and EN 2921, EN 9541,
EN ISO 138491 and EN 1050, the machinery construction company must
configure, for all its machine types and versions, the safetyrelevant control
sections for the complete machine, incorporating all of the integrated
components. These also include the electric drives.

Note
When engineering SIMODRIVE 611, it is assumed that the motors to be used
are known.
Reference: refer to the appropriate references for motors in the Appendix

Procedure

A SIMODRIVE drive group is configured in two phases:

S Phase 1

Selecting the components

(refer to Fig. 1-4)

S Phase 2

Connection configuration

(refer to Fig. 1-5)

Note
A selection guide is available for engineering the 6SN series, e.g.:

S NCSD Configurator
For additional information, please contact your local Siemens office.
The functions of SIMODRIVE control units are described with keywords in this
Configuration Manual. Limit values may be specified in some cases. For
additional details, please refer to the appropriate documentation.
Detailed ordering information and instructions are provided in Catalogs NC 60
and NC Z.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-29

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.2 Engineering steps

Phase 1 when
engineering

02.12
05.01

Selecting components

Motor selection

See Chapter 3

Position sensing

See Chapter 3

Control units

See Chapter 4

Power modules

See Chapter 5

Infeed modules

See Chapter 6

Line supply connection

Fig. 1-4

Phase 2 when
engineering

Selecting components

Connectingup

Important
circuit information

Cabinet design and EMC

Fig. 1-5

1-30

See Chapter 8

See Chapter 9

See Chapter 4

Block diagrams

Selecting
cables, cable
protection and
switching devices

See Chapter 7

Connection diagrams

See Chapter 10

Dimension drawings

See Chapter 12

Connectingup

Cables, cable protection and switching devices must be selected carefully taking into account the relevant regulations, standards and the requirements of the
location where the system is installed.
Reference:

/NCZ/

Catalog, Connecting System

and System Components

Reference:

/NSK/

Catalog, Low Voltage

Switchgear

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
10.04
05.01

1.3

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Engineering a drive

Dimensioning

The power modules are selected depending on the motors to be used and the
drive requirements (torque, speed ratio).
The infeed module is selected using the DC link power required by the group
and the active power requirement of all of the power modules:

S Taking into account the coincidence factor (value determined from the load
duty cycle or experience value). Not all of the motors are subject to a full
load at the same time.
> refer to Fig. 1-6

S The maximum permissible power to charge the DC link capacitors.

> refer to Chapter 6.6 and Table 1-4
When calculating the DC link power PZK, refer to Fig. 1-6.

Feed axes

In this case it must be noted that the DC link will be overdimensioned if the
motor outputs are simply added together:

S Because, from experience, feed axes are not operated at their rated torque
and rated speed

S Because generally, the feed drives are not simultaneously operated

In the engineering sheet (refer to Fig. 1-6) to calculate the DC link power, these
factors are taken into account by the speed ratio /nN (ratio between the operating speed and the rated speed) and coincidence factor K.

Power supply
rating

Gating and electronic points used to determine the load limits of the power supply. It is not possible to specify the power rating of an individual voltage source
as several power supplies are coupled with one another. If the number of gating
or electronic points is exceeded, an additional power supply must be used the
monitoring module.
When determining the gating (AP) and electronic points (EP) refer to Chapter 6.6.
When calculating the power supply rating, refer to Chapter C.1.1.

DC link
capacitance

Every infeed module has a maximum value that applies when expanding the
DC link capacitors. It must be ensured that the DC link capacitance in the selected drive group is not exceeded (refer to Table 1-1).
The sum (total) of the DC link capacitances (refer to Chapter C.1.1, Table 1-4) of
all modules must be less than or equal to the charge limit corresponding to the
following table of the infeed modules:

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-31

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Table 1-1

05.08
05.01

Infeed modules

DC link power
PZK [kW]

Peak power
[kW]

Infeed module
Order No.

Charge limit
[F]

Infeed, unregulated
p5

10

6SN11461AB0j0BAj

p10

25

6SN11451AA0j0AAj

6000

p28

50

6SN114j1AA0j0CAj

20000

1200

Infeed/regenerative feedback module, regulated

1-32

p16

35

6SN114j1BA0j0BAj

20000

p36

70

6SN114j1BA0j0CAj

20000

p55

91

6SN114j1Bj0j0DAj

20000

p80

131

6SN114j1BB0j0EAj

20000

p120

175

6SN114j1BA0j0FAj

20000

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

1.3.1

Calculation of the required DC link power (PZK) for dimensioning

the supply system, infeed unit
Steadystate operation:
PZK = PVSA ZK + PMSD ZK
PZK v Pn infeed module

S Feed axes with rotary motors

The following formula is used in the engineering sheet to determine the calculated power:
Pcalc FD = 0.105 M0 nn 103 [kW]
Where:
Pcalc FD

calculated power for feed axes [kW]

0.105

factor 2 /60

For feed axes, calculated with M0

M0

stall torque [Nm]

nn

rated speed [RPM]

S Feed axes with linear motors

P = Fn VMAX, FN 103 [kW]
Where:
Fn

rated force [N]

VMAX, Fn

maximum velocity at the rated force [m/min]

The DC link power PVSA ZK of the feed axes is calculated using the engineering
sheet. The following factors must be taken into account:

S Speed ratio /nN

S Coincidence factor K for the number of feed axes per area
If the exact values of the speed ratio /nN and coincidence factor K are known
for the application in question, these should be used.

S Main spindles
For main spindle drives, the efficiencies must be included in the calculation
and are roughly estimated using the following factors:

Motors

v 4 kW

PMSD ZK

+ 1.45 PMSD motor shaft [kW]

Motors

u 4 kW

PMSD ZK

+ 1.25 PMSD motor shaft [kW]

Where:
PMSD ZK

DC link power for the main spindle drive [kW]

1.45 or 1.25

Assumed factor for the motor efficiency

Pmotor shaft MSD

mechanical power [kW] used at the shaft of the

main spindle motor

The rated motor current may not exceed the rated output current of the
power modules. The maximum motor current must always be less than the
maximum converter current.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-33

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

1.3.2

10.04
05.01

Dynamic operation
The peak infeed power must also be calculated for acceleration and deceleration operations.

S Feed axes
The peak infeed power expected for feed axes can be roughly calculated
according to the following formula:
PS FD

= 0.6 VDC link Imax /nN 103 [kW]

Where:
PS FD

peak infeed power (calculated) [kW] for feed axes

0.6

empirical factor: DC link energy and

and EMF of the motor are taken into account

VDC link

DC link voltage [V] (600 V)

Imax

peak current [A] set for an axis

/nN

max. axis speed referred to the

motor rated speed

S Feed axes with linear motors

PS FD

= FMAX VMAX, FMAX + (IMAX/IN)2 PVN [kW]

= 0.5 ... 0.9 UZK IMAX ~v/VMAX, FMAX 103 [kW]

Where:
FMAX

maximum force [N]

VMAX, FMAX

maximum velocity at the maximum force [m/min]

Imax

peak current [A] set for an axis

IN

rated current [A] set for an axis

PVN

rated motor power loss [kW]

max. axis velocity referred to the maximum velocity at the

maximum force

v/VMAX, FMAX

S Main spindles
The peak infeed power expected for main spindles is calculated according
to the following formula:

Motors

v 4 kW

PS MSD

= 1.45 PS motor shaft MSD [kW]

Motors

> 4 kW

PS MSD

= 1.25 PS motor shaft MSD [kW]

Where:

1-34

PS MSD

peak power (calculated) for main spindles [kW]

1.25 or 1.45

factor to take into account the motor efficiency

PS motor shaft MSD

peak power [kW] used at the shaft of the

main spindle motor

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

The sum of PS FD and PS MSD should be calculated from all of the feed axes
and main spindles that are simultaneously operated. This calculated power
must be less than the peak power of the regenerative feedback module.

1.3.3

Braking operation
With the UI modules, only deceleration with pulsed resistors is possible.
With I/R modules, a regenerative feedback of excess energy to the supply
system also occurs. For required braking operations in the event of a power
failure, the braking module and pulsed resistors are also needed.
The regenerative feedback power is dependent on the available energy to be
braked in the system:

S The mass
S Speed/velocity
S Braking ramps/braking time
S Efficiencies

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-35

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

1.3.4

Axis
name

10.04
05.01

Calculation of the DC link power (engineering sheet)

Order No. of the motor

nN
[RPM]

M0
[Nm]

IN
[A]

I0(PM)
[A]

PcalcFD
[kW]

n/nN

PcalcFD
[kW]

n/nN

Range I for Pcalc FD from 0...1.8 kW

1
2
3
4
5
6
Sum, range I
Range II for Pcalc FD from 1.8...8.8 kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sum, range II
Range III for Pcalc FD from 8.8...27 kW
1
2
3
4
5
6
KI
Sum, range I

Sum, range III

=

KII
Sum, range II

x 1.1 =
+

KII
Sum, range III

DC link power
PVSA DC link

kW
DC link power
PZK FD

kW

+
Application
scenario

Speed
ratio n/nN

Feed axes
per range

Coincidence
factor k per range

Feed drives
Robot drives

0.4 to 0.7
0.9 to 1

1
2

1
0.63

Robot drives
with 1FT

3
4

0.5
0.38

1-36

kW

0.33
0.28

5
6

Fig. 1-6

DC link power
PZK

Engineering sheet to calculate the DC link power PzK

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

1.3.5

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Checking the permissible power supply rating

The infeed or monitoring module used offers a basic equipping of the electronic
(EP values) and control power supply (AP values).
The following table is used to determine the power supply requirement of a drive
lineup.
The number of modules used should be entered. The product from Evaluation
factor individual module and Number of modules should be formed.
An (additional) monitoring module must be provided if one of these values is
exceeded. The following tables should be used again for the module lineup,
supplied from the monitoring module.
The monitoring module must be located to the left in front of the modules to be
monitored.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-37

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Table 1-2

02.12
05.01

Engineering table for drive modules with SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS/universal E HRS

SIMODRIVE 6SN11
power modules, type

Assessment factors

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

Resolver

Encoder with 1 Vpp

6SN1118-

SIMODRIVE 611 universal E HRS

Encoder with 1Vpp

DC link
capaci
capaci
tance

6SN1118-

-.NJ01

-.NK01

-.NH01

-.NH11

1-axis

2-axis

2-axis

2-axis

mF

1axis version
6SN11 2.x - 1AA00 - 0HA1

EP 1.1
AP 1.7

EP 1.4
AP 2.0

EP 1.5
AP 2.0

EP 1.5
AP 2.6

75

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0AA1

EP 1.1
AP 1.7

EP 1.4
AP 2.0

EP 1.5
AP 2.0

EP 1.5
AP 2.6

75

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0BA1

EP 1.1
AP 1.7

EP 1.4
AP 2.0

EP 1.6
AP 2.0

EP 1.6
AP 2.6

110

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0CA1

EP 1.1
AP 1.7

EP 1.4
AP 2.0

EP 1.6
AP 2.0

EP 1.6
AP 2.6

330

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0DA1

EP 1.2
AP 1.7

EP 1.4
AP 2.0

EP 1.7
AP 2.0

EP 1.7
AP 2.6

495

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0LA1

EP 1.7
AP 1.8

EP 1.7
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.7

990

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0EA1

EP 2.7
AP 1.8

EP 2.7
AP 2.1

EP 2.7
AP 2.1

EP 2.7
AP 2.7

990

6SN11 2 . - 1AA01 - 0FA1

EP 2.7
AP 1.9

EP 2.7
AP 2.1

EP 2.7
AP 2.1

EP 2.7
AP 2.7

2145

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0JA1 1)

EP 1.3
AP 1.9

EP 1.5
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.7

2145

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0KA11)

EP 1.4
AP 1.9

EP 1.6
AP 2.1

EP 1.8
AP 2.1

EP 1.8
AP 2.7

4290

6SN11 23 - 1AA02 - 0FA1 1)

EP 1.3
AP 1.9

EP 1.5
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.7

2145

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0HA1

EP 1.3
AP 2.1

EP 1.5
AP 2.4

EP 1.6
AP 2.4

EP 1.6
AP 3.0

150

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0AA1

EP 1.4
AP 2.1

EP 1.7
AP 2.4

EP 1.7
AP 2.4

EP 1.7
AP 3.0

150

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0BA1

EP 1.6
AP 2.1

EP 1.8
AP 2.4

EP 1.8
AP 2.4

EP 1.8
AP 3.0

220

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0CA1

EP 1.7
AP 2.1

EP 1.8
AP 2.4

EP 1.8
AP 2.4

EP 1.8
AP 3.0

660

2axis version

Assessment factors of individual modules for the electronics points (EP) and
gating points (AP) as well as permissible combinations of power modules and
control units.
Only combinations with entered EP and AP values are permissible.
Data referring to the assessment factors for EP and AP refer to the encoder
cable lengths that have been released.
Enter the values into Table 14.

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS/E HRS with options

When using EnDat absolute encoders, an additional 0.4 EP
(electronic points) must be added for each encoder.
For PROFIBUS-DP, an additional 0.6 control points (AP)
should be added.

1) With mounted fan or hose cooling.

1-38

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Table 1-3

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Engineering table for drive modules with digital interface

SIMODRIVE 6SN11
power modules, type

Assessment factors
DC link
capaci
tance

Control unit, digital

1-axis version
High-Performance control

2-axis version
High-Performance control

2-axis version
High-Standard control

6SN1118-

6SN1118-

6SN1118-

-0DJ21

-0DJ23

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0HA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0AA1

-0DK21

-0DK23

-0DM31

-0DM33

mF

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

75

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

75

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0BA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

110

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0CA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

330

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0DA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

495

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0LA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

990

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0EA1

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

990

6SN11 2 . - 1AA01 - 0FA1

EP 1.75
AP 1.85

EP 1.75
AP 2.2

EP 1.75
AP 1.85

EP 1.75
AP 2.2

2145

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0JA1

EP 1.5
AP 1.85

EP 1.5
AP 2.2

EP 1.5
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

2145

EP 1.5
AP 1.85

EP 1.5
AP 2.2

EP 1.5
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

4290

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

EP 1
AP 1.85

EP 1
AP 2.2

2145

1axis version

1)

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0KA1

1)

6SN11 23 - 1AA02 - 0FA1

1)

2axis version
6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0HA1

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

150

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0AA1

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

150

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0BA1

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

220

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0CA1

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

EP 1
AP 2.8

EP 1
AP 3.4

660

Assessment factors of individual modules for the electronics points (EP) and
gating points (AP) as well as permissible combinations of power modules
and control units (digital).
Only combinations with entered EP and AP values are permissible.
The data referring to the assessment factors EP and AP refer to the encoder
cable lengths that have been released for use.
Enter the values into Table 14.

Absolute encoder with EnDat interface

S
S

An additional 0.4 EP for each absolute encoder in the elec

tronics area
SSI encoders require an external power supply - therefore no
additional electronic/gating points

1) With mounted fan or hose cooling.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1-39

1 Overview of the Drive System

1.3 Engineering a drive

Table 1-4

02.12
05.01

Engineering sheet to calculate the DC link power PzK

Designation

Electronic points (EP)

Assessment
factor,
individual
module

SIMODRIVE 611
UI module

5 kW/10 kW
10 kW/25 kW
28 kW/50 kW
16 kW/21 kW
36 kW/47 kW
55 kW/71 kW
80 kW/131 kW
120 kW/175 kW

I/R module

0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1
1

Monitoring module

Braking module

0.2

Capacitor module (central/distributed)

HLA module

Num
ber of
mod
ules

Gating points (AP)

Product

Assessment
factor,
individual
module
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.75

1 =

DC link capacitance

Num
ber of
modules

Prod
uct

1=

2.8 mF
4.1 mF
1.2 1)

0.1

0
0

0
0
=

Power module with

control unit for FD/MSD
(values from Tables 13)
=
=
Power module with
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS
(values from Table 12)
=

1.5

=
=

=
=
=
=
=

Prod
uct

1=

10004)

75

2800
4100

=
=
=
=
=

mF

150
440
990
495
990
2145
2145
4290
10004)

0
=

Number of
modules

0
=
=
=
=
=

=
=

=
=
=
=
=

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

powerline 2)

SINUMERIK 810D
including integrated power modules
CCU box 3LT with CCU 3

4.5

660

CCU box 2LT with CCU 3

4.5

220
0

SINUMERIK 840D powerline with

NCU 561.4
NCU 571.4
NCU 572.4
NCU 573.4
NCU 573.5

6FC5356-0BB12-0AE0
6FC5357-0BB12-0AE0
6FC5357-0BB23-0AE0
6FC5357-0BB34-0AE1
6FC5357-0BB35-0AE0

1
1
1
2.3
2.3

=
=
=
=
=
Sum,
Electronics points
maximum value 8
Maximalwert 3,5

1) An additional 0.4 electronic points (EP) for each absolute value encoder
EnDat.
2) An additional 0.3 gating points (AP) must be taken into consideration for
each connected absolute value encoder with EnDat interface.

1-40

3.8
3.8
3.8
5 (5.4) 3)
5 (5.4) 3)
EP

=
=
=
=
=

Sum, Gating
points
maximum value 17

AP

Sum of the
DC link
capacitances

Maximum value 7

3) The value 5.4 is used for NCU 573.4/573.5 with link module.
4) Used only when the module is only supplied by the DC link.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

System Configuration
Drive lineup

A SIMODRIVE drive group has a modular configuration comprising line filter,

commutating reactor, line supply infeed module, drive modules as well as, when
required: monitoring, pulsed resistor and capacitor module(s).
Satisfactory operation is ensured only in conjunction with the components that
are described in this Configuration Manual or published in the Catalog NC60
(Internet Mall) and with adherence to the required boundary/application conditions.
Failure to observe this along with improper use and application conditions can
void your certifications, conformity declarations or warranty claims. In order to
avoid contamination, the modules should be installed in a control cabinet with
degree of protection IP 54.
Modules can also be arranged in several tiers one above the other or next to
one another.

Note
Tightening torques for screw connections are:
Screw size
> tightening torque
M3
>
0.8 Nm
M4
>
1.8 Nm
M5
>
3.0 Nm
M6
>
6.0 Nm
M8
>
13.0 Nm
M10
>
25.0 Nm
Tolerance
>
0/+30%
For tightening torque deviations for connections to the HF/HFD reactors, see
the specifications in Chapter 6.5.
The screws at terminal connections, e.g. DC link busbars, terminals should be
checked and tightened each time that the equipment is transported or when
performing maintenance work, however at the latest after 5 years.

Note
According to IEC 6180051, a PDS (Power Drive System) with leakage
currents over 3.6 mA requires a secure ground connection (e.g. at least
10 mm2 Cu or multiple connection) or an automatic shutdown in case of a
ground connection fault.
The housings of the SIMODRIVE 611 converter system modules are enclosed
and EMCcompatible as specified in EN 60529 (IEC 60529).
The electrical system is designed to comply with EN 50178 (VDE 0160) and
EN 60204, and an EC declaration of conformity is available.
The connections in the module group, motor cables, encoder lines and bus
lines must be made using preassembled MOTIONCONNECT lines (see Catalog NC 60).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-41

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.1 Arrangement of the modules and their mounting

2.1

Arrangement of the modules and their mounting

2.1.1

Arrangement of the modules

The modules must be arranged in a particular layout. The following criteria must
be taken into account:

S Function of the module

S Crosssection of the DC link busbar
The I/R or UI module is always located to the left of the module group at the
beginning. The power modules (PM) are located to the right next to the I/R or UI
modules (refer to Fig. 2-1).

For the NC control system

The largest power module must be located after

the infeed module; all of the other power
modules are then located to the right
corresponding to their size (power rating).

The infeed module should always

be located to the left
of the module group.
Drive bus cable1)
Equipment bus cable

The shield connecting plates

are necessary to ensure that
the wiring meets EMC
requirements.

The capacitor modules

must be located at the
end of the drive lineup
after the power
modules.

1) Note:
A round drive bus cable fed from the module group (6SX2002xxxx) should preferably
be attached to the 6SN11620FA000AAx shield connection or clamped to the
provided insert nut on the module housing!
Fig. 2-1

Connection example

Due to the limited conductivity of the DC link busbars of the modules with module width p150 mm, the DC link power PZK of these modules must not exceed
55 kW. Larger DC link busbars must be used if this restriction cannot be complied with (refer to Fig. 2-2 and 2-3).
The DC link power PZK of the subsequent modules is calculated according to
the engineering rule specified in Chapter 1.3.
The larger DC link busbars can be ordered as a set with
Order No. [MLFB] 6SN11611AA026AA0. The set includes reinforced DC link
busbars for module widths 50 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm.
The standard DC link brackets between the modules may not be changed, even
when strengthened DC link busbars are used.

2-42

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm

PM 100 mm

PM 150 mm

PM 150 mm

I/R 300 mm

PM 300 mm

2.1 Arrangement of the modules and their mounting

2
Other
modules

PZK p55 kW
Subsequent modules

PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm

PM 100 mm

PM 150 mm

PM 150 mm

PM 300 mm

Module group without larger DC link busbars

I/R 300 mm

Fig. 2-2

Other
modules

PZK p55 kW

Note:
Reinforced
DC link busbars must be
used in the
modules

PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm
PM 50 mm

PM 100 mm

PM 100 mm

I/R 300 mm

PZK u55 kW

Other
modules

PZK p55 kW
PZK u55 kW
Fig. 2-3

Module group with larger busbars

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-43

2 System Configuration

05.08
02.07
05.01

2.1 Arrangement of the modules and their mounting

Pulsed resistor
module

Subject to certain conditions, several pulsed resistor modules can be connected

in parallel (refer to Chapter C.1.1, Table 1-4).

Drive bus

The drive bus length may not exceed 11 m.

For more than six modules, control units, round cables must be used (refer to
Chapter 2.1.2).

Equipment bus

The equipment bus cable that is loopedthrough a drive group at an infeed or

monitoring module may not exceed 2.1 m from the supply connection point. For
a twotier configuration, two equipment bus branches are possible, each with a
maximum length of 2.1 m from the branch point at the supply connection point.

Cable length

The permitted cable lengths depend on the used line filters, refer to the line filters in Section 7.4.

Readers note
For cable lengths for SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA, refer to
Reference: /POS3/ User Manual SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA

2-44

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.1 Arrangement of the modules and their mounting

2.1.2

Mounting and installing the modules

When mounting and installing the SIMODRIVE modules on the rear cabinet
panel, proceed in the following sequence:
1. Screwin the retaining screws up to a clearance of approx. 4 mm from the
surface of the mounting panel.
2. Locate the modules in the screws and then tighten the screws with 6 Nm.
3. Locate the DC link connecting bar in the adjacent module under the screws
provided and tighten these screws with 1.8 Nm 0/+30%.
The DC link covers must only be installed with the power turned off. Check the
spring elements for exact positioning prior to installation. Covers with warped
spring elements must be replaced.

Drive bus

For drives with a digital setpoint interface, a drive bus cable is required for the
control and communications interface SINUMERIK 840D powerline (refer to
Fig. 2-1).
Table 2-1

Order number assignment

Designation

Order number (MLFB)

for module width

S
S
S
S

50 mm

6SN11 611CA000AAj

100 mm

6SN11 611CA000BAj

150 mm

6SN11 611CA000CAj

300 mm

6SN11 611CA000DA0
j > 0: Ribbon cable
j > 1: Round cable (control units required
from six axes onwards)

In order to jumper monitoring/pulsed

resistor modules, select the drive bus
cable to be 50 mm longer!

S
S
Equipment bus

350 mm round long cable

6SN11 611CA000EA1

200 mm long ribbon cable

6SN11 611CA000FA0

The electronics power supply between the individual modules is established

using the equipment bus cable (refer to Fig. 2-1). The equipment bus cable is
included in the scope of supply of the power module.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-45

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.2 Ambient conditions

2.2

Ambient conditions

Note
The components are insulated in compliance with DIN EN 50178.

S Overvoltage category III for industrial line supplies

S Degree of pollution II, especially no conductive pollution, moisture
condensation is not permissible

S Installation altitude up to max. 2000 m above sea level

S Installation altitude 2000 m 6500 m possible in conjunction with isolating
transformer with neutral point on grounded the secondary side, grounded
module housing.

S As a result of the thinner air (poor thermal dissipation), above 1000 m, the
drive power must be derated (reduced). Refer to Chapter C.1.3 and 5.4.

S Star point of the line supply is directly grounded, the module housing is
grounded.
According to EN 6180051 and UL 508 only protective extra low voltages with
safety separation may be connected at all connections and terminals of the
electronic modules.

Warning
Any conductive dirt/pollution can result in the safe electrical separation
being lost and can therefore result in hazards to personnel (electric
shock).

Note
Appropriate measures (filter, waiting cycles, etc.) must be adopted to prevent
contamination of the cooling system, because otherwise fan damage and thus
loss of the cooling effect can occur.

2-46

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.2 Ambient conditions

Table 2-2

Ambient conditions
Designation

Vibratory load

Shock load

Protection
against ingress
of solid foreign
bodies and water
Transportation
and storage

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

Description

Longterm storage in the transport packaging

Operation

Class 1M2 in accordance with EN6072131

Class 2M3 in accordance with EN6072132
Test values:
Frequency range: 10 Hz to 56 Hz
With constant 0.075 mm deflection
Frequency range: 58 Hz to 200 Hz
With constant 1 g acceleration

Longterm storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging
Operation
Modules/devices without drive:
Modules/devices with drive:

Class 1M2 in accordance with EN6072131

Class 2M3 in accordance with EN6072132
Test values:
5 g/11 ms
5 g/30 ms

Transport in the transport packaging

Modules with internal cooling

Modules with external cooling/pipe cooling
Heatsink in cooling area
Electronics area

IP201)
IP54
IP20

Temperature range

40 C +70 C

Dewpoint temperature td and relative

air humidity U

Annual average

U = 75%
td = 17 C

On 30 days (24 h) annually

U = 95%
td = 24 C

These days should be naturally distributed over the complete year.

On the other days (<24 h)
But maintaining the annual
average

Ambient climatic
conditions in
operation

U = 85%
td = 24 C

Relevant Standards

DIN EN 6006821
DIN EN 6006822
DIN EN 6006823
DIN EN 6180051

Temperature range:
for PM/NE modules
(100% load):
Current/power derating from +40 C
onwards:

0 C +55 C

Dewpoint temperature td and relative

air humidity U

Annual average

U = 75%
td = 17 C

On 30 days (24h) annually

U = 95%
td = 24 C

+40 C
2.5 %/C

These days should be naturally distributed over the complete year.

On the other days (<24 h)
But maintaining the annual
average

U = 85%
td = 24 C

Temperature
change

Within one hour:

Within 3 minutes:

max. 10 K
max. 1 K

Condensation

Not permissible

Atmospheric pressure

min. 860 mbar (86 kPa)

max. 1080 mbar (108 kPa)

Gases that can

have a negative impact on the function

acc. to DIN 40046, Part 36 and Part 37

Relevant Standards

DIN EN 6006821
DIN EN 6006822
DIN EN 6006823
DIN EN 6180051

1) Supplementary measure is required, if the work to be carried out close to the DC link busbar (DC link cover at the last module).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-47

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.3 Motor selection

2.3

Motor selection

Selection

The Motor Configuration Manuals are used to select the drive motors.
Readers note
You can find information on the following motors under the following link:

S Ordering documentation/overview of documents

Printed documentation Docu_SIMOTICS

DoConCD/User Manual Collection

S Links to download documents

Download documentation

SIMOTICS S servomotors
SIMOTICS M main motors

S Using documentation online (finding and searching in manuals/information)

http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
The selection of the motor and the (brief) overload capability determines he size
(rating) of the power module (refer to Chapter 4).

VP module (VPM)

A voltage protection module (VPM) is required for motors 1FE1 and 2SP1 with
an EMF > 800 V and maximum < 2 kV (> 565 Veff up to a maximum 1400 Veff).
When a fault condition develops, the VPM limits the DC link voltage at the drive
converter.
Technical data and ordering data, refer to 8.16.
Readers note
Reference: /PJFE/ Configuration Manual, 1FE1 Synchronous Builtin
Motors
/BU/
Catalog NC 60
/PMS/ Configuration Manual ECO Motor Spindles for
2SP1 Main Spindle Drives

2-48

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

02.07
05.01

2.4 Position sensing/actual speed value sensing

2.4

Position sensing/actual speed value sensing

Description

2.4.1

The encoder system is used for precise positioning and to determine the actual
speed value of the drive motor for the particular application. The resolution of
the measuring system and the control board selected are decisive when it
comes to positioning accuracy.

Position sensing, direct

Measuring
systems
that can be
evaluated

S Rotary encoders with sine/cosineshaped voltage signals.

S Linear scales with sine/cosineshaped voltage signals.
S Distancecoded measuring systems (only SIMODRIVE 611 digital with NC)
S Measuring systems with sine/cosineshaped voltage signals and EnDat/SSI
interface (linear scales, singleturn and multiturn encoders)
The feed and main spindle drive modules can be supplied with a second measuring system evaluation, e.g. for a tabletop measuring system or for spindle
position sensing. A direct measuring system is needed, for example, when a
high degree of accuracy has to be achieved on the workpiece with a linear
scale or exact positioning is required with a multistage gear unit.

SIMODRIVE 611
digital, universal

The optimum measuring system for position detection is suitable for the evaluation of incremental encoders with sine/cosine voltage signals. It is possible to
connect linear scales and rotary encoders with sinusoidal voltage signals to
drive controls to operate 1FT6 and 1FK6 feed motors. The measuring signals
supplied by the encoder system are evaluated with a high degree of resolution.
Example:
With a linear scale (20 m grid constant) a position resolution of 0.01 mm (Digital High Performance control) is achieved.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-49

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.4 Position sensing/actual speed value sensing

2.4.2

Position detection, indirect

Measuring
systems
that can be
evaluated

S Integrated incremental encoder in feed and main spindle motors

S Integrated absolute encoder with EnDat interface in feed motors
S Incremental encoder (SIMAG H) for sensing the rotary angle and the rotary
angle velocity
SIMAG H is used for hollowshaft applications with 1FE1 and 1PH2 direct
drives and thirdparty spindles. It is also used as autonomous spindle encoder.
Readers note
Reference: /PMH/ Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives

SIMODRIVE 611
digital/universal

When the SINUMERIK 810D/840D and SIMODRIVE 611 are digitally linked,
the measuring systems are connected to the digital control units.
The controls are equipped by default with a connection for the measuring
system integrated in the feed and main spindle modules. Together with the high
resolution position detection of the digital controls, the integrated motor measuring system achieves a resolution of 4,000,000 increments per revolution (Performance Control). In many cases, also for the main spindle, it means that an
additional Caxis encoder is not required.
The highresolution actual position value is also transferred to the NC position
control loops via the drive bus so that, given the right mechanical conditions, a
direct tabletop measuring system is no longer required.
The same secondary conditions/limitations apply for SIMODRIVE 611 universal
and POSMO SI/CD/CA. The only difference is the drive link established using
PROFIBUS DP.

2-50

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

10.04
05.01

2.5 Power modules

2.4.3

Drive module
The drive modules comprise the following components: Power module, control
unit, equipment bus cable and where relevant, a drive bus cable and option
module.
The permissible combinations of power module and control unit are saved in the
engineering tables (refer to Chapter C.1.1). Depending on the cooling method
employed or the power modules size, additional cooling components have to
be ordered or be provided by the user.
Depending on the application, the drive modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 converter system can function as feed, main spindle or induction motors, and comprise the power module, control unit, and drive bus cable components. Option
modules can be added where applicable.
A drive module is created by inserting the control unit into the power module,
e.g. for feed or main spindle applications.
The modular design of the drive modules allows a large number of applications
to be implemented using only a small number of individual components.

Note
Combinations that differ from the engineering information and instructions
where relevant, also in conjunction with thirdparty products, require a special,
contractual agreement.
We accept a warranty for our scope of supply up to the system interfaces that
we have defined.

2.5

Power modules
A wide range of 1axis or 2axis power modules is available. These modules
are graded according to the current ratings and can be supplied with three different cooling techniques. The range of power modules allows a seamless,
modular and spacesaving drive solution for:

S Small, compact machines (required feed torques and main spindle power
ratings e.g. 80 Nm at 500 RPM and 11 kW S1 at 1500 RPM) up to

S complex machining centers and automatic lathes e.g. 115 Nm or 145 Nm

at 2000 RPM and 100 kW S1 at 1500 RPM.
The currentrelated data refers to the seriespreset values. The output currents
can be limited by the control unit being used. After the control unit has been
inserted, the retaining screws of the control unit front panel must be tightened in
order to establish a good electrical connection to the module housing.
At higher clock cycle frequencies, ambient temperatures and installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level, the modules must be derated. The appropriate preassembled cables are available to connectup the motors. The
ordering data is provided in Catalog NC 60, in the Motors Section.
Shield terminal plates are available to meet EMC requirements when using
shielded power cables.
The equipment bus cable is included in the scope of supply of the power module. The drive bus cables must be ordered separately for the digital system.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-51

2 System Configuration

02.07
05.01

2.5 Power modules

2.5.1

Function of the power modules

The power module provides the required energy for the control boards and the
connected motor. The power module is selected depending on the selected
motor and the control board.

2
2.5.2

Connectingup the power modules

The power module is grounded through the PE connecting screws.
The power module must be mounted on a grounded, lowresistance conductive
mounting surface and must have a conductive connection to this mounting surface.
Power is fedin through the DC link busbars.

Power module
Internal cooling

Control unit (refer

to Chapter 4)

50 mm power module

Order number

Type plate/Order No.

PE

Fig. 2-4

2-52

Power module with control unit

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.6 Control units

2.6

Control units

2.6.1

General

2
The SIMODRIVE 611 control units use the power module to control the speed,
torque and position of the attached motors. (Properties, for details refer to the
module description in Chapter 4)

2.6.2

AC motors
The following AC motors, for example, can be operated synchronously or asynchronously:

S
S
S
S
S
S

2.6.3

1FT/1FK servo motors

1PH/1PM induction motors
1FE1/2SP1 builtin spindle motors
1 FW torque motors
1 FN linear motors
Thirdparty motors (when suitable!)

Modules included in the scope of supply

For SINUMERIK
840D powerline

S High Performance as 2axis or 1axis control unit, optionally also with direct measuring system.

S High Standard as 2axis control unit, optionally also with direct measuring
system.

S HLA/ANA as 2axis control unit for highlydynamic hydraulic axes (modulating valves) or universal dynamic analog interface for components to be
controlled externally.

For universal
applications

S SIMODRIVE 611 universal in the system group or also for standalone

devices.
Various variants with analog or PROFIBUS DP interface. Variants with or
without integrated positioning.

S SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS with Resolver as 2axis or 1axis control

unit.

S SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS (high resolution) as 2axis control units for
encoders:
sin/cos or

EnDat or

TTL (only induction motors)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-53

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.6 Control units

For SINUMERIK
840Di powerline
SINUMERIK 802D

S SIMODRIVE 611 universal E HRS (economic high resolution) as 2axis

control units for encoders:
sin/cos or
EnDat or
TTL (only PROFIBUS DP interface for the controller)

2
Table 2-3

Comparison table
Control unit with

611 universal

High Standard
Closedloop
control

High Performance
Closedloop
control

Max. electrical fundamental frequency for motor

1400 Hz

600 Hz

1400 Hz

Encoder limit frequency, motor encoder

350 kHz

200 kHz

350 kHz (420 kHz)1)

Encoder limit frequency, motor encoders for Safety

Integrated

200 kHz

300 kHz (420 kHz)1)

Encoder limit frequency, direct measuring system

350 kHz

200 kHz

350 kHz (420 kHz)1)

Encoder limit frequency resolver

12bit 432 Hz
14bit 108 Hz

Encoder limit frequency, direct measuring system for

Safety Integrated

200 kHz

300 kHz (420 kHz)1)

Pulse multiplication:
S Incremental encoder
S Resolver (14/12bit)

2048
4096/16348

128

2048

Maximum cable length, encoder with voltage signal

50 m

50 m

50 m (20 m)1)

Smooth running characteristics (measure of the position fluctuation by nset in the range 10% n N referred
to a 10 mm spindle pitch/motor revolution)
S 1axis version
S 2axis version

0.1 m
0.1 m

0.2 m
1.5 m

0.1 m
0.1 m

1) The following limitations/secondary conditions apply for 420 kHz:

Cable to be used: Siemens cable, Order No. [MLFB]: 6FX20022CA311CF
Maximum permissible encoder cable length: 20 m
Encoder characteristics: 3dB cutoff frequency greater than or equal to 500 kHz
Examples for permissible encoders: ERA 180 with 9000 pulses/revolution and
ERA 180 with 3600 pulses/revolution manufactured by Heidenhain
Amplitude monitoring up to 420 kHz is active.

2.6.4

NCU box for SINUMERIK 840D

If the digital drive modules are operated in conjunction with the SINUMERIK
840D CNC control system, then the NCU box must be located immediately to
the right of the infeed module.

Fig. 2-5

2-54

Digital closedloop control with SINUMERIK 840D

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

02.12
10.04
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2.7

Infeed modules

Application

The infeed modules are used to connect the drive group to the line supply.
The infeed modules generate the DC voltage for the DC link from the following
possible line supply voltages:

S 3ph. 400 V AC $10% 50 Hz/60 Hz,

S 3ph. 415 V AC $10% 50/60 Hz,
S 3ph. 480 V AC + 6% 10% 50 Hz/60 Hz
In addition, the electronic voltages ($24 V, $15 V +5 V, etc.) are made available centrally to the drive modules and to the SINUMERIK 840D or SINUMERIK
810D arranged as group via the equipment bus.

Different line
supply

If the infeed modules are connected to a line supply other than a TN line supply,
or a line supply that is not equipped with suitable residual current protective
devices, then an additional transformer with separate windings in vector group
yn is required according to selection table 7-8.
The HF commutating reactor is also required for the regulated infeed/regenerative feedback module when there are upstream transformers.
An appropriate matching transformer is also required for line supply voltages of
3ph. 200 V/220 V/240 V/440 V/500 V/575 V AC 10% 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Please observe the appropriate information and instructions for the 300 mm
modules.

Module
arrangement

For the arrangement of the infeed module, see Chapter 2.1.1.

Heat dissipation

The necessary cooling components, such as externally mounted fan and/or air
baffle plates for a module width of 100 mm to guide the air at the module heat
sinks must be separately ordered when required. For other module widths, the
baffle plates should be appropriately produced according to the drawing, see
the dimension drawing in Chapter 12.

A minimum lateral clearance of 50 mm must be maintained between the module

groups mounted at the same height.

S Internal cooling
The infeed modules can be ordered with moduleinternal heatsinks for cooling inside the control cabinet. The 300 mm wide modules, that can be ordered for pipe cooling, also offer the option of connecting a pipe for direct air
cooling.

S External cooling
Alternatively, infeed modules with heat sinks outside the housing for external
cooling are available. When mounting, the heatsinks are inserted through
the openings at the rear of the cabinet. Cooling is then realized on the customer side. For this type of configuration, a mounting frame is required for
each module (refer to Fig. 2-9).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-55

2 System Configuration

02.07
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

Dimensions

All modules have a grid dimension of 50 mm for the width. All modules have a
standard height of 480 mm. Note that the dimensions for air baffle plates, shield
connecting plates, builton fans and hose cooling must also be taken into account.

S Width: 50 mm grid dimension

S Relative to the mounting plane, the depth of all modules (without connectors
and optional machinemounted accessories) is:

2-56

Internal cooling or hose cooling: 288 mm

External cooling: 231 mm, in this case, the heatsink penetration depth
must be taken into account for the cooling duct.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2.7.1

Cooling components
Depending on the cooling method used, additional fan units and fan components, specifically designed for the system, must also be ordered.
A differentiation is made between three different cooling types.
1. For internal cooling, the complete power loss remains in the electrical cabinet in the form of heat.
2. With external cooling, the power module power loss (thermal) is externally
dissipated in the form of heat and the power loss of the control unit is internally dissipated in the form of heat.
3. For pipe cooling, version with 300 mm wide modules with internal cooling,
the complete power loss in the form of heat is conducted to the outside using a pipe connected to the module.
The mounted fan is connected directly to the control cabinet line supply.

Fig. 2-6

Standard system design for 300 mm wide modules with mounted fan for internal cooling

Warning
The fan may only be commissioned if it is electrically connected to the module
housing (PE fan via module housing).

Caution
If the fan has an incorrect direction of rotation (see arrow) then cooling is not
guaranteed!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-57

2 System Configuration

02.12
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2
I/R

Minimum,
300 mm

PM

Hose cooling for a 1 tier configuration

Pipe cooling for a 2tier configuration

Package 1 for a single module

Packet 2 for a 2tier design

Version for the Order no.

Version for the Order no.

6SN11451BB000DAV
6SN11451BB000EAV
6SN11451BB000FAV
6SN11231AA010FAV
6SN11231AA000JAV
6SN11231AA000KAV

6SN11451BB000DAV
6SN11231AA020FAV
(Order No. 6SN11 620BA030CA1)

(Order No. 6SN11 620BA030AA1)

Fig. 2-7

System configuration with hose cooling (only for 300 mm wide modules)

The 2tier design with pipe cooling is only permissible for the combination of
modules, order no. 6SN11451BB000DA j at the top and
6SN11231AA020FAj at the bottom.
Note
DC link connection, refer to Chapter 9.1.3.
For connection details for the DC link adapter set, refer to the dimension
drawing in Chapter 12.

2-58

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

10.04
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2.7.2

Internal cooling

2
Cooling clearance
min. 100 mm clearance
Do not cover e.g., with cable,
to ensure the appropriate cooling

Cooling clearance
min. 100 mm
clearance

Fig. 2-8

Power module with inserted control unit, internal cooling

Note
The power loss is dissipated in the cabinet and must therefore be taken into
account when engineering/dimensioning the cabinet cooling.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-59

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2.7.3

External cooling

Rear cabinet panel

(bare metal)
First mount the frame and
then seal!
M5 screw
Tightening torque 3 Nm
Discharged air,
electronics

Discharged air,
heatsink

Closedloop
control
Seal the mounting frames
with respect to one another
and to the rear cabinet panel
(e.g. using Terostat91
made by Henkel).
The sealant (preferably
inside the cabinet) should be
applied around the
circumference so that
degree of protection IP54 is
ensured.
It should be checked that the
foam rubber seal is tight if
required, seal!

Fan assembly
Power module with
external cooling
and heatsink seal
Air intake for
the electronics
T v 40 0C

Fig. 2-9

Air intake for

the heatsink
T v 40 0C

Mounting
frame

Power module with inserted control unit, external cooling

Note
Refer to Fig. 2-9 for the air flow direction and the dimension drawing in
Chapter 12 for the ventilation space. The dimensions of the installation frame
are presented in the dimension drawing in Chapter 12.

Notice
For external heatsinks and fans, a high degree of pollution restricts the module
cooling. This can cause the temperature monitoring function in the power
module to respond. The heatsinks and fans must be checked for accumulated
dirt at regular intervals.
Clean when required!

2-60

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2 System Configuration

05.08
05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

Configuration
information

For external cooling, the module heatsinks extend through the mounting plane
in the electrical cabinet and can therefore dissipate power loss into an external
cooling circuit.
The breakout in the mounting panel can be made for each module or also for a
complete group of modules. For a breakout for the complete group of modules,
the specific mounting frames for the modules should be used. For 300 mm wide
modules, the appropriate mounting frame must be used (Order No.:
6SN11620BA040EA0). The dimension drawings for the breakouts are provided in Chapter 12.
The mounting frames should be installed from the inside of the cabinet or from
the rear. This also then guarantees the necessary mounting surface for EMC.
Note
The dimensions of the recesses for the reinforcing ribs have different lengths.
Ensure that the modules are mounted/installed in a standard way.

Seal

The reinforcing ribs of the mounting frames, that are roundedoff towards the
rear, have seals on both sides. A sealant (e.g. Terostat96 made by Henkel)
must be used to seal the edges of the mounting frames in contact with the
mounting panel. Degree of protection IP 54 is achieved when the sealant is correctly applied.

Mounted fans for

300 mm wide
modules

The fan cable must be fed into the electrical cabinet using a PG gland to ensure
that the degree of protection is maintained.
The mounting panel must be sealed at the rear panel of the electrical cabinet so
that a closed space or duct is created. Depending on how the cabinet is
mounted (freestanding or installed in the machine), this must be cooled/ventilated via the roof/base assembly or the rear panel.
Make sure that the air inlet is unobstructed. The distance to the side walls must
be at least 50 mm.
Fans must not draw in any air contaminated with cooling lubricant nor must they
be sprayed with cooling lubricant, as this will considerably reduce their service
life because of them sticking and cooling ducts can become clogged.
For further information refer to the devicespecific technical user documentation.

Control
cabinet inside

Control
cabinet
outside

Control
cabinet inside

Cooling lubricant

Cooling lubricant
Equipment
combination

Control
cabinet
outside

Equipment
combination

Spray protection

Fig. 2-10

Spray protection for external cooling

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

2-61

2 System Configuration

05.01

2.7 Infeed modules

2-62

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3
3

3.1

Motor selection
The motor type should be selected according to the mechanical and dynamic
requirements placed on the motor.

3.1.1

Motor protection
To protect the motors, the specified motor protection circuit breakers should be
connected downstream, which only switch a signal contact when the motor has
an overload condition.
If the motor is separated from the power module with the pulses enabled during
operation, then there is the danger that the power module will destroy itself together with the control unit. Because of the harmonic oscillations in the current,
set approx. 10% above the rated current!

3.1.2

Motors with holding brake

Description

The holding brake mounted onto the motors is used to brake the motor when it
is already at a standstill. In an emergency, it can also additionally reduce the
braking travel. The holding brake is not an operational brake.

Notice
The motor holding brakes should only be actuated at standstill.
If the holding brake is operated during operation or while the motor is turning,
this results in increased wear and shortens the lifetime of the holding brake.
This is the reason that failure of the holding brake must already be taken into
consideration when engineering the system. A hazard analysis must be
performed.

Suspended
(hanging) loads

Danger
Special attention and consideration must be given when holding brakes are
used for suspended (hanging) loads (injury, crushing, possibility of death,
machine damage) as this application represents a high potential hazard.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-63

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.2 Motor encoder

3.2

05.08
02.12
05.01

Motor encoder

General

The motors are equipped with various encoder systems to sense the rotor position and speed.
Reference:

refer to Appendix B in the relevant Configuration Manual

of the motors
The assignment of the SIMODRIVE units to the servo/main spindle motor types
and encoder systems is shown in the Table 3-5.

Depending on the requirements, various types of encoder are used and processed in the appropriate modules:

S sin/cos 1 Vpp or EnDat encoder

S SSI encoder (only SIMODRIVE 611 High Performance, High Standard, HLA/
ANA)

S Resolver (only SIMODRIVE 611 universal)

S TTL encoder (only SIMODRIVE 611 universal with induction motors)
Induction motors can also be operated without encoders.
The modules provide high encoder resolutions with internal pulse multiplication.

Recommended
encoder signals
for faultfree
operation with
sin/cos 1 Vpp

The following encoder signals are recommended for faultfree operation:

S For track signals A+, A, B+, B, C+, C, D+ and D

Signal
5V

0.375...0.6 V
2.0...
3.0 V

0V

Fig. 3-1

3-64

Signal characteristics for track signals A+, A, B+, B, C+, C, D+ and D

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.2 Motor encoder

S For zero pulse/reference signal R+ and R

Signal
5V

3.5 V
0.2...0.5 V

0.2...0.5 V

1.5 V

0V

Fig. 3-2

Signal characteristics for zero pulse/reference signal R+ and R

If other encoder signals are used or in the case of TTL encoders, encoder signal monitoring can be triggered. In particular, the lower signal level for reference
signals R+ and R must be carefully observed.

Resolver

Key data for resolver as motor encoder:

S Pin assignment: in accordance with Chapter 4.2.2, Table 4-13

S Number of pole pairs: 1 or equal to the polepair count of the motor
S Resolver excitation:
the control unit produces the voltage with 4.3 VRMS at 9.6 kHz

S Nominal input voltage of the controller: sin/cos 2.0 VRMS

S Transmission coefficient of the resolver: approx. 0.46 at 9.6 kHz (often described with 1:2 transformation ratio in the datasheets)

S The resolver excitation is controlled within the control range to provide the
input voltage of 2.0 VRMS.

S Maximum excitation current: 28 mARMS (corresponds to the minimum magnitude of 154 of the complex input impedance of the resolver)

Note
The named key data represent starting values for the selection of the resolver
but not a complete specification of the resolver interface. In specific cases, the
user must check whether the chosen resolver in the complete system meets
the requirements.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-65

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.2 Motor encoder

Theoretic
resolutions in
SIMODRIVE
modules

05.08
05.01

S Encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp

High Performance and SIMODRIVE 611 universal control units can be

parameterized for encoders up to 65,535 incr./rev. The increment value
is increased by the factor 2048 using pulse multiplication in the evaluation of the modules.
Encoders with 2048 incr./rev. are used in preference. The resolution is
then approx. 4.2 million incr./rev. An increment then represents on a
10 mm spindle (10 mm/(2048 @ 2048) = 2.4 nm.

This means the High Standard control unit with a pulse multiplication of
128 with the standard encoder would then be resolved theoretically up to
(10 mm/2048/128) = 38 nm with the 10 mm spindle.

For direct measuring systems (internal pulse multiplication also 2048),

an encoder pulse number up to 32 bits can be set.

Linear scales can be parameterized with grid divisions from 0 to

8,388,607 nm. Linear encoders with 20 m grid division are used primarily; the resolution is then (20 m/2048) = 10 nm.

The encoder limit frequency fG, with sin/cos 1 Vpp encoders, for High
Performance and SIMODRIVE 611 universal control units can be as
high as 350 kHz, with secondary conditions up to 420 kHz, and max.
200 kHz for High Standard control units.

With the encoder 2048 incr./rev., with 350 kHz @ (60s/2048) up to

10,250 RPM can be processed.

The High Standard control unit with the standard encoder permits max.
200 kHz @ (60s/2048) up to 5,860 RPM.

Linear encoders (20 m grid) permit speeds with

350 kHz @ (20 m @ 60s) up to 420 m/min.

S Resolver

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control unit in the variant with resolver
(1 6 pole pairs) permits resolutions with 12 or 14bit and encoder limit
frequencies up to 432 Hz or 108 Hz.

For a resolver with 1 pole pair, 12 or 14bit achieves the resolution

4,096/rev. or 16,384/rev. namely 4,096 incr./rev. or 16,384 incr./rev.

The position resolution with 10 mm spindle pitch corresponds theoretically to 2.5 m or 0.6 m. The values are correspondingly more favorable for resolvers with a higher number of poles, e.g. for six pole pairs.

Maximum speeds can be achieved with 12 bits and for pole pair 1 to
432 @ 60 = 26,000 RPM and with 14 bits up to approx. 6,500 RPM.
Resolvers with a larger number of poles, e.g. six pole pairs, permit only
correspondingly lower speeds.

Note
Because encoder systems (as result of excitation frequency, excitation
amplitudes, windings, nonsymmetry of the poles) can exhibit relatively high
tolerances in the evaluation for analog/digital conversion, the actually
achievable values are significantly lower in practice.

3-66

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.2 Motor encoder

S Encoder with TTL signal

For the speed control of induction motors with SIMODRIVE 611 universal
HRS control units, sin/cos 1 Vpp variant, TTL encoders can be connected
and evaluated.
The limit frequency fG can be as high as 420 kHz.
The SIMODRIVE 611 universal E HRS control unit allows only one TTL signal to be passed to a higher level controller using the PROFIBUS DP.

Note
The actually achievable system quality with regard to speed or positioning
accuracy depends primarily on the quality of the used encoders and other
influencing factors, such as:

S the mechanical system (rigidity, backlash, mass (GD2)), and also

S the controlengineering configuration of motors, power, controller
(interpolation and control cycles, control parameters, etc.)
In practice, the previously mentioned effects mean the quality that can be
achieved in a real system is significantly lower than the theoretically achievable
quality.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-67

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

3.3

02.07
05.01

Indirect position and motor speed sensing

The various possibilities for indirect position and speed sensing and to position
the motor shaft as a function of the drive configuration (SINUMERIK,
SIMODRIVE and Motor) are shown in Table 3-6 (Chapter 3.5).

3.4

Direct position sensing

3.4.1

Encoder systems that can be evaluated

The various possibilities for direct position sensing for positioning as a function
of the drive configuration (SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE and Motor) and the encoder system being used are shown in Table 3-7 (Chapter 3.5).
As a result of the higher data transfer reliability, we recommend that sinusoidal
voltage signals are used.

Recommended
encoder signals
for faultfree
operation with
sin/cos 1 Vpp

The following encoder signals are recommended for faultfree operation:

Parameterizable
encoder limit
frequency
(as of SW 5.1.14)

Machine data MD 1326: $MD_SAFE_ENC_FREQ_LIMIT can be used to parameterize a limit frequency. The maximum value is 420 kHz, the lower limit and
default value is 300 kHz.

, refer to Chapter 3.2 Motor encoders

Note
Changes to this MD may only be made carefully taking into account the
prevailing conditions.
This functionality is only supported by SIMODRIVE 611 digital High
Performance control units.
Table 3-1

Encoder limit frequency and speed

Encoder pulses/
rev.

Speed at the maximum encoder limit frequency

200 kHz

300 kHz

420 kHz

2048

5800 RPM

8700 RPM

12300 RPM

1024

11600 RPM

17400 RPM

24600 RPM

512

22200 RPM

34800 RPM

49200 RPM

The following secondary conditions/limitations are specified:

1. Cable to be used:
Siemens cable, Order No.: 6FX20022CA311CF0
2. Maximum permissible encoder cable length:
Encoder limit frequency 420 kHz: 20 m
3. Encoder characteristics: 3dB cutoff frequency greater than or equal to
500 kHz
Examples of encoders that can be used:
ERA 180 with 9000 pulses/rev and ERA 180 with 3600 pulses/rev from the
Heidenhain Company.
4. The amplitude monitoring that is active up to 420 kHz.

3-68

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

Incremental systems with two sinusoidal voltage signals A, B offset by

90 degrees (several, for distancecoded systems) reference mark(s) R.
Transfer:

Differential signals
A, *A; B, *B and R, R*

Amplitude A *A

1 Vpp + +20% 25%

Amplitude B *B

1 Vpp + 20% 25%

Amplitude R *R

0.2 Vpp ... 1 Vpp

Power supply:

5 V 5% (also refer to Chapter 3.4.2

Encoder power supply)

Max. power supply current:

300 mA

Max. processable enc. signal frequency:

200 kHz standard module/

420 kHz (as of SW 5.1.14)1)
350 kHz

Note
For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the signal amplitude
must be  60% of the nominal amplitude and the deviation of the phase shift
from the ideal 90d between track A and B must be   30d.
Observe the frequency characteristic of the encoder signals.

A*A

90_ el.

360_ el.

B*B
0
Range of uniqueness
R*R
0

Fig. 3-3

Signal characteristic for a clockwise direction of rotation

1) Refer to parameterizable encoder limit frequency (as of SW 5.1.14)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-69

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

05.08
05.01

Singleturn, multiturn and linear absolute systems with two sinusoidal voltage signals A, B offset by 90 degrees and EnDat interface

Transfer, incremental signals:

Differential signals
A, *A and B, *B

Amplitude A *A

1 Vpp + +20% 25%

Amplitude B *B

1 Vpp + 20% 25%

Transfer, serial signals:

Differential signals
data, *data and clock, *clock

Signal level:

acc. to EIA 485

Power supply:

5 V 5% (also refer to Chapter 3.4.2

Encoder power supply)

Max. power supply current:

300 mA

Max. processable enc. signal frequency:

200 kHz standard module/

420 kHz (as of SW 5.1.14)1)
350 kHz

Note
For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the signal amplitude
must be  60% of the nominal amplitude and the deviation of the phase shift
from the ideal 90d between track A and B must be   30d.
Observe the frequency characteristic of the encoder signals.

A*A

90_ el.

360_ el.

B*B
0

Fig. 3-4

Signal curve of incremental tracks for clockwise rotation

1) Refer to parameterizable encoder limit frequency (as of SW 5.1.14)

3-70

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

Incremental signals with two square wave signals A, B offset by 90 degrees and reference mark(s) R SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS/
SIMODRIVE universal HRS E
Transfer:

Differential signals
A, *A; B, *B and R, *R

Signal level:

According to RS422

Power supply:

5 V  5% (also refer to Chapter 3.4.2

Encoder power supply)

Max. power supply current:

Max. 300 mA

Max. encoder signal frequency

that can be evaluated:

420 kHz

Note
For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the edge clearance
between track A and B must be 200 ns.
Observe the frequency characteristic of the encoder signals!

A*A

0
90_ el.
B*B

360_ el.

0
R*R

Range of uniqueness

Fig. 3-5

Signal characteristic for a clockwise direction of rotation

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-71

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

SSI encoder

05.08
05.01

The SSI encoder is used as direct position measuring system (NC) (SSI scale/
encoder is attached to the load). In addition to this direct position measuring
system, on the motor side, the speed is sensed using an incremental motor
encoder.
The exception is the measuring system sensing for SIMODRIVE 611D HLA,
where the linear scale can be used as motor measuring system.

The used SSI encoders must comply with the following specification:
Gray or binarycoded encoders can be used under the assumption:

S Error bit/alarm bit is the LSB; if, in addition, a parity bit is transferred, then
this is the next to last bit. If an alarm bit is not transferred, then the parity bit
is the LSB.

S The net (useful) information also as parity or error bit/alarm bit are either
gray or binarycoded but never mixed.

S Message frame length (including alarm and/or parity):

SIMODRIVE HLA 13 and 25 bit,

SIMODRIVE 611D from 13, to 25 bit

S Data format: SIMODRIVE HLA only right justified

S For HLA: The encoder zero point of the linear encoder (absolute value 0)
must not be located in the traversing range.

S Transfer frequency, f: 100 or 500 kHz.

S Monoflop time:

at 100 kHz tm min 12 s,

at 500 kHz tm min 2.4 s,

or tm > 1.2
1/f

S Operation is only possible without Safety Integrated!

Note
Only SSI encoders without incremental tracks may be used. The connection of
SSI encoders is not possible on the connection for the indirect measuring
system (X411, X412). The use as direct measuring system is possible only for
HLA axes.

3.4.2

Encoder power supply

Remote/sense operation is possible with the encoder power supply for the
motor measuring systems and the encoder power supplies for the measuring
systems for direct position sensing (voltage controlled directly on the encoder to
5%).

3-72

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

Remote/sense
operation means:

The power supply voltage of the measuring system is sensed using the sense
lines P sense and M sense (quasi zerocurrent measurement).
The controller compares the measuring system power supply voltage, sensed
using the remote sense lines, with the reference power supply voltage of the
measuring system and adjusts the power supply voltage for the measuring
system at the drive module output until the required power supply voltage is set
directly at the measuring system.
This means that the voltage drops across the power supply cables P encoder
and M encoder are compensated and corrected by the encoder power supply.
The reference voltage is generated from a reference voltage source and is 5 V.
This means that it is possible to use cable lengths up to 50 m without having to
operate the measuring systems with an undervoltage condition.

Note
All data only apply for SIEMENS preassembled cables as these are correctly
dimensioned regarding the cable crosssections.
For SIMODRIVE connection systems and also for the measuring system
suppliers, remote/sense operation is only possible for encoder systems with
voltage signals.
For motor measuring systems and mounted SIMODRIVE sensor encoders, the
sense lines are connected in the encoder or in the connector on the encoder
side. For thirdparty encoder systems, the customers must make the
appropriate connections.

High Performance
digital FD and
MSD drive control

Remote/sense operation

Measuring system without

remote/sense lines

Drive module
P encoder
P sense
M encoder
M sense

Fig. 3-6

P encoder
M encoder

Customers must make the connections,

i.e. P encoder with P sense and
M encoder with M sense

Drive module
P encoder
P sense
M encoder
M sense

l 5m

l 50 m

l 50 m

l 5m

Measuring system with

remote/sense lines
P encoder
P sense
M encoder
M sense

Signal overview of the connections

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-73

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

3.4.3

02.07
05.01

Encoder power supply for SSI encoders

General
information

For SIMODRIVE, an internal 5 V is provided to supply encoders. When using

SSI encoders, the power supply voltage must be externally connected to the
encoder cable.

What has to be
observed?

The following must be observed (refer to Fig. 3-7):

3
Note
SSI encoders are likely to have lower noise immunity due to the encoder and
the 24 V power supply.

S The encoders must be supplied with a separately regulated 24 V voltage

(e.g. SITOP power) in order to avoid disturbances/noise due to contactors, etc.

S The external 24 V power supply must have safe separation (PELV).

S Filter data:

The special filter is required in order to filterout noise and disturbances

Maximum continuous operating current = 0.8 A (use a fuse!)

Max. voltage = 30 V

One filter is designed for two encoders with a maximum current = 0.4 A

S The 24 V supply (reference potential) should be connected to the electronics

ground of the system (e.g. terminal X131 on the NE module) if this connection is not already provided in the encoder.

S Maximum cable length between the 24 V supply and the filter v 10 m

S Maximum encoder cable = 40 m
S The technical data of the encoder manufacturer must be carefully observed.
S Thirdparty encoders must be connected using the adapter cables provided
by the particular manufacturer.

24 VDC

L+
L

0.8 A
Filter
6SN11611DA000AA0
Power supply cables l  20 cm

e.g. at terminal X131

of the NE module

6FX80022CC80.../OEMl v 40 m

SIMODRIVE 611

Fig. 3-7

3-74

SSI
encoder

Connecting SSI encoders to SIMODRIVE 611

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

+
M5x12 max.

Power supply

10.5 mm

3
Red
Black

Fig. 3-8

Connection example for the High Performance digital control

+
Power supply
M5x12 max.
O

10.5 mm

Red
Black

Fig. 3-9

Connection example for the HLA module control board

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-75

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

3.4.4

02.12
05.01

Signal amplifier electronics

The signal amplifier electronics (SVE) is used for encoders with current signals
between the encoder and drive module to convert the current signals into voltage signals 1 Vpp .
The signal amplifier electronics were developed for optical encoder systems
equipped with photodiodes and no additional supplementary electronics (example, ROD 456 from the Heidenhain company). However, there are many encoder systems in the market with integrated electronics where the behavior of current signals is only roughly emulated. As a result of the many options available,
a general statement regarding the compatibility between the encoder, SVE and
closedloop control cannot be made.

Notice
For new applications, no longer use encoders with current signals, as voltage
signals offer a higher noise immunity.

The signal amplification electronics can be used in conjunction with the

following control modules:

S SIMODRIVE 611 digital High Standard or High Performance

S SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS/E HRS for encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp
S HLA module
S ANA module
Table 3-2

Technical data of the signal amplifier electronics

Technical specifications

3-76

Signal shape

Sine/cosine

Input signal

7 APP to 16 APP

Output signal

1VPP

Max. signal frequency

300 kHz

Max. operating voltage

At the remote sense

8 VDC

Max. operating current

200 mA

Encoder voltage supply

5 VDC $5%

Max. encoder current supply

120 mA

Dimensions (W x H x D)

54 mm x 121 mm x 57 mm

Order number

6SN11150AA120AA0

Housing degree of protection

IP65

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

SVE pin assignment

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.4 Direct position sensing

S Encoder signal input (for encoders with current signals) at the signal amplification electronics (SVE).
A 9pin flangemounted socket with socket contacts for standard round
encoder connectors is provided at the SVE.
The input is located on the side with the PE connection.
Table 3-3
Pin

Assignment of the SVE signal input

Signal name

Function

AP

Current signal input for incremental track A

AN

Inverse current signal input for incremental track A

P_ENCODER

Encoder power supply

M_ENCODER

Encoder power supply ground

BP

Current signal input for incremental track B

BN

Inverse current signal input for incremental track B

RP

Current signal input for track R (zero mark/reference pulse)

RN

Inverse current signal input for track R

(zero mark/reference pulse)

SHIELD

Ground pin to connect the inner shield

S Output of the SVE (connection to the SIMODRIVE controls, input at the

direct measuring system for voltage signals).
A 12pin flangemounted socket with plug contacts for standard round encoder connectors is provided at the SVE.
Table 3-4

Assignment of the SVE signal output

Pin

Signal name

Function

BN

Inverse voltage signal output for incremental track B

PSENSE

Remote Sense encoder power supply (P)

RP

Voltage signal input for track R (zero mark/reference pulse)

RN

Inverse voltage signal input for track R (zero mark/reference pulse)

AP

Voltage signal output for incremental track A

AN

Inverse voltage signal output for incremental track A

not assigned

BP

Voltage signal output for incremental track B

not assigned

10

MENC

Encoder power supply ground

11

MSENSE

Remote Sense encoder power supply (M)

12

PENC

Encoder power supply

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-77

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.5 Overview, position sensing

3.5

11.05
05.01

Overview, position sensing

Table 3-5

Assignment, motor measuring systems to control unit

Drive control unit, High Performance (FD mode)

Drive control unit, High Performance (MSD mode)

Drive control unit, High Standard (FD mode)

Drive control unit, High Standard (MSD mode)
Drive control unit 611 universal HRS resolver
Drive control unit 611 universal HRS 1 Vpp voltage signals
Motor type
Encoder system
Yes

1FK
Servo motor

Resolver

Yes

Yes

Yes

1FT/1FK
Servo motor

Incremental encoder 1 Vpp

Yes

Yes

Yes

1FT/1FK
Servo motor

Multiturn absolute encoders

Yes

Yes

Yes

1FN
Linear motor

Incremental encoder (Hall sensor box) 1 Vpp

Absolute encoder

Yes

Yes

Yes

1PH4/6/7
Main spindle motor

Incremental encoder 1 Vpp

Yes

Yes

Yes

1FE1/1PH2/1PM/2SP1
Main spindle motor

Incremental encoder (hollowshaft encoder) 1 Vpp

(toothed wheel or magnetic)

Yes

1FW
Builtin torque motor

Incremental encoder 1 Vpp

Absolute encoder

Yes

1LA standard motor

Encoderless (sensorless)

Yes

Yes
Yes

Table 3-6

Yes

Yes

Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed sensing digital controls

Version of
the
control
board

Drive
control
High Perfor
mance/
High Standard

Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed

sensing digital controls

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

l v 50 m

1FT6
1FK
1PH
1PM
Incremental

3-78

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

Table 3-7

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.5 Overview, position sensing

Direct position sensing, digital control

Version of
the
control
board

Direct position sensing, digital controls

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

BERO function
not released for FD
l v 50 m
Incremental

SIMODRIVE
drive module

3
BERO1)

1PH4/6/7
1FE

Toothed wheel
SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

l v 50 m

1PH2
1FE
Spindle

Drive
control
High Perfor
mance/
High Standard

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

Voltage signals

Sensor head

l v 50 m

Linear2)
measuring
system
incremental

SIMODRIVE
drive module

1FT6
1FK
l  50 m

Voltage signals

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

Linear measuring
system
incremental and
absolute

l v 50 m

1FT6
1FK
Voltage signals
and EnDat interface

l  50 m
Data
clock

1) The absolute accuracy for socalled synchronization with a BERO depends on the following:
the switching time of the BERO
the hysteresis of the BERO
the signal edge gradient (rateofrise) of the BERO signal (depending on the direction of rotation) and the switching
thresholds in the drive; high > 13 V, low < 5 V
the search speed and the signal runtimes in the evaluation electronics
2) Distancecoded reference marks can be evaluated

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

3-79

3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing

3.6 Ordering information

Table 3-7

Direct position sensing, digital control, continued

Version of
the
control
board

11.05
05.01

Direct position sensing, digital controls

Rotary measuring system,

incremental
Drive
control
High Perfor
mance/
High Standard

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

l v 50 m

Incremental

1PH4/6/7
1FE

SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

l v 50 m

incremental or
incremental + absolute
linear scale

SLM
1FN
Hall sensor box
Drive
control
High Perfor
mance
SINUMERIK
840D powerline
drive bus

Drive bus

SIMODRIVE
drive module

l v 50 m
1FW

Temp

3.6

Ordering information
Refer to the relevant catalog for the Order Nos. of the specified components

S Preassembled encoder cables

refer to Catalog NC Z

with the appropriate maximum

permissible cable lengths

S Toothedwheel encoder and the diagnostics

box required to make adjustments

refer to Catalog NC Z or NC 60
J

3-80

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Control Units

Overview of the
control units
Table 4-1

The control units/boards listed in the following table can be used in the
SIMODRIVE power modules.

Overview of the control units/boards

Closedloop control module

Variant

Axes

Motor encoder

Motors1)

Optional
interfaces

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

1axis
nset

Resolver

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1,

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN
Thirdparty: If suitable

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

1axis
pos.

Resolver

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1,

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

2axis
nset

Resolver

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1,

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN
Thirdparty: If suitable

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

2axis
pos

Resolver

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

2axis
nset

Incremental
encoder sin/cos
1 VPP
Absolute encoder

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN
Thirdparty: If suitable

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

2axis
pos

Incremental
encoder sin/cos
1 VPP
Absolute encoder

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN
Thirdparty: If suitable

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232/485

Incremental
encoder sin/cos
1 VPP
Absolute encoder

SRM: 1FT6, 7 1FK, 1FE1

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH, 1PM6,
SLM: 1FN
Thirdparty: If suitable

PROFIBUS DP,
terminals;
RS 232

SIMODRIVE 611
universal E HRS

1) SRM:
Synchronous rotating motor
IM:
Induction rotating motor
IM:
Synchronous linear motor
Standard: Standard motor
Thirdparty:Unlisted motor

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-81

4 Control Units

Table 4-1

Overview of the control units/boards

Closedloop control module

10.04
05.01

Variant

Axes

Motor encoder

Motors1)

SIMODRIVE 611
with digital setpoint interface for
FD and MSD

High
Performance
control

Incremental
encoders sin/cos
1 VPP, EnDat

SRM: 1FT6, 1FK, 1FE1,

1FW6, 2SP1
IM
1PH, 1PM
SLM: 1FN
Standard: 1LA
Thirdparty: If suitable

SIMODRIVE 611
with digital setpoint interface for
FD and MSD

High
Performance
control

Incremental
encoders sin/cos
1 VPP, EnDat

SRM: 1FT6, 1FK, 1FE1,

1FW6, 2SP1
IM: 1PH7, 1PM
SLM: 1FN
Standard: 1LA
Thirdparty: If suitable

SIMODRIVE 611
with digital setpoint interface for
FD and MSD

High
Standard
control

Incremental
encoders sin/cos
1 VPP, EnDat

SRM: 1FT6, 1FK, 1FE1,

2SP1
IM: 1PH7, 1PM6
Standard: 1LA
Thirdparty: If suitable

Incremental
encoders sin/cos
1 VPP, EnDat,
SSI (SW 1.2.4
and higher)

Hydraulic linear axes/analog axis

SIMODRIVE 611
with digital setpoint interface for
hydraulic/analog
Linear drives HLA/ANA

Optional
interfaces

1) SRM:
Synchronous rotating motor
IM:
Induction rotating motor
IM:
Synchronous linear motor
Standard: Standard motor
Thirdparty:Unlisted motor

4-82

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.08
10.04
05.01

4.1

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

General
information

Digital control units in 1axis and 2axis versions (for 1PH, 2axis control is
only possible with High Performance) are available to operate motors
1FT6/1FK/1FN1/1FN3/1FE1/1PH/1PM/1FM6/2SP1.
During the initialization phase (power on or reset), the drive software is downloaded from the SINUMERIK 840D to the control board via the drive bus.

1axis drive
control

High Performance: Order No.: 6SN11180DJ2V0AAV

The digital 1axis High Performance control can be loaded with the drive software for either FD control or MSD control. MSD and FD have the same user
interface. The board is available in the following versions:

S Basic version with sinusoidal voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute encoders with EnDat interface

S In addition, the evaluation of a direct position measuring system with sinusoidal voltage signals and the connection of absolute encoders with EnDat
interface and SSI interface (as of SW 5.1.9) is possible.

2axis drive
control

The module is available in three basic versions that differ in the controller performance and in the evaluation of the direct position measuring systems:
High Performance: Order No.: 6SN11180DK2V0AAV

S Basic version with sinusoidal voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute encoders with EnDat interface

S In addition, the evaluation of two direct measuring systems with sinusoidal

voltage signals and the connection of absolute encoders with EnDat interface and SSI interface (as of SW 5.1.9) is possible.
High Standard: Order No.: 6SN11180DM3V0AAV

S Basic version with sinusoidal voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute encoders with EnDat interface.

S Additionally with evaluation for 2 direct measuring systems with sinusoidal

voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute encoders with
EnDat interface and SSI interface (from SW 5.1.9).

Note
A 2axis drive control can also be operated in a single axis power module for
single axis applications. It is engineered as a 1axis board.
For motor encoders without any adjustment to the EMF of the synchronous
motor (1FE1/1FN1/1FN3) a configurable, automatic identification technique can
be used to determine the electrical rotor position. In so doing, motion of
typically <$5 degrees mechanical is not exceeded. The identification routine is
performed after each power up operation.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-83

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

Software versions

The digital drive controls can be used with the following software releases of the
SIEMENS drive components:
Table 4-2

Software functions
High Performance

4-84

05.08
05.01

High Standard

MLFB

6SN11180DJ2V0AAV
6SN11180DK2V0AAV

6SN11180DM3V0AAV

NCU version

w6.4.9

w6.4.9

drive version

w6.3.11

w6.5.4

PCU50/PCU20

w6.2.18

w6.2.18

Commissioning tool for the

PC

w6.2.18

w6.2.18

NCU hardware

w573.3; w572.3; 571.3

w573.3; w572.3; 571.3

Mixed operation, FD/MSD

w6.2.12

w6.2.12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

1axis version
High Performance

2axis version
High Performance/High Standard

M3/0.8 Nm

M3/0.8 Nm

0.5 Nm

0.5 Nm

DAC assignment
DAC 1
DAC 2
DAC 3
Ground

DAC assignment
DAC 1
DAC 2
DAC 3
Ground

M3/0.8 Nm

Fig. 4-1

Digital control High Performance and High Standard with direct measuring system

Notice
When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, connectors must be
coded to prevent the connectors being incorrectly inserted (refer to
EN602041, Section 6.4).
For Order No. for coded connectors, refer to Catalog NC 60.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-85

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

1axis version
High Performance

11.05
05.01

2axis version
High Performance/High Standard

M3/0.8 Nm

M3/0.8 Nm

0.5 Nm

0.5 Nm

DAC assignment
DAC 1
DAC 2
DAC 3
Ground

DAC assignment
DAC 1
DAC 2
DAC 3
Ground

M3/0.8 Nm
Fig. 4-2

Digital control High Performance and High Standard without direct measuring system

Notice
When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, connectors must be
coded to prevent the connectors being incorrectly inserted (refer to
EN602041, Section 6.4).
For the order number for coded connectors, refer to Catalog NC 60.

4-86

Warning
At terminals 19, P24 and M24, only PELV circuits may be connected. If this is
not carefully observed, then this can result in personal injury in the form of
electric shock.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
11.05
05.01

4.1.1

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

Interface overview, closedloop drive control

High Standard and

High Performance
Table 4-3

Interface overview, High Standard and High Performance closedloop drive control
Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit
values

Max. cross
section

NC
I

max. 250 V AC/1 A,

30 V DC/2 A
+21 V ... 30 V

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

9 X431
P24 X431
BE1 X431

Relay start inhibit (feedback signal, terminal 663)

Relay start inhibit (feedback signal, terminal 663)
Pulse enable: The starting lockout relay is operated with
terminal 663. On opening, the trigger pulses are inhibited
and the motor is switched into a torquefree condition.
Enable voltage 2)
+24 V supply for the brake control 4)
Output, brake control, axis 1

O
I
O

+24 V
+18 ... 30 V
max. 500 mA

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

B1
19
B2
9
M24
BE2

X432
X432
X432
X432
X432
X432

Input, external zero mark (BERO) axis 1

Negative enable voltage
Input, external zero mark (BERO) axis 2
Positive enable voltage 2)
0 V supply for the brake control
Output, brake control, axis 2

I
O
I
O
I
O

+13 ... 30 V
0V
+13 ... 30 V
+24 V

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

X34/X35

Test socket, DAC

X411

Motor encoder, axis 15)

X412

Motor encoder, axis 25)

X421

Direct position encoder, axis 15)

X422

Direct position encoder, axis

25)

X461

BERO input, axis 1

X462

BERO input, axis 2

X351

Equipment bus

X141/341

Drive bus

Term.
no.

Designation

AS1 3) X431
AS2 3) X431
663 X431

Function

max. 500 mA

For the terminal

assignment, refer to
Table 4-4
For the terminal
assignment, refer to
Table
For the terminal
assignment, refer to
Table 4-6

1) I=Input; O=Output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for a signal, NO=High/NC=Low)

2) The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group.
3) When connecting contacts AS1/AS2 in series, a contact voltage drop up to max. 0.2 V must be taken into account for
the lifetime of the contacts (100000 switching operations). For a 24 V switching voltage, due to the
nonlinear contact characteristics, from experience, five contacts can be simply connected in series
without encountering any problems.
4) A ULcertified miniature fuse (max. 3.15 A) must be
provided at the supply for the brake control:
Value:
e.g. 3.15 AT/250 V; 5x20 mm UL
Company:
WickmannWerke GmbH
Annenstrae 113
58453 Witte, Germany
Order No.:
181
5) In order to increase the strength with respect to surge disturbances, for encoder cables > 30 m long, the screen
connection 6SN11620FA000AA2 can be used. In order to ensure noise immunity in compliance with the standard,
the encoder cable shields should be connected where the cable enters the control cabinet.
The permissible voltage range for the common mode component of the individual encoder signals (A+. A. B+, B, C+,
C, D+, D, R+, R) is 1.5...3.5 V.
6) According to EN 602041 (Safety of Machinery) control transformers should be used when using AC control voltages.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-87

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

Encoder
connection
X411/X412

Table 4-4
Pin

02.07
05.01

Encoder signal input of motor encoder X411, X412

X411 (axis 1)
X412 (axis 2)

Function

PENC

Encoder power supply

MENC

Encoder power supply ground

AP

Incremental signal for track A

AN

Inverse incremental signal for track A

Inner shield ground

BP

Incremental signal for track B

BN

Inverse incremental signal for track B

Inner shield ground

Reserved, do not use

10

ENDATCLK

EnDat interface clock signal

11

Reserved, do not use

12

XENDATCLK

Inverse clock signal, EnDat interface

13

THMOTP

KTY 84 (+) temperature sensor

14

PSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (P)

15

ENDATDAT

Data signal EnDat interface

16

MSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (N)

17

RP

Reference mark signal/zero pulse

18

RN

Inverse reference mark signal/zero pulse

19

CP

Singleturn absolute track signal C

20

CN

Inverse singleturn absolute track signal C

21

DP

Singleturn absolute track signal D

22

DN

Inverse singleturn absolute track signal D

23

XENDATDAT

Inverse EnDat interface data signal

24

Inner shield ground

25

THMOTCOM

KTY 84 () temperature sensor

Note:
The inputs on the control must not be assigned any signals other than the intended signals. Otherwise, sporadic or permanent malfunction or damage can occur. In particular,
any existing signals of additional temperature sensors (PTCs, NTCs, etc.) for spindle
applications must NOT be applied to the unused CP, CN, DP, or DN inputs when using
induction motors!

4-88

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Encoder
connection
X421/X422

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

Table 4-5
Pin

Encoder signal input of direct measuring system X421. X422

X421 (axis 1)
X422 (axis 2)

Function

PENC

Encoder power supply

MENC

Encoder power supply ground

AP

Incremental signal for track A

AN

Inverse incremental signal for track A

ENDATDAT

Data signal EnDat interface

BP

Incremental signal for track B

BN

Inverse incremental signal for track B

XENDATDAT

Inverse EnDat interface data signal

PSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (P)

10

RP

Reference mark signal/zero pulse

11

MSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (N)

12

RN

Inverse reference mark signal/zero pulse

13

Inner shield ground

14

ENDATCLK

EnDat interface clock signal

15

XENDATCLK

Inverse clock signal, EnDat interface

Note:
The inputs on the control must not be assigned any signals other than the intended signals. Otherwise, sporadic or permanent malfunction or damage can occur.
It is especially important for spindle applications, that possibly available signals from
additional temperature sensors (PTCs, NTCs or similar) must NOT be connected to the
CP, CN, DP, DN inputs that are not used when using induction motors!
When parking axis is selected, the encoder can be withdrawn and inserted also under
voltage.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-89

4 Control Units
4.1 Closedloop control with digital setpoint interface

02.12
05.01

Holding brake
connection
Safety circuit
24 V
SITOP

<10 m

0V
K1

Power
supply,
e.g. SITOP
power
1)

Motor with
motor
holding brake

K2
Relays

Relays

to
control
the motor
holding brake 1)

to
control
the motor
holding brake

M1
3

M2
3

Axis 1
1) Overvoltage circuitry, e.g. varistor

Fig. 4-3

High Standard/Performance
X431
X432
Term. P24
Term. M24
P24
M24
T. BE2
Term. BE1
BI1
BI2

Fuse

Axis 2

Circuit example: Connecting a motor holding brake to a High Standard/High Performance control board

BERO input
X461/X462

Table 4-6

BERO input X461/X462

Pin

Function

Type

Technical specifications

1)

No.

Designation
X461

X462

Type: 9pin Dsub socket connector

FRP

FRP

Internal enable voltage

(jumpered with terminal 9)

+24 V

BERO1

BERO2

BERO input

+15 ... 30 V

Reserved,
do not use

Reserved,
do not use

FRM

FRM

Reserved,
do not use

Reserved,
do not use

8
9

Internal enable voltage

(jumpered with terminal 19)

0V

1) I: Input; O: Output

4-90

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4.2

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Description

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board is used in the SIMODRIVE
611 system (SW q8.3) and includes two drive controls that are independent of
one another. However, the board can also be used for 1axis applications and
in 1axis power modules.

Note
The control board is described in detail in:
References:

/FBU/ Description of Functions, SIMODRIVE 611 universal

The functionality specified in this Description of Functions under SIMODRIVE

611 universal also applies to SIMODRIVE 611 universal HR.

Features

The control board has the following features:

S Variants
Table 4-7

Control board, option modules, data medium

Description

Cons.
No.

Hardware

Order No. (MLFB)

Firmware

Closedloop control module

1
2
4
6

2axis1) for encoders

with sin/cos 1 Vpp
2axis1) for resolvers

8
10

1axis for resolvers

nset

6SN11180NH010AA1

Positioning

6SN11181NH010AA1

nset

6SN11180NK010AA1

Positioning

6SN11181NK010AA1

nset

6SN11180NJ010AA1

Positioning

6SN11181NJ010AA1

Option module (can be alternatively used in the control board)

1

TERMINALS

6SN11140NA000AA0

PROFIBUS

DP23)

6SN11140NB000AA2

PROFIBUSDP33)

6SN11140NB010AA1

SimoCom U,
drive firmware,
Toolbox, GSD file,
readme file, etc.

6SN1153VNX20VAG0

Data volume
1

CD

2)

V = 0 > CD with the

most current SW version
The CD also contains
previous SW versions

1) For 2axis control boards, 1axis operation is also possible

2) V: Space retainer for software version
3) Prerequisite: Control board as of SW 3.1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-91

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

11.05
05.01

S Settings
All driverelated settings of the control board can be made as follows:

Using the SimoCom U parameterizing and startup tool on an external

PG/PC

Using the display and operator control unit on the front panel

Using PROFIBUS DP (parameter area, PKW area)

S Software and data

The firmware and the user data are saved on a memory module which can
be replaced.
The software designation on the memory module refers to the system software including the initial program loader.

S Terminals and operator control elements

2 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs per drive

4 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs per drive

2 measuring sockets

POWERON RESET pushbutton with LED

Display and operator unit

S Safe start inhibit

The start inhibit is addressed via terminal 663 and is signaled back using a
relay with positivelydriven signaling contacts (AS1/AS2). Using the start
inhibit, the energy feed from the drive to the motor is interrupted.
When the safe start inhibit function is correctly used, the signaling contacts
AS1/AS2 must be included in the line contactor circuit or the EMERGENCY
OFF circuit.
Caution
When using the safe start inhibit function, it must be ensured that the velocity
goes to zero.

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board supports the Safe
standstill function.
Detailed information about the safe standstill function is provided in Chapter 8.5.

S Serial interface (RS232/RS485)

S Option modules

Optional TERMINAL module,

8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs for drive A

Optional PROFIBUSDP module

S Expanded functions as of SW 5.1

The following expanded functionality is provided with a new control board for
sin/cos 1Vpp encoders:

4-92

Higher internal resolution, interpolation factor 2048 (previously 128)

Pulse multiplication is possible (doubling) at the angular incremental encoder interface for absolute encoders

Pulse multiplication (doubling) and division (1:2, 1:4, 1:8) are possible at
the angular incremental encoder interface, also for incremental encoders

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4.2.1

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Control board for 1 or 2 axes

Control boards for

2 axes

The following 2axis control boards are available:

2axis for encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp or

2axis for resolvers
(refer to Table 4-7)

Mounting slot for

X302

Optional TERMINAL module

or

Optional PROFIBUS DP module

S
S
S

Interfaces
Terminals
Switches


Memory module

S
S

Firmware

User data


Display and operator unit

Pulse interface


Equipment bus

The following applies to retaining screws:

Tighten (to establish a good shield contact)
max. torque = 0.8 Nm
For plug connections:
Plug connectors with the same number of pins must be
appropriately coded so that they cannot be interchanged (refer to
the index entry Coding the mini connectors).

Fig. 4-4

Control boards for 2 axes (SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-93

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Control board for

1 axis

11.05
05.01

The following 1axis control boards are available:

1axis for resolvers

These interfaces have
no function for the
1axis version

Mounting slot for

X302

Optional TERMINAL module

or

Optional PROFIBUS DP module

S
S
S

Interfaces
Terminals
Switches

Memory module

S
S

Firmware

User data


Display and operator unit

Pulse interface

Equipment bus

The following applies to retaining screws:

Tighten (to establish a good shield contact)
max. torque = 0.8 Nm
For plug connections:
Plug connectors with the same number of pins must be
appropriately coded so that they cannot be interchanged (refer to
the index entry Coding the mini connectors).

Fig. 4-5

4-94

Control board for 1 axis (SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Optional terminal
module

An additional 8 digital inputs and outputs can be realized using this optional
module.
The functionality of these inputs/outputs can be freely parameterized.

Note

S The input/output terminals of the optional TERMINAL module are

Before SW 4.1: permanently assigned to drive A or axis A

As of SW 4.1: can be freely assigned axes

S The optional TERMINAL module can be used as follows, dependent on the

software release:

I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
O4
O5
O6
O7
O8
O9
O10
O11
Fig. 4-6

The following applies before SW 2.4:

The module can only be used in the positioning mode.

The following applies as of SW 2.4:

The module can be used independently of the operating mode.

X422

Order number: 6SN11140NA000AA0

8 inputs

For screws:
X432
8 outputs

Tighten (due to the shield contact)

max. torque = 0.8 Nm

Optional TERMINAL module

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-95

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Optional
PROFIBUS DP
module

11.05
05.01

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control board can be connected and operated
as DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus when this optional module is used.

X423

For screws:
Twocolor LED
for diagnostics

Tighten (due to the shield contact)

max. torque = 0.8 Nm

Fig. 4-7

Table 4-8

Optional PROFIBUS DP module

Which optional modules are available?

Designation

Order No. (MLFB)

PROFIBUS DP2

6SN11140NB000AA2

Properties

S
S
S

Features that
PROFIBUS DP2 and DP3 have in common

PROFIBUS DP3

6SN11140NB010AA1

For control boards as of SW 3.1, this module can replace the

optional PROFIBUS DP1 module
Requirement:
Control board as of SW 3.1 is required

Cyclic data transfer (PKW and PZD section) possible

FW module can be updated using SimoCom U

Noncyclic data transfer (DP/V1)

SimoCom U via PROFIBUS possible

PROFIBUS ASIC DPC31 with PLL

4-96

PROFIBUS ASIC DPC31 without PLL

Motion Control with PROFIBUS DP function (clocksynchronous PROFIBUS operation) is possible

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

Table 4-9

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Which optional modules can be used for the various software releases?
Case

Firmware version

Optional module
DP2

DP3

1. A master configured software, generated with GSD file

siem808f.gsd, can be operated with

as of SW 3.1

Yes

Yes

2. A master configured software, generated with a GSD file

siem8055f.gsd and P0875 = 2, can be operated with

before SW 4.1

Yes

Yes

3. A master configured software, generated with a GSD file

siem8055f.gsd and P0875 = 2, can be operated with

as of SW 4.1

Yes

Yes

4. Master configured application, generated with a GSD file

si02808f.gsd and P0875 = 2 can be operated with

as of SW 6.1

Yes

Yes

4
Note
Case 1 is for new applications with the DP2, DP3 module.
Cases 2 and 3 are for series commissioning of drives using DP1 modules and
for replacing a defective DP1 module by a DP2 module.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-97

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

4.2.2

02.03
02.12
05.08
05.01

Description of the terminals and interfaces

Board
specific
terminals and
interfaces
Table 4-10

The boardspecific terminals and interfaces are available jointly for drive A and
B of a 2axis module.

Overview of the boardspecific terminals and interfaces

Terminal

Function

Type

Technical specifications

1)

No.

Designation

Signaling terminal, start inhibit (X421)

AS13)
AS23)

X421

Signaling contact
Start inhibit
Feedback signal from
terminal 663

NC

AS1
AS2
T. 663

Connector type:
Max. cond. crosssect.:
Contact:
Contact load capability:

2pin conn. strip

2.5 mm2
Floating NC contact
at 250 VAC max. 1 A4)
at 30 VDC max. 2 A

AS1

Relay, safe
start inhibit

AS2

Relay, safe
start inhibit

T. 663

Pulses not enabled (T. 663)

Pulses enabled (T. 663)

The gating pulses of the power

transistors are inhibited.

The gating pulses of the power

transistors are enabled.

Terminals for supply and pulse enable (X431)

X431
P24

M24

X431.1

X431.2

Connector type:
Max. cond. crosssect.:
External supply for
digital outputs
(+24 V)

Reference for the external supply

Voltage tolerance
(including ripple):

5pin conn. strip

1.5 mm2

20,4 V to 28,8 V

The external supply is required for the following digital outputs:

S
S

8 outputs of the drivespecific terminals (X461, O0.A O3.A/X462, O0.B O3.B)

8 outputs of the optional TERMINAL module (X432, O4 O11)

When dimensioning the external power supply, the total current of all of the digital outputs must be taken into
account.
Maximum total current:

S
S

for the control board (all 8 outputs):

2.4 A

for the optional TERMINAL module (all 8 outputs): Max. 480 mA

Example:
Board/module
Outputs
Dimensioning the external supply
Control board
8
max. 1.5 A
> 24 V/1.5 A
Control module +
optional TERMINAL module 8 + 8
max. (1.5 A + 280 mA) > 24 V/1.8 A

4-98

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Table 4-10

Overview of the boardspecific terminals and interfaces, continued

Terminal

Type

Function

Technical specifications

1)

No.

Designation

X431.3

Enable voltage
(+24 V)

Reference:
Terminal 19
Maximum current(for the total group):
Max. 500 mA
Note:
The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be used to supply the
enable signals (e.g. pulse enable) as 24 V auxiliary voltage.

663

X431.4

Pulse enable
(+24 V)

Voltage tolerance(including ripple):

21 V to 30 V
Typ. current consumption:
50 mA at 24 V
Note:
The pulse enable acts simultaneously on drive A and drive B.
When this pulse enable is withdrawn, the drives coast down
unbraked.

19

X431.5

Reference
(Reference for all digital
inputs)

Note:
If the enable signals are to be controlled from an external voltage source, the reference potential (ground) of the external
source must be connected to this terminal.

Serial interface for

SimoCom U

IO

Type: 9pin Dsub socket connector

Cable diagram and pin assignment for RS232 or RS485, refer
to:
Reference:
/FB611U/ Description of Functions, SIMODRIVE 611 universal

Equipment bus

IO

Ribbon cable:
Voltages:
Signals:

34pin
various
various

DAC1

Test socket 12)

DAC2

22)

Test socket:
Resolution:
Rated operating voltage:
Maximum current:

2 mm
8 bits
0 V to 5 V
Max. 3 mA

Serial interface (X471)

X471

Equipment bus (X34)

X351

Test sockets (X34)

X34

Test socket
Reference

1) I: Input; IO: Input/output; M: Measuring signal; NC: NC contact; S: Supply

2) Can be freely parameterized
3) When connecting contacts AS1/AS2 in series, a contact voltage drop up to max. 0.2 V must be taken into account for
the lifetime of the contacts (100000 switching operations). For a 24 V switching voltage, due to the nonlinear contact
characteristics, from experience, five contacts can be simply connected in series without encountering any problems.
4) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety) controlpower transformers should be provided when
AC control voltages are used.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-99

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Drive
specific
terminals
Table 4-11

11.05
05.01

The drivespecific terminals are available for both drive A and drive B.

Overview of the drivespecific terminals

Function

Terminal

Type

Technical specifications

1)

Drive A
No.

Designation

Drive B
No.

Designation

Encoder connection (X411, X412)5)

X411

Motor encoder
connection
Drive A

See Chapter 3
Type: 25pin Dsub plug connector
Note:
Encoder limit frequencies:

X412

Motor encoder
connection
Drive B
or
connection, direct
measuring system
(as of SW 3.3)

S
S

Encoder with sin/cos 1 Vpp: 350 kHz

Resolver:

12 bits 432 Hz
14 bits 108 Hz

S Enc. with TTL signal:

420 kHz
For the encoder connection, refer to Tables
4-12 and 4-13

Analog outputs (X441)

75.A

X441.1

Analog output 12)

AO

16.A

X441.2

Analog output 22)

AO

75.B

X441.3

Analog output 12)

AO

16.B

X441.4

Analog output 22)

AO

15

X441.5

15

X441.5

Reference

Connector type:
5pin conn. strip
Wiring:
Connect the cable with the braided shield at
both ends
Max. cond. crosssection for finely
stranded or solid cond.:
0.5 mm2
Rated operating voltage:
10 V to +10 V
Maximum current: 3 mA
Resolution:
8 bits
Update:
In the speedcontr.
clock cycle
shortcircuit proof

Terminals for analog inputs and digital inputs/outputs (X451, X452)

X451

X452

Connector type:
10pin conn. strip
Max. cond. crosssection for finelystranded or solid cond.: 0.5 mm2

56.A

X451.1

56.B

X452.1

Analog input 1

14.A

X451.2

14.B

X452.2

Reference

24.A

X451.3

24.B

X452.3

Analog input 2

20.A

X451.4

20.B

X452.4

Reference

65.A

X451.5

65.B

X452.5

Controller enable
Drivespecific

4-100

X451.6

X452.6

Enable voltage
(+24 V)

AI

Differential input
Rated operating voltage:12.5 V to +12.5 V
Input resistance:
100 kk
Resolution:
14 bits (sign + 13 bits)
Wiring:
Connect the cable to the
braided shield at both ends

Typ. current consumption:

Signal level (incl. ripple)
High signal level:
Low signal level:
Galvanic isolation:

6 mA at 24 V
15 V to 30 V
3 V to 5 V
Ref. is T. 19/
T. M24

Reference:
Terminal 19
Maximum current
(for the total group):
500 mA
Note:
The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be
used to supply the enable signals (e.g. controller enable).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Table 4-11

Overview of the drivespecific terminals, continued

Terminal

Function

Type

Technical specifications

1)

Drive B

Drive A
No.

Designation

No.

Designation

I0.A

X451.7

I0.B

X452.7

Digital input 02)

Fast input3)
e.g. for equivalent zero
mark, external block
change

DI

I1.A

X451.8

I1.B

X452.8

Digital input 12)

Fast input

DI

I2.A

X451.9

I2.B

X452.9

Digital input 22)

DI

I3.A

X451.10

I3.B

X452.10

Digital input 32)

DI

Voltage:
24 V
Typ. current consumption: 6 mA at 24 V
Signal level (incl. ripple)
High signal level:
15 V to 30 V
Low signal level:
3 V to 5 V
sampling time, fast input: 62.5 ss
Galvanic isolation: Ref. is T. 19/T. M24
Note:
An opencircuit input is interpreted as 0
signal.

Drivespecific terminals (X461, X462)

X461

X462

Connector type:
10pin conn. strip
Max. cond. crosssection for finelystranded or solid cond.: 0.5 mm2

A+.A

X461.1

A+.B

X462.1

Signal A+

IO

A.A

X461.2

A.B

X462.2

Signal A

IO

Incremental Shaft Encoder Interface

(AIE int.)
Wiring:

B+.A

X461.3

B+.B

X462.3

Signal B+

IO

B.A

X461.4

B.B

X462.4

Signal B

IO

R+.A

X461.5

R+.B

X462.5

Signal R+

IO

R.A

X461.6

R.B

X462.6

Signal R

IO

15

X461.7

15

X462.7

Ground reference

Cable with braided shield, connected at

both ends.
The reference ground of the connected
node should be connected to terminal
X441.5 or X461.7.
Condition to maintain the surge
strength: Cable length < 30 m

Note:
Devices (stations) can be connected which conform to the RS485/RS422 standard.
The angular incremental encoder interface can either be parameterized as an input or output.
S Input
To enter incremental position reference values
S Output
To output incremental actual position values
O0.A

X461.8

O0.B

X461.8

Digital output 04)

DO

O1.A

X461.9

O1.B

X461.9

Digital output 14)

DO

O2.A

X461.10

O2.B

X461.10

Digital output 24)

DO

O3.A

X461.11

O3.B

X461.11

Digital output 34)

DO

Rated current per output:

500 mA
Maximum current per output:
600 mA
Maximum total current:
2.4 A
(valid for these eight outputs)
Voltage drop, typical: 250 mV at 500 mA
shortcircuit proof
Example:
If all eight outputs are simultaneously controlled, then the following is valid:
Current = 240 mA > OK
Current = 2.8 A > not OK, as the total
current is greater than 2.4 A.

Note:
S The power switched via these outputs is supplied via terminals P24/M24 (X431). This must be taken into account
when dimensioning the external supply.
S The digital outputs only function if there is an external supply (+24 V/0 V at terminals P24/M24).
1) I: Input; DO: Digital output, DI: Digital input, AO: Analog output; AI: Analog input; S: Supply
2) Can be freely parameterized. All of the digital inputs are debounced per software. When detecting the signal
a delay time of between 1 and 2 interpolation clock cycles (P1010) is therefore incurred.
3) I0.x is internally hardwired to the position sensing and acts there with almost no delay.
4) Can be freely parameterized. The digital outputs are updated in the interpolation clock cycle (P1010). A hardware
related delay time of approx. 200 s must be added.
5) The permissible voltage range for the common mode component of the individual encoder signals (A+. A. B+, B, C+,
C, D+, D, R+, R) is 1.5...3.5 V.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-101

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

Encoder
connection
X411/X412

S Unconditioned signal
Table 4-12

Pin

05.08
05.01

Encoder signal input of motor encoder X411, X412 (unconditioned signal

assignment)
X411 (axis 1)
X412 (axis 2)

Function

PENC

Encoder power supply

MENC

Encoder power supply ground

AP

Incremental signal for track A

AN

Inverse incremental signal for track A

Inner shield ground

BP

Incremental signal for track B

BN

Inverse incremental signal for track B

Inner shield ground

Reserved, do not use

10

ENDATCLK

EnDat interface clock signal

11

Reserved, do not use

12

XENDATCLK

Inverse clock signal, EnDat interface

13

THMOTP

KTY 84 (+) temperature sensor

14

PSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (P)

15

ENDATDAT

Data signal EnDat interface

16

MSENSE

Remote sense encoder power supply (N)

17

RP

Reference mark signal/zero pulse

18

RN

Inverse reference mark signal/zero pulse

19

CP

Singleturn absolute track signal C

20

CN

Inverse singleturn absolute track signal C

21

DP

Singleturn absolute track signal D

22

DN

Inverse singleturn absolute track signal D

23

XENDATDAT

Inverse EnDat interface data signal

24

Inner shield ground

25

THMOTCOM

KTY 84 () temperature sensor

Note:
The inputs on the control must not be assigned any signals other than the intended signals. Otherwise, sporadic or permanent malfunction or damage can occur. In particular,
any existing signals of additional temperature sensors (PTCs, NTCs, etc.) for spindle
applications must NOT be applied to the unused CP, CN, DP, or DN inputs when using
induction motors!
When Parking axis is selected, the encoder can be removed and inserted when power
is present!

4-102

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

4 Control Units
4.2 SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board

S Resolvers
Table 4-13
Pin

Encoder signal input of motor encoder X411, X412 (resolver)

X411 (axis 1)
X412 (axis 2)

Function

Reserved, do not use

Ground

AP

Resolver, sinusoidal

AN

Resolver, sinusoidal, inverted

Inner shield ground

BP

Resolver, cosine

BN

Resolver, cosines, inverted

Inner shield ground

EXC_POS

Resolver excitation (pos.)

10

Reserved for test purposes, do not use

11

EXC_NEG

Resolver excitation (neg.)

12

Reserved for test purposes, do not use

13

THMOTP

KTY 84 (+) temperature sensor

14

Reserved, do not use

15

Reserved for test purposes, do not use

16

Reserved, do not use

17

Reserved, do not use

18

Reserved, do not use

19

Reserved, do not use

20

Reserved, do not use

21

Reserved, do not use

22

Reserved, do not use

23

Reserved, do not use

24

Inner shield ground

25

THMOTCOM

KTY 84 () temperature sensor

Note:
The inputs on the control must not be assigned any signals other than the intended signals. Otherwise, sporadic or permanent malfunctions can occur.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-103

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

4.3

05.01

HLA module control board

Description

The hydraulics (HLA) module provides a means of controlling hydraulic axes

directly from the SINUMERIK 840D system via the digital drive bus.
The HLA module is a control unit belonging to the modular SIMODRIVE 611
converter system mounted in a 50 mm wide carrier module (universal empty
housing). The gating and closedloop control electronics for operating hydraulic
drives are integrated in the HLA module.
The control unit can also be used as an ANA control unit for analog axes. This
doubleaxis board can be used in mixed operation (HLA/ANA).

Hydraulic drives have the same significance as electric drives also when combined within an interpolating group.

Note
The HLA module is described in detail in:
References:

Features

/FBHLA/, SINUMERIK 840D SIMODRIVE 611 digital

HLA module, Description of Functions

The HLA module has the following features:

S Software and data

The communications interface is compatible with SIMODRIVE 611
SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD) for supported services. Code and data structure is
analogous to SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). The hydraulics software is stored as a separate program code in the control system.

S Hardware
Integration into the SIMODRIVE 611 system is compatible with
SIMODRIVE 611 digital SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). Essentially, this involves the
following interfaces:

Drive bus

Equipment bus
Power supply concept

S HLA control unit (2axis)

Velocity precontrol, controller

Force control
Voltage output for actuators

Connection for two pressure sensors per axis

Control of hydraulic control valves

S Terminals and diagnostics

4-104

Control of a hydraulic shutoff valve

BERO input per axis

Modulespecific enable signal

Test sockets (diagnostics)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

05.01

4.3.1

System overview
A complete SINUMERIK 840D with HLA module comprises of various individual
components. These are listed below.

MMC CPU

e.g. SIMATIC S7300

Operator panel

HHU

Machine control panel

MCP

Full CNC keyboard

Line infeed
Distributor box
Cable distributor

NC CPU
Cable distributor

Hydraulic drive

PCMCIA
Equipment bus
NCU box
HLA module
NE

Position sensing

NCU HLA
module

Pressure sensor A
Battery and fan
slot
Digital I/O
(highspeed NC I/O)

Pressure sensor B

Measurement (2x)

Handwheel
(2x)
(1x of M)
SITOP power
(external
power supply)

Modulating valve

BERO
inputs

External 26.5 V
supply

Fig. 4-8

Shutoff valve

Enable
Note:
Hydraulics shown for one axis

System components

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-105

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

05.01

Modulating valve

Modulating valve

Pressure sensor A

Pressure sensor A

Pressure sensor B

Pressure sensor B

Position sensing

Position sensing

Shutoff valve

Shutoff valve

Hydraulic drive, axis 1

Hydraulic drive, axis 2

X102

Position measuring system

Axis 2

HLA

X101

Axis 1

Position measuring system

X111

X112

A
Pressure sensing

Modulating valve

X122

X121

B
A
Pressure sensing

Modulating valve

X431

Electronic ground
Shutoff valve, axis 1
Reserved, do not use
External 26.5 V supply
Power enable, term. 663
Internal +24 V enable voltage

Drive bus

X1341

M
PV1
MV1
C1
P24
M24
663
9

X35
X34

X1141

DACs

X432

M
PV2
MV2
C2
B1
19
B2
9

Electronic ground
Shutoff valve, axis 2
Reserved, do not use
BERO input, axis 1
Internal 0 V enable voltage
BERO input, axis 2
Internal +24 V enable voltage

Drive bus/drive bus terminator

at the last module

Equipment bus interface (X151)

Fig. 4-9

4-106

Connection configuration for HLA module

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

4.3.2

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

Wiring

Line supply
connection

The SINUMERIK 840D and the HLA module are supplied from the
SIMODRIVE line supply infeed or from the SIMODRIVE monitoring module via
the equipment bus. There must be at least one NE module in the equipment
group when an HLA module is used. No provision has been made for any other
type of voltage supply and failure to use the supply provided could damage the
unit.

Note
It is not permissible to operate an HLA module on its own with a SIMODRIVE
monitoring module!

Power is supplied to downstream electrical axes via the DC link busbars (40
mm2) of the carrier module.

Measuring
systems

One position encoder for each axis can be evaluated on the HLA module.

S X101:

Axis 1

S X102:

Axis 2

The measuring system must always be plugged into the connector of the associated axis.
Table 4-14

Connectors X101, X102; 15pin subD plug connector (twotier)

X1011)

Pin

X1021)

Function

PENC0

PENC2

Encoder power supply 5 V $5%, 300 mA

Encoder power supply ground

AP0

AP2

Incremental signal for track A

AN0

AN2

Inverse incremental signal for track A

ENDATDAT0

ENDATDAT2

EnDat or SSI interface data signal

BP0

BP2

Incremental signal for track B

BN0

BN2

Inverse incremental signal for track B

XENDATDAT0

XENDATDAT2 Inverse EnDat or

SSI interface data signal

PSENSE0

PSENSE2

Remote sense encoder power supply (P)

10

RP0

RP2

Zero pulse/reference mark signal A

11

MSENSE0

MSENSE2

Remote sense encoder power supply (M)

12

RN0

RN2

Inverse zero pulse/reference mark signal A

13

Ground (for internal shields)

14

ENDATCLK0

ENDATCLK2

EnDat or SSI interface clock signal

15

XBMICLK0

XBMICLK2

Inverse EnDat interface clock signal

Note: The SSI encoder requires an external 24 V power supply

1)

The permissible voltage range for the common mode component of the
individual encoder signals (AP. AN. BP, BP, RP, RP) is 1.5...3.5 V.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-107

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

Pressure sensor
system

05.01

Connection for two pressure sensors per axis

S X111:

Axis 1 (sensors 1A, 1B)

S X112:

Axis 2 (sensors 2A, 2B)

Table 4-15

Connectors X111, X112; each 15pin subD socket connector

X111

Pin

X112

Type

Function

1)

P24DS

P24DS

External +24 V supply for the

pressure sensor

P24DS

P24DS

External +24 V supply for the

pressure sensor

Not assigned

Not assigned

M24EXT

M24EXT

External 0 V supply for the

pressure sensor

Not assigned

Not assigned

Not assigned

M24EXT

M24EXT

External 0 V supply for the

pressure sensor

10

M24EXT

M24EXT

Extra pin for jumper between pins 1011 with

3wire connection

11

PIST1BN

PIST2BN

Analog actual value signal, reference ground

12

PIST1BP

PIST2BP

Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V

13

M24EXT

M24EXT

Extra pin for jumper between pins 1314 with

3wire connection

14

PIST1AN

PIST2AN

Analog actual value signal, reference ground

15

PIST1AP

PIST2AP

Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V

1)

I = Input, O = Output

The inputs are differential with 40 k input resistance.

The input voltage range is 0...+10 V.
The supply output has an electronic shortcircuit protection function.
The supply output is dimensioned for a total current (4 sensors) of 200 mA.
Supply for pressure sensors with 26.5 V "2% according to the external infeed
at X431.

Notice
The external 26.5 V supply voltage cannot be replaced by a 24 V supply
voltage.

4-108

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

05.01

Modulating valve

S X121:

Axis 1

S X122:

Axis 2

Table 4-16

Connectors X121, X122; both are 15pin subD socket connectors

X121

Pin

X122

Type

Function

1)

P24RV1

P24RV2

+24 V switched

P24RV1

P24RV2

+24 V switched

P24RV1

P24RV2

+24 V switched

P24RV1

P24RV2

+24 V switched

USOLL1N

USOLL2N

Analog setpoint output, reference ground

USOLL1P

USOLL2P

Analog setpoint output +/10 V

M24EXT

M24EXT

24 V external ground

10

M24EXT

M24EXT

24 V external ground

24 V external ground

Electronic ground

Electronic ground

11

M24EXT

M24EXT

12

13

14

UIST1N

UIST2N

Analog valve actualvalue input, reference

ground

15

UIST1P

UIST2P

Analog valve actualvalue input, +/10 V

1)

Not assigned
Electronic ground

I = Input, O = Output

The analog valve actual value inputs are differential with 100 k input resistance.
The current ratings of the 24 V outputs of the control valves are

S for an ambient temperature of 40 C

2.0 A

S for an ambient temperature of 55 C

1.5 A

for the mean current value with a load cycle of 10 s duration.

The temperature corner points may be interpolated linearly.
The shortterm current rating of the control valve outputs is 3.0 A (200 ms).
In the event of an overload, the F1900 or F1901 fuse on the HLA control unit
blow.

Fuse

The switched 24 V outputs for axes 1 and 2 are protected by F1900 (axis 1) or
F1901 (axis 2) miniature fuses.
Value:

2.5 AF/250 V; 5x20 mm UL

From:

WickmannWerke GmbH
Annenstrasse 113
58453 Witten, Germany
or
Postfach 2520
58415 Witten

Order No.:

194

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-109

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

02.12
05.01

Terminals
Shutoff valves (axisspecific), external 26.5 V supply, enable contact, BERO
inputs

S X431:
S X432:

Axis 1

Table 4-17

Connector X431; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector

Pin

Axis 2

X431

Type

Function

1)

Electronic ground

PV1

+24 V shutoff valve axis 1

MV1

Ground for shutoff valve for axis 1

C1

Reserved, do not use

P24

Input for external +26.5 V

M24

Input for external 0 V

663

Modulespecific enable signal

Internal +24 V enable voltage, term. 9

1)

Typ. voltage/
limit values

Max. 2.0 A

26.5 V "2%

21 V ... 30 V

I = Input, O = Output

Table 4-18
Pin

Connector X432; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector

X432

Type

Function

1)

Electronic ground

PV2

+24 V shutoff valve axis 2

MV2

Ground for shutoff valve for axis 2

C2

Reserved, do not use

B1

BERO input, axis 1

19

Internal enable voltage, ground, term.19

B2

BERO input, axis 2

Internal +24 V enable voltage, term. 9

1)

Typ. voltage/
limit values

Max. 2.0 A

15 V ... 30 V

15 V ... 30 V

I = Input, O = Output

Max. terminal crosssection 2.5 mm2.

4-110

Caution
The +24 V outputs for shutoff valves for axes 1 and 2 are shortcircuit proof.
The energy absorbed when inductive loads are disconnected must be limited to
1.7 J by the user. When the supply polarity is reversed, the outputs are not
protected against overload.

Warning
If the polarity of the 26.5 V supply is reversed, then the shutoff valves will
open immediately, even if the NC or closedloop control is not in operation!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.3 HLA module control board

05.01

Notice
Each of the shutoff valves must be connected directly using two conductors
connected to pins 2/3 of X431 or X432!
A currentcompensated interference suppression coil is inserted at the input for
the external incoming supply terminal P24, terminal M24 (pins 5 and 6 of
X431).
Terminal M24 and terminal MV1/MV2 may therefore not be reversed or
shortcircuited.
The internal enable voltage (FRP/9) is provided in order to supply the BEROs,
and terminals 663 may not be used to supply the hydraulics components. The
hydraulic components must be supplied via incoming supply P24. The voltages
may not be connected in parallel.

Input enable

Modulespecific enabling commands are issued by terminal 663. As no power

section is installed, no relay is available. The input is therefore evaluated via
optocouplers in the HLA module and also acts on the shutoff valves.
The enable voltage can be taken from terminal 9.
Terminal 663 is referenced to the internal enable voltage (ground, terminal 19).

4.3.3

Test sockets (diagnostics)

Measuring sockets

Functionality

The startup tool or an MMC102/103 can be used to assign internal signals to

the test sockets on the 611D drive (in conjunction with SINUMERIK 840D),
where the signals are then available as analog values.

DAC1

DAC2

DAC3

Ground

Three 8bit digital/analog converter (DAC) channels are available on the 611D
hydraulics module. An analog image of various drive signals can be connected
through to a test socket via these converters.
Only a window of the 24bit wide drive signals can be displayed with the 8 bits
(=1 byte) of the DAC. For this reason, the shift factor must be set to determine
how fine the quantization of the selected signal must be. The normalization factor is determined when parameterizing and displayed to the user.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-111

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

4.4

05.01

ANA module control board

Description

Up to two analog axes can be controlled by using the ANA control unit. The
ANA module results when the ANA control unit is inserted in the 50 mm wide
universal empty housing.
The control unit can also be used as an HLA control unit for hydraulic axes. This
doubleaxis board can be used in mixed operation (HLA/ANA).
An analog axis can be used very much like a digital axis. It can be programmed
like a digital interpolating path axis or spindle. Pure functions of the SIMODRIVE
611 drive control system are, of course, not possible for external drive units
linked via an analog speed setpoint interface. (These are functions which are
dependent on feedback within the axis and communication by means of the
drive bus, e.g. SINUMERIK Safety Integrated.) If necessary, separate EMC
measures must be taken for external drive units.

Note
The ANA module is described in detail in:
References:

Features

/FBANA/, SINUMERIK 840D SIMODRIVE 611 digital

ANA module, Description of Functions

The ANA module has the following features:

S Software and data

The communications interface is compatible with SIMODRIVE 611
SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD) for supported services. Code and data structure is
analogous to SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD).

S Hardware
Integration into the SIMODRIVE 611 system is compatible with
SIMODRIVE 611 digital SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). Essentially, this involves the
following interfaces:

Drive bus

Equipment bus

Power supply concept

S ANA control unit (2axis)

nset output $10 V

Connection for 2 sensors per axis

Control of an analog drive amplifier

S Terminals and diagnostics

4-112

BERO input per axis

Modulespecific enable signal

Test sockets (diagnostics)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

4.4.1

System overview
A complete 840D control with ANA module comprises various individual components. These are listed below.

MMC CPU

e.g. SIMATIC S7300

HHU

Operator panel

Machine control panel

MCP

Full CNC keyboard

Line infeed
Distributor box
NC CPU

Cable distributor

Cable distributor

Analog axis

PCMCIA
Equipment bus
NCU box

Position sensing

ANA module
NE

NCU ANA
module

Analog sensors
Battery and fan
slot
Digital I/O
(highspeed NC I/O)

0...10 V
Analog
drive amplifier

Measurement (2x)

Handwheel
(2x)
(1x of M)

BERO inputs

SITOP power
Enable
(external
power supply)
External 26.5 V supply (this is only
required when using terminals
PV1/MV1 or PV2/MV2)

Fig. 4-10

Analog axis

Note:
Shown for one analog axis

System components

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-113

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

ANA control unit

Axis 1

Measuring system (encoder connection)

X101

Sensor detection
X111

External drive amplifier

X121

15

Measuring system (encoder connection)

X102

Sensor detection
X112

External drive amplifier

X122

nset, $10 V
nset, reference ground

nset, $10 V
nset, reference ground

15 1
X432

X431
M
PV1
MV1
C1
P24
M24
663
9

Axis 2

Electronic ground
24 V switched, axis 1
Reserved, do not use
External 26.5 V supply
Power enable, term. 663
Internal +24 V enable voltage

M
PV2
MV2
C2
B1
19
B2
9

Electronic ground
24 V switched, axis 2
Reserved, do not use
BERO input, axis 1
Internal 0 V enable voltage
BERO input, axis 2
Internal +24 V enable voltage

DACs
Drive bus
X141

Drive bus
X341

Equipment bus
X151

Fig. 4-11

4-114

ANA control unit (2axis)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

4.4.2

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

Wiring

Line supply
connection

SINUMERIK 840D and the ANA module are supplied from the SIMODRIVE line
supply voltage or from the SIMODRIVE monitoring module via the equipment
bus. There must be at least one NE module in the equipment group when an
ANA module is used. No provision has been made for any other type of voltage
supply and failure to use the supply provided could damage the unit.

Notice
It is not permissible to operate an ANA module on its own with a SIMODRIVE
monitoring module!

Power is supplied to downstream electrical axes via the DC link busbars (40
mm2) of the carrier module.

Measuring
systems

One position encoder for each axis can be evaluated on the ANA module.

S X101:

Axis 1

S X102:

Axis 2

The measuring system must always be plugged into the connector of the associated axis.
Table 4-19

Connectors X101, X102; 15pin subD plug connector (twotier)

X1011)

Pin

X1021)

Function

PENC0

PENC2

Encoder power supply

Encoder power supply ground

AP0

AP2

Incremental signal A

AN0

AN2

Inverse incremental signal A

BMIDAT0

BMIDAT2

Data signal EnDat interface

BP0

BP2

Incremental signal B

BN0

BN2

Inverse incremental signal B

XBMIDAT0

XBMIDAT2

Inverse EnDat interface data signal

PSENSE0

PSENSE2

Remote sense encoder power supply (P)

10

RP0

RP2

Incremental signal R

11

MSENSE0

MSENSE2

Remote sense encoder power supply (M)

12

RN0

RN2

Inverse incremental signal R

13

Ground (for internal shields)

14

BMICLK0

BMICLK2

EnDat interface clock signal

15

XBMICLK0

XBMICLK2

Inverse EnDat interface clock signal

1)

The permissible voltage range for the common mode component of the
individual encoder signals (AP. AN. BP, BP, RP, RP) is 1.5...3.5 V.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-115

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

Analog sensors
Connection for two sensors per axis

S X111:

Axis 1 (sensors 1A, 1B)

S X112:

Axis 2 (sensors 2A, 2B)

Table 4-20

Connectors X111, X112; each 15pin subD socket connector

Pin

X111

P24DS

P24DS

External +24 V supply for the sensor

P24DS

P24DS

External +24 V supply for the sensor

X112

Type
1)

Function

Not assigned

Not assigned

M24EXT

M24EXT

External 0 V supply for the sensor

Not assigned

Not assigned

Not assigned

M24EXT

M24EXT

External 0 V supply for the sensor

10

M24EXT

M24EXT

Extra pin for jumper between pins 1011 with

3wire connection

11

PIST1BN

PIST2BN

Analog actual value signal, reference ground

12

PIST1BP

PIST2BP

Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V

13

M24EXT

M24EXT

Extra pin for jumper between pins 1314 with

3wire connection

14

PIST1AN

PIST2AN

Analog actual value signal, reference ground

15

PIST1AP

PIST2AP

Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V

1)

I = Input, O = Output

The inputs are differential inputs with an input resistance of 40 k each.

The input voltage range of the actual value inputs is 0...+10 V.
The supply output has an electronic shortcircuit protection function.
The supply output is dimensioned for a total current (4 sensors) of 200 mA.

4-116

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

Analog setpoints
and actual values

S X121:

Axis 1

S X122:

Axis 2

Table 4-21

Connectors X121, X122; both are 15pin subD socket connectors

X121

Pin

X122

Type

Function

1)

P24RV1

P24RV2

P24EXT switched, from X431.5

P24RV1

P24RV2

P24EXT switched, from X431.5

P24RV1

P24RV2

P24EXT switched, from X431.5

P24RV1

P24RV2

P24EXT switched, from X431.5

USOLL1N

USOLL2N

Analog setpoint output, reference ground

USOLL1P

USOLL2P

Analog setpoint output +/10 V

M24EXT

M24EXT

M24EXT, from X431.6

10

M24EXT

M24EXT

M24EXT, from X431.6

M24EXT, from X431.6

Electronic ground

Electronic ground

11

M24EXT

M24EXT

12

13

14

UIST1N

UIST2N

Analog actual value input, reference ground

15

UIST1P

UIST2P

Analog valve actualvalue input, +/10 V

1)

Not assigned
Electronic ground

I = Input, O = Output

The analog actual value inputs are differential inputs with an input resistance of
100 k each.
The load capability of the 24 V outputs (P24RV1/2) is

S for an ambient temperature of 40 C

2.0 A

S for an ambient temperature of 55 C

1.5 A

for the mean current value with a load cycle of 10 s duration.

The temperature corner points may be interpolated linearly.
The shortterm current rating of the 24 V outputs is 3.0 A (200 ms).
In the event of an overload, the F1900 or F1901 fuse on the ANA control unit
will blow.

Fuse

The switched 24 V outputs for axes 1 and 2 are protected by F1900 (axis 1) or
F1901 (axis 2) miniature fuses.
Value:

2.5 AF/250 V; 5x20 mm UL

From:

WickmannWerke GmbH
Annenstrasse 113
58453 Witten, Germany
or
Postfach 2520
58415 Witten

Order No.:

19194

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-117

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

Terminals

02.12
05.01

External 26.5 V infeed, enable, BERO inputs

S X431:
S X432:

Axis 1

Table 4-22

Connector X431; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector

Pin

Axis 2

X431

Type

Function

1)

Electronic ground

PV1

P24EXT switched, axis 1

MV1

M24EXT switched, axis 1

C1

Reserved, do not use

P24

Input for external +24 V

M24

Input for external 0 V

663

Modulespecific enable signal

Enable voltage, internal, +24 V

1)

Typ. voltage/
limit values

Max. 2.0 A

26.5 V "2%

21 V...30 V

I = Input, O = Output

Table 4-23
Pin

Connector X432; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector

X432

Type

Function

1)

Electronic ground

PV2

P24EXT switched, axis 2

MV2

M24EXT switched, axis 2

C2

Reserved, do not use

B1

BERO input, axis 1

19

Internal enable voltage, ground, term.19

B2

BERO input, axis 2

Enable voltage, internal, +24 V

1)

Typ. voltage/
limit values

Max. 2.0 A

15 V...30 V

15 V...30 V

I = Input, O = Output

Notice
A connection (jumper) between X431.6 and X432.3 is not permissible!

Max. terminal crosssection 2.5 mm2.

It is only necessary to supply terminals X431 pins 5 and 6 with 24 V if the 24 V
outputs of connectors X111/112, X121/122 or X431/432 are to be used.

4-118

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

Input enable

Caution
The +24 V outputs for shutoff valves for axes 1 and 2 are shortcircuit proof.
The energy absorbed when inductive loads are disconnected must be limited to
1.7 J by the user. When the supply polarity is reversed, the outputs are not
protected against overload.

The modulespecific enable is realized using terminal 663. The input is evaluated via the optocoupler in the ANA module. The enable voltage can be taken
from terminal 9.
Terminal 663 is referenced to the internal enable voltage (ground, terminal 19).

4.4.3

Bus interfaces

Drive bus

(refer to SIMODRIVE 611 digital)

S X141:
S X341:

Input
Output

A bus terminator must be plugged into the last module.

Equipment bus

(refer to SIMODRIVE 611 digital)

S X151:

Equipment bus
J

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4-119

4 Control Units
4.4 ANA module control board

05.01

4-120

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Power Modules
5.1

Description

General

Together with the control module, the power module forms the drive module, for
feed or main spindle applications.

Motors that can be

connected

The power modules can be used to operate the following motors:

S 1FT6, 1FK6 and 1FK7 servo motors

S 1FW6 builtin torque motors (direct drives)
S 1FN linear motors
S 1PH main spindle motors
S Standard induction motors; if IM operation is selected, only inverter pulse
frequencies of 4 kHz and 8 kHz are permissible.

S 1PM hollowshaft motors for main spindle drives (direct drives)

S 1FE1 main spindle motors
S 2SP1 motor spindle
S Thirdparty motors, if according to the motor manufacturer the motor meets
the requirements for sine modulation, insulation, and dV/dt resistance (see
Chapter 8.1).
For special motors with a low leakage inductance (where the controller settings
are not adequate), it may be necessary to provide a series reactor in the form of
a 3arm iron core reactor (not a Corovac reactor) and/or increase the inverter
pulse frequencies of the converter. Motors with a low leakage inductance are,
from experience, motors that can achieve high stator frequencies (maximum
motor stator frequency > 300 Hz) or motors with a high rated current (rated
current > 85 A).

Available power
modules

A wide range of 1axis or 2axis power modules is available. These modules

are graded according to the current ratings and can be supplied with three different cooling techniques.
The currentrelated data refers to the seriespreset values. At higher frequencies of the fundamental waves or for higher clock cycle frequencies, ambient
temperatures and installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level, power
deratings apply as subsequently listed.

Wiring

Matched, preassembled cables are available to connect the motors. Ordering

information is provided in the Motors section of the NC 60 catalog.
Shield terminal plates are available to meet EMC requirements when using
shielded power cables.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-121

5 Power Modules
5.1 Description

10.04
02.12
02.07
05.01

The equipment bus cable is included in the scope of supply of the power module. The drive bus cables must be ordered separately for the digital system.
The current data of the power modules (PM modules) are normalized values to
which all of the control units refer. The output currents can be limited by the control unit being used.

Caution
After the control unit has been inserted, the retaining screws of the control unit
front panel must be tightened in order to establish a good electrical connection
to the module housing.
The power module is equipped with overload protection, which when correspondingly dimensioned, prevents the motors and cables from being overloaded. The overload protection functions as described in the documentation
SINUMERIK 840D/810D drive functions, Chapter 2.4.1. It does not fully comply
with the requirements as specified in UL508C Version 2010, regarding cable
protection

Power module,
internal cooling

Control unit
(refer to Chapter 4)

50 mm power module

M3/0.8 Nm

Order number

M4/1.8 Nm

Type plate/Order No.

PE

Fig. 5-1

5-122

Power module with control unit

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
10.04
05.01

5.2

5 Power Modules
5.2 Operating modes

Operating modes

Feed drives

S with synchronous motors (FD)

Main spindle
drives

1FT6, 1FK6 and 1FK7 servo motors

1FW6 builtin torque motors (direct drives)

1FN linear motors

S with induction motors (MSDIM)

1PH main spindle motors

1PM hollowshaft motors for main spindle drives (direct drives)

standard induction motors (sensorless)

If IM operation is selected, only inverter pulse frequencies of
4 kHz and 8 kHz are permissible.

S with synchronous motors (MSDSRM)

1FE1 main spindle motors

2SP1 motor spindle

Note
For the MSDSRM operating mode (highspeed MSD synchronous
applications), inverter pulse frequencies are set that differ from the rated
frequencies. This consequently ensures an optimum ratio between the inverter
pulse frequency and the output frequency.
The derating resulting from this should be taken into account when selecting
the power module.
The frequencies relevant when engineering the system should be appropriately
taken from the following documentation.

Readers note
Technical data and ordering data, refer to
Reference: /PJFE/ Configuration Manual, 1FE1 Synchronous Builtin
Motors
/BU/
Catalog NC 60 2004
/PMS/ Configuration Manual ECO Motor Spindles for
2SP1 Main Spindle Drives
WEISS GmbH/Operating Instructions ECO Spindle Units Type 2SP1...

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-123

5 Power Modules
5.3 Technical data

5.3

10.04
05.08
12.07
03.08
05.01

Technical data

General

The technical data of the power modules is specified in Table 5-1 for the 1axis
version and in Table 5-2 for the 2axis version.
The specified values are valid for:

S The specified rated frequency (inverter pulse frequency)

S Maximum ambient temperature of 40 C
S Installation altitude<1000 m above sea level

Derating must be applied for conditions that deviate from those specified above.
The power modules do not have any overload protection, but only a current
acquisition without its own processing. The overload protection is realized in the
SIMODRIVE 611 control unit.

Definition of the
currents

Also refer to the definition of the load duty cycles (Fig. 5-2 to 5-5)

S FD mode

In
Imax

Continuous nominal current, rated current

Peak current

S Operating modes, MSDIM and MSDSRM

In

Continuous nominal current, rated current

IS640%
Imax

Current for maximum of 4 min. for the S6 load duty cycle

Peak current

Imin

Minimum motor current

nFS
I0Mot

Speed at the start of field weakening

Motor noload current in Arms

The following restrictive conditions must be met:

for induction motors:
The noload current of the motor (I0Mot) must be less than the rated current of the power module (according to Table 5-1).

On the basis of the actual current value resolution, the lowest occurring
noload current of the motor must satisfy the following condition:

nFS
nmax

 I0Mot

Imin

(Imin according to Table 5-1)

for synchronous motors:

A ratio of Imax_powersection/I0_100K (motor) X 5 should not be exceeded for
synchronous motors.

Definition of the
power ratings

Appropriate values are specified in Table 5-1 and 5-2 to dimension the cabinet
cooling. These are defined as follows:

S PVtot

Total power loss dissipated by the module

S PVext

Power loss that can be dissipated externally or using

hose cooling

S PVint

Power loss that cannot be dissipated using hose cooling or

external cooling (this power loss remains in the control cabinet)

For components with internal cooling, the complete dissipated power loss remains in the control cabinet.

5-124

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
10.04
05.01

5 Power Modules
5.3 Technical data

Table 5-1

Power modules in the 1axis version

6SN112j1AA0j

0HAj

0AAj

0BAj 0CAj 0DAj

0AAj

0FAj

0LAj

0EAj

0FAj

0JAj

0KAj

3 internal cooling
4 external cooling1)
Mounting frame external
cooling 6SN11620BA04
Type of cooling

0BAj

0CAj

Non
ventilated

0EAj

Fan

For operation of induction motors

Nominal current In

Aeff

24

30

45

Current for S640% IS640%

Aeff

10

32

40

60

Peak current Imax

Aeff

16

32

51

76

Inverter pulse frequency f0

kHz

60

85

120

200

80

110

150

250

102

127

193

257

3.2

Derating factor XL

50

55

Power loss, total PVtot

30

40

74

Power loss, internal PVint

12

16

29

89

32

Power loss, external PVext

18

24

45

171

288

260

50

320

460

55

685

850

1290

2170

19

30

100

190

325

441

655

750

1100

1845

For operation of synchronous motors

Nominal current In

Aeff

18

28

42

56

70

100

140

Peak current Imax

Aeff

10

18

36

56

64

112

140

100

210

Inverter pulse frequency f0

kHz

1910

Derating factor XL

55

50

55

Power loss, total PVtot

35

50

90

190

300

460

645

730

1300

Power loss, internal PVint

14

19

35

65

30

25

25

90

170

250

Power loss, external PVext

21

31

55

125

270

435

620

640

1130

1660

General technical data for the regulated infeed

Input voltage
Minimum motor current
Transistor limit current

Regulated: 600 V or 625 V DC, unregulated: UDC link=USupply  1.35

V DC

Maximum output voltage

Imin5)

Veff

Ua_max = UDC link/1.4

0.6

1.1

1.8

3.6

5.7

8.5

11

14

21

28

15

25

50

80

108

160

200

300

400

Efficiency
Module width
Weight, approx.

0.98
mm

50

100

150

kg

6.5

9.5

13

Maximum air flow of fan

(volumetric flow, unobstructed
flow per fan)
m3/hr
Motor connection

19
Connectors

22

56

2x56

2x563)

3002)
26
2x512)

28

Terminals

1) For a module width of 300 mm with external cooling, mounting frames are required that must be separately ordered.
The fan assembly required to mount the builton fan is included in the scope of supply of the mounting frame.
The builton fan must be separately ordered! Mounting frames are also available for smaller module widths. However,
these are not required if openings are cut out in the rear cabinet panel for the module heatsinks as shown
in this Configuration Manual.
2) For 6SN11231AA0j0JAj/0KAj and 6SN11241AA0j0FAj/0JAj/0KAj, the builton fan
6SN11620BA020AA2 is required.
3) Is applicable for internal cooling. For external cooling with mounted fan 2) 400 m3/h
4) True for induction motors and applies to the noload current.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-125

5 Power Modules
5.3 Technical data

Table 5-2

10.04
05.08
05.01

Power modules in the 2axis version

6SN112j1AB00

0HAj

0AAj

0BAj

0CAj

3 internal cooling
4 external cooling
0AAj

Mounting frame external

cooling 6SN11620BA04
Type of cooling

0GAj
Fan

For operation of induction motors1)

Nominal current In

Aeff

24

Current for S640% IS640%

Aeff

10

32

Peak current Imax

Aeff

16

32

Inverter pulse frequency f0

kHz

3.2

Derating factor XL

55

Power loss, total PVtot

76

118

226

538

Power loss, internal PVint

28

42

74

184

Power loss, external PVext

48

76

152

354

For operation of synchronous motors

Nominal current In

Aeff

18

Peak current Imax

Aeff

10

18

36

Inverter pulse frequency f0

kHz

Derating factor XL

55

Power loss, total PVtot

70

100

180

380

Power loss, internal PVint

27

38

69

130

Power loss, external PVext

43

62

111

250

General technical data for the regulated infeed

Input voltage
Maximum output voltage

V DC

regulated: 600 V or 625 V DC, unregulated: UDC link=USupply  1.35

Veff

Ua_max = UDC link/1.4

Minimum motor current Imin2)

0.6

1.1

1.8

3.6

Transistor limit current

15

25

50

Efficiency
Module width
Weight, approx.
Maximum air flow of fan
(volumetric flow)
Motor connection

0.98
mm

50

100

kg

13.5

19

56

m3/hr
Connectors

1) For IM operation, corresponding to the selected 4/8 kHz inverter pulse frequency, an appropriate derating must be
observed.
2) True for induction motors and applies to the noload current.

5-126

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

5 Power Modules
5.3 Technical data

Load duty cycles

S Rated load duty cycles for FD operation

I
Imax
In
0.25 s

5
t

10 s
Fig. 5-2

Peak current load duty cycle with preload condition

I

Imax
In

2.65 s

t
10 s
Fig. 5-3

Peak current duty cycle without preloading condition

S Rated load duty cycles for MSDIM and MSDSRM

I
Imax
Is6
In
0.7 In

4 min

10 min
Fig. 5-4

S6 load cycle with preload condition

I
Imax
Is6
In
0.7 In

10 s

60 s
Fig. 5-5

S6 peakcurrent load cycle with preload condition

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-127

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

5.4

10.04
05.08
05.01

Current reduction/derating
The current has to be reduced if one or more of the following limitations/secondary conditions apply:

S Selected inverter pulse frequency fT > reference frequency f0

S Installation altitude>1000 m above sea level
S Ambient temperature TU > 40 C

Notice
The currents must be reduced for In, Is6 and Imax in the same way.
All of the relevant limitations/secondary conditions must be taken into account
with an appropriate reduction factor (refer to the calculation example, Chapter
5.4.4).

5.4.1

Pulse frequency power modules

The current should be reduced from the reference frequency f0 onwards according to the following rule:
XT = 100%

Definitions

Calculation
example

5-128

(100% XL)  (f f0)

8 kHz f0

The pulse frequency of the power modules (inverters) must be at least factor 5
for the maximum motor frequency!
S f0
Pulse frequency reference frequency in accordance with the
technical data

S f
S TU
S XL

set inverter pulse frequency

S XT
S XH
S XTU

derating factor for the inverter pulse frequency

ambient temperature
power module-specific derating factor for the
inverter pulse frequency
derating factor for the ambient temperature
derating factor for the installation altitude as a %

See Chapter 5.4.4

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
10.04
05.01

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

Pulse frequency
dependent
derating

Factor XT, diagram only for illustration, calculation example in Chapter 5.4.4.

S for MSDIM and MSDSRM or IM operation (sensorless)

110
105
100

Power in %

95
90
85
80
75
70
65

XL = 55%
XL = 50%

60
55
50
45
40
2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

7.5

8.0

Inverter pulse frequency in kHz

Fig. 5-6

Power as a function of the inverter pulse frequency for MSDIM and MSDRSM

S for FD

Power in %

110
105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65

XL = 55%
XL = 50%

60
55
50
45
40
2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

7.5

8.0

Inverter pulse frequency in kHz

Fig. 5-7

Power as a function of the inverter pulse frequency for FD

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-129

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

5.4.2

10.04
05.08
05.01

Temperaturedependent derating
For an ambient temperature T > 40 C, derating is required according to the
following rule:
XTU=100% 2.5% (TU 40 C)

110
105
100

Power in %

85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
30.0

Fig. 5-8

35.0

40.0

45.0

50.0
Ambient temperature in C

55.0

Power as a function of the temperature

Notice
The maximum ambient temperature for operation of TU = 55 C may not be
exceeded.

5.4.3

Installation heightdependent derating

For an installation altitude h > 1000 m above sea level, derating is required according to the following derating characteristic:

110
105
100
95
Power in %

95
90

90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
0

Fig. 5-9

5-130

500

1000

1500

2000

2500

3000
3500
4000
4500
Installation altitude above sea level in m

5000

Power relative to the installation altitude

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
10.04
05.01

5.4.4

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

Calculation examples

Temperature/
installation
altitude derating

S Supplementary conditions
Power module:

6SN11231AA0j0EA1

Operating mode:

FD

Inverter pulse frequency:

6.3 kHz

Installation altitude

2000 m above sea level

Ambient temperature

45 C

XL = 55%
f0 = 4.0 kHz
IN = 56 A
Imax = 112 A

S Determining the derating factors

XT = 100%

(100% 55%)  (6.3 kHz 4.0 kHz)

= 74.125 %
8.0 kHz 4.0 kHz

XTU = 100% 2.5%  (45 C 40 C) = 87.5%

XH [ 85%

S Calculating the permissible current values

INred = IN  XT  XTU  XH = 56 A  0.74125  0.875  0.85 = 30.8 A
Imaxred = Imax  XT  XTU  XH = 112 A  0.74125  0.875  0.85 = 61.7 A

Current reduction

Power module:

6SN11231AA0j0EA1

Operating mode:

FD

Inverter pulse frequency:

Installation altitude

6.3 kHz
<1000 m above sea level

Ambient temperature

<40 C
XL = 55%
f0 = 4.0 kHz
IN = 56 A
Imax = 112 A

(100% 55%)  (6.3 kHz 4.0 kHz)

= 74.125 %
8.0 kHz 4.0 kHz
IN6.3 = IN  XT = 56 A  0.74125 = 41.5 A
Imax 6.3 = Imax  XT = 112 A  0.74125 = 83.0 A

XT = 100%

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-131

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

10.04
05.08
05.01

Derating example

S Installation altitude: e.g. Puebla, Mexico, 2200 m above sea level

Derating to 83% IN necessary!

S Temperature: e.g. internal temperature of the switchgear cabinet with 45 _C,

no airconditioner
Derating to 87% IN necessary!

S Power module clock cycle frequency 6SN11231AA00EA2

XL = 50%: e.g. for a 6.3 kHz spindle application

Derating to 68% IN necessary!
Result:
Derating for the power unit to:
83% S 87% S 68% [ 50% IN required!
Derating for the line supply infeed to:
83 % S 87% [ 72% IN required!

5-132

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
10.04
05.01

Table 5-3

5 Power Modules
5.4 Current reduction/derating

Power modules in a 1axis version, derating for MSDSRM or IM operation (sensorless)

6SN112j1AA0j

0HAj 0AAj 0BAj 0CAj 0DAj

Type of cooling

0LAj

Non
ventilated

0EAj

0FAj

0JAj

0KAj

Fan

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 4.0 kHz

Rated current IN

2.8

4.6

7.3

22.0

27.8

41.6

55.0

77.9

111.0

185.0

Current for S640% IS640%

2.8

4.6

9.2

29.3

37.0

55.5

73.3

100.8

138.8

231.3

Peak current Imax

2.8

7.3

14.7

29.3

47.2

70.3

93.5

116.4

178.5

237.7

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 5.33 kHz

Rated current IN

2.3

3.9

6.2

18.7

24.0

36.0

46.7

66.1

96.0

160.1

Current for S640% IS640%

2.3

3.9

7.8

24.9

32.0

48.0

62.3

85.6

120.0

200.1

Peak current Imax

2.3

6.2

12.5

24.9

40.8

60.8

79.4

98.8

154.5

205.7

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 6.4 kHz

Rated current IN

2.0

3.3

5.3

16.0

21.0

31.5

40.0

56.7

84.0

140.0

Current for S640% IS640%

2.0

3.3

6.7

21.3

28.0

42.0

53.3

73.3

105.0

175.0

Peak current Imax

2.0

5.3

10.7

21.3

35.7

53.2

68.0

84.7

135.1

179.9

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 8.0 kHz

Rated current IN

1.5

2.5

4.0

12.0

16.5

24.8

30.0

42.5

66.0

110.0

Current for S640% IS640%

1.5

2.5

5.0

16.0

22.0

33.0

40.0

55.0

82.5

137.5

Peak current Imax

1.5

4.0

8.0

16.0

28.1

41.8

51.0

63.5

106.2

141.4

Table 5-4

Power modules in a 2axis version, derating for MSDSRM

6SN112j1AB00

0HAj

0AAj

Type of cooling

0BAj

0CAj

Fan

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 4.0 kHz

Rated current IN

2.8

4.6

7.4

22.2

Current for S640% IS640%

2.8

Peak current Imax

2.8

4.6

9.3

29.6

7.4

14.8

29.6

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 5.33 kHz

Rated current IN

2.4

4.0

6.4

19.2

Current for S640% IS640%

2.4

4.0

8.0

25.6

Peak current Imax

2.4

6.4

12.8

25.6

5.6

16.8

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 6.4 kHz

Rated current IN

2.1

3.5

Current for S640% IS640%

2.1

3.5

7.0

22.4

Peak current Imax

2.1

5.6

11.2

22.4

Inverter pulse frequency fT = 8.0 kHz

Rated current IN

1.65

2.75

4.4

13.2

Current for S640% IS640%

1.65

2.75

5.5

17.6

Peak current Imax

1.65

4.4

8.8

17.6

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-133

5 Power Modules
5.5 Operating power modules from an unregulated infeed

5.5

10.04
02.12
05.08
05.01

Operating power modules from an unregulated infeed

The drive modules can be operated from both unregulated and regulated supply
modules belonging to the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system. The engineering and power data of this Configuration Manual refer to operation with the
regulated infeed/regenerative feedback modules. This data should be corrected, if required, when operated from unregulated infeed modules.
Operating drive modules with PH and 1FE1 motors and induction motors
from an unregulated infeed

When operation is with an unregulated infeed (e.g. UI module or unregulated

operated I/R module), a lower maximum motor output is available in the upper
speed range than with the use of the infeed/regenerative feedback module.
As a result of the low DC link voltage of 490 V (for a line supply infeed with
400 V 3ph. 10%) for the UI module or unregulated operated I/R module, the
available continuous output is given by:
If
UZK

<1

1.5 x VN motor
then, only the following continuous power is available
Pcontinuous = PN 

UZK
1.5 x VN motor

UDC link = line voltage  1,35

UDC link = 436 V
for 360 V 10 % line voltage
UDC link = 486 V
for 400 V 10 % line voltage

VN motor should, for the particular motor, be taken from the appropriate documentation (refer to Appendix, References).
As a result of the lower DC link voltage, it is possible that motor rated speeds
will no longer be able to be reached, refer to Engineering the motors. In this
case, the speed of the motors, and therefore the power, must be appropriately
reduced.
Power P

S6

S1
1

2
1

Motor power limit with

I/R module

Motor power limit with

UI module
Speed n

Fig. 5-10

5-134

Speed/power graph

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
10.04
05.01

5 Power Modules
5.5 Operating power modules from an unregulated infeed

Readers note
Selecting the power rating for UI modules, refer to Chapter 6.7.5.

For the 28 kW UI, the pulsed resistors must be separately ordered and externally mounted.
For higher regenerative feedback powers, a separate braking resistor module
must be provided or the regenerative power reduced by using longer braking
times.
Operating drive modules with 1FT6, 1FK and 1FN motors on uncontrolled
infeeds
As a result of the lower DC link voltage of 490 V1) for the UI module (600 V for
the I/R module), under certain circumstances, the following restrictions must be
expected:

S Reduction of the dynamic drive properties in the upper speed/velocity range

S Lower utilization of the rated motor speed/velocity if the requirement relating
to overload is kept

1) For a line supply infeed with 3ph. 400 V AC 10%.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-135

5 Power Modules
5.6 Interfaces and terminals

5.6

Interfaces and terminals

5.6.1

Interface overview

Table 5-5
Term.
no.

10.04
05.08
11.05
05.01

1axis module
Designation

Function

U2 A1
V2
W2

Motor connection

PE

Protective conductor
Protective conductor

P600
M600

DC link
DC link

Table 5-6
Term.
no.

Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit values

3ph. 430 V AC

0V
0V
I/O
I/O

+300 V
300 V

Max. crosssection
See Chapter5.6.2

2 screws
Busbar
Busbar

2axis module
Designation

Function

Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit values

Max. crosssection

U2 A1
V2
W2

Motor connection for axis 1

3ph. 430 V AC

See Chapter5.6.2

U2 A2
V2
W2

Motor connection for axis 2

3ph. 430 V AC

See Chapter5.6.2

PE

Protective conductor

P600
M600

DC link
DC link

0V
I/O
I/O

+300 V
300 V

2 screws
Busbar
Busbar

1) O = Output; I = Input

Note
For 2axis module, Order No.: 6SN11231AB000CA2/0CA3, note that the
terminal arrangement of A1 and A2 differs compared to the other 2axis
modules!

5-136

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
10.04
05.01

5.6.2

5 Power Modules
5.6 Interfaces and terminals

Connectable cable crosssections

The cable crosssections that can be connected are listed in Table 5-7:

Table 5-7

Cable crosssections that can be connected at the power module (motor connection)
Connection crosssection [mm2]

MLFB
1,5

2,5

10

16

25 35

50

70

95

1)

2)

120 150

[Nm]

6SN112j1AA000KAV

400 A

M6

25...30

6SN112j1AA000JAV

300 A

M6

15...20

6SN112j1AA010FAV

200 A

M6

15...20

6SN11231AA020FAV

200 A

6SN112V1AA000EAV

160 A

6SN112V1AA000LAV

108 A

6SN11231AA000DAV

80 A

6SN112V1AA000CAV

50 A

6SN112V1AA000BAV

25 A

6SN112V1AA000AAV

15 A

6SN112V1AA000HAV

8A

6SN112V1AB000CAV

2x50 A

6SN11231AB000BAV

2x25 A

6SN112j1AB000AAV

2x15 A

6SN11231AB000HAV

2x8 A

Key

M6

15...20

M6

6...8

M6

6...8

M5

1,5...1,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

M5

0,7...0,8

Terminal area for flexible cable with end sleeves (with or without plastic collars)
Terminal area for flexible cables with terminal pin
X

IP20 is guaranteed when correctly used, e.g. insulated pintype cable lugs

1) Size of the screw for the protective conductor connection

2) Tightening torque of the terminals or connectors

Warning
The internal overload monitoring function of the power modules only protects
the cable if this is dimensioned/selected corresponding to the power module
currents. If smaller crosssections are selected, then the user must ensure the
appropriate level of cable protection, e.g. by suitably setting the control
parameters.

Note
For UL certification, only use copper cables that have been appropriately
dimensioned/selected for the operating temperature w60 _C.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-137

5 Power Modules
5.6 Interfaces and terminals

10.04
02.12
05.01

Note
In order to clearly indicate potential hazards due to voltages at the terminals,
the warning plate WS2K (Order No. 1004513) can be ordered at the following
address.
Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co. KG
Flachsmarktstr. 8
32825 Blomberg
Germany
Tel. +49 5235 3 00
Fax +49 5235 3 1200
http://www.phoenixcontact.com

Readers note
For a description of DC link terminal adapter for twotier configuration, see the
dimension drawing in Fig. 12-60.

5.6.3

Motor terminals A1 and A2

The arrangement of the motor terminals A1/A2 can be taken from Table 5-8,
diagrams 5-11 and 5-12
Table 5-8

Motor terminals A1 and A2 provided at the power module

MLFB

5-138

Device

A1

A2

Axis 1

Axis 1

6SN112j1AA000KAV

400 A

6SN112j1AA000JAV

300 A

6SN112j1AA010FAV

200 A

6SN11231AA020FAV

200 A

6SN112V1AA000EAV

160 A

6SN112V1AA000LAV

108 A

6SN11231AA000DAV

80 A

Axis 1

6SN11231AB000CAV

2x50 A int.

Axis 1

Axis 2

6SN11241AB000CAV

2x50 A ext.

Axis 1

Axis 2

6SN11241AA000CAV

50 A

Axis 1

6SN11231AB000BAV

2x25 A

6SN112V1AB000AAV

2x15 A

Axis 1

Axis 2

6SN11231AB000HAV

2x8 A

6SN112j1AA000BAV

25 A

6SN112j1AA000AAV

15 A

Axis 1

6SN112j1AA000HAV

8A

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5 Power Modules
5.6 Interfaces and terminals

6SN112V1AA000KAV, 6SN112V1AA000JAV,
6SN112V1AA000FAV, 6SN112V1AA020FAV,

6SN112V1AA000EAV, 6SN112V1AA000LAV,

02.12
10.04
05.01

Fig. 5-11

Power Modules device 1 und 2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5-139

10.04
02.12
05.01

1AB000HAV
1HA000AAV
1HA000BAV

1AA000HAV
1AA000AAV
1AA000BAV

5 Power Modules
5.6 Interfaces and terminals

6SN11231AA000DAV

6SN11231AB000CAV

6SN11241AB000CAV

1AB000CAV

Fig. 5-12

Power Modules devices 2 ... 8

5-140

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Infeed Modules
6.1

Description

General
information

The infeed modules are used to connect the drive group to the line supply.
The infeed/regenerative feedback module (I/R module) and the module for the
unregulated infeed (UI module) are used to input power into the DC link. Further, the I/R, UI, and the monitoring module also provide the electronics power
supply for the connected modules.
The infeed modules do not have any comprehensive overload protection. Such
overload protection must be provided by the configuration and correct setting of
the current values in the control boards.

UI module

For the UI module, when the motor brakes, the drive energy injected into the DC
link is converted into heat in the braking resistors and dissipated to the environment. These braking resistors are either integrated or mounted. When required,
one or more additional pulsed resistor modules (PR modules) can be used
within the limits specified when engineering the system.
This module is used for the following applications:

S Machines with few or short braking cycles, low braking energy

S Drive groups with limited dynamic demands, in particular for the main
spindle drive

I/R module with

HFD reactor

I/R modules and HF/HFD commutating reactors form the stepup converter
(7 kHz) for controlling the DC link voltage and enabling a regenerative feedback. This module is used for the following applications:

S Machines with high dynamic requirements placed on the drives

S Frequent braking cycles and high braking energy
S Control cabinet designs optimized for low operating costs
Note
The HFD line reactor is required in order that the I/R module can function, as
this is cyclically shortcircuited for the stepup controller, voltage control
function to be active!

Overvoltage limiting module

The overvoltage limiting module limits sporadic, transient overvoltages, for example that can occur as a result of switching operations in the line supply.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-141

6 Infeed Modules
6.1 Description

Monitoring module

02.12
05.01

The monitoring module contains a complete electronics power supply for the
equipment bus and the central monitoring functions for a separate drive group.
The power is normally supplied from the 3ph. 400 to 480 V AC line supply. For
emergency retraction in case of a power failure, the power supply can also be
connected to the DC link in parallel (see Section 8.15).
The monitoring module is required if a higher number of drive modules in a
group exceeds the electronics power supply of the infeed module (I/R or UI
module). The monitoring module also allows groups of drive modules to be
created in multiple cabinet compartments or tiers.

Arrangement

The I/R, UI and monitoring module are located as the first module at the left in
the drive group.
The mounting surface for the line supply infeed and drive modules as well as
the commutating reactors and line filter must be mounted to the mounting panels through a lowresistance connection (e.g. galvanized plates and panels).

Line filters, line filter modules and shielded cables are available in order to comply
with the CE requirements regarding the radio interference voltage limit values.
Shield terminal plates are available to meet EMC requirements when using
shielded power cables.

Operating conditions
Number of charge
operations within 8 min

Fig. 6-1

Charge limit, infeed module [F]

DC link capacitance of the
drive group [F]

DC link precharging frequency

Note
In the standby mode of the line supply infeed, pulse inhibit for the power modules, terminal 63 should also be used to inhibit the pulses in the infeed. The DC
link remains at the nonregulated level; this means that when the pulses are
enabled, it is immediately regulated and is ready to operate.
The cycle indicated above also applies to the starting frequency of the power
supply (from the line supply or X181).
The maximum starting frequency for the power supply is five times within a five
minute period.

Notice
Failure to comply with this boundary condition triggers a thermal protection in
the device, preventing further startup of the power supply.
Consequence: All LEDs remain dark.
Remedy: Switch off the power and wait at least two minutes before switching
on the power again. For a 6conductor connection, it is sufficient to interrupt
the power supply for two minutes at connector X181.

6-142

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 Infeed Modules
6.1 Description

05.01

NC
contact

Relay contact
Ready signal

NO
contact
Relay contact for group signal I2t
and motor overtemperature
Pulse enable
Enable voltage
Enable voltage
Drive enable
Reference potential for enable
voltage
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET (R+term.15)
Enable voltage
Setup operation
Contactor energization, start
Signaling contact,
line contactor

74
nc
73.2
73.1
nc
72

X111

5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19

X121

7
45
44
10
15
15
R

X141

9
112
48
111
213
113

Enable signal for internal line

contactor

NS1
NS2

Signaling contact, start inhibit

(NC contact)

AS1
AS2

1)

X161
1)
X171
2)
X172
LED
displays
X351

M500

DC link power supply for buffering

power failures
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply

P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1

X181

Equipment
bus

1)

1W1

P600
DC link connection
LED display
Electronics power
supply faulted

red

Device is not ready,

green
no enable signal (term.
63, 64 or 48)
red
Line supply fault

M600
5 V voltage
level faulted
Unit ready
yellow (DC link
precharged)
DC link
red
overvoltage
red

1) Jumpers inserted when the equipment is supplied

2) For UI modules, there is no X172

Fig. 6-2

U1 V1 W1 X131 PE

Line
supply
connection

Interfaces, infeed module (UI module) or infeed/regenerative feedback module (16 to 55 kW I/R module)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-143

6 Infeed Modules
6.1 Description

05.08
05.01

NC
contact

Relay contact
Ready signal

NO
contact
Relay contact for group signal I2t
and motor overtemperature
Pulse enable
Enable voltage
Enable voltage
Drive enable
Reference potential for enable
voltage
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET (R+term.15)
Enable voltage
Setup operation
Contactor energization, start
Signaling contact,
line contactor

74
nc
73.2
73.1
nc
72

X111

5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19

X121

7
45
44
10
15
15
R

X141

9
112
48
111
213
113

Enable signal for internal line

contactor

NS1
NS2

Signaling contact, start inhibit (NC

contact)

AS1
AS2

1)
X161
1)
X171
X172
LED
displays
X351

M500

DC link power supply for buffering

power failures
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply

P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1

X181
Equipment
bus

1)

1W1

P600

DC link connection
LED display
Electronics power
supply faulted

red

Device is not ready,

green
no enable signal (term.
63, 64 or 48)
red
Line supply fault

M600
red

5 V voltage
level faulted

Unit ready
yellow (DC link
precharged)
red

DC link
overvoltage

L1 L2 X131
1) Jumpers inserted when the equipment is supplied
Line supply connection
Fig. 6-3

6-144

U1

V1

W1

PE

Infeed/regenerative feedback module (80 and 120 kW I/R module) interfaces

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.08
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.1 Description

X121A
Relay contact for group signal I2t
and motor overtemperature

X121B

5.3
5.2
5.1
nc

74
73.2
73.1
72

S1

Relay signal
Ready/fault

S1 Setting
X131

X141A
Pulse enable
Enable voltage FR+
Enable voltage FR+
Drive enable
RESET (R+Kl15)
Reference ground enable voltage FR

X141B
1)

63
9
9
64
R
19

9
112
48
1) NS1
NS2
15

Enable voltage FR+

Setup operation
Contactor energization, start
Enable signal for
internal line contactor
M

X161
Signaling contactfor for
internal line contactor

111
213

LEDAnzeigen
X351

X181
M500

DC link power supply for buffering

power failures
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply
External infeed for the electronics power supply

P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1

Equipment bus
1)

1W1

P600
LED display
Electronics power
supply faulted

red

Device is not ready,

green
no enable signal (term.
63, 64 or 48)
red
Line supply fault

DC link connection
red

5 V voltage
level faulted

M600

Unit ready
yellow (DC link
precharged)
red

DC link
overvoltage

W1 V1 U1 Line supply connection

1) Jumpers inserted when the equipment is supplied
Fig. 6-4

PE

Infeed module 5 kW UI module interfaces

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-145

Fig. 6-5

6-146

1)
2)
3)

1 1)

2 1)

4 1)

5 1)

Vmot = 600 V/625 V

Voltage
controller

Settings, refer to
Chapter 6.3

3 1)

6 2)

When supplied, OFF

When supplied ON
Jumpers closed when supplied
T. 1U12U1, 1V12V1, 1W12W1
T. 911248
T. NS1NS2

X131 (refer to Chapter 8.2)

For a description of the

interface, refer to Chapter 6.2

Note:

S1

DIP switch

6)

5)

4)

NS2

73.2

X131

5.1

Line
contactor

5.2

Control

64

IAct
ual

L1

L2

Tmax. power section

Pulse
generation

5.3

Precharging
contactor

74

NS1

Current
controller

Monitoring

73.1

I2t prewarning
and motor
overtemperature

63

45

P24 P15
44

10

N15 N24

Gating/
control
unit

15

112

T. 112
setup
operation 3)

Reset

48

L2

V1

L3

W1

Line supply, 3ph. 400 V

AC (415/480 V)

L1

U1

DC link precharging circuit

19

EN

T. 48
start

DC link
sensing

Safety relay, start inhibit

15

Electronics power supply

PE1

EN+

5)
Jumper open in shipped
Commutating
F1, F2
state
reactor
T. L1, L2 only available for I/R modules
80 and 120 kW
L1 L2
PE
T. 113 for UI modules, 5 and 10 kW
not present
Line supply, 2ph. 400 V
AC (415/480 V)

Current
setpoint
limiting

72

Signal
ready/
fault signal

Pulse
enable

Drive
enable

113

111

AS2

3)

213 1W1 2W1 1V1

2V1

X151

M600

P600

Equipment
bus

P500 M500

1U1 2U1

Line supply
rectification and
synchronization

4)

100 k

Unit enable

NS2
NS2

3)

Vact

NS1
NS1

Power supply and

signals

Signal,
line contactor

6)

AS1

DC link controller
Feedback
signal,
start inhibit

6 Infeed Modules
6.1 Description
05.01

Block diagram, line supply infeed module (I/R)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

6.2

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Interface overview
Danger

6.2.1

Protection from direct contact by means of SELV/PELV is permitted only in

areas with equipotential bonding and in dry interior spaces. If these conditions
are not given, other protective measures against electric shock must be taken,
e.g. protection through protective impedances or limited voltage or by
implementing protection class I and II.
Only PELV or SELV voltages may be connected at terminals with either PELV
or SELV voltages (refer to EN 602041, Section 6.4).
For Order Nos. for coding connectors, refer to Catalog NC60.
Refer to the information in the following tables.

Interface overview, NE modules

The interface description applies to all NE modules except for the 5 kW UI module. The interface of the 5 kW UI module has a separate description (see Section 6.2.2).

Table 6-1
Term.
No.

Interface description for NE modules

Designation

Function

Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit values

for Vn 400 V

Max. cross
section10)

U1, V1
W1

Line supply connection

3ph. 400 V AC

refer to Section 4.2

L1
L2

Line supply connection for contactor

I
I

refer to Section C.1.3, Table

3.5
refer to Chapter 6.2.5, L1,
L2

16 mm2/10 mm2 4)
16 mm2/10 mm2 4)

PE
P600
M600

Protective conductor
DC link
DC link

I
I/O
I/O

0V
+300 V
300 V

Screw
Busbar
Busbar

Grounding bar 5)

I/O

300 V

Conductor bar

Terminals provided on3)

I/R, UI

I/R 80 kW,
120 kW

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact; (for signal, NO = high; NC = low)

P = only for PELV voltage; S = only for SELV voltage
2) Term. 19 is the reference ground (connected through 10 kW to the general reference ground X131/T.15 inside the module)
Terminal 15 must not be connected to PE, to terminal 19 or to external voltage sources.
Terminal 19 can be connected with X131.
The terminal may be used only for enabling the associated drive group.
3) I/R = infeed/regenerative feedback module; UI = unregulated infeed; MM = monitoring module;
PR = pulsed resistor module
4) The first data applies with pintype cable lug. The second data is used for finelystranded cable without end sleeve.
5) The grounding clip is used to ground the DC link M600 busbar through 100 k (must be closed and must not be closed
if RCCBs are used, see also Chapter 8.1;
the grounding clip must be opened if the system is subject to a highvoltage test).
6) RESET = resets the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group (terminal R ! Terminal 15 = RESET)
7) Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (for I/R 16 kW and UI 10 kW, only from Order No. [MLFB]:
6SN114V1VV010VVV)
Terminals 111113 NO contact not positivelydriven
For I/R 16 kW (from version E) and UI 10 kW (from version F) the following apply:
Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (series circuit of NC contact, main contactor and NC contact,
precharging contactor)
Terminals 111113, positivelydriven NO contacts
8) Max. current load of terminal 9 with respect to terminal 19: 0.5 A.
9) Only for UI 28 kW
10) For UL certification, only use copper cables dimensioned for an operating temperature w 60C
11) Max. permissible connected power: Pmax v 43 kW; max. permissible current load: Imax v 72 A
12) When the AS1/AS2 contacts are connected in series a contact resistance of approx. 0.20 Ohm must be taken into
consideration over the lifetime of the contacts. For a 24 V switching voltage, from experience, a series
circuit of up to five contacts can be used without any problems due to the nonlinear contact characteristics.
13) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety), control transformers must be used for AC control voltages.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-147

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Table 6-1
Term.
No.

Interface description for NE modules, continued

Designation

P600
M600
1R, TR1,
2R, TR29)
3R
X131
X151
M500 X181
P500 X181

1U1
2U1
1V1
2V1
1W1
2W1
7
45
44
10
152)
R6)
5.3
5.2
5.1
632)
92)8)
92)8)
642)
19

02.07
05.01

X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X141
X141
X141
X141
X141
X141
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121

Function

Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit values

for Vn 400 V

DC link
DC link
Connection, external
resistor

I/O
I/O

Electronics M

I/O

0V

Equipment bus

I/O

Various

DC link power supply

DC link power supply
Output L1
Input L1
Output L2
Input L2
Output L3
Input L3

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
RESET
Relay contact
Group signal
I2t/motor temp.
Pulse enable
Enable voltage
Enable voltage
Drive enable
Enable voltage
reference potential

I/O

+300 V
300 V
300 V

Max. cross
section10)

Terminals provided on3)

16 mm2/10 mm2 4)
16 mm2/10 mm2 4)

Monitoring module 11)

6 mm2/4 mm2 4)
UI 28 kW
16 mm2/10 mm2 4)
Ribbon cable

DC 300 V

1.5 mm2

DC +300 V

1.5 mm2

O
I
O
I
O
I

3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
+20.4...28.8 V/50 mA
+15 V/10 mA
15 V/10 mA
20.4...28.8 V/50 mA
0V
T.15/RI = 10 k
DC 50 V/0.5 A/12 VA max
DC 5 V/3 mA min

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

O
O
O
O
O
I
NC
NO
I
I
O
O
I

+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k

+24 V
+24 V
+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
0V

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI, monitoring module

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact; (for signal, NO = high; NC = low)

P = only for PELV voltage; S = only for SELV voltage
2) Term. 19 is the reference ground (connected through 10 kW to the general reference ground X131/T.15 inside the module)
Terminal 15 must not be connected to PE, to terminal 19 or to external voltage sources.
Terminal 19 can be connected with X131.
The terminal may be used only for enabling the associated drive group.
3) I/R = infeed/regenerative feedback module; UI = unregulated infeed; MM = monitoring module;
PR = pulsed resistor module
4) The first data applies with pintype cable lug. The second data is used for finelystranded cable without end sleeve.
5) The grounding clip is used to ground the DC link M600 busbar through 100 k (must be closed and must not be closed
if RCCBs are used, see also Chapter 8.1;
the grounding clip must be opened if the system is subject to a highvoltage test).
6) RESET = resets the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group (terminal R ! Terminal 15 = RESET)
7) Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (for I/R 16 kW and UI 10 kW, only from Order No. [MLFB]:
6SN114V1VV010VVV)
Terminals 111113 NO contact not positivelydriven
For I/R 16 kW (from version E) and UI 10 kW (from version F) the following apply:
Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (series circuit of NC contact, main contactor and NC contact,
precharging contactor)
Terminals 111113, positivelydriven NO contacts
8) Max. current load of terminal 9 with respect to terminal 19: 0.5 A.
9) Only for UI 28 kW
10) For UL certification, only use copper cables dimensioned for an operating temperature w 60C
11) Max. permissible connected power: Pmax v 43 kW; max. permissible current load: Imax v 72 A
12) When the AS1/AS2 contacts are connected in series a contact resistance of approx. 0.20 Ohm must be taken into
consideration over the lifetime of the contacts. For a 24 V switching voltage, from experience, a series
circuit of up to five contacts can be used without any problems due to the nonlinear contact characteristics.
13) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety), control transformers must be used for AC control voltages.

6-148

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Table 6-1
Term.
No.

Interface description for NE modules, continued

Designation

Function

7
45
44
10
152)
R6)

X141
X141
X141
X141
X141
X141

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
RESET

92)8)
1122)

X161
X161

Enable voltage
Settingup operation/
normal operation

482)
1117)
2137)

X161
X161
X161

Contactor control
Signaling contacts,

Type
1)

Typ. voltage/limit values

for Vn 400 V

Max. cross
section10)

Terminals provided on3)

I/R, UI, monitoring module

O
O
O
O
O
I

+20,4...28,8 V/50 mA
+15 V/10 mA
15 V/10 mA
20,4...28,8 V/50 mA
0V
KL15/RE = 10 k

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

O
I

+24 V
+21 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k

+30 V/1 A (111113)
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/
2 A max
17 V DC/3 mA min

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

I
I
NC
NO

1137)

X161

line contactor

NS1
NS2

X171
X171

Coil contact for

line supply, pre
charging contactor

O
I

AS112)
AS212)

X172
X172

Signaling contact
Start inhibit (T.112)

I
NC

+24 V

max. 250 V/1 A AC13)/

30 V/2 A DC

I/R, UI, monitoring module

I/R, UI

mm2 max.

1.5
cable length, 30 m
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

I/R, UI

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

I/R

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact; (for signal, NO = high; NC = low)

P = only for PELV voltage; S = only for SELV voltage
2) Term. 19 is the reference ground (connected through 10 kW to the general reference ground X131/T.15 inside the module)
Terminal 15 must not be connected to PE, to terminal 19 or to external voltage sources.
Terminal 19 can be connected with X131.
The terminal may be used only for enabling the associated drive group.
3) I/R = infeed/regenerative feedback module; UI = unregulated infeed; MM = monitoring module;
PR = pulsed resistor module
4) The first data applies with pintype cable lug. The second data is used for finelystranded cable without end sleeve.
5) The grounding clip is used to ground the DC link M600 busbar through 100 k (must be closed and must not be closed
if RCCBs are used, see also Chapter 8.1;
the grounding clip must be opened if the system is subject to a highvoltage test).
6) RESET = resets the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group (terminal R ! Terminal 15 = RESET)
7) Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (for I/R 16 kW and UI 10 kW, only from Order No. [MLFB]:
6SN114V1VV010VVV)
Terminals 111113 NO contact not positivelydriven
For I/R 16 kW (from version E) and UI 10 kW (from version F) the following apply:
Terminals 111213, positivelydriven opening contacts (series circuit of NC contact, main contactor and NC contact,
precharging contactor)
Terminals 111113, positivelydriven NO contacts
8) Max. current load of terminal 9 with respect to terminal 19: 0.5 A.
9) Only for UI 28 kW
10) For UL certification, only use copper cables dimensioned for an operating temperature w 60C
11) Max. permissible connected power: Pmax v 43 kW; max. permissible current load: Imax v 72 A
12) When the AS1/AS2 contacts are connected in series a contact resistance of approx. 0.20 Ohm must be taken into
consideration over the lifetime of the contacts. For a 24 V switching voltage, from experience, a series
circuit of up to five contacts can be used without any problems due to the nonlinear contact characteristics.
13) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety), control transformers must be used for AC control voltages.

Warning
In order to avoid damage to the infeed circuit of the NE modules, when
controlling/energizing terminal 50 at X221 (PR module, DC link fast discharge)
it should be ensured that terminal 48 of the NE module is deenergized (the
module is then electrically isolated from the line supply). The feedback signal
contacts from the main contactor of the NE module (X161 term. 111, term. 113,
term. 213) must be evaluated.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-149

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

6.2.2

5 kW UI module interface overview

Table 6-2
Term.
No.

Interface overview, 5 kW UI modules

Designation

Function

Max. crosssection
6)

0V
0V
Various
300 V

M5 thread
M4 thread
34core ribbon cable
Busbar

DC link

I/O

+300 V
300 V

Conductor bar

DC link power supply

DC link power supply
Output L1
Input L1
Output L2
Input L2
Output L3
Input L3

I
I
O
I
O
I
O
I

300 V
+300 V
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

Protective conductor
Electronics M
Equipment bus
Grounding bar 3)

X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181

Typ. voltage/limit values

I
I
I/O
I/O

PE

M500
P500
1U1
2U1
1V1
2V1
1W1
2W1

1)

4 mm2
finelystranded
without conductor end
sleeves
6 mm2 with pintype
cable lug

Line supply connection

X131
X351

Type

3ph. 400 V AC

U1 X1
V1
W1

P600
M600

02.03
05.08
02.07
05.01

5.3
5.2
5.1
nc

X121A
X121A
X121A
X121A

Relay contact
Group signal
I2t/motor temperature

NC
NO
I

1ph. 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max

1ph. 5 V DC/3 mA min

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

74
73.2
73.1
72

X121B
X121B
X121B
X121B

Relay signal
Ready/
fault

NC
I
I
NO

1ph.250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A max7)

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

632)
92)4)
92)4)
642)
R5)
19

X141AX
141A
X141A
X141A
X141A
X141A

Pulse enable
FR+
FR+
Drive enable
RESET
FR, reference ground enable
voltage

I
O
O
I
I
O

5 V DC/3 mA min
+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
+24 V
+24 V
+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
terminal 19/RE = 10 k

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact

2) Term. 19 is the reference ground (connected through 10 kW to the general reference ground X131 inside the module)
Terminal 15 must not be connected to PE, to terminal 19 or to external voltage sources
Terminal 19 can be connected to X131.
The terminal may be used exclusively for enabling the associated drive group.
3) The grounding clip is used to ground the DC link M busbar through 100 k (must be closed;
the grounding clip must be opened if the system is subject to a highvoltage test).
4) max. current load of terminal 9 terminal 19  1 A
Notice: For the 5 kW, there are no terminals 7, 45, 44 and 10.
5) RESET = resets the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group
(terminal R ! Term. 19 = RESET)
6) For UL certification: only use copper cables dimensioned for an operating temperature w 60C.
7) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety),
control transformers must be used for AC control voltages.

6-150

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Table 6-2
Term.
No.

Interface overview, 5 kW UI modules, continued

Designation

111 X161
213 X161

92)4)
112
48
NS1
NS2
15

X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B

Function
Signaling contact
Line contactor

FR+
Setup/normal operation
Contactor control
Coil contact for
line supply, precharging
M contactor

Type
1)

I
NC

O
I
I
O
I
O

Typ. voltage/limit values

1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A7)
17 V DC/3 mA min

+24 V
+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
+13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
+24 V
0/+24 V
0V

Max. crosssection
6)
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
max. cable length,
30 m
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact

2) Term. 19 is the reference ground (connected through 10 kW to the general reference ground X131 inside the module)
Terminal 15 must not be connected to PE, to terminal 19 or to external voltage sources
Terminal 19 can be connected to X131.
The terminal may be used exclusively for enabling the associated drive group.
3) The grounding clip is used to ground the DC link M busbar through 100 k (must be closed;
the grounding clip must be opened if the system is subject to a highvoltage test).
4) max. current load of terminal 9 terminal 19  1 A
Notice: For the 5 kW, there are no terminals 7, 45, 44 and 10.
5) RESET = resets the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group
(terminal R ! Term. 19 = RESET)
6) For UL certification: only use copper cables dimensioned for an operating temperature w 60C.
7) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety),
control transformers must be used for AC control voltages.

Notice
There are no 7, 45, 44 and 10 terminals for the 5 kW UI module.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-151

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

6.2.3

02.12
05.01

Cable crosssections that can be connected

The cable crosssections that can be connected are listed in Table 6-3:

Table 6-3

Cable crosssections that can be connected at the infeed module (line supply connection)
Connection crosssection [mm2]

MLFB
1,5

2,5

10 16

25

35

50

70

95

1)

2)

120 150

6SN11431BB000FAV

120 kW

M6

25...30

6SN11431BB000EAV

80 kW

M6

15...20

6SN11451BA010DAV

55 kW

M6

15...20

6SN11451BB000DAV

55 kW

M6

15...20

6SN11451BA020CAV

36 kW

M6

6...8

6SN11451BA010BAV

16 kW

M5

1,5...1,8

6SN114j1Aj010BAV

28 kW

6SN11451AA010AAV

10 kW

6SN11461AB000BAV

5 kW

Key

[Nm]

X
X
X
X
X

M6

6...8

M5

1,5...1,8

M5

0,7...0,8

Terminal area for flexible cable with end sleeves (with or without plastic collars)
Terminal area for flexible cables with terminal pin
X

IP20 is guaranteed when correctly used, e.g. insulated pintype cable lugs

1) Size of the screw for the protective conductor connection

2) Tightening torque of the terminals or connectors

6-152

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Threeconductor connection (standard circuit)

73.2
73.1
72

X111/X121B

5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19

5V
15 V
24 V
M

7
45
44
10
15
R

Pushbutton
contact
1)
Other
terminal 48

1)

X141

AS1
AS2

Power
Unit

B
L

9
112
48
111
213
113
NS1
NS2

Electronics
power
supply

X161

Internal line
contactor

X171

X351

Other
terminal 19

X121/X121A

S1: Settings, refer to Chapter 6.3

NE module
2)
(with the exception
of UI 5 kW)
M600

74

Only PELV circuits may

be connected at terminal
19 (FR).

P600

S1.6
S1.5
S1.4
S1.3
S1.2
S1.1

6.2.4

L+

X172

To the
drive
modules

P600
A

P600

To the drive
modules

LEDs
4)

1)
1)
1)

M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

X181

M600
M600
100 k

U1
1U2

V1
1V2

W1

L2
3)

1W2
6)

F1

Line filter

Line fuses for I/R

or UI module,
refer to Chapter
7.3.1

L
1

L
2

L
3

L1

L2

L3

Main switches
Supply system

Fig. 6-6

X131

PE
To the NC

F2
5)

Reactor, only for

I/R module and
UI 28 kW

2)
Leading
contact

L1

PE

Notice
1) Jumpers in the condition when supplied.
Depending on the application, remove the
jumpers (ref. to the circuit examples in
Section 8.7).
2) For I/R modules with setting for regulated
operation the following applies (refer to
switch S1, Chapter 6).
Term. 48 must be deenergized w 10 ms
earlier before the line contacts of the main
switch open (e.g. using a leading contact).
3) Terminals L1 and L2 are only available for
I/R modules 80 kW and 120 kW.
4) Grounding bar for line supplies with poor
chassis connection to ground,
open when the equipment is supplied.
5) Or external contactor infeed (connection).
6) Or external contactor infeed (connection
not permitted).

Threeconductor connection (standard circuit)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-153

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

6.2.5

02.03
05.08
11.05
05.01

Description of the interfaces and functions

Switch S1

Switch S1 to set various functions is provided on the upper side of the NE and
monitoring module or on the front side/panel for the UI module 5 kW; refer to
Chapter 6.3.

Terminal 19

EN
Reference potential for the enable voltage terminal 9, nonfloating (with electrical isolation) (connected to the general reference ground terminal 15 through
10 k ). Terminal 19 is not permitted to be connected to terminal 15. (Connect
to the PE bus or X131.)
When controlling the enable signals using electronic outputs that switch to high
(PLC), terminal 19 must be connected to the 0 V reference potential (ground) of
the external power supply.
The circuits/power source must satisfy the requirements for PELV (Protection
ExtraLow Voltage) functional extralow voltage with safe separation in accordance with EN 602041; 6.4.

Terminal 9

EN+
Only use the +24 V enable voltage for the internal enable signals of the NE and
drive modules.
Maximum power supply load: 500 mA
(corresponds to 8 EP; 1 optocoupler input requires 12 mA, for UI 5 kW > 1 A)

Terminal 48

Start
This terminal has the highest priority. A defined poweron and poweroff sequence of the NE module is initiated using terminal 48.
If terminal 48 is enabled (energized), then internally, the precharging sequence
is initiated.
(interrogation VDC link w 300 V and VDC link w 2 Uline supply 50 V).
After the DC link has been charged, then, simultaneously
S after 500 ms > the precharging contactor is opened and the main contactor is closed.
S after 1 second > the internal enable signals are then issued.
If terminal 48 is deenergized, then initially, after approx. 1 ms, the internal
pulse enable signals are inhibited and then the DC link is electrically isolated
from the line supply delayed by the dropout time of the internal line contactor.
If terminal 48 is opened (enabled) during the load operation, the load operation
is first completed. The inhibit functionality for terminal 48 does not takes effect
until the load operation is complete, provided terminals NS1NS2 are jumpered.

Terminals NS1,
NS2

Coil circuit of the internal line and precharging contactor

If the line contactor is opened (deenergized) by interrupting the coil circuit using electrically isolated (floating) contacts, then the DC link is safely and electrically disconnected from the line supply (signal contact, terminals 111213 must
be interrogated).
The terminals have a safetyrelevant function. The shutdown using terminals
NS1NS2 must be realized at the same time as or delayed with respect to terminal 48 start (refer to Section 8.7 Circuit examples = 2 and = 4).
Max. cable length 50 m (2conductor cable) for 1.5 mm2 crosssection

Terminal 63

Pulse enable
For the pulse enable and inhibit functionality, this terminal has the highest priority. The enable and inhibit functions are effective after approx. 1 ms simultaneously for all of the modules including the NE module. When the signal is withdrawn, the drives coast down unbraked.

6-154

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

05.01

Standby operation of the infeed:

If an infeed module is to be kept in the ready state for a longer period of time
(DC link charged), then in order to avoid unnecessary switching losses and
reactor losses, a pulse inhibit should be enabled! The DC link voltage then remains at the nonregulated value and is again ready in the regulated mode immediately after the pulses have been enabled.

Terminal 64

Drive Enable
The drive modules are enabled using terminal 64. The modules are simultaneously enabled or inhibited after approx. 1 ms.
If terminal 64 is inhibited, then nset =0 is set for all drives and the axes brake as
follows:

S For 611D/611 universal/ANA/HLA drives, the pulses are cancelled after a

selectable speed has been undershot or after a selectable timer stage has
expired. The axes brake along the selected limits (MD 1230, 1235, 1238).
For spindles, a ramp can only be achieved using regenerative limiting
(MD 1237).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-155

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Terminals L1, L2

11.05
05.01

External switching voltage for the coil circuit of the line contactor
Is used to supply the coil circuit of the internal line contactor only at the 80 kW
and 120 kW I/R modules (do not connect between the I/R module and reactor).
Fuse: Ir 4 A, version gL
2ph. 360 to 457 V AC/45 to 53 Hz; 400 to 510 V/57 to 65 Hz
Table 6-4

Technical data of the internal line and precharging contactor

I/RF module

Type

Pullin power [VA]

Holding power [VA]

50 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

6SN114j1BB0j0EA1

3TK48

330

378

36

44.2

6SN114j1BB0j0FA1

3TK50

550

627

32

39

Matching transformer for the coil connections L1, L2 at the line supply voltage 230 V and
380 V; for two 5TK50220AR0 contactors.

Table 6-5

Matching transformer SIDAC 1phase autotransformer

For 50 Hz line supplies

For 60 Hz line supplies

Type

4AM40960EM500AA0

4AM46960EM700FA0

Throughput rating [VA]

80

80

Input voltage [V]

380/230

380/230

Output voltage [V]

415 (min. 360/max. 458)

460/415

Output current [A]

0.193

0.19...0.17

Insulating material class

T40/B

T40/B

Applicable standard

EN 6155813

VDE 0532

Frequency [Hz]

50/60

50/60

Vector group

IA0

Ii0

Degree of protection

IP00

IP00

Dimension sketch

PD10 T8/2

LV 10

for voltage fluctuations

+10% 13.2 %

+10% 13.2 %

Note
If, for the 80/104 kW or 120/156 kW I/R module, the line supply voltage at
terminals L1, L2 fails or fuses F1, F2 trip, then only the pulses in the I/R module
are cancelled and the internal line contactor dropsout.
This is displayed using the line fault LED, the ready relay and also the
contactor signaling contacts. In this case, in order to reclose the internal line
contactor, terminal 48 must be inhibited (deenergized) and reenergized after
one second or the unit must be powereddown/poweredup.

Terminal R

Reset
The fault signal is reset using a pushbutton (pulse edge) between terminal R
and terminal 15.
For the SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control unit, the reset is effective if, in
addition, terminal 65 controller enable is also inhibited.

6-156

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
02.07
05.01

Terminal 112

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Setup operation
Terminal 112 is jumpered by default with terminal 9 (+24 V enable voltage).
Open:

The stepup converter voltage control is set to start inhibit, monitoring

disabled

Terminal 112 can only be used for SIMODRIVE 611 analog and not for
SIMODRIVE 611 digital/universal.

Terminals AS1,
AS2

Signaling contact, start inhibit DC link controller

Terminals AS1 AS2 closed means that start inhibit is effective
(i.e. terminal 112 = open, setup mode)
(not available for UI modules 5 kW, 10 kW, 28 kW)
Terminal 112 can only be used for SIMODRIVE 611 analog and not for
SIMODRIVE 611 digital/universal.

Terminal X131

Reference potential, electronics

If analog setpoints are routed from an external controller to the drive group, then
wire an equipotential bonding conductor via terminal X131. This cable must be
routed in parallel to the speed setpoint cable.
Crosssection = 10 mm@!

Terminals 7, 45, 44,

10, 15 (X141)

Terminals
2U1, 2V1, 2W1

Electronics power supply

S
S
S
S
S

Terminal 7:

P24

+20.4 to 28.8 V/50 mA

Terminal 45:

P15

+15 V/10 mA

Terminal 44:

N15

15 V/10 mA

Terminal 10:

N24

20.4 to 28.8 V/50 mA

Terminal 15:

0 V(only for circuits of terminals 7, 45, 44

and terminal 10; max. load, 120 mA)

Terminal 15 may not be connected to PE (ground loop)

Terminal 15 may not be connected to terminal 19 (otherwise there will be

a shortcircuit through the reactor; terminal 15 is internally connected to
X131).

Connecting terminals to separately supply the internal electronics power supply,

e.g. through fused terminals (refer to the circuit example in Section 8.3.1).
In this case, jumpers 1U12U1, 1V12V1, 1W12W1 must be removed.

Notice
Observe additional information and instructions under Section 8.3 Monitoring
module, and Section 8.15 Sixconductor connection!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-157

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

Terminal P500,
M500

02.12
05.01

Connect P500 and M500 for the internal coupling of the power supply to the DC
link, e.g. for power failure concepts.
Notice
With this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1, 2W1 of the power supply must
be supplied with the line supply voltage between the I/R module and line
reactor. The jumpers at connector X181 must under all circumstances be kept!
For a sixconductor connection (refer to Section 8.15), ensure a connection
X181 (P500/M500) to the the DC link P600/M600 as specified in Section
8.15.2!

Terminals 111, 113,

213

6
Terminals 72, 73.1,
73.2, 74 (X111)

Signaling contacts, internal line contactor

111113

NO contact

111213

NC contact

Ready relay
Terminals 72 73.1: NO contact

closed for Ready

Terminals 73.2 74: NC contact

open for Ready

In addition to the interface signals provided, the terminal signal 72/73 also includes the line supply infeed monitoring as well as signals from the watchdog
and the reset controller of the closedloop control. This signal is available to the
control unit independently of the processor.
The function of terminals 72/73 is not a safety function in the sense of the Machinery Directive 98/37/EU.
For the switch position S1.2 = ON Fault signal the relay pullsin if the following
conditions are fulfilled:

S Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 NS2 connected, terminal

48 enabled).

S No faults may be present (on any of the SIMODRIVE drives in the group).
S The NCU/CCU must have booted (SINUMERIK 840D, 810D).
For the switch position S1.2 = OFF Ready the relay is activated if the following
conditions are fulfilled:

S Terminal 48 is enabled.
S Terminals 63, 64 = on.
S VSA with High Standard/High Performance or resolver for the ready setting,
must be enabled (terminal 663, 65)
If there is a fault, the relay dropsout.
With the exception of the line monitoring function, all of the internal monitoring
functions on all of the drive modules are effective at the relevant equipment bus
and also the ready signal. For line supply faults, only the I/R module pulses are
inhibited.
Notice
The ready signal must be evaluated in the external NC control in order to derive
enable signals, inhibit signals, fault responses, etc.

6-158

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Terminals 5.1, 5.2,

5.3 (X121)

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

I2t prewarning and motor temperature monitoring

Terminals 5.1 5.2: NO contact

open for no fault

Terminals 5.1 5.3: NC contact

closed for no fault

Notice
No I2t monitoring of the infeed!
You must ensure sufficient power of the infeed module by setting this
parameter accordingly in the configuration.
Terminals 5.j must be externally evaluated for the machine responses, for
example, in the PLC. When the motor temperature monitoring responds, the
user/machine manufacturer must define what the response should/must be

S Reduce the load on the machine

S Reduce the power

S Stop
S Shutdown
If the terminal is not evaluated, and the response that makes sense for this
particular case is initiated in the machine control system, then this can destroy
the system, converter or motor!

The relay is activated if:

S At NE module

Heatsinktemperature monitoring trips

S At 611D

Motortemperature monitoring trips

Heatsinktemperature monitoring trips

I2t axis limiting responds

S At 611 universal HRS

Motortemperature monitoring trips

Heatsinktemperature monitoring trips

I2t axis limiting responds

Input current, enable circuits:

Terminals 48, 63, 64, and 65: Input current, optocoupler approx. 12 mA at +24 V
Terminal 663: Input current, optocoupler and start inhibit relay approx. 30 mA at
+24 V
When selecting the switching devices and the auxiliary contact on the main
switch, the contact reliability when switching low currents must be carefully
taken into consideration.
Switching capacity of the signaling contacts:
The max. switching power of the signaling contacts is specified in the interface
overviews of the modules in Chapters 4 and 6, and must be absolutely complied with!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-159

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

02.12
05.01

Note
All of the connected actuators, contactor coils, solenoid valves, holding brakes,
etc. must be provided with overvoltage limiting elements, diodes, varistors, etc.
This is also true for switchgear/inductances controlled by a PLC output.

Display elements
(LEDs)

The NE and monitoring modules have the following display elements (LEDs):

1 LED red

electronics power supply 15 V faulted

2 LED red

5 V voltage level faulted

3 LED green

external enable signals not present (terminal 63 and/or terminal 64

missing)

4 LED yellow DC link charged (normal operation)

5 LED red

6 LED red

line supply fault (single or multiphase power failure at terminals

U1, V1, W1) 1)
commutating reactor not available, incorrectly installed
or incorrectly selected
system fault level of the line supply or transformer too low
DC link overvoltage
possible causes: Regenerative feedback off, settingup operation,
line fault, for UI, PW either not operational or too small,
line supply voltage too high, dynamic overload, line filter
inserted between I/R and the commutating reactor

Note:
1) Detection time for linesupply failure, approx. 30 ms
Linesupply failure is detected from a 3-phase voltage < 280 V.
For a 1-phase linesupply failure, a pulse cancellation is initiated for the drive axes
after approx. 1 min. (stored signal). This is valid for
order number 6SN1114V1VV0V0VV1
Fig. 6-7

Display element, NE and monitoring module

Effects of the display states:

1
2
4
5

LED red bright:

LED red bright:
LED yellow dark:
LED red bright:

6 LED red bright:

6-160

Pulses are cancelled for the complete drive group

Pulses are cancelled for the complete drive group
Pulses are cancelled for the complete drive group
Pulses are only cancelled for the I/R module (regenerative
feedback into the line supply no longer possible.
Axes initially continue to run. Ready relay drops out)
Pulses are cancelled for the complete drive group

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Display, line fault

6 Infeed Modules
6.2 Interface overview

If a line fault is displayed or if the yellow LED does not light, the overvoltage
limiter module must be checked.
Procedure:
1. Switch the unit into a novoltage condition
2. Withdraw the overvoltage limiter module and insert connector X181 on the
NE module.
Does the NE module function correctly?
Yes > The overvoltage limiter module is defective and
must be replaced.
No > Check the line supply and possibly the NE module/group.

Note
Operation can continue, but without overvoltage protection when the
overvoltage limiter module is withdrawn and connector X181 has been
removed from the NE module!

Operation without overvoltage limiter module is not in conformance with UL!

3. Insert a new overvoltage limiter module up to its endstop and reinsert connector X181 on the overvoltage limiter module.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-161

6 Infeed Modules
6.3 Function overview and settings

6.3

05.08
05.01

Function overview and settings

General
information

A switch S1 is provided on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module that
is used to set the following functions (for UI 5 kW on the front side):
S1

ON:

Vline= 415 V"10% VDC link = 625 V1) 1

OFF:
Vline= 400 V"10% VDC link = 600 V1)

Ready signal

Regenerative feedback into the

line supply off

Regenerative feedback into the

line supply on

V+6%

Standard, refer to switch S1.1

Controlled infeed
Squarewave current operation
(on the line side)

Error message

Vline= 480

10%2)

Controlled infeed off

Sinusoidal current operation 
(on the line side)

3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 415 V AC 3ph. 480 V AC

ON 1.
ON 1.
ON 1.
S1.1
.
.
.
S1.4
4
4
4
1) Only possible for I/R modules for all
NE modules, the monitoring thresholds are increased ("2.5%).

Standard setting

2) For S1.4 = ON, S1.1, S1.3 and S1.6 have no effect.

Fig. 6-8

DIL switch S1

Note
For a configuration 480 V S1.4= ON, only controlled regenerative feedback is
realized, independent of the position of S1.5.

Notice
For I/R modules, sinusoidal current mode is the initial setting.
For operation with filters that are not listed in Table 6-6, the mode must be
changed to squarewave current mode in order to protect the filter from thermal
overload.
Before powering up or down using the main switch or a line contactor, terminal
63 (pulse enable) and/or terminal 48 (start terminal, contactor control) must be
deenergized!

Switch S1.1

6-162

OFF: I/R module

Uline = 400 V "10%; VDC link = 600 V "2.5%
UI module
Vline = 400 V "10%; VDC link = Vline  1.35
Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules)
PR on = 644 V; PR off = 618 V "2.5%
VDC link w 695 V "2.5%
ON: I/R module
Vline = 415 V "10%; VDC link = 625 V "2.5%
UI module
Vline = 415 V (440 V) "10%; VDC link = Vline  1.35
Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules)
PR on = 670 V "2.5%;
PR off = 640 V "2.5%
VDC link w 710 V "2.5%
PR = Pulsed resistor

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.3 Function overview and settings

Switch S1.2

OFF: Ready signal (X111 ready relay)

For S1.2 = OFF, the relay pullsin if the following conditions are fulfilled:
Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled)
Terminals 63, 64 = ON
No fault present (also not at the FD 611 A Standard, 611 U,
resolver and 611 D drives and HLA modules).
FD with High Standard or resolver for the setting ready is enabled (terminals 663, 65)
For 840D/810D, the NCU must have runup
ON: Fault signal (X111 ready relay)
For S1.2 = ON, the relay picks up if the following conditions are fulfilled:
Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled)
No fault present (also not at the FD 611 A Standard, 611 U,
resolver and 611 D drives and HLA modules).
FD with High Standard or resolver for the setting ready is enabled (terminals 663, 65)
For 840D and 810D the NCU must have runup

Switch S1.3

OFF: Standard setting, regenerative feedback into the line supply active
I/R modules
16 kW to 120 kW are capable of regenerative feedback.
UI module:
5 kW, 10 kW, 28 kW: The pulsed resistor in the module
is effective and active.
ON:

Regenerative feedback to the line supply is switched off

I/R modules:
16 kW to 120 kW: Regenerative feedback mode is
disabled
UI module:
5 kW, 10 kW: The pulsed resistor in the module is
not active
Valid for
UI 5 kW, Order No.: 6SN11461AB000BA1 and
UI 10 kW, Order No.: 6SN11451AA010AA1
Not valid for UI 28 kW. In this case, the external
pulsed resistor must be disconnected.

Switch S1.4

OFF: Standard setting for all NE modules, refer to S 1.1

ON: Vline = 480 V +6% / 10%; VDC link = Vline  1.35 in infeed mode
VDC link = 700 to 750 V "2.5% in regenerative feedback mode
Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules)
PR on = 744 V "2.5%;
PR off = 718 V "2.5%
VDC link w 795 V "2.5%
S1.4 exceeds the setting of S1.1
Please note! Unregulated operation in the infeed direction.

Warning
An incorrect switch setting (OFF) for S1.4 when connected to Uline = 480 V
will overload the NE module and destroy it!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-163

6 Infeed Modules
6.3 Function overview and settings

Switch S1.5

02.12
05.01

This function is only applicable in conjunction with I/R modules

Order No.: 6SN114V1BV0V0VA1
OFF: regulated infeed active (default setting)
ON:

Unregulated operation in the infeed direction VDC link = Vline  1.35

Notice:
For unregulated operation of the I/R units with Vline = 400 V/415 V, the power
must be reduced (derated) as specified in Section 5.5.

Switch S1.6

OFF: Squarewave current operation (current with a squarewave shape is

drawn from the line supply)
ON:

This function is only applicable in conjunction with I/R modules with

Order No.: 6SN114V1BV0V0VA1
sinusoidal current operation (sinusoidal current is taken from the line supply)

Combinations of the components:

Table 6-6

I/R
16 kW

6-164

Combinations (regenerative feedback into the line supply)

I/R
36 kW

I/R
55 kW

I/R
80 kW

I/R
120 kW

For internal
Cooling:

For internal
Cooling:

For internal
Cooling:

For internal
Cooling:

For internal
Cooling:

6SN1145
1BA010BAV
For external
Cooling:
6SN1146
1BB010BAV

6SN1145
1BA020CAV
For external
cooling:
6SN1146
1BB020CAV

6SN1145
1BA010DAV
For external
cooling:
6SN1146
1BB000DAV

6SN1145
1BB000EAV
For external
Cooling:
6SN1146
1BB000EAV

6SN1145
1BB000FAV
For external
cooling:
6SN1146
1BB000FAV

HFD reactor
16 kW

HFD reactor
36 kW

HFD reactor
55 kW

HFD reactor
80 kW

HFD reactor
120 kW

6SL3000
0DE216AAV

6SL3000
0DE236AAV

6SL3000
0DE255AAV

6SL3000
0DE280AAV

6SL3000
0DE312AAV

Wideband
Line Filter
16 kW

Wideband
Line Filter
36 kW

Wideband
Line Filter
55 kW

Wideband
Line Filter
80 kW

Wideband
Line Filter
120 kW

6SL3000
0BE216AAV

6SL3000
0BE236AAV

6SL3000
0BE255AAV

6SL3000
0BE280AAV

6SL3000
0BE312AAV

Basic
Line Filter
16 kW

Basic
Line Filter
36 kW

Basic
Line Filter
55 kW

6SL3000
0BE216DAV

6SL3000
0BE236DAV

6SL3000
0BE255DAV

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

6.4

Technical data

6.4.1

General information
The configuring of the infeed modules requires the performance data from the
Tables 6-9 and 6-10 and the following performance curves.

P/Prated

Pmax. block unregulated

 Pmax. sine

 PS6

 Prated

0
300

Fig. 6-9

320

340

360

380

400

420

440

460

480

Vline supply [V]

Normalized power graph

Note
When connected to line supplies with voltage fluctuations below the rated voltage, the infeed should be overdimensioned corresponding to the above diagram
(Fig. 6-9), otherwise this can lead to failures or defects.

Table 6-7

Power factory at the rated power without filter

Module

Operation on the line side

Factor cos 1)

Factor

I/R

Sinusoidal current operation

cos  0.98

 0.97

I/R

Squarewave current operation

cos  0.98

 0.89

UE

cos  0.87

 0.67

cos : The power factor only contains the basic fundamental

: The power factor contains the basic fundamental and harmonic components
1) Is valid for sinusoidal current operation at the rated voltage without filter

Note
With line filter, when the converter is operating at partial load, a capacitive phase shift occurs.
As line supplies in companies generally have an inductive phase shift, this capacitive component has a compensating effect in this line supply.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-165

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

Supply voltage
and frequency

02.12
05.01

Switches S1.1 and S1.4 (see Chapter 6.3) are used to adapt the line infeed modules to the prevailing line supply conditions.
The converter system is designed for operation on grounded line supplies TNS
and TNC (IEC 603641 VDE 0100300). For other line supply types, a transformer with separate windings in vector group yn on the secondary side must be
connected upstream (refer to Chapter 7 for the dimensioning).

Table 6-8

Supply voltage and frequency

NE-Module

Line voltage: U1, V1, W1

With derating Prated and Pmax
DC link voltage
Frequency

1)

S1.1, S1.4 = OFF

Un = 3AC 400 V

S1.1 = ON
Un = 3AC 415 V

S1.4 = ON
Un = 3AC 480 V

3AC 400 V " 10%

3AC 415 V " 10%

3AC 480 V + 6% 10%

DC 625 V

DC 580...710 V

3AC 380 V " 15%

DC 600 V
45...65 Hz

55...65 Hz

1) See Table 6-9, Technical data I/R modules

This means that the operational reliability is increased even when connected to weak line supplies!

6-166

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Table 6-9

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

Technical specifications, I/R modules

Internal cooling
External cooling
Hose cooling

6SN11 456SN11 466SN11 45-

1BA0V-0BAV 1BA0V-0CAV 1BA0V-0DAV

1BB0V-0BAV 1BB0V-0CAV 1BB0V-0DAV
1BB0V-0DAV

Infeed/regenerative
feedback
Rated power (S1)
S6 power
Peak power (400 V)

kW
kW
kW

16
21
35

36
47
70

55
71
91

1BB0V-0EAV
1BB0V-0EAV
1BB0V-0EAV

1BB0V-0FAV
1BB0V-0FAV
1BB0V-0FAV

2)

2)

80
104
131

120
156
175

Sinusoidal operation input currents (ACRMS)

Use for dimensioning the installation, not for calculating the power!

Rated current (400 V)

Arms

Squarewave operation
input currents (ACRMS)

Use for dimensioning the installation, not for calculating the power!

Rated current (400 V)

Arms

27

30

60.5

67

92.5

102

134

149

202

223

Use for dimensioning the installation, not for calculating the power! (calculated)
Rated current (400 V)
unregulated operation

Arms

33

Connection data
Voltage (power)

Vrms

refer to Chapter C.1.3, Table 3.5

Voltage (electronics)

refer to Chapter C.1.3, Table 3.5

Power supply

Vrms

At the DC link with 600/625/680 V DC or supplied in parallel, AC and DC connection or DC connection only.

Frequency

Hz

50 to 60 10%

Connection crosssection

mm2

Max. 16

Output voltage

regulated: 600/625; unregulated: 490...680 (line supplydependent)

Module width

mm

100

200

300

300

300

Type of cooling
Internal cooling
(volumetric flow rate)

m3/h

Fan
56

Fan
112

Fan
112

Builton fan
4003)

Builton fan1)
4003)

External cooling1)

Fan

Fan

Hose cooling

Mounting frame (Bestell-Nr. 6SN1162

0BA040EAV) with fan assembly and builton
fan (6SN11620BA020AA2

320
50/270

585
50/535

745
115/630
115/630

1280
190/1090
190/1090

1950
290/1660
290/1660

0.97

0.97

0.97

0.97

0.97

Losses
Internal cooling
External cooling
Hose cooling
Efficiency

W
W (int./ext.)
W (int./ext.)

74

114

165

248

Max. 50

Max. 95

Max. 95

Max. 150

Kit for hose cooling with fan

Weight
Internal cooling
kg
10.5
15.5
26
26
29
External cooling
kg
10.5
15.5
26
26
29
Hose cooling
kg

26
26
29
1) For a module width of 300 mm with external cooling, mounting frames are required that must be ordered separately.
The fan assembly required to mount the builton fan is included in the scope of supply of the mounting frame.
The builton fan must be ordered separately! Mounting frames are also available for smaller module widths. However,
these are not required if openings are cut out in the rear cabinet panel for the module heatsinks as shown in this
Configuration Manual.
2) External power supply for main contactor control required (see Chapter 6.2.5).
3) ) Must be separately ordered: Mounted fan, 6SN11620BA020AA2
4) See the diagram with pipe cooling in Chapter 2.7.1, Fig. 2-7

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-167

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

Table 6-10

05.08
02.12
05.01

Technical data, UI modules

Heat dissipation
Heat dissipation
Hose cooling

6SN11 456SN11 466SN11 45-

1AB000BAV (INT./EXT.)

1AA010AAV (INT./EXT.)

Infeed/regenerative
feedback
Rated power (S1)
S6 power
Peak power (400 V)

kW
kW
kW

5
6.5
10

10
13
25

1AA000CAV (INT.)
1AB000CAV (EXT.)

28
36
50

Input currents (
(ACRMS)

Use for dimensioning the installation, not for calculating the power!

Rated current (400 V)

12

24

68

Continuous power/
Peak power

kW

0,2/10

0,3/25

Energy consumption,
max:

kWs

E = 13,5

E = 7,5

Connection data
Voltage (power)

refer to Chapter C.1.3, Table 3.5

Voltage (electronics)

refer to Chapter C.1.3, Table 3.5

Power supply

At DC link with 600/625/680 V DC or parallel infeed, AC and DC connection

Frequency

Hz

50 to 60 10%

Connection cross
section, max.

mm2

Output voltage

0...490...680 depending on the line supply voltage

Output frequency

Hz

0...1400 depending on the control unit

Module width

mm

Built-in pulsed resistor

16

50

50

100

200

Type of cooling
Internal cooling

Nonventilated

Universal cooling

External cooling
Hose cooling

Nonventilated

internal/external

Internal separately
driven fan
Integrated thirdparty
fan (volumetric flow,
both 42 m3/hr)

270
270/

450
120/330

250
90/160

0.98

0.98

0.98

6.5
6.5

9.5
9.5

15.5
15.5

Losses
Internal cooling
External cooling
Hose cooling

W
W (int./ext.)
W (int./ext.)

Efficiency
Weight
Internal cooling
External cooling
Hose cooling

kg
kg
kg

Note
Temperature derating, see Chapter 5.4.2.
Installation altitude derating, see Chapter 5.4.3.

6-168

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

6.4.2

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

Permissible duty cycles/derating

Nominal load duty

cycles for NE
modules

For a derating, it must be analyzed as to the reason why this is required, and
which component is involved. For instance, if derating is required as a result of
the line voltage, then for uncontrolled infeed modules, the maximum motor
speed must be correspondingly adapted.

P
Pmax

P
Pmax

Ps6
Pn

Ps6
Pn

0.4 Pn

4 min

10 s

0.4 Pn

t
10 min
S6 load cycle with preload condition

t
60 s
Peak power load duty cycle with preload
P

Pn

Pn

4s

0.2 s
t

10 s

Peak power load duty cycle with preload

Fig. 6-10

F  Pn

Pmax

t
10 s
Peak power load duty cycle without preload
F: For all NE modules up to Pn v 80 kW, F = 1.6 applies
For Pn = 120 kW, F = 1.4 applies (F = factor)

Nominal load duty cycles for NE modules

Calculation of
maximum
permissible line
infeed load

The effective load must be determined over a load period/cycle and this must
be set to the ratio for the rated power of the module. The resulting weighting
factor B must not exceed the factors of the associated time interval T indicated
in Table 6-11. Note that the maximum Pmax must not be exceeded at any time
and the derating factor, depending on the pulse frequency and/or installation
altitude, must be taken into account!
As a rule of thumb, the following applies for block-type load duty cycles:
B=
T
Pn
P1...Pk
t1...tk
B

P12  t1 + P22  t2 +...+ Pk2  tk

T  Pn2

Total duration of the load duty cycle

Rated power of the I/R module
Magnitude of the required power
Duration of the corresponding power
Evaluation factor for the load duty cycle according to Table 6-11

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-169

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

02.03
05.01

P
P1
Pk
P3
P2

t
t1

t2

t3

tk

Fig. 6-11

Explanation of the rule of thumb for blocktype load duty cycles

The following applies for the rules of thumb:

S The evaluation factor B, calculated for the load duty cycle, must be less than
the maximum values Bmax specified in Table 6-11.

S The maximum infeed power Pmax of the infeed module may not be exceeded.

S The power derating as a function of the installation altitude must be taken

into account.
Table 6-11

Evaluation factor for the load duty cycle

Total duration

Bmax

T v 10 s

10 s t T v 60 s

60 s t T v 600 s

1.03

0.90

0.89

Calculation example for a blocktype load duty cycle:

Evaluation/assessment factor B should be determined for the following load
duty cycle:
Infeed module used: I/R 36 kW (Pn=36 kW; Pmax =70 kW)
i

P [kW]

50

20

36

40

t [s]

1.5

1.2

1.2

P
P1
P5
P3
P2

P4=0
t
t1

t2

t3

t4

t5

Fig. 6-12

6-170

Example, calculating a load duty cycle

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

1. Is the maximum infeed exceeded? > No > OK

2. Calculating the total duration T
T = ti = t1 + t2 +...+ tk = 1.5 s + 1 s + 2 s + 1.2 s + 1.2 s = 6.9 s
3. Calculating the evaluation/assessment factor B
B=

B=

B=

P12  t1 + P22  t2 +...+ Pk2  tk

T  Pn2
502  1.5 + 202  1 + 362  2 + 02  1.2 + 402  1.2
6.9  362
3750 + 400 + 2592 + 0 + 1920
8942.4

B=

8662

= 0.98

8942.4

4. Check, whether B is < Bmax for the calculated load duty cycle T
B = 0.98
Bmax for a load duty cycle less than 10 s = 1.03
> the load duty cycle is permissible.

Installation altitude
over 1000 m with
limitations/
secondary
conditions

All of the power ratings specified apply up to an installation altitude of 1000 m

above sea level. For installation altitudes > 1000 m above sea level, the specified power ratings must be reduced according to the derating characteristic as
shown in Chapter 5.4.3. For installation altitudes > 2000 m, an isolating transformer must be used.
For a line supply circuit with overvoltage category III, the standard prescribes
greater isolating distances at altitudes starting at 2000 m. For this reason, a
nonline supply circuit must be implemented using an isolating transformer.
The isolating transformer is used for uncoupling of a line supply circuit (overvoltage category III) to form a non-line supply circuit (overvoltage category II) in
which the available isolating distances are then sufficient.
See IEC 606641 (required for the total system).

Notice
The power ratings for Pn, Ps6 and Pmax must be reduced (derated) in the same
way.
If the power ratings are exceeded, the devices can fail prematurely.

Note
For UI modules, it must be carefully observed that the braking energy fed in
does not exceed the power rating of the pulsed resistor.
A defect does not occur; when an overload condition occurs, the resistor is shut
down.
The drive unit then goes into a fault condition, with the fault DC link
overvoltage and the motors coast down in an uncontrolled way.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-171

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

6.4.3

10.04
05.01

Technical data of the supplementary components

Cooling
components
Components

Order
number

Supply
voltage

Builton fan for internal and

external cooling

6SN11 62
0BA020AAV

3ph.
360..510 V AC
45...65 Hz

Hose cooling package 1 for

an individual module comprising:

6SN11 62
0BA030AA1

6SN11 62
0BA030CA1

S
S

S
S

Degree
of
protection

Weight
[kg]

0.2...0.3 A

For the direction

of rotation, refer
to the direction
of the arrow on
the fan

IP 44

3ph.
360..457 V AC
47.5...62.5 Hz

1.0...1.2 A

Counterclockwise direction of
rotation when
viewing the rotor

IP 54

3ph.
360..457 V AC
47.5...62.5 Hz

1.0...1.2 A

Counterclockwise direction of
rotation when
viewing the rotor

IP 54

1x cabinet connection
flange
1x radial fan with cabinet connection flange1)
(refer to Fig. 2-7)

4x module connection
flange, 2000 mm hose
1x cabinet connection
flange
1x radial fan with cabinet connection flange1)
(refer to Fig. 2-7)

Motor circuitbreaker

Air baffle plate

width 100 mm
1)

Observe the
rotating field!

2x module connection
flange, 2000 mm hose

Hose cooling package 2 for

a 2tier configuration of
I/R 55 kW and LT 200 A:

Supply
current

6-172

3RV10110DA10 0.220.32 A
3RV10110KA10 0.91.25 A

Size S0
Setting value, 0.3 A
Setting value, 1 A

3RV10210DA10 0.220.32 A
3RV10110KA10 0.91.25 A

6SN1162
0BA010AA0

Replacement filter element:

Size S00:
Setting value, 0.3 A
Setting value, 1 A

If heat sensitive parts are located above the UI and/or PR module with a
clearance < 500 mm, e.g. cable ducts, then an air baffle plate must be
used (refer to Chapter 12, Dimension drawings).

Order No. AFF0

Can be ordered from: Pfannenberg GmbH
Postfach 80747
D21007 Hamburg

Warning
The fan may only be commissioned if it is electrically connected to the module
housing (PE fan via module housing).

Caution
If the fan has the incorrect direction of rotation (refer to the arrow on the fan)
then cooling is not guaranteed!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 Infeed Modules
6.4 Technical data

05.01

Connection for
3phase fans
L1 L2 L3 PE
Observe the rotating field!
to other fans
Q

U1 V1 W1

I/R

Fan

Fig. 6-13

The motor protection

circuitbreaker Q is not included in
the scope of supply

In w 1.5 A

Connection for 3phase fans

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-173

6 Infeed Modules
6.5 HFD reactor

6.5

02.12
05.01

HFD reactor

General
information

For the unregulated 5 kW and 10 kW infeed modules, the commutating reactor

is integrated. With 28 kW, it must be external.
For connection of the regulated infeed/regenerative feedback modules to the
line supply, the HF/HFD reactor tuned to 7 kHz is required (see selection Table
6-12).
The HFD reactors perform the following functions:

S To limit the harmonics fed back into the line supply

S Energy store for the stepup operation of the infeed units
S Current limiting for line supply oscillations
S Together with a damping resistor, the HFD reactors dampen the system os-

cillations of the converter system. The HF reactors are replaced with the
HFD reactors with damping resistor because they provide increased operational reliability and a longer lifetime.
The HFD reactor should be mounted as close as possible to the line supply
infeed module.

Caution
The surface of the reactors can reach high temperatures.
The 100 mm clearance above and below the components to ensure air
circulation and cooling must be carefully maintained. If this is not observed,
then the components could prematurely age.
Temperaturesensitive components must be located a sufficient distance away
or thermally partitioned off!

Note
The connecting cables to the NE module must be kept as short as possible
(max. 5 m). For lengths exceeding 1 m, twisted shielded connection lines, with
the shielding contacting ground on both side, should be used. It is preferable
that the cable shield is connected close to the reactor footplate, using a clamp
that completely encompasses the shield

Notice
It is not permissible to use HFD reactors in the motor cable. Operation without a
damping resistor is not permissible, as high voltages (several kV) can occur if
the system oscillates

Note
If commutating reactors are used that have not been released by SIEMENS for
SIMODRIVE 6SN11, harmonics or switching edges not permitted for the
semiconductors can occur that can damage, disturb or early age other
equipment connected to the particular line supply.

6-174

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6.5.1

6 Infeed Modules
6.5 HFD reactor

Assignment of the HFD reactors/damping resistors to the NE

modules

Table 6-12

HFD reactor/damping resistor assignment, data

UI module
28/50 kW

I/RF module
16/21 kW

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

I/RF module
80/104 kW

I/RF module
120/156 kW

Type
HFD reactor

28 kW

16 kW

36 kW

55 kW

80 kW

120 kW

Order No.
6SL3000
6SN1111

1AA000CAV

0DE216AAV

0DE236AAV

0DE255AAV

0DE280AAV

0DE312AAV

Pv

70 W

170 W

250 W

350 W

450 W

590 W

Degree of protection acc. to

DIN EN 60529
(IEC 60529)

IP00

Maximum permissible ambient

temperature

S
S
S

Transport

25..+80 _C

Storage

25..+80 _C

Operation

0...+40 _C, for power derating, up to +55 _C

Connection

max. 35 mm2

max. 16 mm2

max. 35 mm2

max. 70 mm2

max. 95 mm2

Tightening torque
of terminals [Nm]

2.5

1.2

2.5

Conductor 7
PE 3...4

Springloaded terminals

Terminals of HFD resistor 1.2

Approx. weight

6 kg

8.5 kg

13 kg

18 kg

40 kg

50 kg

Mounting position

Any

Any

Any

Any

Any

Any

Terminal placement

Input: 1U1, 1V1, 1W1

HFD damping resistor

Output: 1U2, 1V2, 1W2

Refer to Table 6-15

Cooling clearances (without any additional measures, HFD line reactors can become hot!): 100 mm
Drilling template

Refer to Chapter 12 Dimension drawings

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-175

6 Infeed Modules
6.5 HFD reactor

HFD packages

02.12
05.01

The following usual HFD components can be ordered in packages:

S HFD package includes an HFD line reactor and a damping resistor

Table 6-13
For I/R
modules
16 kW

Packages without Wideband Line Filter that can be ordered

HFD package

HFD line reactor

6SN11110AA000BV0

6SL30000DE216AAV

6SN11110AA000CV0

6SN11131AA000DAV (300 W)
6SL31001BE213AAV (800 W)

6SN11110AA000BV1
36 kW

Damping resistor

6SL30000DE236AAV

6SN11131AA000DAV (300 W)
6SL31001BE213AAV (800 W)

6SN11110AA000CV1
55 kW

6SN11110AA000DV0

6SL30000DE255AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV (800 W)

80 kW

6SN11110AA000EV0

6SL30000DE280AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV (800 W)

120 kW

6SN11110AA000FV0

6SL30000DE312AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV (800 W)

S HFD package includes an HFD line reactor, a damping resistor and a

Wideband Line Filter
Table 6-14
For I/R
modules
16 kW

HFD packages with Wideband Line Filter that can be ordered

HFD package

HFD line reactor

Damping resistor

6SN11110AA001BV0

6SL30000DE216AAV

6SN11131AA000DAV
(300 W)

6SN11110AA000CV0

6SL30000BE216AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV
(800 W)

6SN11110AA001BV1
36 kW

Wideband Line Filter

6SL30000DE236AAV

6SN11131AA000DAV
(300 W)

6SL30000BE236AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV
(800 W)

6SN11110AA000CV1
55 kW

6SN11110AA000DV0

6SL30000DE255AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV
(800 W)

6SL30000BE255AAV

80 kW

6SN11110AA000EV0

6SL30000DE280AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV
(800 W)

6SL30000BE280AAV

120 kW

6SN11110AA000FV0

6SL30000DE312AAV

6SL31001BE213AAV
(800 W)

6SL30000BE312AAV

6-176

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.5 HFD reactor

HFD reactor connection

HFD reactor, terminal connection1)

HFD reactor
Order No., refer to Table 6-12

PE

PE

Shield contact

Connecting the cable

to the HFD reactor

bk

bk

V/L2
bk

W/L3/D/L

U/L1/C/L+
gn/ye

Cable labeling
Example, 800 W resistor

HFD resistor,
example 800 W

Cable connection to the resistor.

The cable length of 5 m may be
decreased but not increased.

Connection circuit, 800/1500 W resistor

Connection circuit, 300 W resistor
1
2

U/L1/C/L+

V/L2

W/L3/D/L

3
1)

Resistance

PE
PE
1) Jumper, 23PE for potential connection (EMC)
is provided as standard
Note:
It is not permissible to route cables in or close to
the warm airflow of the damping resistor!
Fig. 6-14

PE

U/L1/C/L+
V/L2
W/L3/D/L
PE

1)

Resistance

Mounting position:
Arbitrary mounting position but consider the
heat dissipation, if necessary, provide a Hot
surface warning notice!

Wiring, HFD reactor and damping resistor

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-177

6 Infeed Modules
6.5 HFD reactor

Damping resistor

05.08
02.12
05.01

Together with the HFD reactor, an external resistor must be used for damping
purposes (refer to Fig. 6-14).
Table 6-15

Technical specifications

Order No.
Rated power (kW)

Pulsed resistor
0.3/25 kW1)

HFD damping
resistor2)

Pulsed resistor
Plus 1.5/25 kW3)

6SN11131AA00
0DAV

6SL31001BE21
3AAV

6SL31001BE22
5AAV

0.3

0.8

1.5

0...230 kHz p3 dB

Special lowinductance
resistor
including the connecting
cable [m]

Connection

3 x 1.5 mm2

4 x 1.5 mm2

4 x 2.5 mm2

Weight [kg]

1.45

5.5

5.6

Degree of protection
acc. to DIN EN 60529
(IEC 60529)

IP 54

IP51

IP20

E228809

E212934

E192450

UL file
Ambient temperature
[C]
Dimensions (W x H x D)
[mm]

0...55
80 x 210 x 53

277 x 552 x 75

193 x 410 x 240

1) The 300 W resistance can be used for HFD applications if

the following is true after a warmup run when all axes are shut down in a regulated way:

After an operating period of over two hours, no temperature in excess of 150 _C

may occur on the surface of the 6SN11131AA000DA0 resistor.

This warmup run must be repeated if the hardware configuration, e.g. motor cable
lengths, is changed!
2) Preferred type
3) Alternative possible

Note
Preferably, the HFD damping resistor (6SL31001BE213AA0) should be
used. It must not be connected as an external pulsed resistor on the pulsed
resistor module or UI module!
The HFD damping resistor can become very hot. Consequently, it must be
installed so that it cannot be touched or placed at an endangered position with
an appropriate warning notice.

Danger
During operation and briefly after being switched off, the surfaces can reach
temperatures that can cause burns and results in fires

Readers note
For mounting information and instructions for external HFD resistors, refer to
Fig. 6-14 and Chapter 6.7.4.

6-178

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.6 Monitoring module

6.6

Monitoring module

6.6.1

Integration into the overall system

The monitoring module contains an electronic power supply and central monitoring functions, which are required to operate the drive modules.

6.6.2

Technical data (supplement to the general technical data)

Table 6-16

Technical data, monitoring module

Power loss

70 W

Rated supply voltage

3ph. 400 V 10% up to 480 V AC + 6%

Alternatively, rated supply voltage

DC link

600/625/680 V DC

Current consumption

for 3ph. 400 V AC: approx. 600 mA

Type of cooling

Natural ventilation

Weight

approx. 5 kg

Assessment factor for the electronic points

(EP)

Max. 8

Assessment factor for the gating points (AP)

Max. 17

The crosssection that can be connected to

the P600, N600, X131 terminal block

Max 10 mm2 for cables with

conductor end sleeves

Max 16 mm2 for cables with

pintype cable lug

Readers note
For an overview of the interfaces, refer to Section 6.2.1, Table 6-1 in the column
Terminals used under monitoring module.

For operation of the monitoring module only on the DC link, without AC power
supply, 1000 F per monitoring module must be observed for the loading limit of
the line supply.
This capacity is not included in the calculation of the permitted number of
pulsed resistors, because they are decoupled using diodes.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-179

6 Infeed Modules
6.6 Monitoring module

11.05
05.01

Changeover switch parameters

Monitoring module
(settings, refer to Section 6.3)
74
nc
73.2
73.1
nc
72

X111

5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19

X121

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET (R+term.15)

7
45
44
10
15
15
R

X141

Enable voltage
Setup operation

9
112

X161

NC
contact

Relay contact
Ready signal

NO
contact
Relay contact for group signal I2t and
motor overtemperature

Pulse enable
Enable voltage
Enable voltage
Drive enable
Reference potential for enable voltage

LED displays
X351
Mains supply
connections
Electronic
power supply
P500/M500

M500

X181

P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

Equipment bus

P600

DC link busbars
M600

DC link terminals
P600 M600 X131 PE1
Note:
For a description of the interfaces, refer to Chapter 6.2.1; Table 6-1.

Fig. 6-15

6-180

Monitoring module 6SN11121AC010AA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 Infeed Modules
6.6 Monitoring module

05.01

6.6.3

Mode of operation
Parameters critical for operation are monitored in the monitoring module these
include:

S DC link voltage
S Controller power supply ($ 15 V)
S 5 V voltage level
If these parameters are in the permissible operating range, then the internal
prerequisites for the Unit ready signal are available. The module group connected to the monitoring module is enabled as soon as the external enable signals have been issued via terminals 63 (pulse enable) and 64 (drive enable).
The total signal activates the Ready relay and can be fetched potentialfree
using the 74/73.2 and 73.1/72 terminals. The load capability of the contacts is
250 V AC/1 A or 30 V DC/1 A.
LEDs on the front panel of the monitoring module indicate the signal states of
the monitoring circuits.

LED display
Electronics power
supply faulted
Unit not ready,
external enable signals
missing
free

Fig. 6-16

red
green
red

5 V voltage
level faulted
Unit ready
yellow (DC link
precharged)
DC link
red
overvoltage
red

LED display of the monitoring module

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-181

Fig. 6-17

6-182

1)
2)
3)

1)

Switch S1.3 does not

have any function

Settings, refer to
Chapter 6.3

1)

X131 (refer to Chapter 8.2)

For a description of the interface,

refer to Chapter 6.2

Note:

1)

Delivered state OFF

Delivered state ON
Jumper closed in the delivered state

S1 1

1)

DIP switch
72

Monitoring

73.1

73.2

Signal
ready/
fault signal

NS1

74

5.3

X131

5.1

5.2

I2t prewarning
and motor
overtemperature

64

PE1

PE

EN+
7

45

P24 P15
44

10

N15 N24

M
15

P600

Electronics power supply

63

Pulse
enable

M600

15

Reset

19

EN

START

DC link
sensing

112

3)

T. 112
setup
operation

Drive
enable

X181

L1

X151

P500 M500

2U1

L3

1U1

Vact

2V1

L2

1W1 2W1 1V1

Line
rectification

Unit enable

Power supply and

signals

M600

P600

Equipment
bus

6 Infeed Modules
6.6 Monitoring module
05.08
05.01

Block diagram, monitoring module

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

6.7

DC link options

6.7.1

Capacitor module with 2.8 mF, 4.1 mF or 20 mF

Description

The capacitor modules are used to increase the DC link capacitance. This
means that on one hand, a brief power failure can be buffered and on the other
hand, it is also possible to store the braking energy.
A differentiation is made between the modules as follows:

S Modules with 2.8 mF and 4.1 mF > are used as dynamic energy storage
devices

S Module with 20 mF > is used to buffer line supply dips

The modules are available in the following versions:

S Central modules: 4.1 mF and 20 mF

SIMODRIVE housing type integrated into the system group.

S Distributed modules: 2.8 mF and 4.1 mF

New housing types are mounted decentrally in the control cabinet and
are connected to the SIMODRIVE DC link using an adapter terminal and
cable.

The capacitor modules have a ready display; this is lit from a DC link voltage of
approximately 300 V and above. This also means that if an internal fuse ruptures, it can be identified. This does not guarantee safe and reliable monitoring
of the charge state.
The module with 2.8 mF or 4.1 mF is implemented without precharging circuit
and can because it is directly connected to the DC link absorb dynamic energy and therefore operate as dynamic energy storage device. For these modules, the charge limits of the line supply modules must be carefully taken into
consideration.
For the 20 mF module, the precharging is realized through an internal pre
charging resistor; this is designed to limit the charge current and to decouple
the module from the central precharging function. This module cannot dynamically absorb any energy as the precharging resistor limits the charge current.
When the power fails (line supply failure), a diode couples this capacitor battery
to the system DC link so that it can be buffered by the capacitors.

Note
The capacitor modules may only be used in conjunction with the SIMODRIVE
611 line supply infeed units.
The central modules are suitable for internal and external cooling.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-183

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

02.12
05.01

Central
capacitor module
Width = 100 mm
or
Width = 300 mm

LED READY
Status display
is lit from VDC link > 300 V

Mounting
brackets

6
Equipment bus
(equipment bus
cable is included in
the scope of supply)
P600
DClink
M600

PE

Fig. 6-18

Central capacitor module 4.1 mF

Note
The equipment bus is only looped through the capacitor module and has no
function in the module itself. If capacitor modules are mounted at the end of the
module lineup, then the equipment bus does not have to be wired.

6-184

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

05.01

Distributed
capacitor module
Width = 100 mm

LED READY
Status display

is lit from VDC link > 300 V

Connecting terminals

Fig. 6-19

Mounting
position

Distributed capacitor module, 2.8 mF/4.1 mF

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-185

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Technical data

02.07
05.01

The following technical data applies:

Table 6-17

Technical data of the central capacitor modules

Designation

Central modules
4.1 mF

20 mF

Order number

6SN11 121AB000BA0

Voltage range

VDC 350 ... 750 V

Storage capacity
w = 1/2 x C x V2

VDC steadystate (examples)

600 V
> 738 Ws
680 V
> 948 Ws

Temperature range

0 _C to +55 _C

Weight

approx. 7.5 kg

approx. 21.5 kg

Dimensions

WxHxD
100 x 480 x 211 [mm]

WxHxD
300 x 480 x 211 [mm]

Table 6-18

6SN11 121AB000BA0

VDC steadystate (examples)

600 V
> 3 215 Ws
680 V
> 4 129 Ws
Note:
As a result of the internal pre
charging resistor, the voltage at
the capacitors is only approx.
0.94 x VDC.

Technical data of the distributed capacitor modules

Designation

Distributed modules
2.8 mF

Examples for the

calculation

4.1 mF

Order number

6SN11 121AB001AA0

Voltage range

VDC 350 ... 750 V

6SN11 121AB001BA0

Storage capacity
w = 1/2 x C x V2

VDC steadystate (examples)

600 V
> 504 Ws
680 V
> 647 Ws

Temperature range

0 _C to +55 _C

Weight

5.3 kg

5.8 kg

Dimensions

WxHxD
100 x 334 x 231 [mm]

WxHxD
100 x 334 x 231 [mm]

Connection

AWG 12 ... AWG 6 (4 ... 16 mm2) finely stranded

Degree of protection

IP 20

VDC steadystate (examples)

600 V
> 738 Ws
680 V
> 948 Ws

The storage capacity in dynamic operation and for regenerative braking is

calculated as follows:
Formula:

w = S C S (V2DC link max V2DC link n)

Assumptions for the example:

Capacitance of the capacitor battery

C = 4.1 mF

Rated DC link voltage

VDClinkn = 600 V

Maximum DC link voltage

> w = S 4.1 S

103 F

S ((695

VDClinkmax = 695 V
V)2

(600 V)2) = 252 Ws

In addition, 252 Ws for each C = 4.1 mF module can be stored for this voltage
range.

6-186

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

The following applies for the storage capacity of the capacitor battery
when the power fails:
Formula:

w = S C S (V2DC link n V2DC link min)

Assumptions for the example:

Capacitance of the capacitor battery

C = 20 mF

Rated DC link voltage

VDClinkn = 600 V

Minimum DC link voltage

VDClinkmin = 350 V

> w = S 20 S 103 F S ((600 V)2 (350 V)2) = 2375 Ws

For this voltage range, a 20 mF capacitor module can supply energy for
2375 Ws.

Notice
VDClinkmin must be y 350 V.
For voltages below 350 V, the switchedmode power supply for the electronics
shuts down.

The possible buffer time t is calculated as follows with the output DC link
power PDC link:
t = w / PDC link
Dynamic energy
The DC link capacitors should be considered as being a battery. The capacitance and, thus, the storage capacity are increased as a result of the capacitor
module.
In order to evaluate the required capacitance for a specific requirement in a certain application, the energy flow must be determined.
The energy flow depends on the following:

S All moved masses and moments of inertia

S Velocity, speed (and their change, acceleration, deceleration)
S Efficiencies: Mechanical system, gear units, motors, inverters (driving/braking)
S Backup duration, buffering
S DC link voltage and the permissible change, output value, upper/lower limit
value.
In practice, often there is no precise data about the mechanical system. If the
mechanical system data is determined using rough calculations or estimated
values, then the capacitance of the DC link capacitors required can only be determined during tests performed during the commissioning phase.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-187

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

05.01

The energy for dynamic operations is obtained as follows:

The following applies for braking or accelerating operations within time tV of a
drive from one speed/velocity to another:
w = S P S tV
For rotary drives with

P=

MMot S (nMot max n Mot min)

9 550

S G

For linear drives with

P = FMot S (VMot max VMot min) S 103 S G
with G:

Braking

G = M S INV

Acceleration

G = 1/(M S INV)

w [Ws]

Energy

P [kW]

Motor power

tV [s]

Time of the operation

Mmot [Nm]

Max. motor torque when braking or accelerating

Fmot [N]

Max. motor force when braking or accelerating

nmot max [RPM]

Max. speed at the start or the end of the operation

nmot min [RPM]

Min. speed at the start or end of the operation

vmot max [m/s]

Max. velocity at the start or end of the operation

vmot min [m/s]

Min. velocity at the start or end of the operation

Total efficiency

Motor efficiency

INV

Inverter efficiency

Torque M and force F depend on the moved masses, the load, and the acceleration in the system.
If precise data is not available for the previously specified factors, then generally
rated/nominal data is used instead.

Engineering
information

6-188

The central capacitor module should preferably be located at the end of the
system group. The connection is made using the DC link busbar.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Central module with 20 mF (width: 300 mm)

I/R

PM

PM
Adapter terminals, Order No.
for module width 50 200
mm 6SN11611AA010BA0
for module width 300 mm
6SN11611AA010AA01)

P600
M600
100
Central module with 4.1 mF (width: 100 mm)

Cable length,
max. 5 m
Danger
1) Notice!

Note:

Do not use for module widths 50 200 mm.

Danger of death because the contact safety is
endangered!
Distributed module
Fig. 6-20

The distributed
capacitor modules
may only be
mounted and
installed vertically.

Mounting location for the capacitor modules

Depending on the line infeed used, several capacitor modules can be connected in parallel.
For the capacitor modules with 2.8 mF and 4.1 mF, the total charge limit of the
line infeed may not be exceeded (refer to Chapter 1.3).

Capacitor modules
that can be
connected

The capacitor modules 2.8 mF and 4.1 mF (central/distributed) must be dimensioned/selected corresponding to the engineering table 1-4 in Chapter C.1.1
taking into account the charge limits of the infeed.
The 20 mF capacitor modules do not have to be taken into account in the 1-4
engineering table. They must be selected as required taking into account the
maximum number from Table 6-19.
Table 6-19

Maximum number of 20 mF capacitor modules

Infeed unit

Maximum that can be connected1)

UI 5 kW

UI 10 kW
I/R 16 kW

UI 28 kW
I/R 36 kW...120 kW

1) Valid if all of the monitoring modules used are connected to the AC line supply.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-189

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Charge times
Discharge times
Discharge voltage

05.08
05.01

Before performing any commissioning or service work, check that the DC link is
safely disconnected from the power supply.
Table 6-20
Capacitor
module

Charge/discharge times, discharge voltage

The charge time
depends on the
total DC link
capacitance

The discharge time depends on the total DC

link capacitance to 60 V of the DC link voltage
at 750 V DC

2.8 mF/4.1 mF

As for the
power modules

approx. 30 min

20 mF

approx. 2 min

approx. 30 min

If there is a pulsed resistor in the system, in order to reduce the discharge time
after opening terminal 48, the DC link can be quickly discharged via terminals
X221:19 and 50 (jumpers). In this case, the electronics power supply must be
implemented using a 3phase line supply connection; this is not disconnected
while discharging.

Note
Discharge through a pulsed resistor is not possible for a 5 kW UI!

Warning
The pulsed resistor modules can only convert a certain amount of energy into
heat (refer to Table 6-24). The energy available to be converted depends on
the voltage.
A monitoring function protects the resistance against overload. If this responds,
then no additional energy is converted into heat in the resistor.

Caution
In order to avoid damage to the infeed circuit of the NE modules, when
controlling/energizing terminal X221 T.19/50, it should be ensured that terminal
48 of the NE module is deenergized (the module is electrically isolated from the
line supply).
The feedback signal contacts of the main contactor of the NE module must be
evaluated to check whether the contactor has actually dropped out (X161
terminal 111, terminal 113 and terminal 213).

6-190

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.08
05.01

6.7.2

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Pulsed resistor module and unregulated line supply infeed with

pulsed resistor
The pulsed resistor module (PR module) protects the DC link from overvoltage,
which, for example, would occur for UI modules when braking or for I/R modules
when the power fails when stopping. The possible braking power of the total
system can be increased by using one or more pulsed resistor modules.
The pulsed resistor module can be used to quickly discharge the DC link.
If the pulsed resistor (PR) module is supplied from a monitoring module, the
electronics power supply must be implemented with a 3phase AC supply
system. Fast discharge is not possible if the electronics power supply is exclusively implemented through the DC link (P500/N500).
If heatsensitive components, e.g. cable ducts, are located above the module
with a clearance < 500 mm, then an air baffle plate must be provided
(Order No. 6SN11620BA010AA0).
As a result of the universal housing design of the pulsed resistor module, this
can be used both for internally as well as externally cooled module groups.
The UI and PR modules are equipped with a switchon time monitoring; this
protects the pulsed resistor from overheating.
The switchin and switchout thresholds depend on the setting of the line infeed switch S 1.1 or S 1.4, see Chapter 6.3.
Table 6-21

Technical data, PR module

Rated supply voltage

Continuous power/peak power/energy
Permitted load cycle, refer to
Section 6.7.4

435/490/600/625/680 V DC

S
S

with internal pulsed resistor

P = 0.3/25 kW; E = 7.5 kWs
with an external pulsed resistor module
P = 1.5/25 kW; E = 13.5 kWs

Weight

approx. 5 kg

Module width

50 mm

Order number

6SN11 131AB010AA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-191

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

05.08
05.01

Connection
PR module
When supplied:
Connector with a jumper between 1R and 2R
internal resistor active

Connecting an external resistor:

Connector without jumper
Internal resistor is not active
External resistor is active

Thermally conductive
plate1)

PR module

DC link fast
discharge

PR module

DC link fast
discharge

X221
50
19

X151

X221
50
19

X351

X151

X351

P600

P600

M600

M600

PE
2R

3R

2R

1R

3R

1R

PE

PE

Shield connecting plate

With internal pulsed resistor
1) Installation, see Chapter 12, Fig. 12-63
Fig. 6-21

With external pulsed resistor

PR module, Order No.: 6SN11131AB010BAV

Note
Only the external PR 6SL3 1001BE225AA0 can be connected.

Notice
Fast discharge is possible only when a 3phase AC line supply is present!

6-192

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Table 6-22
Term.
No.

Interface description for PR modules

Designation

PE
P600
M600

Function

Type
1)

Max.
crosssection

Protective conductor
DC link
DC link

I
I/O
I/O

Screw
Busbar
Busbar

X151/X351

Equipment bus

I/O

Ribbon cable

1R,
2R,
3R

TR1,

TR2

Connection of an external resistor

(remove the 1R 2R jumper!)

I/O

6 mm2/4 mm2 2)

19
50

X221
X221

Reference potential 0 V
Fast discharge = 0 V

O,P
I

1.5 mm2
1.5 mm2

1) I = input; O = output; P = only for PELV voltage

2) The first data is used for pintype cable lug.
The second data is used for finelystranded conductors without end sleeve.

Number of pulsed resistors used on the same DC link

The following condition must be fulfilled:
T = RN  CDC link w 7.5 ms
1/RN = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + 1/R3 +...+ 1/Rn
RN

Resistance of the parallelconnected resistors in the system

(15 ohm/resistor)

CDC link [F] Total of all DC link capacities of the drive group
Secondary condition:
CDC link with pulsed resistor of at least 500 F per resistor
Note
For a module group with pulsed resistor modules, they must be operated on
the same power supply (device bus) of the I/R or monitoring module to ensure
a simultaneous activation and deactivation of the resistors. Otherwise individual
resistors/pulsed resistance modules can be overloaded.
For UI modules that use the integrated pulsed resistors, additional pulsed
resistor modules must be operated on the device bus (PS) of the UI module!
An additional pulsed resistor module is not permitted for the 5 kW UI module!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-193

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

6.7.3

02.07
02.12
05.01

External pulsed resistors

With externally attached pulsed resistors, the power loss of the resistor that occurs during braking accumulates outside the control cabinet and, thus, does not
place a thermal load on the control cabinet.
The external pulsed resistors are generally required for the 28 kW UI module.
Depending on the power requirement, up to two equal pulsed resistors can be
connected in the case of the 28 kW UI module. The protection function is parameterized via the connecting terminals.
Table 6-23

Technical specifications
Data

External pulsed resistor

0.3/25 kW (15 )

Plus 1.5/25 kW (15 )

Order number

6SN11131AA000DA0
(only for 28 kW UI module/
HFD)

6SL31001BE225AA0

Degree of protection acc. to

DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

IP54

IP20

Weight [kg]

3.4

5.6

Type of cooling

Natural ventilation

Natural ventilation

Dimensions (W x H x D) [mm]

80 x 210 x 53

193 x 410 x 240

including the connecting cable

[m]

External PR 0.3/25 kW

Mounting
position

External PR Plus 1.5/25 kW

Connecting cable

Note:
Connecting cable
Carefully note the mounting position, base mounting is possible.
When mounting the pulsed resistor it must be carefully ensured that it is not located
in the cooling airflow of the drive group and there is sufficient clearance to the cable
ducts.
Fig. 6-22

6-194

Pulsed resistor, external

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

Table 6-24
Description

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Braking power of the UI and pulsed resistor modules (PR)

External PR 0.3/25 kW1)

External PR Plus 1.5/25 kW

Order number

6SN11131AA000DA0

6SL31001BE225AA0

Can be used
for

28 kW UI module

28 kW UI module
PR module 6SN11131AB0
0BA
6SN11131AB0V0BAV
S Attenuation: 0...230 kHz  3 dB
S Must be used together with HFD commutating reactor for damping

Pn

0.3 kW

1.5 kW

Pmax

25 kW

25 kW

Emax

7.5 kWs

180 kWs

Dimension drawings, refer to Chapter 12

1) External PR can also be used for damping after a protecting measurement on the HFD reactor.

Mounting
positions

The resistor can be mounted either horizontally or vertically.

PE

red, blue, PE (green yellow), each 1.5 mm2

Shielded 3 m connecting cable, can be extended up to max. 10 m

Fig. 6-23

Connection for external pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW

U/L1/C/L+ V/L2 W/L3/D/L PE

3R

1R

PE PE

The shield is connected through a PG gland

Shielded connecting cable (braided shield), crosssection 2.5 4 mm2,
max. length 10 m
Fig. 6-24

Connection for external PR for braking power ratings up to 1.5/25 kW

Note
Conductors that are not used in multiconductor cables must always be
connected to PE at both ends.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-195

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

28 kW UI module

02.07
05.01

The UI 28 kW module requires external pulsed resistors. Up to two identical

resistors with the same power rating can be connected.

Connecting
external pulsed
resistors to the 28
kW module

Ext. pulsed resistor

Shield contact
TR1

TR1

TR2
TR2

Fig. 6-25

Table 6-25

Connecting the external pulsed resistor with shield connection

Permissible ways of connecting external pulsed resistors to a

28 kW UI
PR

Terminal block TR1

0.3/25 kW
1R
2R
3R

Terminal block TR2

1)

PR
0.3 kW

1R
2R
3R

1)

PR
0.3 kW

1R
2R
3R

2 x 0.3/25 kW=0.6/50 kW
1R
2R
3R
1.5/25 kW

2 x 1.5/25 kW=3/50 kW

1R
2R
3R
1R
2R
3R

PR
1.5
kW/25
PR
1.5 kW

1)

PR
0.3 kW

1R
2R
3R
1R
2R
3R

PR
1.5 kW

1) Jumper for coding the thermal limit characteristic

Note
An external resistor cannot be connected to a 5 kW or 10 kW UI.

6-196

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

6.7.4

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

Engineering information is applicable for UI 5 kW, 10 kW, 28 kW

and PR module
Sizing the load duty cycles with pulsed resistors
E [Ws]

Regenerative feedback energy when braking a motor from n2

to n1

T [s]
A [s]
J [kgm2]

Period of the braking load duty cycle

Load duration
Total moment of inertia (including J motor)

M [Nm]

Braking torque

n [RPM]
Pn [W]

Speed
Continuous power rating of the pulsed resistor

Pmax [W]

Peak power of the pulsed resistor

Emax [Ws]

Energy of the pulsed resistor for a single braking operation

6
Load duty cycles
for braking
operations

P (kW)
Pmax
Pn
0 kW

0 kW

T
Fig. 6-26
Table 6-26

Example

t (s)

Load duty cycle for internal and external pulsed resistors

Examples

Values

PR 0.2/10 kW

Emax
Pn
Pmax

13500 Ws 1)
200 W
10000 W

7500 Ws
300 W
25000 W

180000Ws
1500 W
25000 W

A=
T=

0.2 s
10 s

0.12 s
10 s

0.6 s
10 s

A=
T=

1.35 s
67.5 s

0.3 s
25 s

7.2 s
120 s

PR 0.3/25 kW

PR 1.5/25 kW

1) As a result of the mechanical dimensions, the resistor can absorb a relatively high level of energy.

The following conditions must be fulfilled:

1. Pmax w M S 2 S S n/60
2. Emax w E; E=J S [(2 S S n2/60)2(2 S S n1/60)2]/2
3. Pn w E/T

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6-197

6 Infeed Modules
6.7 DC link options

05.01

6-198

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Line Supply Connection

7.1

Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

Supply voltage
and frequency

For technical data, refer to Chapter 6.4 and Tables 7-1/7-2.

Compatibility/
noise immunity

SIMODRIVE infeed units are designed to be connected to line supplies with

compatibility level, Class 3 of electromagnetic environments in industrial plants
and systems according to IEC/DIN EN6100024:2002.
When the EMC mounting/installation guidelines are complied with, noise immunity values according to IEC/DIN EN6100062 Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Generic Standard, Noise Immunity/emission Part 2: Industrial environments (1999) are complied with.

Direct connection
to line supplies
with selective
AC/DCsensitive
RCCBs

The SIMODRIVE unit may be directly connected to TN line supplies with selectively tripping, AC/DCsensitive RCCBs as protective measure.
Upstream devices providing protection against hazardous leakage currents or
for fire protection (such as residualcurrent protective devices) must be universal currentsensitive in accordance with the requirements of DIN EN 50178. In
the case of other residualcurrent protective devices, a transformer with separate windings must be connected upstream of the converter for purposes of
decoupling.

Connection schematic with RCCB

Line
supply/transformer
for the factory

L3
L2
L1
PEN
Selective
AC/DCsensitive
Residualcurrent circ.
breaker (RCCB)

Fuses

Line filter

Commutating reactor(s)

PE
U1 V1 W1
NE module

Fig. 7-1

Residualcurrent circuitbreaker (RCCB) connection schematic

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-199

7 Line Supply Connection

7.1 Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

02.12
05.01

Note
If a fault current protective device is used on the line supply side of this
electronic device for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only Type B
is permitted! Otherwise, another protection measure must be applied, such as
separating the electronic device from the environment through
double/reinforced insulation or separating the electronic device from the line
supply through a transformer.

Note
Points to bear in mind:

S It is only permissible to use a delayedtripping, (selective) AC/DC

S
S

S
S
S

currentsensitive residualcurrent protective device (RCCB) (connection as

shown in Fig. 7-1).
Parts of the electrical equipment and machine that can be touched are
integrated in a protective grounding system.
It is not possible to connect RCCBs in series in order to implement selective
tripping.
The max. permissible ground resistance of the selective protection device
must be observed (83 max. for RCCBs with a rated differential current Inn
= 0.3 A).
The total length of the shielded power cables used in the drive group (motor
cable, incl. supply cables from supply system filters to the NE connection
terminals) is less than 350/500 m for sinusoidal/squarewave current.
Operation is only permitted with line filters. Only the line filters described in
Chapter 7 may be used.

Notice
The currently widely established AC or pulsecurrent sensitive Type A are
definitely not suitable!

Recommendation

7-200

For selective, AC/DC-sensitive residual-current protective devices offered by

Siemens that comply with DIN VDE 0100 T480 and EN 50178, i.e. Series 5SM3
6464 short-time delayed or Series 5SM3 6465 selective with auxiliary disconnector (1 NC/1 NO) for rated current of 63 A, rated fault current Inn = 0.3 A, see
Catalog BETA Modular Installation DevicesETB1)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.1 Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

Harmonics fed
back into the line
supply/noise
emission

When the requirements regarding system fault level are observed and when
using the appropriate line supply filters, the harmonics fed back into the line
supply lie below the compatibility level of Class 3 of the electromagnetic environment of industrial plants and systems according to EN6100024:2002.
When the recommended SIEMENS line filter is used and the EMC mounting/
installation regulations are complied with, the noise emission limits according to
EN500812 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Generic Standard, Noise
Immunity/emission Part 2: Industrial environments (1993) are complied with.
Notice
If line filters are used that SIEMENS has not certified for use with SIMODRIVE
6SN11xx/6SLxx, this can result in harmonics being fed back into the line
supply. These harmonics can damage/disturb other equipment connected to
this line supply. Certification, e.g. CE is invalid.
Certificates from Siemens are invalid, for example CE , UL. You are responsible
for generating/obtaining the certificates for this new combination.
It is not permissible to connect additional loads after the line filter

Table 7-1

Line supply connection conditions for NE modules

Module

Description

The NE modules are designed for symmetrical 3phase line supplies with grounded neutral point: TN systems. No further
consumers with asymmetric load (singlephase) may be connected for transformers with nonloadable neutral point.
The line supply specifications according to EN 50178 are complied with as a result of the series (upstream) line reactor (for
5 kW and 10 kW UI, these are integrated in the module).
Notice
The described minimum line supply fault level is needed to trigger the fuses in the case of ground fault and shortcircuit within
the prescribed time in order to protect the plant and prevent damage and faults at other devices.
An insufficient system fault level (shortcircuit power) increases the triggering and also prevents the triggering of the fuses.
This can cause, for example, arcs with the consequent fire of danger.
The following applies for several converters connected to one line supply:
The SK of the line supply must as a minimum, be sufficient for the highest rating converter connected to it. When selecting
and dimensioning the protective elements, Chapter 7.3 must be carefully observed!
The required apparent power of the line supply for each NE module is Sn = Pn S 1.27. When operating one infeed alone on
a matching transformer, as a minimum, an SK of 0.73 times the value from the table is permissible.
UI modules
I/R module

Operation on line supplies from SKline/Pn w 30

Pn I/R module

Sinusoidal current operation (S1.6

= ON)

Squarewave current operation

(S1.6 = OFF)

16 kW

SK line w 1.0 MVA

(70 S PnI/R module in kW)

SK line w 1.5 MVA

(100 S PnI/R module in kW)

36 kW

SK line w 2.5 MVA

(70 S PnI/R module in kW)

SK line w 3.5 MVA

(100 S PnI/R module in kW)

55 kW

SK line w 4.0 MVA

(70 S PnI/R module in kW)

SK line w 5.5 MVA

(100 S PnI/R module in kW)

80 kW

SK line w 5.0 MVA

(60 S PnI/R module in kW)

SK line w 6.5 MVA

(80 S PnI/R module in kW)

120 kW

SK line w 7.0 MVA

(60 S PnI/R module in kW)

SK line w 9.5 MVA

(80 S PnI/R module in kW)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-201

7 Line Supply Connection

7.1 Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

Table 7-2

No ground faults

7-202

Engineering information, if you dimension and select the transformer

yourself

Used
I/R module
Pn/P^

Required rated power Sn of the

isolating/autotransformer

Required uk short
circuit voltage

16/21 kW

Sn w 21 kVA

uk v 3%

36/47 kW

Sn w 46 kVA

uk v 3%

55/71 kW

Sn w 70 kVA

uk v 3%

80/120 kW

Sn w 102 kVA

uk v 3%

120/156 kW

Sn w 153 kVA

uk v 3%

Required rated power Sn of the

isolating/autotransformer

Required uk short
circuit voltage

5/10 kW

Sn w 6.4 kVA

uk v 10%

10/25 kW

Sn w 13 kVA

uk v 10%

28/50 kW

Sn w 36 kVA

uk v 10%

UI module
used
Pn/P^

05.08
05.01

Before poweringup the system for the first time, the cabinet wiring, the motor/
encoder feeder cables and DC link connections must be carefully checked to
ensure that there are no ground faults.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.1 Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

Overvoltage limiter modulel

Application

The overvoltage limiter module limits overvoltages at the line supply input to
acceptable values. These overvoltages can occur, e.g. due to switching operations at inductive loads and line supply matching transformers.
The overvoltage limiting module is used for upstream transformers or for line
supplies that are not in conformance with IEC (unstable line supplies) or in line
supplies where frequently switching operations occur, e.g. involving larger motors (from approx. 30 kW). The overvoltage limiting module is mandatory if the
NE module is to be used in conformance with UL.
For NE modules from 10 kW and higher (100 mm wide), the overvoltage limiting
module can be inserted at interface X181.
For the 5 kW overvoltage limiting module, an appropriate protective circuit is
already integrated as standard.

Note

It is absolutely necessary to use the overvoltage limiting module:

S For line supplies in which higher power loads are directly connected
(depending on the line supply stiffness and extent of the line supply, already
necessary from 20 kW and above), and if

S Line supplies, that do not reliably fulfill the line supply specifications
according to IEC/EN 6100024.

Table 7-3

Rated conditions

Technical specifications

Max. energy absorption

100 Joule

Weight

approx. 0.3 kg

Dimensions (H x W x D)

76 mm x 70 mm x 32.5 mm

Power module depth with overvoltage limiter module

325 mm

Order number

6SN11 110AB000AA0

The following operating conditions apply:

S A voltage limiter must be used when transformers are used in front of the
NE module.

S This limits the voltage for overvoltage condition caused by switching operations, when the line supply frequently fails, for arcing etc.

S Plants and systems that are to fulfill UL/CSA requirements must be

equipped with overvoltage limiter modules.

S To protect the devices against lineside overvoltages, it is recommended

that an overvoltage protection device is used directly at the supply point, in
front of the main switch. In order to comply with the requirements of CSA
C22.2 No. 1405, an overvoltage protection device is absolutely mandatory.
For suitable surge arresters, refer to www.raycap.com for example
www.raycap.com.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-203

7 Line Supply Connection

7.1 Line supply connection conditions for line supply infeed

Assembly

02.12
05.01

1. Disconnect the equipment from the power source and ensure that it is in a
novoltage condition.
2. Withdraw connector X181 from the NE module.
3. Insert the overvoltage limiter module into connector X181 up to its endstop.
4. Insert connector X181 onto the overvoltage limiter module.

Fig. 7-2

Overvoltage limiter module

Notice
If the system is subject to a highvoltage test, then the overvoltage limiting module must be withdrawn in order to prevent the voltage limiting function from
responding

7-204

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

7.2

Voltage matching

7.2.1

General
A distinction is made between:

S Line connection components to be directly connected to the line supply

S Line connection components to be directly connected to an autotransformer
S Line connection components to be directly connected to an isolating transformer

Note
If isolating transformers are used upstream (in front of) I/R and UI modules, an
overvoltage limiter module (Order No.: 6SN11110AB000AA0) must be used,
refer to Chapter 6.7.2.
For 5 kW UI module (Order No.: 6SN11462AB000BA1), a voltage limiter
circuit is included.

7.2.2

Line supply types

The air and creepage distances in the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system
have been dimensioned for rated voltages up to 520 V AC, 300 V phase
grounded neutral point.
This voltage may never be exceeded as otherwise the converter insulation
system would be damaged and would result in inadmissibly high touch voltages.

Caution
The drive converters may only be connected to TN line supplies, either directly
or through an autotransformer.
The SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system is insulated in compliance with
DIN EN 618005x. This means that the insulation system is designed for
direct connection to a TN line supply with grounded neutral point. For all other
line supply types, an isolating transformer with neutral point on the secondary
side must be used upstream (in front of) the units. This transformer is used to
decouple the line supply circuit (overvoltage Category III) from a non
linesupply circuit (overvoltage Category II), refer to IEC 606441.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-205

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Connection types

02.12
05.01

The infeed can be directly connected to a TN line supply for 3ph. 400 V AC,
3ph. 415 V AC, 3ph. 480 V AC
For other voltage levels, the infeed can be connected through an autotransformer.

Example:
TNC line supply
TNC line supply direct connection schematic
Line supply/transformer for the factory

TNC line supply with autotransformer direct connection

schematic
Line supply/transformer for the factory

L3

L3

L2

L2

L1

L1

N (5 conductor)
PEN

PEN

7
Line filter

Autotransformer

Commutating
reactor

Line filter
PE

Commutating
reactor

U1 V1 W1

PE
U1 V1 W1
NE module

NE module

Fig. 7-3

TNC line supply connection schematic

TNC line supply

TNS line supply
TNCS line
supply

Symmetrical 4conductor or 5conductor threephase line supply with

grounded neutral point with a protective and neutral conductor connector connected at the neutral point which, depending on the line supply type, uses one
or several conductors.
For other line supply types 1) the NE module must be connected through
an isolating transformer.

1)

Harmonized transformer types are described in Siemens Catalog NC 60.

7-206

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

TT line supply

Symmetrical 3conductor or 4conductor threephase line supply with a directly grounded point. The loads are grounded, e.g. with grounds that are not
electrically connected to the directly grounded point of the line supply.

Connection schematic, TT line supply

with grounded neutral point and
isolating transformer
Line supply/transformer for the factory

TT line supply grounded phase conductor

and isolating transformer connection schematic
Line supply/transformer for the factory
L3

L3

L2

L2

L1

L1

PE

PE

Line filter

Line filter

Commutating
reactor

Commutating
reactor
PE

PE
U1 V1 W1
NE module

Fig. 7-4

Isolating
transformer

Isolating
transformer

U1 V1 W1
NE module

TT line supplies connection schematic

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-207

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

IT line supply

11.05
05.01

Symmetrical 3conductor or 4conductor threephase line supply with no directly grounded point. The loads are connected, e.g. with grounds.

IT line supply and isolating transformer

connection schematic
Line supply/transformer for the factory

IT line supply and isolating transformer

connection schematic
Line supply/transformer for the factory
L3

L3

L2

L2

L1

L1
PE

PE

Isolating
transformer
Line filter

Isolating
transformer
Line filter

Commutating
reactor

Commutating
reactor
PE
U1 V1 W1
NE module

Fig. 7-5

PE
U1 V1 W1
NE module

IT line supplies connection schematic

Thus, within the pulsed transistor converter, the voltage stressing on the insulating clearances between the power circuits at the line supply potential and the
open and closedloop control circuits referred to the protective conductor potential, according to a rated voltage of 300 V complies with IEC/DIN EN 50178.
Due to the 6pulse 3phase bridge circuit in the line supply infeed module, any
fault currents will contain DC components. This must be taken into consideration when selecting/dimensioning a fault current protective device, e.g. an
RCCB.

7-208

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7.2.3

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Minimum crosssections for PE (protective conductor)/equipotential

bonding conductor
Table 7-4

Minimum crosssections for PE (protective conductor)

Prated
[kW]

Irated
[A]

PE
[mm2]

PE
[AWG/kcmil]

1.5

16

10

14

14

28

40

10

16

23

4/10

10

36

52

16

55

79

16

80

115

25

120

173

50

1/0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-209

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

7.2.4

11.05
02.07
05.01

Transformers
For the assignment of transformers (auto/isolating transformers) with supply
voltages of 3ph. 220 V AC to 3ph. 575 V AC to the NE modules, refer to Sections 7.3.2 to 7.3.4.

Line supply
connection/
transformer for
the plant

SK line

SK plant = SK line

Additional loads/
machines

Matching transformer for the

machine

For isolating transformer:

Ground the star point!
SK transformer

Line filter

Line filter

Commutating
reactor

Commutating
reactor
U1 V1 W1

U1 V1 W1
PE

PE
NE module

Fig. 7-6

Vector group

NE module

Connection schematic, matching transformer

Suggestion: Dyn0 or Yyn0; this means either a delta or star circuit on the primary side and star circuit on the secondary side where the neutral point is
broughtout. For the connection, refer to Section 7.2.2.

Note
Switching elements (main switch, contactors) for connecting and disconnecting
the line filter must feature a max. 35 ms delay time between closing and
opening individual main contacts.

7-210

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Matching
transformer
configuration

A SIMODRIVE NE module and other loads/machines are connected at the

matching transformer (refer to Fig. 7-7).

Line supply
connection/
transformer for
the plant

SK plant
For isolating
transformer:
Ground the star
point!1)
SK transformer

Matching transformer for the

machine

Line fuses

SK line

Additional loads/
machines

Line fuses

Line filter

Commutating
reactor
U1 V1 W1
PE
NE module
1) Loadability, note dependent of the vector group!
Fig. 7-7

Connection schematic, matching transformer for additional loads

A matching transformer must be dimensioned for the total of all loads connected
to it. The apparent power required for the NE modules must be determined and
added as shown in Chapter C.1.3, Table 7-1. If the transformer Sn or SK is too
small, this can lead to increased line voltage dips and faults in the system and
in other loads at this connecting point.
The shortcircuit power must be adequately dimensioned so that the overcurrent protective device reliably trips.

Warning
A sufficiently high system fault level (shortcircuit power) is required to ensure
that when a ground fault does occur, the fuses rupture in the specified time. An
insufficient system fault level (shortcircuit power) increases the time to trip
beyond permissible levels (e.g. a fire is possible).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-211

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Sn calculation of
the matching
transformer for an
NE module

05.08
05.01

S Condition a)
The rated power (Sn) of the matching transformer must be:
Sn1 w 1.27  Pn (I/R module [kW])

[kVA]

Example: The minimum rated power of a matching transformer

for I/R module 16/21 is 21 kVA.

S Condition b)
In order to avoid faults and disturbances at the other loads, that are connected to the secondary side of the matching transformer, the sum of the
system fault level (shortcircuit power) of the plant connection and that of
the matching transformer at the connection point (SK line supply) must contain at least the values shown in Table 7-1, Chapter C.1.3. Depending on the
vector group of the transformers, e.g. YYn0, asymmetric loading of the N/MP
may not be permitted.
Consequently, the required rated power Sn2 of the matching transformer is calculated.
Sn2 +

SK plant  SK line  uk

[kVA]

(SK plant SK line)  100

This means:
Sn1, Sn2 Calculated rated power of the matching transformer
uk
Shortcircuit voltage of the matching transformer as % (see Table 7-2)
SK
Shortcircuit power.
SK plant if necessary, consult the utility company
SK line = at least the value contained in Chapter C.1.3,Table 7-1

Note:

The system fault level at the plant connection SK plant plays a decisive role in
dimensioning/selecting the matching transformer.
From the rated power (Sn1 or Sn2) calculated under a) and b), the higher must
be used for the matching transformer.

Examples

Matching transformer for 16/21 kW I/R module sinusoidal current:

uk matching transformer = 3%; SK plant = 50000 kVA ; SK line for I/R 16/21 kW
sinusoidal current according to Table 7-1: SK line = 1120  0.73 = 820 kVA
based on a)
Sn1 = 1.27  16 kW = 21 kVA
based on b)
Calculation of Sn2
Case 1:
Sn2 +

50000  820  3

= 25 kVA

(50000 820)  100

Sn2 > Sn1 Sn2 is decisive

The matching transformer requires a rated power Sn of 25 kVA
at a uk of 3%.
Case 2:
If the uk of the matching transformer is less than, e.g. uk=1%
for otherwise unchanged conditions for Case 1:
50000  820  1
Sn2 +
= 8.3 kVA
(50000 820)  100
Sn1 > Sn2 Sn1 is decisive
The matching transformer requires an Sn rated power of 21 kVA
at a uk of 1%.

7-212

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Case 3:
If SK plant is less, then a transformer with a higher rating must
be selected, e.g. SK plant = 3000 kVA; otherwise as for Case 1:
Sn2 +

3000  820  3

= 34 kVA

(3000 820)  100

Sn2 > Sn1 % Sn2 is decisive

The matching transformer requires a rated power Sn of 34 kVA
at a uk of 3%.
Case 4:
When compared to Case 3, the uk of the matching transformer
is reduced to, e.g. uk = 1%:
Sn2 +

3000  820  1

= 11.3 kVA

(3000 820)  100

Sn1 > Sn2 Sn1 is decisive

The matching transformer requires a rated power Sn of 21 kVA
at a uk of 1%.

Note
Sn2 for the matching transformer can be reduced by reducing uk.

Sn calculation of
the matching
transformer for
several loads

S Condition a)
The rated power (Sn) of the matching transformer must always be:
Sn1 w 1.27  Pn (I/R module [kW])

[kVA]

S Condition b)
In order to avoid faults and disturbances at the other loads, that are connected to the secondary side of the matching transformer, the sum of the
system fault level (shortcircuit power) of the plant connection and that of
the matching transformer at the connection point (SK line supply) must contain at least the values shown in Table 7-1, Chapter C.1.3. Depending on the
vector group of the transformers, e.g. YYn0, asymmetric loading of the N/MP
may not be permitted.
Consequently, the required rated power Sn2 of the matching transformer is calculated.
Sn2 +

Note:

SK plant  SK line  uk

[kVA]

(SK plant SK line)  100

The system fault level at the plant connection SK plant plays a decisive role in
dimensioning/selecting the matching transformer.
From the rated power (Sn1 or Sn2) calculated under a) and b), the higher must
be used for the matching transformer.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-213

7 Line Supply Connection

7.2 Voltage matching

Examples

05.08
05.01

Matching transformer for 36/47 kW I/R module sinusoidal current:

uk matching transformer = 3%; SK plant = 50000 kVA ; SK line for I/R 36/47 kW
sinusoidal current according to Table 7-1: SK line = 2520 kVA
based on a)
Sn1 = 1.27  36 kW = 45.72 [ 46 kVA
based on b)
Calculation of Sn2
Case 1:
Sn2 +

50000  2520  3
(50000 2520)  100

= 79.61 [ 80 kVA

Sn2 > Sn1 Sn2 is decisive

The matching transformer requires a rated power Sn of 80 kVA
at a uk of 3%.
Case 2:
If the uk of the matching transformer is less than, e.g. uk=1%
for otherwise unchanged conditions for Case 1:
Sn2 +

50000  2520  1
(50000 2520)  100

= 26.54 [ 27 kVA

Sn1 > Sn2 Sn1 is decisive

The matching transformer requires an Sn rated power of 46 kVA
at a uk of 1%.

7-214

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

7.3
Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main
switch
7.3.1

Assignment of the line fuses to the NE modules

Fuses or circuit breakers are necessary to protect the cables against shortcircuit/ground fault, to limit any damage to the converter, provide protection
against electric shock and to avoid fire in the case of a fault. The overvoltage
protective devices must be located before the terminals of the drive lineup (line
filter or HFD reactor)!
Danger

Overvoltage protective devices only on the primary side of a transformer, which

may be possibly used, are not sufficient to protect the converter or protect
against fire!
Fuses and plant conditions, such as loop resistance and shortcircuit power,
must be harmonized with each other so that the limit curve shown in Fig. 7-8 is
not exceeded.
Circuit breakers (Table 7-6) or alternatively, fuses (Table 7-7) should be used.
The appropriate protection measure should be selected corresponding to the
local situation from Table 7-5.

Fusible links in accordance with the documentation when tripped in

less than 10 ms (
or , , , )

Minimum residual
risks

Circuitbreaker with parameterized magnetic shortcircuit deactivation adapted to the loop resistance (, , , )

Minimum residual
risks
Incorrect trips for
large converter
configurations
with a high rated
power

Risk

Transformer vector group

can be loaded
asymmetrically

Protection

Loop resistance
allows shortcircuit
current

Selection aid for line supply protection measures

Shortcircuit power
as specified in the
Configuration Manual

Table 7-5

RCD switch (AC/DCsensitive

type B) and isolating transformer or circuitbreaker with residual
current monitor (RCM) (, )

Fusible links in accordance with the documentation that can be

tripped in less than 10 ms
(
in accordance with test, , , , )

Excessively high
line dips for other
loads

RCD switch (AC/DCsensitive

type B) and isolating transformer or circuitbreaker with residual
current monitor (RCM) (, )

Excessively high
line dips for other
loads

1) Assignment of the possible circuit breakers to the NE modules, see Table 7-6
Assignment of fuses to the NE modules, see Table 7-7

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-215

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Table 7-6

Circuit
breakers
,1)

02.12
05.01

Assignment of the possible circuit breakers to the NE modules

UI module
5/10 kW

UI
module
10/25 kW

UI module
28/50 kW

I/R
module
16/21 kW

I/R module
36/47 kW

3VL1702
2DD3V....

3VL1703
2DD3V
....

3VL1708
2DD3V....

3VL1703
2DD3V...
.

I/R
module
80/104 kW

I/R module
120/156 KW

3VL1708 3VL2712
2DD3V.... 2DC3V....

3VL2716
2DC3V....

3VL3725
2DC3V....

3VL2708
2DC3V....

3VL2708 3VL2712
2DC3V.... 3DC3V....

3VL2716
3DC3V....

3VL3725
3DC3V....

3VL2708
3DC3V....

3VL2708
3DC3V....

Minimum
shortcircuit
current2)

300 A

300 A

1000 A

300A

1000 A

Circuit
breakers
UL approvals3) 1)

3VL1102
2KM30....

3VL1103
2KM30
....

3VL2108
2KN30....

3VL2105 3VL2108
2KN30.... 2KN30....

Minimum
shortcircuit
current2)

450 A

Residual
current
monitor
including
UL4) 1)

FI-Breakers 5SM3... + fuse

I/R
module
55/71 kW

1500 A

2000 A

3000 A

3VL2112
2KN30....

3VL3117
2KN30....

3VL3125
2KN30....

1500 A

2400 A

3000 A

3VL1135
2KM30...
.
450 A

1000 A

840 A

1000 A

900 A
RCMA470LY21 AC/DC30 mA3 A
Transducer: W1A35S internal diameter 35 mm or
Transducer:
W2A70SS internal diameter 70 mm

1) Selection aid for line supply protection measures, see Table 7-5
2) Minimum shortcircuit current: Before connecting the machine to the line supply, the necessary minimum value
must be checked using a measurement corresponding to IEC 615573 and documented. If the minimum shortcircuit
currents at the connection point are not reached, then there is a risk of fire in the case of a fault.
3) The switches are designed for high switching capacity 65 kA at 480 V.
The connection terminals for the switches are also required.
The following box terminals, for example, are required:
for 3VL2...: two 3VL92204TC31 sets (one set contains three items)
for 3VL3...: two 3VL93354TC31 sets (one set contains three items)
You can find information on circuit breakers under the following link:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There, enter SIRIUS Configuration Manual as search term.
4) In combination with the appropriate circuitbreakers.

7-216

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Fuses that can be used: Sizes NH, D, DO with characteristic gL.

We recommend the following SIEMENS fuses that have no restrictions relating
to the characteristic power data of the NE modules.
Table 7-7

Assignment of fusible links to the NE modules

UI module
5/10 kW

UI
module
10/25 kW

UI module
28/50 kW

I/R
module
16/21 kW

I/R module
36/47 kW

I/R
module
55/71 kW

I/R
module
80/104 kW

I/R module
120/156 KW

Rated
voltage
400 VX

1)

16 A D01
Neoz./
Order No.
5SE2316

25 A D02
Neoz./
Order No.
5SE2325

35 A D02
Neoz./
Order No.
5SE2325

Rated
voltage
500 VX

1)

16 A DII
Diazed/
Order No.
5SB261

25 A DII
Diazed/
Order No.
5SB261

80 A DIV
Diazed/
Order No.
5SC211

35 A DIII
Diazed/
Order No.
5SB411

80 A DIV
Diazed/
Order No.
5SC211

Rated
voltage
500 VX

1)

16 A Size
00 LV
HRC/
Order No.
3NA3805

25 A Size
00 LV
HRC/
Order No.
3NA3810

80 A Size
00 LV
HRC/
Order No.
3NA3824

35 A Size
00 LV
HRC/
Order No.
3NA3814

80 A Size
00 LV
HRC/
Order No.
3NA3824

125 A
Size 00
LV HRC/
Order No.
3NA3832

160 A Size
1 LV HRC/
Order No.
3NA3136

250 A Size 1
LV HRC/
Order No.
3NA3144

Minimum
shortcircuit
current2)

270 A

500 A

1600 A

700 A

1600 A

2800 A

3400 A

5800 A

Fuses for North America

Designation
1)

AJT 17.5

AJT 25

AJT 80

AJT 35

AJT 80

AJT 125

AJT 175

AJT 250

Minimum
shortcircuit
current2)

270 A

380 A

1100 A

600 A

1100 A

1800 A

2500 A

3100 A

1) Tool to select the overcurrent protective devices, see Table 7-5

2) Minimum shortcircuit current: Before connecting the machine to the line supply, the necessary minimum value must
be checked using a measurement corresponding to IEC 615573 and documented. If the minimum
shortcircuit currents at the connection point are not reached, then there is a risk of fire in the case of a fault.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-217

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

02.12
05.01

Notice
The calculated maximum shortcircuit current at the connection point is an important indicator for dimensioning the required switching capacity of protective
elements, fuses/circuit breakers.
Protection elements should be dimensioned so that the maximum permissible
shortcircuit current can be reliably switched by the selected protection element.
The calculated minimum shortcircuit current at the connection point is an important indicator for the maximum permissible tripping time of protection elements, fuses/circuit breakers.
Protection elements should be dimensioned so that at the minimum shortcircuit current expected, these still reliably trip within the maximum permissible trip
time specified by the device manufacturer in order to guarantee protection for
personnel and avoid the risk of fire.
When connecting the machine, using a suitable measuring device (according
to DIN, EN, IEC 615573; VDE 04133) at the connection point of the drive
system, the shortcircuit current should be determined and the overcurrent
protective devices installed checked to ensure that they comply with these operating conditions.

The measuring results and installed protection elements must be documented

so that they can be subsequently verified when required.

Warning
For trial operation when connected to line supplies that do not have adequate
shortcircuit power (system default level), the protection elements should be
adapted so that they trip within approx. 10 ms in the case of a fault, as
otherwise there is a risk of significant damage to the device or fire.
It is not permissible to overdimension the protection elements.

Note
The recommended circuit breakers are sufficient for a maximum shortcircuit
current (SCCR) < 65 kA of the drive lineup.
For line supplies that deviate from this with a smaller or higher line shortcircuit
power, these can or must be appropriately redimensioned.

7-218

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Time (ms)

Decisive voltage class A

10 000
AC2
25 V AC

AC2

DC2

30 V AC

60 V DC

1 000

100

AC2

10
10

DC2

100

1000
250 V

Fig. 7-8

Touch voltage (V)

Permissible tripping time of fuses/circuitbreakers

Note
The dotted line for AC2 applies if there is only one single circuit with DVC A.
The solid line applies if there is more than one circuit with DVC A.

For timely tripping of fuses, the loop resistance as well as the vector group of
the line supply transformer being fed must satisfy the requirement that the touch
voltage of the devices is switched off by the provided fuses within the permissible tripping time (see Fig. 7-8 in accordance with EN 6180051 Ed. 2007).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-219

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

7.3.2

05.08
02.12
05.01

Assigning autotransformers to the I/R modules

Note
If, for I/R modules, a transformer is used, this does not replace the external
commutating reactor.
When using a transformer, from NE module  10 kW onwards,
Order No.: 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1), an overvoltage limiter module must be
used (Order No.: 6SN11110AB000AA0).

Table 7-8

Autotransformers for 480/440 V input voltage

I/RF module
16/21 kW

Nominal power rating [kVA]

S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

Autotransformer IP23

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

21

46.5

70.3

18.9

42

63.3

I/RF module
80/104 kW
104
93.5

I/RF module
120/156 kW
155
140

Input voltage [V]

3ph. 480/440 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Output voltage [V]

3ph. 400 V AC

Vector group

Yna0;
neutral point N can be loaded only with maximum 10% if not corrected with an N (=
MP) line supply!

Permiss. ambient temperature

S Operation
[_C]

Storage/transport

[_C]

25 to +40, for power derating up to +55 _C

25 to +80

Humidity classification in
accordance with
DIN EN 6072133

Class 3K5, moisture condensation and formation of ice not permissible

Low air temperature 0 _C

Degree of protection acc. to

DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)
IP00/IP20/IP23

S
S

Order No.
mdexx GmbH
RichardDunkel_Strae 120
28199 Bremen
Germany
Tel.: +49 421 51 25 - 0
E-Mail: info@mdexx.de

4AP2796
0EL402XV0

Power loss [W]

S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

Autotransformer IP23

Degree of protection IP 00: V > Order No. A

Degree of protection IP 23: V > Order No. C 2)
4AU3696
0ER202XV0

4AU3696
2NA002XV0

4AU3996
0EQ802XV0

IP00: 4BU4395
0CB508B
IP20: 4BU4395
0CB588B
IP23: 4BU4395
0CB528B

1601)

430

550

700

700

135

370

460

590

600

Shortcircuit voltage uk [%]

Conn. crosssection, max.

primary/secondary side

16 mm2

35 mm2

70 mm2

Flat termination 3)

Fuse, primary side

35 A gL

80 A gL

125 A gL

160 A gL

224 A gL

Weight [kg], approx. for

S Degree of prot. IP 00

29

52

66

95

135

40

70

85

115

155

Degree of prot. IP 20/23

7-220

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

Table 7-8

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Autotransformers for 480/440 V input voltage, continued

I/RF module
16/21 kW

Connection

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

I/RF module
80/104 kW

Terminals:
1U1/1U3/1V1/1V3/1W1/1W3/2U1/2V1/2W1/N

I/RF module
120/156 kW

Flat termination connections

Terminals: 1U1 to 1W1 = 480 V input, 1U3 to 1W3 = 440 V input,

2U1 to 2W1 = 400 V output, N = neutral point
Dim. (L x W x H) approx.[mm]
S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

270x192x250

370x220x330

370x240x340

420x260x370

480x220x420

Autotransformer IP23

351x330x395

460x465x555

460x465x555

460x465x555

565x460x520

b4

Drilling template
t4
t1

Dimensions in mm

t2

Footprint, view from the top

t3

b3
b2
b1

t1 = 270/351
t2 = 235
t3 = 35
t4 = 10
b1 = 192/330
b2 = 140.5
b3 = 39.5
b4 = 18
Height
250/395

t1 = 370/460
t2 = 317
t3 = 53
t4 = 10
b1 = 220/465
b2 = 179
b3 = 41
b4 = 18
Height
330/555

t1 = 370/460
t2 = 317
t3 = 53
t4 = 10
b1 = 240/465
b2 = 189
b3 = 51
b4 = 18
Height
340/555

t1 = 420/460
t2 = 368
t3 = 52
t4 = 10
b1 = 260/465
b2 = 200.5
b3 = 59.5
b4 = 18
Height
370/555

t1 = 480/565
t2 = 418
t3 = 62
t4 = 15
b1 = 220/460
b2 = 217.5
b3 = 62.5
b4 = 22
Height 420/520

1) Not IP20
2) 10% power derating required
3) FL = flat termination, hole 9 mm

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-221

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Table 7-9

Autotransformer for a 220 V input voltage

I/RF module
16/21 kW

Nominal power rating [kVA]

S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

Autotransformer IP23

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

21

46.5

70.3

18.9

42

63.3

I/RF module
80/104 kW
104
93.5

I/RF module
120/156 kW
155
140

Input voltage [V]

3ph. 220 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Output voltage [V]

3ph. 400 V AC

Vector group

Yna0
Neutral point N can be loaded only with maximum 10% if not corrected with an N (=
MP) line supply!

Permiss. ambient temperature

S Operation
[_C]

02.12
05.01

Storage/transport

[_C]

25 to +40, for power derating up to +55 _C

25 to +80

Humidity classification in accordance with

DIN EN 6072133

Class 3K5 condensation and formation of ice excluded

Degree of protection acc. to

DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)
IP00/IP20/IP23

S
S
S

Order No.
mdexx GmbH
RichardDunkel_Strae 120
28199 Bremen
Germany
Tel.: +49 421 51 25 - 0
E-Mail: info@mdexx.de

IP00:
4AU3696
0ER302XA0

Power loss [W]

S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

Autotransformer IP23

Degree of protection IP 00: V > Order No. 0

Degree of protection IP 20: V > Order No. 8
Degree of protection IP 23: V > Order No. 2 2)
4BU4395
0CB6V8B

4BU4595
0BD0V8B

4BU5295
0AE4V8B

4BU5495
1AA1V8B

5501)

9001)

9801)

13501)

1650

460

760

830

1150

1400

IP23:
4AU3696
0ER302XC0

Shortcircuit voltage uk [%]

Conn. crosssection, max.

primary/secondary side

16/16 mm2

70/50 mm2

95/70 mm2

Flat termination 3)

Fuse, primary side

63 A gL

160 A gL

224 A gL

300 A gL

500 A gL

Weight [kg], approx. for

S Degree of prot. IP 00

57

110

155

215

310

75

130

175

275

370

Degree of prot. IP 20/23

Terminal arrangement

1U1 to 1W1 = 220 V input, 2U1 to 2W1 = 400 V output, N = neutral point

Dim. (L x W x H) approx.[mm]
S Autotransf. IP00/IP20

370x220x330

480x230x430

480x300x430

530x290x520

590x320x585

Autotransformer IP23

460x465x555

565x290x520

565x460x520

900x600x720

900x600x720

7-222

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

Table 7-9

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Autotransformer for a 220 V input voltage, continued

I/RF module
16/21 kW

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

I/RF module
120/156 kW

I/RF module
80/104 kW

Max. dimensions
b4

d
1

Drilling template in mm
t4
t1

Footprint, view from the top

t1
t2

t2
t3

t3
b3

b
3 b2
b1

b2
b1

t1 = 370/460
t2 = 317
t3 = 53
t4 = 10
b1 = 220/465
b2 = 179
b3 = 41
b4 = 18
Height 330/555

t1 = 480/565
t2 = 418
t3 = 62
t4 = 15
b1 = 230/460
b2 = 205
b3 = 50
b4 = 22
Height 430/520

t1 = 480/565
t2 = 418
t3 = 62
t4 = 15
b1 = 300/460
b2 = 241
b3 = 59
b4 = 22
Height 430/520

t1 = 530/900
t2 = 470
t3 = 60

t1 = 590/900
t2 = 530
t3 = 60

b1 = 290/600
b2 = 254
b3 = 71
d1 = 12.5
Height 520/720

b1 = 320/600
b2 = 279
b3 = 81
d1 = 15
Height 585/720

1) Not IP20
2) 10% power derating required
3) FL = flat termination, hole 9 mm

Operating
conditions
for all transformers

The permissible current of the transformers, reactors etc. depends on the ambient temperature and the installation altitude. The permissible current/power rating of transformers and reactors is as follows:
In (PD) reduced = c In (PD)

c
1.1
0.9
0.7

a)
30

40

50

_C
b)

Reduction factor c
as a function of:

Fig. 7-9

1000

2000

m above sea level

a) The ambient temperature from +40 _C

b) The installation altitude from 1000 m

Reduction factor (derating) c

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-223

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

7.3.3
Table 7-10

Assigning isolating transformers to the I/R modules

Matching transformers with separate windings for 50 Hz/60 Hz line supplies
I/RF module
16 kW

Nominal rated power

[kVA]

Power loss, max.

[W]

I/RF module
36 kW

I/RF module
55 kW

I/RF module
80 kW

47

70

104

155

650

1200

2020

2650

3050

YYn0 neutral point N can only be loaded with maximum 10%!

Shortcircuit voltage uk [%]

Degree of protection acc. to

DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

S
S
S

Degree of protection IP 00: V > Order No. 0

Storage/transport

Degree of protection IP 20: V > Order No. 8

Degree of protection IP 23: V > Order No. 2 1)

Class 3K5 condensation and formation of ice excluded

Permiss. ambient temperature

S Operation
_C

I/RF module
120 kW

21

Vector group

Humidity classification in
accordance with
DIN EN 6072133

05.08
05.01

_C

Approx. weight for

S Degree of prot. IP 00 [kg]

25 to +40, for power derating up to +55

25 to +80
120

200

300

425

600

131

216

364

536

688

Dim. (L x W x H) approx.[mm]

480 x 209 x
420

480 x 267 x
420

630 x 328 x
585

780 x 345 x
665

780 x 391 x 665

Max. conn., secondary

[mm2]

16

35

70

Cable lug according to

DIN 46235

Degree of prot. IP 20/23[kg]

Input voltage, 3ph. 575 V 500 V 480 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

26

58

87

127

189

16

35

50

70

Cable lug
according to
DIN 46235

4BU43 95
0SA7V0C

4BU47 95
0SC3V0C

4BU55 95
0SA4V0C

4BU58 95
0SA6V0C

4BU60 95
0SA6V0C

[mm2]
Order No.
according to Catalog PD10

Input voltage, 3ph. 440 V 415 V 400 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

31

69.5

104

154

228

16

35

70

70

Cable lug
according to
DIN 46235

4BU43 95
0SA8V0C

4BU47 95
0SC4V0C

4BU55 95
0SA5V0C

4BU58 95
0SA7V0C

4BU60 95
0SA7V0C

309

450

[mm2]
Order No.
according to Catalog PD10

Input voltage, 3ph. 240 V 220 V 200 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

62

138.5

210

35

70

Cable lug according to DIN 46235

4BU43 95
0SB0V0C

4BU47 95
0SC5V0C

4BU55 95
0SA6V0C

[mm2]
Order No.
according to Catalog PD10
1)

4BU58 95
0SA8V0C

4BU60 95
0SA8V0C

For degree of protection IP 23, a 10% power derating must be taken into account
In conformance with the Standards with regulation: EN61558/VDE0532
Insulation Class: T40/bH

7-224

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7.3.4
Table 7-11

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Assignment of the isolating transformer to the UI modules

Matching transformers with separate windings for 50 Hz/60 Hz line supplies
UI module
5 kW 2)

Nominal rated power

[kVA]

Power loss, max.

[W]

UI module
10 kW 2)

UI module
28 kW

16

47

520

650

1200

Vector group

YYn0 neutral point N can only be loaded with maximum 10%!

Shortcircuit voltage uk [%]

v 10

Degree of protection to
DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

S
S
S

Humidity rating EN 6072133

Degree of protection IP 20: V > Order No. 8

Degree of protection IP 23: V > Order No. 2 1)

Class 3K5 condensation and formation of ice excluded

Permiss. ambient temperature

S Operation
_C

Degree of protection IP 00: V > Order No. 0

25 to +40, for power derating up to +55

Storage/transport

_C

Approx. weight for

S Degree of prot. IP 00

[kg]

55

70

200

[kg]

65

95

216

420 x 262 x 370

480 x 267 x 420

35

Degree of prot. IP 20/23

Dim. (L x W x H) approx.
Max. conn., secondary

25 to +80

[mm] 360 x 268 x 320

[mm2]

Input voltage, 3ph. 575 V 500 V 480 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

[mm2]

Order No. according to Catalog

PD10

10

20

58

35

4AU36 950SB0V0CN2

4AU39 950SA3V0CN2

4BU47 950SC3V0C

Input voltage, 3ph. 440 V 415 V 400 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

[mm2]

Order No. according to Catalog

PD10

12

24

70

16

35

4AU36 950SB1V0CN2

4AU39 950SA4V0CN2

4BU47 950SC4V0C

Input voltage, 3ph. 240 V 220 V 200 V AC $ 10%; 50 Hz 10% to 60 Hz + 10%

Rated input current

[A]

Max. conn., primary

[mm2]

Order No. according to Catalog

PD10

26

47

140

16

70

4AU36 950SB2V0CN2

4AU39 950SA5V0CN2

4BU47 950SC5V0C

1) For degree of protection IP 23, a 10% power derating must be taken into account
2) Not degree of protection IP 20

Note
UI modules can be operated on TN line supplies from 360 V (with derating!) to
480 V without a matching transformer.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-225

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

7.3.5

05.08
05.01

Assigning the main switches

The main switches must be chosen appropriately for the machine (scope of the
installation), the supply line characteristics (voltage, shortcircuit power), regional regulations for plant/machine constructors.
Recommendation:
Siemens 3LD.../3KA... switch types (as listed in the SIEMENS LowVoltage
Switchgear catalog)

Table 7-12

Assignment of the main and auxiliary switches, e.g. only one NE module and shortcircuit power
SCCR 65 kA
For UI modules

Switch
type

5 kW

10 kW

28 kW

3LD21030TK...
+
3LD92203B

3LD25040TK...
+
3LD92503B

3LD27040TK...
+
3LD92803B

16 kW

36 kW

55 kW

80 kW

120 kW

3LD25040TK...
+
3LD92503B

3LD27040TK...
+
3LD92803B

3KA53301EE01
+
3KX35523EA01

3KA55301EE01
+
3KX35523EA01

3KA57301EE01
+
3KX35523EA01

For I/R modules

Switch
type

7.3.6

Use of a leading contact for line isolating device

For various plant and system configurations the use and the correct connection
of a leading contact (integrating terminal 48) for the switching element is either
absolutely necessary or not required. In this connection, switching elements
are:

S Power disconnectors (mains switch, line supply contactor)

Note
During the shutdown, to prevent damaging overvoltages that can damage
paralleloperated loads, terminal 48 of the NE modules must be switched off
10 ms before deenergizing the line supply contacts.
Main switches (breakers) with leading auxiliary contact can be used to ensure
that terminal 48 of the NE modules is deenergized using a leading contact.
Leading shutdown is not required for certain drive configurations.
For information refer to Section 7.3.6.

7-226

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Note
If the objective is that an application is not to have a leading contact over the
complete power range of the infeed modules, then this can be implemented
using the following measures:

S Changing over from any present I/R modules to unregulated infeed (this is
generally the case for 480 V applications).

S Deactivating the regenerative feedback if I/R modules are being used.

The I/R modules then operate as UI modules and can be operated with
additional loads connected to a switching element without leading contact.

Leading contact is
absolutely
necessary

For the configurations that are now described, a leading contact for the switching element is absolutely necessary:

S If one or more I/R modules are connected, together with other loads, through
a switching element.

S If NE modules having different power classes are connected together to one

switching element. In this case, the restrictions, described on the following
page, must be carefully fulfilled.
The following diagram shows two examples where a leading contact is absolutely necessary.

Switching element with

leading contact

I/RF module

Fig. 7-10

I/RF module

Switching element with

leading contact

Further
consumers

I/RF module
16 kW

I/RF module
120 kW

UI module
10 kW

Examples of a configuration where a leading contact is required

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-227

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Leading contact is
not absolutely
required

05.08
05.01

Caution
If switching elements are used without leading contact, then it must be
absolutely ensured that after poweringdown and up the NE module again,
terminal 48 (start/contactor control) is deenergized in order to activate the
precharging circuit. If this is not the case, then high recharging currents
(similar to shortcircuit currents) can occur when poweringup again. These
recharging currents are not limited by the precharging circuit. This can trip
the fuse or damage/destroy the NE module.
For the subsequently described configurations, it is not absolutely necessary
that a leading contact is used for the switching element:

S Only one NE module is connected to the switching element.

Caution
When using I/R modules, no additional loads may be connected to the
switching element.

7
S Connection of NE modules with the same power class to one switching element. In this case, the restrictions for connecting several
NE modules to a switching element must be carefully observed (refer to the
following page).
Caution
If I/R modules are connected together with UI modules to one switching
element, overvoltage limiter modules must be used.

Switching element
without
leading contact

I/RF module

Switching element
without
leading contact

UI module

Further
consumers

Switching element
without
leading contact

I/RF module
16 kW

I/RF module
16 kW

UI module
28 kW

Overvoltage limiter modules must be used

No additional loads may be connected
Carefully observe the following restrictions
and limitations!
Fig. 7-11

7-228

Examples of three configurations that do not require a leading contact

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
02.03
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.3 Overcurrent protective devices, transformers and main switch

Summary
Table 7-13

Using a leading contact for SIMODRIVE units

Unit connected to
the switching element

Leading contact
required

No leading
contact

Only UI modules

Only UI modules with

additional loads

Only I/R modules

(without additional
loads)

Only modules that

can regenerate into
the line supply with
additional loads

Remarks

Risks

I/R modules together

with UI modules

I/R modules together

with UI modules and
additional loads

The appropriate
restrictions must
be carefully observed.

If these restrictions are not carefully observed, then smaller rating modules can
be destroyed by the modules that are
presently regenerating when the switching
element is opened.
If a leading contact is not used, then the
additional connected loads could be destroyed by overvoltages

It is necessary to
use overvoltage
limiter modules.

If an overvoltage limiter module is not

used, when the switching element is
opened the module could be destroyed by
other modules that are regenerating at that
time.

The appropriate
restrictions must
be carefully observed.

If these restrictions are not carefully observed, then smaller rating modules can
be destroyed by the modules that are
presently regenerating when the switching
element is opened.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

If a leading contact is not used, then the

additional connected loads could be destroyed by overvoltages.

7-229

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

02.12
05.01

7.4

Line filters for I/R and UI modules

7.4.1

General information

Description

The line filters limit the cableborne noise and disturbances, originating from the
converter units, to permissible EMC values for industrial environments. If the
system is consequentially executed inline with the Configuration Manual and
the EMC Guidelines for SIMODRIVE, SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, then the prerequisites are created so that the limit values at the installation location will be in
compliance with the EU Directives for EMC.
The line filters can be used both for sinusoidal current as well as squarewave
current operation.
The mounting/installation and connection regulations as listed in Chapter 9.1
must be carefully observed.
For more detailed information regarding an EMCcorrect design, refer also to
the EMC Guidelines for SINUMERIK (Order No.: 6FC52970AD300AP1).
Other suitable measures can also be adopted to comply with the EMC limits. An
EMC examination is necessary in particular cases.

Note
The line supply connection conditions as specified in Section 7.1 must always
be observed. If the line supply does not comply with the requirements
according to EN/IEC 6100024 Class 3, then the filters could be overloaded.
The use of a matching transformer does not mean that the HFD reactor or the
line filter can be omitted.

Optional line filter rows that are coordinated with the power range are also available with the SIMODRIVE 611 digital converter system. These line filters differ
with regard to the frequency range in which they reduce the conducted emissions.

Correct
If no other
loads are
connected

SIMODRIVE

Incorrect

can be
required

SIMODRIVE

Additional
loads

SIMODRIVE

Additional
loads

SIMODRIVE

Additional
loads

Device damage,
resonance effects

Fig. 7-12

7-230

Wiring information and instructions

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

Wideband line
filter

Wideband line filters function in the frequency range from 2 kHz to 30 MHz.

Basic line filter

Basic line filters function in the frequency range from 150 kHz to 30 MHz. This
especially suppresses disturbances for radiobased services.

Load frequency harmonics are effectively limited using a wideband line filter.
They are required when sensitive loads, such as electronic power supplies, etc.,
are operated on the same line supply. This can prevent impairment, damage,
and premature aging of these loads.

Safety information

Caution
The line filters are only suitable for the direct connection to TN systems.
The line filters listed conduct a high leakage current over the PE conductor. A
permanent PE connection for the line filter or control cabinet is required due to
the high leakage current of the line filters.
Only the line filters described in this Configuration Manual should be used.
Other line filters can cause line harmonics that can interfere with or damage
other loads powered from the line supply.
It is not permissible to connect other loads after the line filter.
Measures according to DIN EN 6180051 must be taken, e.g. a PE conductor
10 mm2 CU or fit an additional connection terminal for a PE conductor with
the same crosssection as the original PE conductor.

Danger
The 100 mm clearances above and below the components must be observed.
The mounting position must ensure that cool air flows vertically through the
filter. This prevents thermal overloading of the filter.
A hazardous voltage will be present at the terminals for up to 30 minutes after
the system has been shutdown depending on the DC link capacitance.
For this reason, opening the device or removing the cover is permitted only
after 30 minutes have elapsed since the device was switched to the
voltagefree state. All covers must be reattached before the line voltage is
switched on.
Danger of death!
Touching live terminals, cables or device parts can result in serious injury or
death!

Note
If the system is subject to a highvoltage test using AC voltage, any existing
line filter must be disconnected in order to obtain a correct measurement result.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-231

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

7.4.2

02.12
05.01

Wideband line filter

Description

The damping characteristics of wideband line filters not only conform with the
requirements of EMC standards for the frequency range of 150 kHz to 30 MHz
but also include low frequencies as of 2 kHz. As a result, these line filters have
an extended function area, which means that they can, to a certain extent, be
used regardless of the machine installation location and any unknown line properties (e.g. line impedance).
The Wideband Line Filters should be preferably used.
TFor sinusoidal current operation, the total length of the power cables from the
line filter should not exceed 350 m and for squarewave current operation,
should not exceed 500 m!

100 mm

Interfaces

Cooling clearance
UVW

Load connection (upper)

Warning and connection label

Rating plate

100 mm

Mounting
position
(wall mounting)

L1 L2 L3

Line supply connection (lower)

Cooling clearance
PE conductor (lower)

Note:
S If the line supply and load connections are interchanged, this will immediately damage the components!

Carefully note the mounting position, base mounting is possible. Adequate heat dissipation must be ensured,
e.g. through the use of a fan.

Fig. 7-13

7-232

Wideband line filter (example 16 kW)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

Caution
The connections/terminals may not be interchanged:

S Incoming line supply cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3

S Outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST U, V, W
If this is not observed, the line filter could be damaged.

Table 7-14

Assigning the wideband filters to the I/R modules

I/RF module
16/21 kW

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

I/RF module
80/104 kW

I/RF module
120/156 kW

Filter
components

Line filter
16 kW

Line filter
36 kW

Line filter
55 kW

Line filter
80 kW

Line filter
120 kW

Rated AC current

30 A

67 A

103 A

150 A

225 A
50...60 Hz $10%

Supply voltage

3ph. 380 V 10% ... 3ph. 480 V AC + 10% (TN line

supply)1);

Order number

6SL3000
0BE216AAV

6SL3000
0BE280AAV

6SL3000
0BE312AAV

Mounting position

Wall or base/floor mounting, refer to Fig. 7-13

Dimensions (W x H x D),
approx.

130x480x150

200x480x260

300x480x260

Module width

Refer to dimension drawings, Chapter 12

Weight, filter

9 kg

16 kg

19 kg

22 kg

34,5 kg

Power loss

70 W

90 W

110 W

150 W

200 W

Connection

16/10 mm2 3)
/1.5 Nm

50 mm2
/6 Nm

50 mm2
/6 Nm

95 mm2
/15 Nm

95 mm2
/15 Nm

PE, M5 studs/
3 Nm2)

PE, M8
studs/13 Nm2)

PE, M8
studs/13 Nm2)

PE, M8
studs/13 Nm2)

PE, M8 studs/
13 Nm2)

Terminals
Line supply connection
(line)

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

Terminals
Load connection (load)

U, V, W

U, V, W

U, V, W

U, V, W

U, V, W

Irated fuse4)

35 A

80 A

125 A

160 A

250 A

6SL3000
0BE236AAV

130x480x245

6SL3000
0BE255AAV

130x480x260

Permissible
ambient temperature

S
S

Operation

[C]

0 ... +40; maximum +55 at 0.6 Prated of the l/R module

Storage/transport [C] 25 ... +70

Cooler

Natural ventilation

Degree of protection to
EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

DIN EN 61800-3 (IEC

61800-3)/VDE 0160-103 radio interference suppression

Limit value Class C2

1)
2)
3)
4)

The permissible supply voltage of the system depends on the infeed module used.
For ring cable lugs to DIN 46234.
The first data applies for pintype cable lugs, the second data applies for finelystranded conductors without end sleeves
The fuse used must have this rated current. Recommendations for the fuses, refer to Table 7-6.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-233

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

7.4.3

02.12
05.01

Line Filter

Description

Table 7-15

The line filters for UI modules attenuate frequencies in the range from 150 kHz
up to 30 MHz. In conjunction with the consequential implementation of the system configuration according to the Configuration Manual and the EMC installation guideline for SIMODRIVE, SINUMERIK, SINAMICS S 120, when applying
the installation guideline, the limit values at the installation location can be attained according to the EC directive EMC. The precondition is that the user
takes into account the specific EMC guidelines at the installation location that
may possibly apply and makes a final check. From the line filter, total cable
lengths up to 500 m are possible!
Assigning wideband line filters to the UI modules
UI module
5/10 kW

UI module
10/25 kW

UI module
28/50 kW

Filter components

Line filter, 5 kW

Line filter, 10 kW

Line filter, 36 kW

Rated AC current

16 A

25 A

65 A

Order number

6SN11110AA011BAV3)

6SN11110AA011AAV3)

6SN11110AA011CAV3)

Supply voltage

3ph. 380 V 10% ... 3ph. 480 V AC + 10% (TN line supply)1); 50...60 Hz $10%

Mounting position

Arbitrary (only for UI modules)

Dimensions (W x H x D),
approx.

156 x 193 x 81

Module width

Refer to dimension drawings, Chapter 12

Weight, filter

3.8 kg

5.7 kg

12.5 kg

Power loss

20 W

20 W

25 W

Connection

4 mm2 /1.5

Nm
PE, M6 studs/3 Nm

10 mm2 /1.5

Nm
PE, M6 studs/3 Nm

50 mm2 /6 Nm
PE, M10 studs

Terminals
Line supply connection
(line)

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

Terminals
Load connection (load)

U, V, W

U, V, W

U, V, W

Irated fuse2)

16 A

25 A

80 A

156 x 281 x 91

171 x 261 x 141

Permissible
ambient temperature

S
S

Operation
Storage/transport

[C]
[C]

0 ... +40; maximum +55 at 0.6 Prated of the UI module

25 ... +70

Cooler

Natural ventilation

Degree of protection to EN
60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

DIN EN 61800-3 (IEC

61800-3)/VDE 0160-103 radio interference suppression

Limit value Class C 2.

1) The permissible supply voltage of the system depends on the infeed module used.
2) The fuse used must have this rated current. Recommendations for the fuses, refer to Table 7-6.
3) Last position of the Order No. w1

7-234

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

7.4.4

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

Basic line filter for I/R modules

Description

The basic line filter for I/R modules are designed for use in machines in which
the conducted interference in the frequency range is to be reduced in accordance with EMC regulations.
The machine manufacturer must perform the EMCcompliant CE certification
for the product before it is implemented.
Note
The company that puts the machine on the market takes full responsibility for
ensuring CE EMC conformity and that the basic line filter is used correctly. The
machine manufacturer (OEM) must have the machine conformity confirmed
(e.g. by the EPCOS Company; mailto:emv.labor@epcos.com).
Basic Line Filters have properties similar to line filters that are generally
available. The Basic Line Filter offered by Siemens, however have the
advantage that they have been systemtested and released for
SIMODRIVE 611. If they are used, taking into account the secondary
conditions, then the Siemens system certificates for the converter system, such
as CE, UL, etc. remain valid and do not result in loss of warranty!

The Basic Line Filters can be used in accordance with the following general
conditions for ensuring CE conformity with regard to cableborne interference:

S The machine/system must only be used in industrial networks.

S No. of axes <12.
S Total cable lengths <150 m (motor cables, power supply cable between the
line filter and I/R module).

Caution
The connections/terminals may not be interchanged:

S Incoming line supply cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3

S Outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST L1, L2, L3
If this is not observed, the line filter could be damaged.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-235

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

02.07
05.01

100 mm

Interfaces

Cooling clearance
Protective conductor

Load connection

Mounting
position
(preferred
position)

Warning and connection label

Rating plate

100 mm

L1 L2 L3

Line supply connection

Cooling clearance

Note:

S
S

If the line supply and load connections are interchanged, this will immediately damage the components!
Any mounting position, base mounting is possible. However, cooling must be guaranteed and it is not
permissible to interchange the line supply and load connection!

Fig. 7-14

7-236

Basic line filter for I/R module (example 36 kW)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
11.05
05.01

Table 7-16

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

Assigning the basic line filters to the I/R modules

I/RF module
16/21 kW

I/RF module
36/47 kW

I/RF module
55/71 kW

Filter
components

Line filter
16 kW

Line filter
36 kW

Line filter
55 kW

Rated AC current

36 A

65 A

105 A

Supply voltage

3ph. 380 V AC 10% ... 3 ph. 480 V + 10%/15% < 1 min) (TN line supply)1); 47 ... 63
Hz

Order number

6SL3000
0BE216DAV

Mounting position

Wall or base/floor mounting, refer to Fig. 7-14

Dimensions (W x H x D),
approx.

50x429x226

Module width

Refer to dimension drawings, Chapter 12

Weight, filter

5 kg

6.5 kg

11.5 kg

Power loss

16 W

28 W

41 W

Connection

10 mm2

35 mm2

/1.5 Nm
PE, M6 studs
/3 Nm2)

PE, M6 studs
/3 Nm2)

50 mm2
PE, M6 studs
/3 Nm2)

Terminals
Line supply connection
(line)

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

Terminals
Load connection (load)

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

L1, L2, L3, PE

Irated fuse4)

35 A

80 A

125 A

Compatibility, residual current protective devices

The discharge current is limited to approx. 110 mA in conjunction with a universally current sensitive residual current protective device and Siemens cables and the 150 m cable.

6SL3000
0BE236DAV

75x433x226

6SL3000
0BE255DAV

100x466x226

Permissible
ambient temperature

S
S

Operation

[C]

0 ... +40; maximum +55 at 0.6 Prated of the l/R module

Storage/transport [C] 25 ... +70

Cooler

Natural ventilation

Degree of protection to EN
60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

DIN EN 61800-3 (IEC

61800-3)/VDE 0160-103 radio interference suppression

Limit value Class C 2

1)
2)
3)
4)

The permissible supply voltage of the system depends on the infeed module used.
For ring terminal end in accordance with DIN 46234
Being prepared
The fuse used must have this rated current. Recommendations for the fuses, refer to Table 7-6.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7-237

7 Line Supply Connection

7.4 Line filters for I/R and UI modules

7.4.5

05.08
05.01

Adapter sets
Adapter sets are available to facilitate an extremely compact installation of the
16 kW or 36 kW HFD reactor and the wideband filter. The mounting depth extends beyond the front plane of the drive group by 20 mm to 30 mm (dimension
drawings, refer to Chapter 12).

Fig. 7-15
Table 7-17

Adapter sets
I/RF module
16/21 kW

Adapter set
Order No.

Construction with an adapter set

6SL3060
1FE216AAV

I/RF module
36/47 kW
6SN1162
0GA000AAV

I/RF module
55/71 kW

I/RF module
80/104 kW

I/RF module
120/156 kW

7-238

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Important Circuit Information

8.1

General information
Note
The following circuit examples, information and descriptions are of a general
nature and are not binding from a legal perspective. Every system must be
adapted to ensure that it is complete and is correct for the particular application.
These circuit examples are intended to support the machinery construction
OEM/user when integrating the SIMODRIVE 611 drive system from the
control perspective into the overall control concept of his machine/system.
The users are responsible for ensuring that the overall control is in compliance
with the Guidelines/Standards applicable for their particular application and the
safety measures, derived from the hazard analysis/risk assessment to avoid
injury to personnel and damage to machine, have been appropriately
engineered and implemented.

Warning
After the line isolating devices (main switch/breaker) or the line contactor have
been opened, residual energy and hazardous touch voltages are still available
at the power DC link of the drive group while the DC link capacitors discharge
max. 30 min. This means that these hazardous touch voltages are also
available at components that are electrically connected to the DC link
(terminals, cables, switching devices, motors, etc.). This must be carefully
taken into consideration as part of the hazard analysis/risk assessment.
After 30 minutes, a residual voltage up to 60 V DC can still be present!
Any damaged DC link covers must be replaced immediately. Operation of the
plant with damaged DC link covers is not permitted!
Service personnel must ensure that the complete plant or system is actually in
a novoltage condition before they perform any service, maintenance and
cleaning work!

Warning
Before the drive group is poweredup or powereddown using the line supply
isolating device (main switch/breaker) or a line contactor, terminal 48 start
and/or terminal 63 pulse enable must be deenergized at the NE module. This
can be realized, for example, using a leading auxiliary contact at the main
switch.
For specific drive configurations it may not be necessary to use a leading
contact when poweringdown the NE modules. For information refer to Chapter
7.3.6.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-239

8 Important Circuit Information

8.1 General information

8
!

8-240

02.12
05.01

Warning
If the electronics power supply of the NE or monitoring module is connected in
front of the commutating reactor directly at the line supply at the
2U12V12W1 terminals, with a sixconductor connection, then establish a
connection between X181 (P500/M500) with the P600/M600 DC link as
specified in Section 8.15.2!

Warning
In order to shutdown the system when the power fails using the DC link energy
it is possible to have a connection between terminals P500/M500 and the DC
link P600/M600.

Warning
When the NE module is connectedup using a sixconductor connection, and
the electronics power supply is connected directly to the line supply, the
jumpers in connector X181 at the NE module, inserted when the equipment is
supplied, must be removed, refer to Section 8.15.

Warning
The input and output side connections at the line filter may not be interchanged
in order to avoid damage to the equipment.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.1 General information

P600
100 k

DC link connection

M600

Grounding bar

Line supply connection

U1 V1 W1 X131 PE

Fig. 8-1

NE module

Warning
The grounding bar is used for highresistance connection and balancing of the
DC link to the ground. It must always remain inserted.
The grounding bar must be opened only if a highvoltage test is performed.

8
Note
Electrically disconnecting the line supply from the power circuit of the drive
group using the internal line contactor.
The coil circuit can be disconnected in order to reliably open (deenergize) the
line contactor using external electrically isolated contacts via terminals NS1,
NS2 at the NE module. The DC link is not precharged if the connection is
missing when the unit is poweredup. The state of the contactor (whether it is
open/deenergized) can be interrogated using terminals 111, 113, and 213.
The NS1, NS2 connection may only be opened if terminal 48 and/or terminal
63 are deenergized using a leading contact, or is simultaneously opened
when these terminals are deenergized, refer to Section 8.7.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-241

8 Important Circuit Information

8.2 Infeed modules

05.01

8.2

Infeed modules

8.2.1

Connecting several NE modules to a main switch

A maximum of six terminals 48 can be connected in parallel with one another in
order to shut down a maximum of six NE modules with one leading contact of
the main switch.
Maximum cable length with a 1.5 mm2 crosssection: 150 m (2wire conductor)

Connection diagram:
NE module Drives

NE module Drives

NE module Drives

19

19

19

9 1)

9 1)

48

48

48

Leading
contact
Main
switches

8
Fig. 8-2

Other devices
1) Terminal

9 may not be connected to terminal 48.

Connection schematic, several NE modules connected to terminal 48

If enable signal terminals, e.g. terminal 663, are connected in parallel to terminal
48, then the number of NE modules must be appropriately reduced due to the
higher current load connected to terminal 9.

Note
If the internal power supply at NE module 1 fails, then the remaining NE
modules and drives that are connected are also inhibited. The drives coast
down unbraked.

As an alternative to the limited current capability of the internal power supply via
terminal 9, the enable voltage can be taken from an external 24 V PELV power
supply.
In this case, the terminals 19 of the NE modules must be connected to the 0 V
reference potential (ground) of the external power supply.

8-242

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8.2.2

8 Important Circuit Information

8.2 Infeed modules

Application, mode of operation and connection of the line contactor

The infeed modules include an integrated line contactor that is listed in the Catalog.
The line contactor is electronically controlled (energized) via terminal 48.
In order to safely and reliably disconnect the DC link from the line supply,
e.g. for stopping in an emergency situation, the coil circuit of the line contactor
must additionally be interrupted via terminal NS1NS2 using electrically isolated
(floating) mechanical switching elements. This means that the electronic control
has no influence when shutting down with electrical isolation. The cable routing
to the connecting terminals must be safely and electrically decoupled from the
electronics.
Before or at the same time that connection NS1NS2 is interrupted, the line
contactor must always be opened using terminal 48.
The NC contact 111213 of the line contactor, positivelydriven with the power
contacts, must be included in the feedback circuit of the external, safetyrelevant EMERGENCY STOP switchgear combination (safety relay). This means
that the function of the line contactor is cyclically monitored.

Notice
If a protective separation of the power DC link from the supply line is required,
for example, work must be performed on the power unit (connect/disconnect
motor), also ensure that all parallel connections to the power infeed are
electrically isolated using switching contacts. In this case, a possible
userspecific external connection between the electronics power supply and
the power DC link must be taken into consideration.
In order to shutdown the system when the power fails using the DC link energy,
it is possible to have a connection between the P500/M500 and P600/M600
terminals.
If a safe electrical separation is required for this interconnection, the
electronics, also possibly the monitoring module, must also be disabled or this
electronic power supply power DC link connection must be separated safely
and reliably because otherwise the electronic power supply of the power DC
link can be charged from the auxiliary DC link.
In the settingup mode (only with 1FT5 motors), the connection between the
electronics power supply and the power DC link must also be disconnected.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-243

8 Important Circuit Information

8.2 Infeed modules

8.2.3

02.07
05.08
05.01

Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module

The diagram below shows the initial state of terminals 48, 63, and 64 (jumpered) when the I/R module is delivered. For a description of terminals 72 to 74,
see Section 6.2.5.
Shutdown using the main switch, an external
line contactor or other switching elements.
Network failure

Load line
supply
present

Supply voltage

Supply voltage

T. 48

T. 64

8
T. 63

Ready
T. 72...74

A
t

Fig. 8-3

Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module

Switch S1.2 = OFF default setting in the I/R module Ready signal

The ready relay can only pullin if precharging has been completed and the
internal line contactor has pulledin.

When the power fails (line supply failure), the I/R module is internally inhibited.
This means that the I/R module can no longer regulate the DC link voltage
which means that no braking energy can be fed back into the line supply (no
regenerative feedback). The drives are not inhibited, but the ready relay drops
out after the power failure detection time with a delay that depends on the line
supply impedances.

When the line supply is switched off using the main switch or other switching
elements, ensure that the terminal 48 on the I/R module is open at least 10 ms
beforehand if other external parallel loads are also present in the switchgear
cabinet (see Chapter 7.3.6).

8-244

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 8-4

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

L2

L3

1U2 1V2 1W2

1U1 1V1 1W1

L1

At the NE module
Remove the jumpers
1U1 2U1
1V1 2V1
1W1 2W1

4)

3/PE AC 50/60 Hz 400 V

1)

PE

W1

V1

U1

Jumpers

1U1 1V1 1W1

L1

2)

9.3 Axis expansion using the monitoring module

9.3.1 Connection example, power supply (standard)

M500

X181

A3431820937

KIC

M500

X181

25.04.2001

8
=
+

Sh.

1
1 Sh.

All cables designated with #

must be routed so that they are short
circuit and groundfault proof.

1)

1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 P500

3)

-Monitoring
module 2

Drives
1 to n

Connection example, power supply (standard)

4) V (N) max. 415 V

1)

1U1 1V1 1W1 2U1 2V1 2W1 P500

3)

-Monitoring
module 1

Drives
1 to n

8.3.1

Fused terminal PHOENIX CONTACT

UK 6.3HESI with jumper EBS x8 (UL 600V), or
UK10DREHSI 6.3x32 with jumper FBI 1012 or EB 1012 (UL 300V), or
Phoenix ZFK 6 DREHSI 6.3x32 with jumper FBI 1012 (UL 600V) or equivalent
With fuse insert 6.3x32 mm 500V/10A SIBA 70 125 4010A (UL 500V)

M500

X181

M600

P600

2U1 2V1 2W1 P500

DC link

Equipment bus

Fused terminals 10 A

1)

3)

NE module

Drives
1 to n

CAUTION!
Connecting X181:P500 to DC link P600 and X181:M500 to DC link M600 is permissible!

Axis expansion using a monitoring module

3) Rated current at V(N) = 3ph. 400 V AC, approx. 600 mA

L2

L1
L2
L3
PE

8.3

and 120/156 kW NE modules.

2) Terminals L1 L2 are only available for 80/120 kW

Crosssection >= 1.5 qmm (>= AWG16) and

Cable length <= 3.0 m

Cable routing according to EN 602041/VDE 0113 Part 1:

1)

L1
L2
L3
PE

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.3 Axis expansion using a monitoring module

See also Section 8.15, examples of correct and incorrect NE connection to the line supply

Connection example, power supply (standard)

8-245

8 Important Circuit Information

8.3 Axis expansion using a monitoring module

8.3.2

05.01

Connection example, pulse enable

Instantaneous
shutdown
NE module

Monitoring module
72

9 FR+
2)

73.1

63 IF

S1.2

S1.2

Ready/
Error message

Ready/
Error message
1)
19 FR

1)
FR 19
0V
To the external power supply
Fig. 8-5

Instantaneous shutdown, pulse enable

Delayed shutdown
NE module

Monitoring module
15

72
KT

73.1

9 FR+

2)
63 IF
18

S1.2
Ready/
Error message

S1.2
Ready/
Error message
1)
19 FR

1)
FR 19
+24 V
A1 B1 A3 B3

15

KT
3)

A2

16

18

0V
To the external power supply
Fig. 8-6

Delayed shutdown, pulse enable

1) Settings, S1.2 Ready/fault signal, refer to Chapter 6.3.

2) The shutdown function is shown in a simplified fashion without the contacts of the driverelated control.
3) Time relay with delayed dropout with auxiliary voltage, e.g. 3RP15051AP30,
t(v) > max. braking time of the drives after the monitoring module.

8-246

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

8.3.3

General

8 Important Circuit Information

8.3 Axis expansion using a monitoring module

Description of the interfaces and functions

The electronics power supply integrated in the NE module supplies the connected drive modules via the equipment bus; and, for the digital drive groups
611 digital, also the SINUMERIK controls 840D or 810D integrated in the group.
The number of modules that can be connected is limited. The connection power
of the modules that can be connected is determined by adding the assessment
factors regarding the electronics points (EP) and gating points (AP). If the power
requirement exceeds the power rating of the NE module power supply, then the
drive group must be expanded by one or more monitoring modules. The overall
system then includes two or more electronic systems that are independent of
one another.
Further, the charge limit of the DC link must be carefully observed (refer to
Chapter 1.3).
Enable signals/commands or fault signals only effect the axes connected to a
common equipment bus. The equipment bus is interrupted between the last
axis after the NE module and the monitoring module.

Examples

S Connection example, power supply (standard) > refer to Fig. 8-4.

The connection example shows the threephase connection of the monitoring modules using fuse terminals after the power connection of the NE module.
As an alternative, the power supply of the monitoring module can also be
taken from the P600/M600 power DC link through terminals P500/M500. In
this case it must be taken into account that as a result of the limit imposed
by the DC link precharging circuit in the NE module, a maximum of two
monitoring modules with the associated axes may be connected. In this
case it must be carefully observed that after the line contactor is opened, the
DC link voltage decreases and therefore the power supply/communications
to the drive modules is interrupted.
As an alternative to fused terminals, the following circuitbreaker can be
used:
e.g. SIRIUS circuitbreaker, Order No. 3RV10111EA1V, (2.84 A )
This should be set to between 3.5 and 4 A. Although the active current drain
of the monitoring module is approx. 1 A, the rated current of the circuit
breaker should be selected somewhat higher due to the highfrequency
harmonic components. When a connection crosssection of 1.5 mm2 is
used, this therefore guarantees adequate cable protection.

S Connection example, pulse enable > refer to Section 8.3.2

The axes connected after the monitoring module may only be enabled if the
NE module signaled ready/fault signal. This means that the power DC link
has been chargedup and the internal line contactor has been closed. Any
fault signals present at the NE module must act either instantaneously or
delayed, interlocked with the pulse enable terminal 63 on the monitoring
modules and the subsequent axes.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-247

8 Important Circuit Information

8.3 Axis expansion using a monitoring module

05.01

S Instantaneous shutdown, pulse enable > refer to Fig. 8-5

The ready/fault signal at terminals 7273.1 of the NE module act directly on
the pulse enable, terminal 63 at the monitoring module. If there is a line fault
or a fault signal, then the ready signal is withdrawn at the NE module; this
means that after the dropout time of the ready relay, the pulses of the
drives after the monitoring module are inhibited and these drives coast
down.
This interlock cannot be used, e.g. for a power failure concept and also it
can disadvantages with respect to other applications when compared to a
delayed shutdown.

S Delayed shutdown pulse enable > refer to Fig. 8-6

Terminal 63 at the monitoring module is also only enabled via the ready/fault
signal at the NE module. If the signal is withdrawn at the NE module, terminal 63 is however only inhibited via time relayKT with dropout delay.
This means, for example, for a line fault or a fault signal at the NE module,
under certain secondary conditions, the drives can be even more quickly
braked:

Addresses

When braking, the DC link voltage must remain within the minimum and
maximum monitoring limits (refer to Chapter 6.3).

The external +24V power supply must maintain the enable signals of
terminals 65, 663.

For 611 digital drive modules, the internal enable signals must be maintained via the digital drive bus of the SINUMERIK 840D, 810D or for
SIMODRIVE 611 universal, communications must be kept via
PROFIBUS DP.

Contact addresses for the fuse terminals used in connection examples in

Section 8.3.1.
PHOENIX KONTACT GmbH & Co.
Flachsmarktstrasse 8
32825 Blomberg, Germany
Tel.
+49 (0)5235/30 0
Fax
+49 (0)5235/341200
SIBA SicherungenBau GmbH
Borker Strasse 22
44532 Luenen, Germany
Tel.
+49 (0)2306/70010
Fax
+49 (0)2306/700110

8-248

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.4 Drive modules

8.4

Drive modules

8.4.1

611 feed module with High Performance/High Standard

2axis FD module
Motor encoder 1

Motor encoder 2

X411

X412
Direct position 2

Direct position 1
X421

X422

BERO input 1

BERO input 2

X461

X462

X431

Feedback
Start inhibit

X432

AS1
AS2
663
9
P24
BI1

Pulse enable

EN+
P24
Brake 1
DA1 DA2

BERO 1
EN
BERO 2
EN+
M24
Brake 2

B1
19
B2
9
M24
BI2

X35
X34
DA3 M

U1

X141

X341

X151

X351

V1 W1
M

Motor
encoder 1

Fig. 8-7

Motor 1
e.g. 1FK6

U1

V1 W1
M
3

Motor 2
e.g. 1FK6

Motor
encoder 2

Diagram showing the terminals of the VSA module with High

Performance/High Standard

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-249

8 Important Circuit Information

8.4 Drive modules

8.4.2

02.07
05.01

Description of the interfaces and functions

The diagram of the terminals in Fig. 8-7 shows, in a simplified form, a 2axis
611 feed module comprising power module, control unit with High Performance/High Standard.

Readers note
Control unit with digital and PROFIBUS DP interface
> refer to Chapter 4.

Terminals AS1,
AS2

Signaling contact, relay, start inhibit

Terminal 663

Pulse enable/start inhibit

When connecting contacts AS1/AS2 in series, a contact voltage drop up to

max. 0.2 V must be taken into account for the lifetime of the contacts (100000
switching operations). For a 24 V switching voltage, due to the nonlinear contact characteristics, from experience, five contacts can be simply connected in
series without encountering any problems.

When terminal 663 is energized, this initiates two functions:

S The pulse enable and inhibit are effective via an optocoupler input after 1 ms
for a specific axis or for 2axis modules, for a specific module.

S The start inhibit, terminal 663 opencircuit, acts with a delay of approx. 40
ms after terminal 663 is inhibited due to the dropout delay of the start inhibit
relay.
The start inhibit supports safetyrelevant functions, refer to Section 8.5.
For pulse inhibit/start inhibit, the drives coast down without being braked.
Switch on terminal 663 after the ready signal of the power supply (terminals 72
to 74); when stopping after a power failure, terminal 663 must remain driven by
means of the voltage backup until the motors have reached a standstill.
Further, the 611D 1axis and 2axis modules and 611 universal HRS with
PROFIBUS interface also have a pulse enable signal that acts on specific axes.
The control is realized through NC/PLC interface signals via the digital drive bus
or via the PROFIBUS DP interface. The signals are effective, delayed corresponding to the appropriate cycle times.

Terminal 9

FR+
+24 V enable voltage for the internal enable signals.
The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group.

Terminal 19

FR
0 V enable voltage for the internal enable signals.

8-250

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.4 Drive modules

05.01

P24 terminals

+24 V supply for the brake control, tolerance range +18...30 V

M24 terminals

0 V supply for the brake control

Terminals BE1,
BE2

Output, brake control axis 1 and axis 2,

max. current is 500 mA
A ULcertified miniature fuse (max. 3.15 A) must be provided at the supply for
the brake control:
Value:
e.g. 3.15 AT/250 V; 5x20 mm UL
Company:
WickmannWerke GmbH
Annenstrasse 113
58453 Witte, Germany
Order No.:
181

Readers note
Connection example for a holding brake, refer to Chapter 4.1.1.

Terminals B1, B2

Input, external zero mark (BERO), axis 1 and axis 2.

Rated operating voltage: +13 to 30 V
If the referencing of the encoder zero pulses cannot be evaluated, then a signal
supplied from a mounted sensor (BERO) can be fed via this input as an equivalent zero mark.

DAC assignment

Three 8bit digital/analog converter (DAC) channels are available. An analog

image of various drive signals can be connected through to a test socket via
these converters.
The three DAC channels are assigned the following drive signals by default:
DA1: Current setpoint

Default shift factor: 4

DA2: Speed setpoint

Default shift factor: 6

DA3: Actual speed

Default shift factor: 6

M:

Reference point (ground)

Resolution: 8 bits
Rated operating voltage: 0...5 V
Maximum current: 3 mA

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-251

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

8.5

Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

8.5.1

Start inhibit applications

02.03
05.01

The SIMODRIVE 611 drive control units support the safe standstill function
this provides protection against unexpected starting according to the requirements of Appendix I No. 1.2.7 of the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC, DIN EN
9541 Category 3 and DIN EN 1037. It is important that the information and the
instructions in this documentation are precisely adhered to.
For this purpose, the drive control units are provided by default with an internal
safety relay with forced contacts. In the Configuration Manuals and user manuals, this safety relay is called a start inhibit function or start inhibit relay.
This safety relay galvanically separates the power supply of the optocouplers
for pulse transmission to the IGBT. The connected motor can no longer generate torque.
The safe standstill function prevents unexpected starting of the motor (from
standstill) that is connected to the drive control unit. The motor shaft is in a no
torque condition when the safe standstill function is active. This is the reason
that this safety function should only be activated after the drive actually comes
to a standstill. Otherwise, it will not be able to brake. The external machine control must have first brought the machine to a standstill and ensured that this has
actually taken place (that the machine has come to a standstill).

Caution
The velocity should be zero prior to the safe standstill function.

Notice
When the start inhibit function is correctly used, the forced signaling contact
AS1/AS2 must always be included in the line contactor circuit or the
EMERGENCY STOP circuit. If the function of the start inhibit relay is not
plausible regarding the operating mode of the machine, then the drive involved
must be electrically isolated from the line supply, e.g. using the line contactor in
the infeed module. The start inhibit and the associated operating mode may
only be reused again after the fault has been removed.

8-252

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

8.5.2

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

Mode of operation of the start inhibit

The current through the individual motor windings is controlled using the inverter
power module. The motors are fed with sinusoidal current.
A pulse generation logic clocks the six power transistors in a rotating fieldorientated pattern. An optocoupler for potential isolation is connected in each transistor arm between the control logic and the control (gating) amplifier of the
power module.
The start inhibit acts on each specific module. In each of the drive modules, a
positivelydriven relay in the inverter control acts in the input circuits of the optocouplers.

P600
U2
V2
W2

M
3~

M600
1
2

P5
AS1
AS2
K1

663
19

ASIC
with
gating logic

uP

Closedloop Control Module

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

1 Control amplifier (SIDUASIC)

K1
Fig. 8-8

2 Optocoupler

safety relay
Mode of operation using as an example the SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

A relay contact interrupts the power supply of the optocoupler inputs. This
means that the optocoupler blocks and cannot transfer any signal. The pulse
generation logic is inhibited using an additional branch that is electrically isolated.
For the drive modules, these two circuits are controlled from the machine
control through terminal 663 (motor start inhibit). The state of the relay contact in
the pulse power supply circuit is signaled to the external adaptation circuit
through a positively opening contact.
The signaling contact is accessible at the module terminals AS1 and AS2 and
the user can interlock this with his safetyrelevant control. When the start inhibit
fails, these start inhibit signaling contacts must disconnect the drive from the
line supply via the power contactor in the line supply infeed (line contactor in the
infeed module).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-253

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

02.03
05.01

When the start inhibit circuit is activated, it is no longer possible to gate several
power transistors orientated to the rotating field.

Warning
In the case that two faults simultaneously occur in the power module, a residual
risk remains where the drive suddenly rotates through a small angle:
> FT motors: 4 pole 90_, 6 pole 60_, 8 pole 45_;
> Induction motors: In the retentive area, max. 1 slot division,
that corresponds to approx. 5_ to 15_
When a fault occurs, 1FN linear motors can continue to rotate electrically
through 180_ (approx. 56 or 72 mm including overshoot).

Warning
When the start inhibit is active, the motor can no longer generate any torque. If
external forces act on the drive axes, additional holding devices and equipment
are required, e.g. brakes. Here, it is especially important to note the effect of
gravity on hanging/suspended axes.
The start inhibit does not result in electrical isolation. This means that under no
circumstances does it provide protection against electric shock.

For operational interruptions, maintenance, servicing and cleaning work

performed on the machine or plant, the complete machine must also be
electrically isolated from the line supply using the line supply isolating device,
e.g. main switch (see EN 602041; 5.3).

8.5.3

Connectingup the start inhibit

The start inhibit is addressed in the drive modules via terminal 663. The start
inhibit relay is controlled using the internal enable voltage FR+ (terminal 9,
+24 V)/or an external +24 V voltage. When using an external voltage source, its
reference potential (ground) must be connected to FR (terminal 19).
When the relay is open, terminal 663 open, the start inhibit is activated.
When the AS1/AS2 signaling contact is closed, this signals the start inhibit is
effective state with electrical isolation.
The circuit must be protected against overload and short circuit using a fuse
with a max. 2 A rating!
When terminal 663 is externally controlled (drive), a failsafe signal must be
used.

8-254

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

Notice
The start inhibit relay has pickup and dropout delay times of
max. 40 ms. The external wiring must be connected to terminals AS1/AS2 so
that it is shortcircuit proof.
One side of the excitation coil of the safety relay is connected to the grounded
electronics chassis (PELV circuit according to DIN VDE 0160). When supplying
the excitation coil (relay coil) from an external 24 V power supply, its negative
pole must be connected to ground potential. The external 24 V power supply
must fulfill the requirements for a PELV circuit in compliance with DIN VDE
0160.

Table 8-1
Terminal

Technical data of the safety relay

Designation

Description

Section

1)

AS12)

Contact 1

Feedback signal
contact, relay

AS22)

Contact 2

Start inhibit

Control input
start inhibit

Nominal resistance of the excitation coil

600 ... 1000

663

Type
NC

30 V DC/max. 2 A
250 V AC/max. 1 A3)

21 30 V DC
Max. switching frequency:
6/min
Electrical lifetime: min.
100.000 operating cycles
Mechanical lifetime: 10 million operating cycles

Enable voltage
FR+ (internal)

+ 24 V

19

Reference
FR (external)

Chassis ground

1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact

2) When the AS1/AS2 contacts are connected in series a contact resistance of
approx. 0.20 Ohm must be taken into consideration over the lifetime of the contacts.
For a 24 V switching voltage, due to the nonlinear contact characteristics, from
experience, five contacts can be simply connected in series without encountering
any problems.
3) In accordance with EN 602041 (machine safety), control transformers must be used
for AC control voltages.

Warning
Only qualified personnel may install and commission the safe standstill
function.
All of the external safetyrelevant cables, e.g. control cable for the safety relay,
feedback signal contacts, must be routed so that they are protected, e.g. using
cable ducts. The possibility of shortcircuits and crosscircuits must be
excluded.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-255

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

8.5.4

02.03
05.01

Sequence and timing when using the start inhibit

The drives must have been stopped before terminal 663 is inhibited and the
start inhibit is activated.
The drives can be stopped, e.g. by ramping down the drives in a controlled way
using the NC program, inhibiting the driveenable terminal 64 or the axisspecific controller enable, terminal 65.
Under fault conditions, the equipment must be safely disconnected and isolated
from the line supply using the line contactor.
If a fault occurs when actuating the start inhibit, then this fault must be removed
before the isolating mechanical protective devices (e.g. guards) to the working
space of the machine or plant are opened. After the fault has been removed,
the handling sequence for the start inhibit must be repeated. Under fault conditions, all of the drives, machine and the plant must be shutdown.
If one of the following faults occurs with terminal 663 deenergized and the protective devices withdrawn, then under all circumstances, EMERGENCY STOP
must be immediately initiated:

S The feedback signaling contacts AS1/AS2 remain open; the start inhibit is
not activated.

S There is a fault in the external control circuit itself.

S There is a fault in the signal cables of the feedback signal contact.

All of the drives of the machine/plant must be disconnected and isolated from
the line supply via the line contactor.
If the control of the start inhibit has been correctly integrated in the external
safetyrelevant drive control and has been carefully checked the drives in
the isolated working zone of the machine are secure against undesirable starting and personnel can enter or access the hazardous zone that has been restricted.

Notice
The relevant regulations for settingup operation must be carefully observed.

8-256

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

8.5.5

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

Checking the start inhibit

The safety relay is an important component associated with the safety and
availability of the machine. This is the reason that if the system functions incorrectly, the control unit together with the safety relay must be replaced. Function
checks are required at regular intervals in order to detect an incorrect function.
The intervals specified in the appropriate regulation BGV A1 39, Paragraph 3
are decisive for the intervals in which the system must be checked. This is the
reason that the function check/test must be performed depending on the application conditions; however, it must be performed at least once a year and in
addition, after the system has been commissioned for the first time as well as
when modifications and repairs have been made.

S The drive pulses must be inhibited when the voltage at terminal 663 is removed. Further, the feedback signal contacts AS1/AS2 of the start inhibit
must close. The drive coasts down.

S Withdrawing the protective devices, e.g. opening the protective door/guard

while the drive is running. The drive must be braked as quickly as possible
and then shut down. In so doing, no inadmissible hazard may occur.

S All of the possible fault/error cases that can occur must be individually simulated in the signal lines/cables between the feedback signal contacts and
the external control as well as the signal evaluation functions of this control
for example, by interrupting the start inhibit monitoring circuit at terminal
AS1AS2.

S The monitoring circuit AS1 AS2 should be disconnected for this purpose.
In all of the simulated fault situations, the line contactor must isolate all of the
drives of the machine or system from the line supply.
If there is a connection between the NE or monitoring module power supply,
terminal 500/M500 to the power DC link P600/M500, then this must be
safely and reliably disconnected at the same time as the line contactor is
opened, e.g. using contactors.

Warning
Only qualified personnel may perform these checks carefully observing the
necessary safety measures.
After the start inhibit check has been completed, all of the changes made to the
control as part of this check must be reversed.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-257

Fig. 8-9

8-258

A1

P24

Infeed unit

K1

S2

Off

S1

On

line contactor of the 1

P24

Y33 Y34

A2

K1

PE

3TK2828

Line supply

14 24 32

A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31

S3

48 58

47 57

A2

P24

Y33 Y34

PE

A2

3TK2828

14 24 32

A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31

Monitoring the internal

Closed

S2

48 58

47 57

Monitoring the internal

line contactor of the
Infeed unit

65

19

n=0

M
RF

EN

AS1
AS2
9 EN+
663 IF

111
113
213
NS1
NS2

EN

EN+

K1

U1 V1 W1

M
3

U2 V2 W2

SIMODRIVE
Closedloop Control Module

PV

SIMODRIVE
NE

48

Line supply

Q1

8.5.6

Open

P24

Main switches

Supply system

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill
02.03
05.01

Example safe standstill with contactor safety combination

Example, minimum circuitry for the safe standstill function with SIMODRIVE 611

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

Function

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

Using two SIGUARD contactor safety combinations (A1. A2) for Emergency
Stop and protective interlocking, it is possible to implement a configuration
according to EN9541 Control Category 3 and EN1037. Using the circuitry as
shown in Fig. 8-9, a stop function, Category 1 according to EN 60204 is implemented.
Switches S2 and S3 are positivelyopening position switches corresponding to
EN 1088.

Response to
opened protective
door

When the protective doors are opened, the contactor safety combinations trip,
staggered in time and initiate that the drive is stopped in accordance with
EN 602041 stop Category 1.

S Signal 0 is specified at the controller enable (CE) input of the drive by means
of the enable contacts of the contactor safety combination A1. The drive is
immediately decelerated to speed 0, and the pulses are canceled.

S The delay time of the contactor safety combination A1 is set so that the drive
has come to a standstill when the delayed contacts open therefore initiating
the second contactor safety combination A2.

S The contactor safety combination A2 instantaneously deenergizes the

safety relay in the drive via terminal 663. The feedback signal contacts of
the safety relay must be closed after the selected delay time has expired,
otherwise the drive is isolated from the line supply via terminal 48.

S For a protective door with tumbler mechanism, the drive is stopped with subsequent pulse cancellation, e.g. by pressing an appropriate button on the
machine. The zero speed signal releases the tumbler mechanism and
when the protective doors open, the safety relay in the drive is immediately
deenergized. In this particular case, the first timer stage (contactor safety
combination A1) is not required.

S When the line supply is switchedin through K1 with button S1 power on

the correct functioning of the internal line contactor of the infeed unit is
checked using the feedback signal in the poweron circuit.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-259

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

8.5.7

Function

02.03
05.01

Example, safe standstill for several drive groups

The concept of the safe standstill function with higherlevel main contactor as
shown in Fig. 8-10 is implemented on an electrical injection molding machine.

a
Enable

c
For a protective device with tumbler mechanism:
a An enable signal is issued, if n=0, and
simultaneously inhibit the pulses via
the control unit

Instantaneous contact at the

start inhibit, terminal 663

Delayed contact at the

interlocking logic

AS1
AS2
Protective door A

AS1
AS2
AS1

Drive 1.1
Drive 1.2
Drive 1.3

AS2

2
Protective door B

Moving protective device

AS1

Protective door A

Drive 2.1
AS2
AS1 Drive 2.2
AS2

Protective door B

AS1
3

AS2

Drive 3.1

EN+
Main contactor
48 Start

Line supply infeed NE

Fig. 8-10

Example, safe standstill function with several drive groups

The machine comprises three functional drive groups. The feedback signal contacts of each control unit AS1/AS2 within a drive group are connected in series.
Every drive group is secured using a moving protective device. Interdependencies according to Table 8-2 apply between the drive groups and moving protective devices.

8-260

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules/safe standstill

Table 8-2

Effect of the moving protective devices on the drive groups

Moving protective
device

Drive 1.1/1.2/1.3

Drive 2.1/2.2

Drive 3.1

Protective door A

Protective door B

X = the drives are shutdown when the protective device is actuated

Behavior when the

protective doors
are open

As long as the assigned protective device prevents any intervention in the hazardous zone, the feedback signal contacts of these power modules are jumpered. After the protective device has been opened, the drives must be shutdown in the defined time and the feedback signal contacts of the safety relay
must be closed otherwise, the higherlevel main contactor will open.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-261

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

8.6

Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

8.6.1

Block diagram of the application example

Supply, PLC, NC

=1/1
=1/2

PLC


Filter

NC

Control, on/off
Drives, on
Drives, off
EMERGENCY STOP

=4/2
Drives
on/off/stop
in an emergency
(line contactor)

PS
Prechar Supp
ge

5/15/24 V

ly
syste
m

NE module

P600

n > nx MSD
Limit position

Equipment bus

Start drives

=4/3

MSD
Start/stop (start inhibit)
t(v) > 1s

n > nx

M600

=4/1 MSD module

Start agreement
Stop drives
t(v) changeover
when settingup

FD
Start/stop (start inhibit)
t(v) < 1s

FD module
(2axis module)

24 V DC

=4/1

Reactor

PLC

Modes
automatic/settingup
Agreement

FD module

Automatic
Setup
Agreement function
Setpoint changeover
when settingup

=5/1

Interlocks with the drive control

(plant/systemspecific)

User-side

machine

Position
switches

=6/1
Protective door
monitoring

Request enable
n = 0 MSD
Spindle encoder

=7/1

control

&  t(v)
program
Start
PLC

PLC

logic

Automatic/settingup
Agreement function
(+)

NC

PLC

MSD

MSD
External speed
monitoring
n=0/n>nx

Stop

=8/1
Limit-position
monitoring

Move away from

the limit position
(+)

=9/1
Armature short-circuit
braking
nsetpoint

NC/FM (analog)
machining program

Position encoders
1 to n
indirect or direct
measuring system
Fig. 8-11

8-262

Monitor/
machine
control panel

=10/1
Power contactors
in the motor circuit

() Limit
position

() Limit
position
Move away from
the limit position
Drive, off/on
Drive, off/on

Block diagram of the application example

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8.6.2

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

Function description of the application example

Application

The block diagram, Section 8.6.1 shows an overview of an application example

for a complete driverelated control of a machine with SIMODRIVE 611 drive
components with analog setpoint interface.
For information on versions with SIMODRIVE 611 digital and 611 universal, refer to Section 8.8.
The individual applications and functions of the drive control are described in
detail in the following Section 8.7 using circuit examples =1 to =9.
The circuit examples =1 to =3 are provided for basic machine applications. Circuit examples =1 and =4 to =9 describe all of the essential functions that are
used for a processing machine/machine tool.
The circuit concept has been designed so that the individual control groups,
from the basic function in circuit example =4

S Drives on/off/stopping in an emergency situation; start/stop/safe standstill

through additional functions

S Operating mode selection, automatic/setup mode with agreement =5

S Protective door monitoring with tumbler mechanism =6

S Limit switch, limit position monitoring =7

S Armature shortcircuit braking =8, and
S Power contactors in motor circuit =9
can be used for the particular applications, graduated from basic up to complex
functions. When expanding the control system, stepbystep, up to the fully
expanded configuration, the terminal jumpers, in the circuit examples, should be
removed (interrupted), and the required interlocking and monitoring circuits inserted.
In the application example, Fig. 8-11 the SIMODRIVE 611 drive group comprises a 1PH7 main spindle drive and three 1FT5 feed drives as an example for
a machine tool.
The driverelated control essentially includes the safetyrelevant, 2channel
hardware control with the associated PLC functions. The PLC control handles
the coordinated sequence of the drive control through logic operations; however
it does not handle any safetyrelevant functions.
The NC/FM (positioning control), with the setpoint and actual value interface as
well as the machine control of the user side, is not discussed in the subsequent
text. This is the reason that they are only depicted from the essential principle.

S Control Category in accordance with EN 9541

The 2channel system structure of controls =4 to =6 corresponds, when the
individual components are correctly used, to control Category 3 according to
EN 9541. This means that if a single fault occurs in the system, then the
safety function must still be kept.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-263

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

05.08
05.01

The user should evaluate the control Categories of the additional circuits =7 to
=9. This depends on how he uses the thirdparty components/monitoring devices that he selected etc. and how they are integrated into the basic control in
a safetyrelevant fashion.

Note
For machines that are to be classified in a lower Category, e.g. 1 or 2 according
to EN 9541, after the hazard analysis/risk evaluation or type C Standard, the
control can be principally derived from these circuit examples and implemented
in a more simple, singlechannel, system structure!

This also applies to the subareas/subfunctions of a machine that, for example, according to type C Standards, must be implemented with either a lower or
higher control category, deviating from the basic machine. For example, after
the danger analysis/risk evaluation it can also be necessary that a hydraulic/
pneumatic clamping unit must be controlled in the work area using a two
handed control device in accordance with category 4.

Functions

S Switching examples =4 to =9

The 2channel system structure is achieved in this application example:

First shutdown path: The power feed to the drive motors is disconnected via
the start inhibit functions in the drive modules.
The shutdown is realized using terminal 663. The positivelydriven feedback signal contact of the start inhibit relay via terminal AS1AS2 is cyclically monitored and intervenes in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit of the
safety relay.
For a detailed description of the start inhibit function, refer to Section 8.5.
Second shutdown path: The line contactor in the NE module galvanically
disconnects the line supply from the DC link of the drive modules.
The shutdown is realized using terminal 48 at the same time (simultaneously) with the deenergizing of the contactor coil in a safetyrelevant,
electrically isolated fashion using terminals NS1 NS2.
The shutdown is realized, for example, when stopping in an emergency,
from fault signals received from the drive system or via the start inhibit monitoring when a fault condition occurs.
After each poweroff cycle, the forced normally closed contact 111 213 of
the line contactor is monitored in the feedback circuit of the EMERGENCY
STOP safety relay. For a detailed description of the line contactor, refer to
Section 8.2.2.
For an EMERGENCY STOP, the drives are stopped in Stop Category 1 according to EN 602041; 9.2.2: Controlled stopping the power feed is only
interrupted when the motor has come to a standstill.
Circuit examples =2 and =3, shown in Section 8.7, can be used for basic
and average applications.

8-264

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

S Circuit example =2:

When the drives are powered up and powered down, the complete drive
group, including the line contactor and start inhibit terminals, is switched in a
safetyrelated way through two channels. The poweron frequency per unit
time of the NE module is limited. This is due to the precharging circuit to
ramp up the DC link voltage at the capacitors.
This circuit is, for example, not suitable for machines where the protective
door is frequently opened or for the settingup mode where the agreement
function is frequently applied.

S Circuit example =3:

Using this circuit, one or more drives can be selectively shut down in a safetyrelated way from an operational drive group, using a keyoperated
switch, limit switch, light barriers, and brought into the safe standstill operating mode.
Beforehand, the NC control must have safely stopped the drives. This circuit
can also be used in conjunction with the basic control =4.
Circuit examples =2 and =3 are also used to obtain a basic understanding of
the complex and extensive control functions from circuit =4 onwards.

Note
All of the following circuit examples neither include safetyrelated or other
mechanical interlocks that may be necessary with the machine control on the
user side.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-265

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

8.6.3

05.08
02.12
05.01

Safety systems and Standards

Objectives

The objective of safety systems is to keep potential hazards for both people and
the environment as low as possible by using suitable technical equipment, without restricting, more than absolutely necessary, industrial production, the use of
machines and the production of chemical products. The protection of man and
environment has to be put on an equal footing in all countries by applying rules
and regulations that have been internationally harmonized. At the same time,
this is also intended to avoid that safety requirements in different countries have
an impact on the competitive situation, i.e. the intention is to facilitate international trade.

Basic principle of
the legal
requirements in
Europe

Legislation demands, the quality of the environment and the health of people
are to be protected using preventive measures (Directive 96/82/EC of the
Council Seveso II). Legislation also promotes health and safety at work (Machinery Directive, health and safety legislation). The objective to achieve these
and similar goals is specified in the appropriate EU Directives by legislative bodies for various areas (regulated area). In order to achieve these objectives, the
legislative bodies place demands on companies operating plants and systems
and the manufacturers of equipment and machines. These legislative bodies
have at the same time allocated responsibility for possible damage.

EU Directives

A new concept (new approach, global approach) used as basis for the EU
Directives:

S EU Directives only specify generally valid safety goals and define basic
safety requirements.

S EU Directives specify that the Member States must mutually recognize domestic regulations.
The EU Directives are all of equal importance, i.e. if several Directives are applicable for a specific piece of equipment or machine, then the requirements of all
of the relevant Directives apply.
For a machine with electrical equipment, among others, the following apply

S Machinery Directive 98/37/EC

S Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
S EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Machinery
directive

The European Machinery Directive is essential valid for all machines. The minimum requirements are defined in Appendix I of the Directive. More detailed information is then provided in the harmonized European Standards types A, B
and C.

Disposal

The devices must be disposed off corresponding to the regulations valid in the
particular country!

8-266

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

However, Standards have not been drawnup for all types of machines. For
machine tools for metal working, robots, and automated manufacturing systems, some Draft Standards and final Standards do exist, e.g. type C Standards. In many cases, Category 3 acc. to EN 9541 is defined in these Standards for the safetyrelated controls. The basic requirement of this category is:
Singlefault failsafety with partial fault recognition. Generally, this requirement
can be fulfilled using a 2channel system structure (redundancy). Subareas of
a machine control can also be classified with other Categories B, 1, 2, or 4
according to EN 9541.

Hazard analysis
and risk
assessment

According to the Machinery Directive 98/37/EC, the manufacturer of a machine

or a safety component or the person or persons responsible for placing such
equipment on the market is legally obliged to perform a risk analysis in order to
determine all of the risks that may arise in connection with the machine or safety
component concerned. He must design and construct the machine or safety
component on the basis of this analysis.
A risk assessment must identify all residual risks that need to be documented.
For the technique to evaluate and assess these risks, among others, the following Standards should be carefully observed EN 292 General Design Guidelines
for the Safety of Machinery; EN 1050 Safety of Machinery, Guidelines for Risk
Assessment and EN 954 Safetyrelevant Parts of Controls.

CE conformity

The machinery manufacturer or the company based in the European Economic

Community or persons that they have nominated must make a legal declaration
regarding the CE Conformance for the complete machine.

Note
The listed Directives and legislation represent just a selection to communicate
the essential goals and principles. This list does not claim to be complete.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-267

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

8.7

8-268

05.08
05.01

Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

Fig. 8-12 = 1 cabinet supply, PLC, NC; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-269

Fig. 8-13 = 2 On/off/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-270

Fig. 8-14 = 2 On/off/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-271

Fig. 8-15 = 3 Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-272

Fig. 8-16 = 4 On/off//stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill;

Sheet 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-273

Fig. 8-17 = 4 On/off//stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill;

Sheet 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-274

Fig. 8-18 = 5 Operating modes, automatic/setup mode with agreement;

Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-275

Fig. 8-19 = 6 Automatic operation with protective door monitoring; Sheet 1/1 .

8-276

Fig. 8-20 = 7 Limit switch, limit position monitoring; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-277

Fig. 8-21 = 8 Armature shortcircuit braking; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-278

Fig. 8-22 = 9 Power contactors in the motor circuit; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-279

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

PE

PE

=2/1.1

1) Specify max. fusing!

2

F11

L+

5
e.g. 3RV...

PLC

1
2

1
2

24

23

14

I11

fault
24 V DC

PLC

33
=4K24
=4/2.6 34

33
=4K23
=4/2.5 34

13

Automatic
circuit breaker
e.g. 5SX...
5SY...

A3431820937

KIC

17.Dec.2002

8
=1
+

EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP, instantaneous

Instantaneous
if circuit = 4
instead of circuit = 2

13
F14
14

=2K22
=2/2.5

Load
Braking
Valves

13
F13
14

PELV circuit

Contactors

F12

24 V DC

e.g. SITOP power 6EP14...

14 22

13 21

13L+

Protective measures corresponding to the power supply utility regulations

Cabinet supply, PLC, NC

G11

* If the jumper is
removed, an
insulation monitor
must be installed

17 e.g. 3LD2
3KA5
18
3KE4
=4/1.1

3/N/PE AC 50/60 Hz 400 V

(415 V)
(480 V)
Infeed, external fusing/protection

L1 L2 L3 N

Circuit example =1

1)

Q1

Line supply
isolating device
(main switch)

Leading auxiliary contact

element for
Poweringdown
>=10 ms

Q11

0 V DC
11L

Only when
required!

11L+

3/PE AC 50/60 Hz 400 V

12L+

Fig. 8-12
14L+

Sh.

9
1
1 Sh.

1L1/2.0
1L2/2.0
1L3/2.0
PE/2.0

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=1 cabinet supply, PLC, NC; Sheet 1/1

8-269

Fig. 8-13

8-270
2.7

1)

24

23

3) Overvoltage limiting
Holding brake, refer to PJ instructions
Motors for MSD + FD
Chapter AL_S

2) Open, jumper, term. 9 48

Open when supplied

Circuit example =2

PLC PLC

I11 E12

1) Jumper, term. NS1NS2

Open when supplied
Connected electrically
isolated contacts!

11L

11L+

11L

A12
2.4

=1A25
=1/2.4

A1

11

Feed drives
(synchronous)

M12

M
3~

X412

A2

9 65.2
EN+ RF
24 V

A3431820937

KIC

M13

M
3~

U2, V2, W2, PE1, PE2

(2axis version)

U2, V2, W2, PE1, PE2

Module

663 AS1 AS2

IF

A14
2.4

Axisspecific controller enable signals

NC measuring circuit module

11

X411

9 65.1
EN+ RF
+24 V

Drives, on/off/stopping in an emergency

EN
19 72 73.1 73.2 74 5.3 5.1 5.2 111 113 213

63 9 112 AS1 AS2 NS1 NS2

9 64
48
IF EN+
EN+ AF Start
+24 V
3/PE AC 50/60 Hz 400 V+24 V S1.2
NE module
=1/2.2/21L1
U1
Ready for operation
OFF
=1/2.2/21L2
V1
fault signal
ON
=1/2.2/21L3
W1
Overtemperature
=1/2.2/PE1
PE Ready/
Line contactor
Motors
fault
heatsink
=1/2.8/17
X131

A10
2.4

2)

14

13

18

17

K23
2.7

K22 13
2.5 14

=1Q1
=1/1.1

663 AS1 AS2

IF
FD module

M14

M
3~

17.Dec.2002

11

=2
+

Holding brake
Option

B1

Y14 B1+

K27 13
R14
2.6
14
4 (6)

13L+
11L

X411 U2, V2, W2, PE1, PE2

P600
M600

Equipment bus

9 65
EN+ RF
+24 V

Sh.

1
2 Sh.

3)

n module

28 /=3/1.0

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611
05.08
05.01

=2 On/off/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 1/2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

0 V DC

A2

Circuit example =2

2) t (v) > max. braking time FD

Configuration (0.5 30s)

Y34 Y32

uC2

14

tv

K27
.7

A14
1.8

A12
1.5

A10
1.0

K23
.7

K22
.5

S23
.6
Drives
On

A25

PLC

14 .1
22 .6
34
44

A2

Drives, on/off/stopping in an emergency

13
21
33
43

K25

A1

A2

A1

Drives
Off

I22
PLC

S22
.2

K22
=1/1.6
1.1
=3/1.4
.4

Drives
On

I21
PLC

NE module
Ready for operation

3)

22

AS2
21

AS2
AS1

213
AS1

52
111

52
51

51

3) Insert jumper or safetyrelevant

insert the monitoring circuits of the userside
machine control!

On/off/Emergency Stop

28

2)

Stopping
in an
emergency!

Monitored ON command

1 Y35

uC1

1
=1A25
=1/2.4 2
35
=3/1.6 NCREADY
1)
=3/1.6
S22
36
.5
Drives
Off
13
Ext.
K25
Pushbutton
.5
14
switches
S24
EMERGENCY STOP
A1
Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22
K21
6.3 A

3TK28421BB42

1) Open jumper, terminals 3536 for

expansion, circuit = 3;
Insert interlock.

11L

24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC

S21
control
off/on

14L+
11L+
12L+

3TK28301CB30

Fig. 8-14
I23
PLC

22

21

Contactor
feedback
link

E25
PLC

K25
.5

O27

PLC

A2

A1

14 1.9
22 .4
34
44
22

A2

A1

34

33

K23
1.1
1.2
.7
.4

S28

A3431820937

KIC

13
21
33
43
21

K27

K23
.7
tv

Holding brake
Option

14 24 34 44 52

13 23 33 43 51

Instantaneous

Drives
On

S23
.4

3TK28301CB30

I29
PLC

=2
+

11L

Sh.

14 24 34 44 52

17.Dec.2002

2
2 Sh.

Machine
control panel

13 23 33 43 51

delayed

NC program
Start
Stop

I28
PLC

S29

14L+
11L+
12L+

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=2 On/off/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 2/2

8-271

Fig. 8-15

8-272

Circuit example =3

663
IF

X351

FDD

M11

M
3~

14
R14

13

Holding brake
Option

B1

Y14 B1+

4 (6)

K14
.7

13L+

13L+

AS1 AS2

U2, V2, W2, PE1, PE2

11

X411

P600
M600

X151

9 65
EN+ RF
+24 V

14

48
13

47

33
34

23
24

Start/Stop

14 24 32

13 23 31

1) t (v) > max. braking time FD

Configuration (0.5 30s)

PE

PE

A2

Ch2(t)

Monitored start

Ch1(t)

1)

Ch2

Ch1

t (v) < 1s

CONTROL
LOGIC

A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22

Drives
Stop
=2K22
=2/2.5

S11

Y33 Y34

0 V DC

K11
.1
.7
.1

K14 21
.7 22

K13 21
.6
22

Drives, start/stop/safe standstill

11L

S12
Drives
Start

max. 2 A

F11

48 58

47 57

34 .7
44 .7

43

22 .3
33

14 .1
21

A2

A1

Diode!
t (v) >= 60 ms

36
=2/2.2
Start inhibit
monitoring
Drives
Stop

PLC

I11

32

31

A3431820937

44

KIC

34
43

22 .3

14 .2

A2

A1

33

21

13

K14

44

43

A14

PLC

Holding brake
Option

34

K11
.3
33

K13
.6

AS1
K13
AS2 .6

=2/2.2
35

A11
.1

13

K13

NE module

.6

A11

K11 13
.3
14

.6

K11
.3
NC K13

24 V DC
24 V DC

=1A25
=1/2.4

=2/1.8/ 28

11L+
12L+

8
17.Dec.2002

=3
+

11L+

11L+
12L+

Sh.

1
1 Sh.

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611
05.08
05.01

=3 Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 8-16

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

0 V DC

Circuit example =4

11L

Insert jumper or
safetyrelevant
monitoring circuits
of the userside
machine control!
insert!

K33
3.5

K24
.6

K23
.5

A10
1.0

S23
.6
Drives
On

1)

2)

N/L

=8/1.2
82

1) Open jumper, term. 75 76

for external speed monitoring
MSD, circuit = 7

X6

14

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
83

K23

66

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
81

K24

14 3.2
24 =5/1.1
34 =1/1.7
44
54
62 .1
72
84

A2

A1

24 34 44 54

S23
.1

Contactor
feedback
link

Drives
On

13
21
33
43

K25

S28

A3431820937

KIC

14 .3
22 .7
34
44

A2

A1

A25

PLC

NE module
Ready for operation

E25
PLC

21
K25
.7 22

I23
PLC

14 3.2
24 =5/1.2
34 =1/1.7
44
54
62 .1
72
82

A2

A1

Drives
Off

Drives
Off

65

I22
PLC

I21
PLC

65
K21
S22
.1 66 .3

Drives on/off/stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill

On/off/EMERGENCY STOP

X2 X4

76
=7/1.4
=7/1.3
75

=8/1.2
81

91
=9/1.7 3)
=9/1.7
2) Open jumper, term. 81 82
92
for limit switch limit position
monitoring, circuit = 8
13
38
K25
3.8
.7 14
3.8
3) Open jumper, term. 91 92
37
=1A25 1
for armature shortcircuit
=1/2.4 2
braking, circuit = 9
NCREADY
S22
S21
.6
control
Drives
off/on
Off
Ext. pushbutton
Stopping
in an
111
emergency!
213
S24
61
EMERGENCY STOP
K21L1/L+
X1
X3
X5
13 23 33 43 53
62 1.1
V1
61 1.2
K3
.5
62
K2
R3 K3 D3 K1
H1
61
K2 H3
K2
62
H2
K2
R5
K1
K1
K3
K3
K1
D2
R2
R1
D1
K1

F21
max. 2 A

24 V DC
24 V DC

3TK28060BB4

11L+
12L+

I29
PLC

25.04.2001

13
21
33
43

K27

K36
3.9

=4
+

14 1.9
22 3.1
34
44

A2

A1

24

23

O27

PLC

11L

9
Sh.

Machine
control panel

Option
Holding brake

NC program
Start
Stop

I28
PLC

S29

11L+
12L+

1
2 Sh.

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=4 On/off//stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/2

8-273

8-274

11L

=5/1.8
512

0 V DC

K36
.9

K33
.5

K35
.5

K32
.4

62

52
61

X8
51

22 K31
51 1.1
.5
52
X7

21

13
K24
14 2.6

Circuit example =4

A2 14 24 32

Ch2(t)

Ch1(t)

Ch2

Ch1

48 58

47 57

1)

A1 13 23 33
K32
1.1
1.2
1.1
.1

701
=7/1.7 4)
=7/1.7
702

=5/1.9
58

57
=5/1.9

K35
1.6
=5/1.9
.1

R3

A1/ A2/
L + L

Diode!

MSD delayed stop

14 .6
13
23
24
33
34 1.4
43
44 .8
52 .1
51
61
62 2.1
72 =5/1.1
71
82 =6/1.8
81

A2

A1

44 52

K33
t (v) >= 60 ms

A2 14 24 34

43 51

14

0.5 2s

FDD
delayed
Stop

E36
PLC

K36
.9

13

Y2

1s

Z1

2s

Z3

R6

K1

R7

A3431820937

X8

K2

8
=4
+

11L+
12L+

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
81

Sh.

9
2
2 Sh.

14 .6
24 2.8
34 1.6
44 .8
54 =7/1.7
62 .1
72
82 =6/1.8

11L

A2

A1

78 88 98

77 87 97

44

43

44

43

K36
Diode!
t (v) >= 60 ms

25.04.2001

K2

H1

K1

X7

38
2.2
Start inhibit
monitoring

AS2

AS1
K36
AS2 .9
AS1

AS1
K33
AS2 .5

2.2
37

R1

A14
1.7

A12
1.5

A11
1.3

FD delayed stop

1.5 s

KIC

3)

Z2

C1 + C2 + C3 + C4 +

R5

V1 V2

MSD
delayed
Stop

14

Drives
Stop

K33
.5

E33
PLC

32

13

I31
PLC

K31
.1

31

Drives on/off/stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill

4) Jumper, term. 701 702

for external
standstill monitoring
MSD, circuit =7

Drives, start/stop

PE

PE

Monitored start

2)

CONTROL
LOGIC

Y33 Y34

3) t (v) > max. braking time FD

Configuration (without jumpers 0.5s)
0
1

2) t(v) > max. braking time MSD

Configuration (0.5 30s)

14

13

55
=5/1.9 1)
=5/1.9
56

A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31

Drives
Stop
K23
2.5

S31

53
1) =5/1.8
=5/1.8
54

1) Open jumpers, terminals 5354/ 5556/ 5758/ 511512

and insert connection 5152 for
settingup operation with agreement, circuit = 5.

1)

511
=5/1.8 K27
2.8

51
=5/1.71) S32
=5/1.7
Drives
52
Start

F31
max. 2 A

24 V DC
24 V DC

3TK28271BB40

Fig. 8-17
3TK28301CB30

8
3TK29230BB4

11L+
12L+

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611
05.08
05.01

=4 On/off//stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 2/2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

0 V DC

Y11 Y12

K13

Circuit example =5

A2

A1

14 24

13 23

A2

A1
K15

K16
.5

S15
.1

A2

A1

62

61

14 .8
22 .1
34 =7/1.2
44 .6

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
83
4

14 .7
24 .9
34 .5
44 .9
54 =7/1.3
62 .1
72 .5
84 .8

13
23
33
43
53
61
73
83

14 .6
24 .2
34 .7
44 .8
54 =8/1.6
62 .4
74 .7
84 =9/1.7

13
21
31
43

K17

14 .7
22 .1
32
44

A2

A1

A17

PLC

44

43

44

43
14

13

13

34
13
K14
14 .3

K13
.2

74

14
73

13

52
=4/3.0

K16
.5

K17
.5

A3431820937

44

43

84

83

97
23
K15
98 .4 24

58
=4/3.4

=4K35
=4/3.5

25.Apr.2001

8
=5
+

Sh.

9
1
1 Sh.

2) For agreement buttons

with two positions,
an EMERGENCY STOP button
must be located
close to it!

11L

Button =4S32
Switch over
Drives, start Drives, stop < 1s
ineffective for settingup operation
Setup operation
with agreement

512
=4/3.0

K15
.4

54
56
=4/3.2 =4/3.2
Monitoring circuit
Settingup operation automatic operation
=4/3.0
=4/3.4
511
57

1) Open jumpers 6162/611612/613614

for automatic operation,
with protective door monitoring,
circuit = 6

KIC

K15
.4

=4/3.2
55

11L+
12L+

14
611
613
1) =6/1.81) =6/1.9
=6/1.8
=6/1.9
612
614

43
S15
44 .1

33

=4/3.2
53

K16
.5

=4/3.0
51

Autom.
Setup
setpoint
Switch over

I18
PLC

61
=6/1.8
1) =6/1.8
62

K15
.4

Drives
Start pulse
for settingup operation
with agreement

Agreement
function

I17
PLC

K14
.3

K13
.2

Start pulse
t(v) >= 80 ms
after I17 1 signal

Setup operation

A2

A1

72

71

Autom.
operation

14

13

Settingup
operation

K16
.5

E16
PLC

34

33

I15
PLC

K15
.4

Drives, automatic operation/settingup operation with agreement

13
21
33
43

K15
.4

K16

Agreement function AUTOMATIC Mode

K14

14 .7
22 .1
34 =7/1.2
44 .6

Agreement function

Ch2

A2

Y21 Y22
Ch1

Autostart

CONTROL
LOGIC

Y33 Y34
21
K13
.2 22
21
K14
.3 22
61
K15
.4 62
21
K17
.5 22
71
=4K33
=4/3.5 72

A1

2)

24

=4 23
K24
24 =4/2.6 24

23

K16
.5

23

13
21
When terminal 112 is energized for
33
SIMODRIVE 611 analog with userfriendly interface
43
the current limiting is energized
(the same as when traversing to a fixed endstop, terminal 96)

Note:

11L

K11

=4
K23
=4/2.5

S15
.4
.8
Operating modes
automatic/
Setup
S11
Agreement function

3TK28221CB30

Fig. 8-18

F11
max. 2 A

11L+ 24 V DC
12L+ 24 V DC

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=5 Operating modes, automatic/setup mode with agreement; Sheet 1/1

8-275

Fig. 8-19

8-276

I2

E1

11L 0 V DC

Example:
S11 = 3SE38406XX00

Protective door with tumbler mechanism

S11

14

13

22
41
42

12
31
32

A2

A1

13

14 .3

K11
.9

Protective door
closed

Protective door closed

K17

21

(+)

14

13

I17
PLC

K17
.3

11

()

F11
max. 2 A

Circuit example =6

44

43

44

44
43

43

I14
PLC

K14
.5

K13
.5

A2

A1

K14

A1
K15

A2

14 .8
24
34
44 .4
54 .8
62 .4
72
84

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
83

14 .9
24
34
44 .4
54 .8
62 .4
72
84

Drives, automatic operation with protective door monitoring

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
83

A2

K18
A2

A1
K16

13
21
33
43

14 .8
22 .4
34
44

A1

14
24
34
44
54
62 .9
72 .8
82 .4

A2

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
81

K14
.5

54

54
53

53

=5/1.7
61
K13
.5

24.04.2001

14 .1
24
34 .8
44 .4
54
62 .4
72 =7/1.8
82

Protective door
Unlocking

A3431820937

KIC

13
23
33
43
53
61
71
81

Protective door Drives, stop

Enable

A2

A1

A18

PLC

602

601

72

71

K14
.5

62

61

14

13

34

33

70
=7/1.3

K11
.3

=7/1.3
69

612
614
=5/1.8
=5/1.9
Protective door monitoring

K18
.7

14

13

=5/1.9
613

=6
+

11L

9
Sh.

1
1 Sh.

Protective door monitoring

A1

A15

PLC

Option
M function
e.g. at end of NC program

2)

77
=7/1.7
=7/1.7
78

K13
.5

=5/1.8
611

62
K13

14 24 34 42

1)

13
=4K11
=4/1.2 14

=4K36
=4/3.9 82

81

34

33

62
=5/1.7

Y2

14

13

1) =4K33 81
K16
=4/3.5 82 .8

K15
.6

11L+
12L+

22
61

62
21

62
61

82
61

81

Ch2

Ch1

E16
PLC
Protective door
interlock

S16

Protective door
enable
request

I15
PLC

Protective door closed and interlocked

K16
.8

K15
.6

K14
.5

K13
.5

K18
.7

Y1

Autostart

CONTROL
LOGIC

S15

13 23 33 41

Protective door Protective door

released
closed
and
interlocked

E13
PLC

K16
.8

1) Option
2) Option, open jumper, terminals 601602
insert the monitoring circuits of the userside
For external standstill monitoring,
e.g. for MSD, open jumper, t. 7778,
machine control.
circuit =7 and when required, insert jumper All potential hazards in the working zone
=4K33/8182
must be absolutely excluded/powereddown.
.
2
3
0
1

Open

Closed

Positivelydriven opening contacts

acc. to IEC 60947513

K16
.8

3TK28211CB30

11L+ 24 V DC
12L+ 24 V DC
13L+ 24 V DC

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611
05.08
05.01

=6 Automatic operation with protective door monitoring; Sheet 1/1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 8-20

24 V DC
24 V DC

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Circuit example =7

11L

0 V DC

Axis 3

Axis 2

Axis 1

Positive opener
in accordance with IEC
60947513

11L+
12L+

()

S22

(+)

S21

()

S12

(+)

S11
K13
.6

EMERGENCY STOP

=4/2.3
82

=4/2.2
81

A2

A1
Diode t(V) w 60 ms

Limit position 2 ()

Limit position 2 (+)

Limit position 1 ()

13
21
31
43

14
22.7
32.8
44

Setup
operating mode

Limit position 1 (+)

Limit position not approached

K11

I22
PL
C

PL
C

I21

PL
C

E12

I11
PL
C

Limit switchespositions monitoring functions

14

13

A2

A1

32

31

I14
PLC
Limit position
approached

E13
PLC
Limit
position
retraction

22

21

13
21
33
43

14.3
22.8
34
44

Move away from the limit position

K13

K11
.3

53
=5K16
=5/1.5 54

Limit position
retraction

K11
.3

PLC

I15

22

21

Limit
position
completed

K13
.6

11L

11L+
12L+

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=7 Limit switch, limit position monitoring; Sheet 1/1

8-277

Fig. 8-21

8-278

2)

Option
Holding brake -M11

lock
(optocoupler)

Fast
Pulse

3)

X411

E.g.:
8WA1011-1EF20

Setup
mode

Retraction
Completed

3) Largearea shielding

2) Overvoltage limitation
Holding brake, see Conf. Manual
Motors for MSD and FD
See Configuration Manual
Motors

1) Axisspecific
coordinated activation/
monitoring

No armature
shortcircuit

EMERG. STOP

If necessary
Open jumper
and insert
limit switch

Move clear
Limit position

Armature shortcircuit Limit position

Move clear
braking

Braking selection
resistor
See Configuration Manual
Motors

-R11

Contactor -K11 and

R11 resistors
touchsafe
installed

Shortcircuit safe
Cable

Safety isolation
between the 24 V DC control voltage
and the 690 V AC motor voltage
(in accordance with DIN VDE 0106, Part 101)

Switch block
-3RT1916-1BB00 varistor
Max. switchon current using
the 60 A (eff) NO contacts briefly

E.g.: -K11
-3RH1140-1BB40 (4S) contactor

If necessary
shutdown, e.g.:
using fault messages
Drives or NC

NE module

Positive opener
in accordance to IEC 60947-5-1-3

Limit switches:
Separate cable laying
shielded and shortcircuit safe
for laying as trailing cable

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611
05.08
05.01

=8 Armature shortcircuit braking; Sheet 1/1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 8-22

Drive
off/on

Delayed stop

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
Principle schematic 1
1channel switch

Drive module

Power contactors in the motor circuit (if required)

Drive
Off

Drive
off/on

Principle schematic 2
2channel switch

Drive module

Delayed stop

3) WARNING
The circuit can be used only with
control units with approx. 1 ms
nondelayed pulse inhibit
using terminal 663.

2) The terminal 663 pulse release

must be switched off w 10 ms earlier
, before the power contacts open
in the motor.
The terminal 663 can be triggered
simultaneously or
delayed after closing
the power contacts.

1) Add monitoring circuit to the

startcircuit drive =4K31/Y33Y34
, circuit 4

Drive
Off

05.08
05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

=9 Power contactors in the motor circuit; Sheet 1/1

8-279

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

8.7.1

05.08
05.01

Function description, circuit examples =1 to =9

Higherlevel information, instructions and functions

Connection
information,
technical data,
selecting
equipment and
devices
Selection of the
switching devices

When engineering the drive components, safety switching devices, contactors,

shown in the circuit examples, it is absolutely necessary to carefully observe the
associated connection information/instructions, technical data of the current
Operating Instructions and Configuration Manuals as well as the appropriate
Catalogs and Application Manuals.

S SIGUARD safety combinations 3TK28/3TK29; circuit examples as well as

the automatic start and monitored start functions are described in the
Safety Integrated Application Manual, Order No. 6ZB50000AA010BA1.

S SIRIUS power and auxiliary contactors 3 RT1 and 3 RH11 should be selected with positivelydriven auxiliary contacts according to ZH1/457, IEC
6094751.

S Contact reliability
The auxiliary contacts, switching contacts of the switching devices and the
line isolation equipment must be able to reliably switch low switching currents v17 V, 5 mA.

S Overvoltage limiting
All of the switching devices, coils, inductances, brakes, etc., must be equipped,
for EMC reasons and for reasons associated with the functional safety, with RC
elements, varistors, diodes or diode combinations. These are intended to
dampen overvoltages at switchoff if these damping elements are not already
integrated in the devices.
This also applies to switching devices controlled from PLC outputs.

Note
The selection of the overvoltage limiting function also influences the off delay of
the devices. This effect must be carefully taken into account when engineering
the system.
Refer to NSK LowVoltage Switchgear Catalog for selection and technical data

8-280

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

Functions/safety
aspects

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

Definition of the terminology

Poweringdown in an emergency EMERGENCY OFF and Stopping in an
emergency EMERGENCY STOP

S Actions taken when an emergency arises according to EN 602041 (VDE

0113, Part 1): 199811, Section 9.2.5.4 should be interpreted as follows:

S Poweringdown in an emergency: In Stop Category 0 according to EN

602041; 9.2.2 stopping is achieved by immediately disconnecting the
power feed to the machine drive elements (i.e. uncontrolled stop). Generally,
this type of powerdown operation is interpreted as EMERGENCY OFF.

S Stopping in an emergency: In stop Category 1 according to EN 602041;

9.2.2, a system is stopped in a controlled way; in this case, the power feed
to the machine drive elements is maintained in order to stop in a controlled
fashion. The power feed is only interrupted when standstill has been
reached. Generally, this type of stopping is defined as EMERGENCY STOP.

S In the circuit examples, when stopping in an emergency, the term EMERGENCY STOP function is used.
The EMERGENCY STOP buttons cause a shutdown according to Control
Category 3 in compliance with EN 9541 through two channels using the
3TK28060BB4/3TK28421BB42 safety relays. When required, the switching devices also allow an EMERGENCY STOP button to be connected in a
configuration that is crossfault circuit proof, Category 4 according to
EN 9541.

S Braking using terminal 64 drive inhibit at the current limit

By inhibiting terminal 64 drive enable at the NE module or the monitoring
module the drives are stopped as quickly as possible at the selected current limit (torque limit)/ramp of the drive module.

S NE module regenerative feedback power

The power rating of the NE module is selected according to the rated power
of the connected motors reduced by a demand factor. When braking at the
current limit, ensure that the braking power does not exceed the peak regenerative feedback power of the I/R modules (see Table 6.3) and the braking
power of the pulsed resistors in the UI modules. In borderline cases, the NE
modules should be dimensioned somewhat larger or additional pulsed resistor modules with external pulsed resistors should be used.

S Setpoint and actual position value interfaces

A complete drive module with power and control module with High Performance for 1FK6 motors is shown in a block diagram in Section 8.4.1. The
setpoint is controlled via terminal X141. In circuit example = 1, the setpoint
and actual position value interfaces of the NC control, e.g. 840D, are only
shown once as a schematic sketch. These are not discussed any further in
the additional circuits.
A detailed description of the control units is provided in Chapter 5.

S Motor holding brake

The holding brake must be controlled in a coordinated way with respect to
time. For instance, using the PLC logic as a function of the pulse cancellation, controller enable and speed setpoint input. In this case, the times required for the holding brake to open and close must be taken into account.
If the brake control is not optimally harmonized and coordinated, then this
results in increased wear and premature loss of the braking performance.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-281

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

In the circuit examples, for a drive stop, the holding brake is disconnected
with dropout delay using the appropriate hardware in addition to the PLC
control. This means that a PLC fault cannot result in the brake being incorrectly controlled when the drive is stationary. It must be decided, on an applicationforapplication basis, whether when stopping in emergency, the
brake is to be shutdown instantaneously or with a delay. Using an internal
sequence control, 611U controls allow a holding brake to be controlled in a
coordinated way (refer to the Function Description for SIMODRIVE 611 universal).
Holding brakes must be provided with external circuitry to dampen overvoltages.
For detailed description, refer to the Configuration Manual for SIMODRIVE
motors.

S Safe standstill
After the drives have stopped, by safely disconnecting the power feed to the
motors, the drives are in the safe standstill condition. When the start inhibit is
activated, then the pulses are safely cancelled in the drive modules.
Features

The motor cannot be started accidentally.

The power feed to the motor is safely disconnected

The motor is not electrically isolated from the drive module or the converter DC link.
The machinery construction OEM must take the appropriate measures to
ensure that the drives do not undesirably move after the power feed has
been disconnected.

Secondary conditions, e.g. for vertical/suspended axes:

8-282

Safe standstill is only guaranteed if the kinetic energy stored in the machine cannot result in an unpredictable motion of the drives/axes. For
example, for vertical or inclined axes without weight equalization, motion
can occur as a result of nonsymmetrical rotating bodies or workpieces.

The motor holding brake supports the safe standstill operating mode.

When manually intervening in the automatic mode, when traversing in

setup mode, as well as during service/maintenance and repair work,
depending on the hazard analysis, it may be necessary to apply additional measures for personnel and machinery protection.

Axes can be secured from dropping/falling or axes can be locked in a

specific position using redundant devices in addition to the holding
brake, e.g. using electromechanical or pneumatic locking devices with
cyclic monitoring.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

Circuit example =1 Cabinet supply, NC, PLC

Cabinet design
and regulations
relating to the
implementation
and design

When designing, constructing and implementing the electrical/control cabinets

to accommodate the drive components, the following important regulations,
among others, must be carefully observed:

S DIN EN 604391 (VDE 0660 Part 500) 200008 LowVoltage Switchgear

Combination

S DIN EN 602041 (VDE 0113 Part 1) 199811 Electrical Equipment of Machines, Safety

S DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 198303 Protection against Electric Shock.
S EMC and LowVoltage Directive
S Enclosure/housing degree of protection IP 54 or corresponding to the requirements of the ambient conditions.

Device selection

S Q1 line isolating device (main switch) with leading auxiliary contact when
opening

Selection, refer to Chapter 7.3.5 and Catalog NSK

The line isolating device electrically disconnects the equipment from the
power supply.

S G11 SITOP power power supply unit for 24 V DC, refer to Catalog KT 10.1.
The power supply and the connected circuits must fulfill the requirements of
PELV = function extralow voltage with protective separation. We recommend that regulated power supply units that limit the current are used, e.g.
SITOP power.

S F11F14 miniature circuit breakers 5SX or 5SY, refer to Catalog I2.1.

The potential assignment of the circuits has been randomly selected.
The max. permissible values of the protective elements must, under all
circumstances, be carefully observed when protecting the safety relays and
circuits.

S Line fuses for the NE modules, assignment refer to Chapter 7.3.1 and
Section 6.2.5.

S Line filter, refer to Chapter 7.4 and Catalog NC 60

S Line commutating reactor, refer to Chapter 6.5.1 and Catalog NC 60

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-283

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

02.03
05.01

Circuit example =2 Drives on/off/stopping in an

emergency
Application

Drive group, comprising an NE module, three 611 FD modules with High Standard control boards. This circuit concept can be used, for example, for basic
drive controls. When the drives are powered up and powered down, the complete drive group, including the line contactor and start inhibit terminals, is
switched in a safetyrelated fashion through two channels.

Functions

Drives On

S Keyoperated switch S21, control on.

The poweroff circuit before the EMERGENCY STOP safety relay K21 with
the expansion devices K22, K23 must be switchedin taking into account
the following conditions:

S Contactor K25 closes, ready signal from the NE module. (ready conditions,
NE module, refer to Section 6.2.5!) When the control is poweredup, the
ready signal is still not present. This means that the PLC output O25 must
be set to 1 using the PLC logic so that the poweroff circuit is closed
through contactor K25. After the drive group is switched in via the switching
devices K21, K22, and K23, the ready message is issued via PLC input
I11, provided no error messages are pending.. The ready monitoring is now
activated in the poweroff circuit by means of the PLC logic.

The feedback circuit from contactor K25 is monitored using PLC I25.

S Contact =A1A25/12 NC ready (ready signal) must be switched through to

the NC control.

S Interlock circuit terminal 3536 is closed.

S The expansion devices K22, K23, the line contactor, the start inhibit functions/terminals and contactor K27 for the brake control are now monitored,
at each poweron cycle for the safetyrelated off switching condition. When
required, safetyrelevant functions of the machine control on the user side
can also be incorporated in the feedback circuit.

S Pushbutton S23, drives on

Contactors K21, K22, K23 are closed and powerup the drive group.
After the DC link precharging has been completed, the line contactor in the
NE module is closed. The ready message is issued as long as there is no
error message present.
NC program, start/stop

S Pushbutton S29/S28
The axisspecific controller enable signals are activated and the NC machining program is started using pushbutton S29 NC program start. At the
end of the program or using pushbutton S28 stop the drives are
brought to a controlled standstill.

8-284

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.03
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

Drives, off
Using pushbutton S24 EMERGENCY STOP or S22 Off, the drives, assuming
that they have still not been stopped via the NC program, are braked and
stopped as quickly as possible at the selected current limit of the drive modules.
Terminal 64, drive enable, is inhibited and braking is initiated using the instantaneous contact of contactor K22. After braking has been completed, the line
contactor is opened using a safely overlapping shutdown time via the off delay
contact of K23 in a safetyrelevant way through two channels via terminal 48
and NS1NS2 of the line contactor; the drive inhibit functions are activated by
inhibiting terminals 663. Fault signals of the drive system, interlocked using the
PLC logic can be used, depending on the application, to brake along the current
limit or for controlled braking along a setpoint ramp. The Off button also acts on
PLC I22. This means PLC logic can be used to determine which switchoff
command caused the drive group to be shutdown. The drive group can also be
powered down via the PLC, logically combined, independent of the ready signal
of the NE module using contactor K25.
Holding brake
The holding brake is controlled, coordinated as far as the timing is concerned by
the PLC logic through PLC O27. When the drives are stopped, the brake is additionally safely shutdown per hardware using an off delay contact of contactor
K23. This means that a PLC fault, when the drive is stationary, cannot cause
the brake to be incorrectly controlled.
Temperature sensor
If the temperature monitoring is tripped because of overtemperature of a drive
module and/or a motor, the 5.15.3 relay contact on the NE module activates
the PLCE12 input. Using the logical interlocking in the PLC, the drives must,
depending on the application, be shutdown either instantaneously or delayed,
e.g. using PLC O25 and contactor K25.

Circuit example =3 Drives start/stop/safe standstill

Application

This control is used where one or several drives must be selectively shut down
from an operational drive group using safetyrelevant technology. The drive can
be shutdown in a safetyrelevant way from the drive group using a twochannel
keyoperated switch or, e.g. using light barriers or limit switches. Beforehand,
the drive must have been safely stopped by the NC control. The safe standstill
condition is achieved using the start inhibit function.

Functions

Drives, start
The 2channel stop circuit in front of safety relay K11 must be closed using the
keyoperated switch S11 and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit contactor
=2K22. Contactor K11 is closed with monitored start and latches using button S12 start and the closed feedback circuit. Terminal 65, controller
enable, and terminal 663, pulse enable, are energized.
The drive is moved and stopped in a controlled way using the NC program.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-285

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.08
05.01

Stop drives
Safety relay K11 is deenergized using keyoperated switch S11 or when
EMERGENCY STOP is pressed. The instantaneous contact withdraws terminal
65 controller enable and the drive is braked at the current limit. Terminal 663 is
deenergized via the off delay contact K11 and therefore the start inhibit activated.
Start inhibit monitoring function
The start inhibit monitoring function for terminals 3536 is effective in the
EMERGENCY STOP circuit of contactor =K2K21.
Normally, when a drive is stopped, the NC contact AS1AS2 of the start inhibit
relay should always be closed before the NO contact of contactor K13 opens.
To ensure this, the contactor coil K13 must be equipped with a diode to extend
the contactor off delay. If the start inhibit function is incorrect, the monitoring
circuit opens and disconnects the complete drive group through the line contactor.
The start inhibit is actively monitored in a cyclic manner after every stop operation.
Holding brake
The function is similar to that in circuit example =2

Circuit example =4 Drives, on/off/stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill

Application

Drive group, comprising an NE module, MSD module for 1PH7 motor and three
FD modules 611 with High Standard control boards. Circuit =4 is the basic circuit for the driverelated control, e.g. of a machine tool. Using the subsequent
circuit components =5 to =9 with the necessary interlock and monitoring circuits
and the applicationspecific supplements, the control can be expanded in a
modular way and therefore individually adapted to the particular application.

Functions

Drives, on (NE module)

S Keyoperated switch S21, control on.

The poweroff circuit in front of the EMERGENCY STOP safety switching
device K21 must be closed under the following conditions:

S The interlocking circuits of the following expansions of circuit =7 are jumpered.

S Contactor K25 closes and contact =A1A25/12 NC ready is closed. The
poweron conditions are almost comparable to circuit =2. The additional function is that the ready signal of the MSD module PLC I15 must be interlocked in
the PLC in addition to the ready signal of the NE module PLC I11.

8-286

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

S Pushbutton S23, drives on

Contactor K21 closes and latches. Initially, only the NE module is powered
up. After the DC link precharging has been completed, the line contactor is
closed. The ready signal is issued as long as there is no fault signal at the
NE module and at the FD modules (switch, ready/fault signal is set to fault
signal).
Drives, start (drive modules)

S The NE module must be powered up. The stop circuit in front of safety relay
K31 must be closed. The interlocking circuits of the following expansions of
circuit =5 are jumpered.

S Using pushbutton S32 drives, start (monitored start) with the feedback
circuit closed, safety relay K31 with expansion device K32 and contactors
K35, K33, K36 are closed and latch.

S Simultaneously, terminal 63 central pulse enable, terminal 64 drive enable

at the NE module and terminal 663 pulse enables for the drive modules
are energized and therefore the start inhibit functions are withdrawn.
NC program, start/stop

S Pushbutton S29/S28
The axisspecific controller enable signals are activated and the machining
program is started using pushbutton S29 NC program start. At the end of
the program or using pushbutton S28 stop the drives are brought to a
controlled standstill.
Stop drives

S Using the twochannel pushbutton S31, drives stop the drives are
braked and stopped as quickly as possible at the selected current limit of the
drive modules if these have not already been stopped by the NC program.

S Terminal 64 drive enable is deenergized by the instantaneous contact

of contactor K31. After the drives have come to a standstill, terminal 663 is
inhibited and the start inhibit functions become active via the off delay contacts of the safety relays K32 and K35.

S The shutdown times are adapted to the various braking times of the MSD
and FD drives and must safely overlap these from a time perspective, e.g.
MSD 5 s; FD 0.5 s.
Start inhibit monitoring function
The start inhibit monitoring function for terminals 3738 is effective in the
EMERGENCY STOP circuit of contactor K21. Normally, when the drives stop,
the NC contacts AS1AS2 of the start inhibit relays in the drive modules must
always be closed before the NO contact of contactors K33 and K36 open. In
order to realize this, the coils of these contactors must be equipped with a diode
to extend the contactor dropout delay. If the start inhibit function is incorrect,
the monitoring circuit opens, EMERGENCY STOP contactor K21 drops out
and shuts down the complete drive group through the line contactor. The start
inhibits are actively monitored in a cyclic manner after every stop operation.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-287

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

10.04
05.01

Drives Off

S Using the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton S24 or Off S22 the drives
are braked and stopped as quickly as possible at the current limit. The function is similar in circuit diagram =2. After the braking time of the spindle
drive, the K31/K32 contactor is used to switch off the drive group, i.e. line
contactor off and start inhibits active.
Holding brake
The control is similar to circuit example =2
Temperature sensor
The function is similar to circuit example =2
In addition, the temperature monitoring function of the spindle drive must be
evaluated via PLC I13 and I14.

Circuit example =5 Drives, operating modes automatic operation/settingup operation with agreement
Application

The operating mode changeover is used for most machines/plants, e.g. in setup
mode, in order to traverse/operate subfunctions of the machine at a controlled,
reduced velocity. In this particular operating mode, other subareas must be
shutdown in a safetyrelated way to avoid potential hazards. The drives can
only be operated with an agreement issued by the operator in the settingup
mode with reduced velocity/speed. This agreement can, for example, depending on the risk assessment, be issued from a secure location outside the hazardous zone of the machine or using a mobile handheld unit with additional
EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton in the operating zone of the machine.

Notice
In this case, the user is responsible for observing and complying with the
specific technological and machinespecific regulations and standards to
maintain the protection and safety of personnel and machinery. Further,
residual risks must be evaluated those risks that are due for example to
vertical axes.
The start phase of the machine after poweron is especially critical. An
agreement for a specific traversing motion should only be issued if the machine
had previously moved in a controlled way.

Functions

Operating modes
The operating mode selector switch S15 must be able to be locked as a key
operated switch or must be implemented in another way so that it can be
lockedout.

Notice
The operating mode may only be changed when the drives are stationary and
this must not result in a hazardous situation at the machine.

8-288

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

AUTOMATIC mode
The interlocking circuits terminals 5152/5354/5556/5758/511512 should
be inserted into circuit =4. The interlocking circuit terminals 611612/613614 is
closed.
Keyoperated switch S15 is set to automatic, contactor K15 pullsin. The
monitoring circuit, drives stop in front of contactor =4K31 is closed via terminals 5354/5556. This means that the drives can be started under the poweron conditions specified in circuit example =4, using the pushbutton, drives,
Start =4S32.
Setup operation
Keyoperated switch S15 is set to settingup, contactor K15 dropsout, contactor K16 closes. The monitoring circuits terminals 5354/5556 are open.
This means that the drives cannot be started. When the monitoring circuit, terminals 511512 is opened, pushbutton =4S32 Start drives is ineffective in the
settingup mode.
Using the interlocking circuit terminals 5758, the dropout delay for contactor
=4K32, used for the shutdown time of the spindle drive is changedover from
5 s, for example, to the shorter time of the FD drives, for example, 0.5 s. If a
fault condition is present this means that the complete drive group is already
shutdown after this shorter time. Further, with the changeover to settingup, the
speed setpoint for the drives is reduced via PLC I18. The speeds and feed velocities are therefore to be reduced to permissible values according to the type
C Standard or the hazard analysis.

Notice
Setpoint limiting is not a safetyrelevant function.

Agreement function
The safety relay K11 and contactors K13/K14 are switchedin if the feedback circuit is closed using pushbutton S11 agreement (pushbutton with
two positions).
The interlocking circuit is then closed through terminals 5354/5556. A start
pulse must be generated via PLC I17 with a time delay >= 80 ms; this pulse is
output at PLC O17. Contactor K17 briefly pullsin and issues the start commands for contactors =4K31, K32, K33, K35 and K36 through terminals
5152.
The start inhibit functions are withdrawn and therefore the drives are enabled in
a safetyrelevant way as long as the agreement button is pressed.
Using the non safetyrelevant PLC function keys in conjunction with the hardware agreement function the selected drives can now be individually traversed with reduced parameters.

Notice
No motion may be started by just pressing the agreement button alone. Note:
When terminal 81 rampfunction generator fast stop is withdrawn, after
every agreement command, the spindle induction motor must be
remagnetized and therefore starts with some delay w 0.5 s.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-289

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.08
05.01

If hazardous operating states exist, if the PLC function keys fail, or for any other
unpredictable situation, the drives can be stopped in a safetyrelated way by
releasing the agreement button.

Notice
For dynamic drives with inadmissible speed increases, potential hazards can
occur under fault conditions due to the response times of personnel and the
delay when the agreement device switches. These hazards must be reduced
by applying additional measures, e.g. a safetyrelated speed monitoring
function. Various type C Standards, e.g. for machine tools, specify a safely
monitored speed in the settingup mode for spindle drives.

Circuit example =6 Drives, automatic operation with

protective door monitoring
Application

In the automatic mode, the working zone of a machine is isolated using a moving, closed protective door (e.g. guard). In the circuit example, the protective
door is interlocked and cannot be opened while the drives are running or if other
hazardous operating states exist. This is realized using a position switch with
tumbler mechanism with an interlock using spring force with sealed auxiliary
release. Automatic operation for the drives is only enabled if the protective door
is closed and interlocked via the position switch.
Depending on the hazard analysis, the user must decide whether, e.g. a second
limit switch is additionally required for the door monitoring function.
The protective door is prevented from being opened as long as a hazardous
state exists, e.g. as a result of the drives runningdown. The enable signal is
only issued with a time delay after the drive with the longest braking time has
been reliably and safely stopped or optionally using the standstill signal of an
external speed monitoring function.
For several applications, e.g. if personnel can enter the working area of a machine, the tumbler mechanism of the protective door is implemented using a
position switch interlocked with magnetic force. This is for safetyrelated reasons. When the line supply or control voltage fails, the position switch can be
used to release the protective door and allow it to be opened.

Functions

Request protective door enable

The drives must initially be shutdown using pushbutton =4S31 stop drives
or optionally, e.g. at the end of the NC program by the output of an NC auxiliary
function, PLC O18 closes contactor K18.
The protective door enable is requested using pushbutton S15. Contactor
K15 is activated, interlocked through the PLC logic when the drives are stopped
and shut down. This means that contactors =4K33 and =4K36 have dropped
out. PLC logic: PLC O15 = 1, if =4I33 and =4I36 = 0 signal.
When requesting that the protective door is enabled, in the secured working
zone of the machine/plant, all hazardous motion and other potential hazards of
the userside machine control must be shutdown. The shutdown must then
realized in a safetyrelevant way using the released or opened protective door.

8-290

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

Releasing the protective door

The protective door is released using contactor K16 if the following conditions
are fulfilled:

S Contactor K15 is closed (energized)

S Drives, delayed stop, contactors =4K33 and =4K36 open (deenergized).
S MSD standstill signal n act < n min via relay =4K11.
S Userside interlocking circuit is closed via terminal 601602.
Optional:

S External standstill monitoring closed via terminal 7778.

The interlocking solenoid of the door position switch S11 is energized and
the safety relay K11 and contactors K13/K14 are deenergized via the
position monitoring function of the solenoid. The drives are shutdown in a
safetyrelevant fashion through two channels via the interlocking circuit,
terminals 611612/613614. The protective door is initially just released, but
is still closed, relay K17 is energized. Using the PLC, e.g. subfunctions of
the userside machine control, that are still not hazardous, can be executed.
Opening the protective door
By opening the protective door, the protective door safety circuit is opened via
the actuator of the door position switch S11 redundantly to the position monitoring function of the solenoids.
Closing the protective door
The protective door must be closed. Using pushbutton S16 interlock protective door contactors K15/K16 are deenergized (they dropout) and the
protective door is again interlocked. The interlock circuit is again closed through
terminals 611612/613614 which means in the selected automatic mode, the
drives can again be released using pushbutton =4S32 start.
For protective doors that are infrequently opened, we recommend that the control is adapted so that each time before the drives are powered up, the position
switch function is checked by opening and again closing the door.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-291

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.08
05.01

Circuit example =7 Limit switch, limitposition monitoring

Application/
functions

Normally, the end position (end stop) of the traversing range of the axes in the
machine is monitored using software limit switches; these become active after
the reference point approach. If, in a fault situation, a software limit switch is
passed, and therefore a hardware limit switch actuated, then contactor =4K21
is deenergized (opened) via the interlocking circuit, terminal 8182 in the
EMERGENCY STOP circuit. The drives are braked at the current limit and are
then stopped.
However, electrical braking of an axis is only effective if there is an appropriate
distance for the braking travel between the hardware limit switch and the mechanical end stop of the axis.
The actuated end position limit switches can be decoded using PLC inputs. In
the settingup mode, the axis can be moved away in the opposite direction using keyoperated switch S13 and button =5S11 agreement.

Circuit example =8 Armature shortcircuit braking

Application

Armature shortcircuit braking is only possible when using permanentmagnet

motors and is used, for example, when passing end position limit switches,
when the power fails, for fault signals or EMERGENCY STOP with some delay.
When a software limit switch is passed, the fault/error is often in the NC, PLC or
in the drive module itself. Electrical braking beyond the limit position limit
switches according to circuit =8 is therefore no longer possible. For critical
drives, e.g. vertical axes, in cases such as these, emergency braking is possible using armature shortcircuit braking or optionally using a fast shutdown
with a holding brake implemented with the appropriate hardware.
The braking torque for armature shortcircuit braking is optimized using the
additional braking resistor in the motor circuit.

8-292

Caution
Shortcircuit braking without a braking resistor can result in partial
demagnetization of the motor.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.7 Circuit examples =1 to =9 with SIMODRIVE 611

05.01

Functions

Armature shortcircuit
The pulse enable is withdrawn via terminal 663 when the limit position limit
switch is actuated/passed or when the power fails. The armature shortcircuit
contactor K11 is simultaneously deenergized (opened). The drive is braked
after the contactor dropout time. The interlocking circuit, terminal 9192, is
simultaneously opened therefore initiating an EMERGENCY STOP function for
all of the drives. A varistor is connected to the contactor coil in order to achieve
a short contactor dropout time. The selected auxiliary contactor from the SIRIUS
series of industrial controls with mounted, fourpole auxiliary contact element
fulfills protective separation between the control voltage and the 690 V AC
motor circuit. For operation with power failure and when the +24 V control voltage is buffered, or for other shutdown functions, the circuit must be appropriately adapted to the particular application.
Holding brake
The fast application of the holding brake, independent of the PLC cycle time
using the armature shortcircuit contactor, supports braking. When compared to
armature shortcircuit braking, there is a delay before the holding brake actually
closes and starts to brake.
In the settingup mode, the axis can be moved away using the keyoperated
switch S13 move away from end position and pushbutton =5S11 agreement.

Circuit example =9 Power contactors in the motor circuit

Application

For special applications, the circuits allow the motor to be galvanically isolated
from the drive module via contactors. The contactors may only be deenergized
with a leading pulse inhibit >=10 ms via terminal 663 with respect to the power
contacts. When poweringup, the pulses must be simultaneously enabled when
the power contacts are closed.

Notice
The contactors are generally not suitable for interrupting clocked inverter
currents or interrupting DC currents of a stationary drive that is in closedloop
position control. If this is not carefully observed, this can result in high voltage
peaks/spikes when poweringdown and in turn can destroy the drive module,
the motor winding and/or cause the contactor contacts to weld.

Functions

The drives are powereddown in a safetyrelevant way using keyoperated

switch S11 through one channel or S15 through two channels a) using the
start inhibit function and b) also using a contactor to galvanically isolate it from
the drive module.
The pulse enable is withdrawn before the power contacts of the power contactor
open as a result of the dropout delay. The interlocking circuit, terminals
103104 or terminals 107108, should be inserted in the start circuit of the
safety combination =4K31/Y33Y34, drives stop.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-293

8 Important Circuit Information

8.8 Information and instructions regarding applications

8.8

05.08
05.01

Information and instructions regarding applications

with 611 digital/611 universal

Fig. 8-23

8-294

Circuit example, 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

8.8.1

8 Important Circuit Information

8.8 Information and instructions regarding applications

Circuit example, 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D

A circuit example SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SINUMERIK 840D with the drive
related control for a machine/plant, based on the circuit examples in Fig. 8-23
with 611 in its principle form, is shown in Section 8.7.

8.8.2

Circuits with 611 digital

The digital control units 611 digital have a digital setpoint and actual position
value interface to the 840D or 810D NC control systems. The boards are available as either 1axis or 2axis modules with High Performance or High Standard control.
Further, the units differ in the connection version:

S Incremental encoder as motor encoder (indirect measuring system), or

S Incremental encoder as motor encoder (indirect measuring system) and
connection for a direct measuring system encoder
For a description of the interfaces of the 611 digital control units
> refer to Chapter 5.
All of the NC control communications to the 611D drive modules are realized via
the digital drive bus. The axisspecific controller and pulse enable signals as
well as the operating and monitoring signals are placed on the digital drive bus
via NC/PLC interface signals.
The terminal 663 pulse enable/start inhibit for the 611D modules is provided on
a moduleformodule basis. The axisspecific pulse enable signals received
via the drive bus are logically ANDed with the signal state at terminal 663.

Control with
SINUMERIK 840D

The NC control with the integrated PLCCPU SIMATIC S7300 is accommodated in a 50 mm wide housing that is compatible to the SIMODRIVE drive
modules.
The control is integrated in the SIMODRIVE 611D drive group and can be expanded up to 31 axes. It is located between the NE module and the first drive
module in the drive group. The power supply for the internal control voltage is
derived from the NE module power supply via the equipment bus. The NC
ready signal acts on the ready signal terminal 7274 of the NE module via the
equipment bus.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-295

8 Important Circuit Information

8.8 Information and instructions regarding applications

Control with
SINUMERIK 810D

10.04
05.08
05.01

SINUMERIK 810D is a highly integrated compact control accommodated in a

150 mm wide housing compatible to the SIMODRIVE modules with integrated PLCCPU SIMATIC S7300 and 611D power and control sections onboard.
The control is available in two versions:

S CCU box with three integrated power modules

2 x 6 A/12 A for FD

1 x 18 A/36 A for FD or 1 x 24 A/32 A for MSD

S CCU box with two power modules

2 x 9 A/18 A for FD

The controller can be expanded with axis expansions consisting of up to five

(four) axes + one spindle with separately attached power units. The closedloop
controls are already integrated into the CCU modules. Just like the SINUMERIK
840D, the control power supply is taken from the NE module power supply via
the equipment bus.
The NC ready signal acts on the ready signal terminal 7274 of the NE module
via the equipment bus. The control has one hardware terminal 663 pulse enable/start inhibit for all axes together. The closedloop controllers and pulses
are enabled on an axisforaxis basis and are controlled on the digital internal
drive bus via NC/PLC interface signals. The safetyrelevant driverelated control for a machine/system with SINUMERIK 810D can be engineered on the
userside based on the circuit examples in Section 8.7.

8
8.8.3

Circuits with 611 universal HRS

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS control board is available as either 1axis
or 2axis module.
The setpoint can either be entered as analog signal or via PROFIBUS.
The interfaces are described in Chapter 4.
Implementation of the safetyrelevant, driverelated control for a machine.
The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control board with analog setpoint interface can
be used in a comparable fashion to the circuit examples =1 to =9 in Section 8.7.

8-296

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

8.9

8 Important Circuit Information

8.9 Master/slave operation, SIMODRIVE 611

Master/slave operation, SIMODRIVE 611

Application
example,
master/slave

Two SIMODRIVE main spindle drives can be operated, rigidly and mechanically
coupled together if the master drive is closedloop speed controlled and the
slave drive is closedloop torque controlled.
The application of a master/slave function with SIMODRIVE 611 universal
HRS is shown in the following example:
The master specifies the torque setpoint for the slave via an analog output (terminals 75.x/15 or terminals 16.x/15).

Torque
setpoint:
Signal No. 36

75.x/15
16.x/15

Master drive

Slave drive

56.x/14.x
24.x/20.x

Speed
setpoint

56.x/14.x
24.x/20.x
1 signal
Mset mode

for a rigid coupling

> Mset mode
with the coupling released
> nset mode

I3.x

0 signal
nset mode

Dependent on
the mechanical
coupling
M
3

Fig. 8-24

M
3

Rigid or quasirigid
connection, which can also
be released in operation.

Master/slave operation with SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

Warning
If the rigid mechanical coupling is released, then the slave drive must be
simultaneously changedover to closedloop speed control as otherwise
inadmissibly high speeds could occur, which could result in malfunctions.

For information and data on the settings and parameterization associated with
this master/slave mode as well as additional possibilities regarding axis couplings, refer to:

Readers note
For information and data on the settings and parameterization associated with
this master/slave mode as well as additional possibilities regarding axis
couplings, refer to:
References: /FBU/

SIMODRIVE 611 universal, Description of Functions

References: /FB3/

Description of Functions SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

TE3: Speed/torque coupling, masterslave
M3: Axis coupling and ESR

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-297

8 Important Circuit Information

8.10 Stardelta mode

8.10

05.08
05.01

Stardelta mode

Application

SIMODRIVE 611 supports the use of motors that can changeover between star/
delta configurations.
At lower speeds, the drive is operated in the star circuit configuration (high
torque) and at higher speeds, in the delta circuit configuration (high stall torque).
Changeover is also possible during operation.
The speed when changingover from a star into a delta configuration (star to
delta operation) must lie within the stall power range for star operation (refer to
the speedtorque diagram for Y/ operation).
A stardelta changeover is only permitted below the star fieldweakening
speed.

MratedY

1
X n
Y

Mstall Y

MratedD

Fig. 8-25

MstallD

1
X n
D

nratedY

nratedD

Speedtorque diagram for Y/ operation of induction motors

Note
If, in the delta mode, a torque lower than Mrated is taken, an appropriately
smaller power module can be selected (as a maximum up to root 3)!

Warning
During the phase when changingover from Y to operation, no torque may be
demanded from the 1PH motor. In this case, a minimum dead time of 0.5 s
must be taken into account for contactor changeover times, safety margins,
demagnetizing and magnetizing operations.

The stardelta operation of synchronous motors with 611D modules is used to

extend the speed range.
The speed range selection may be changed only in the stopped state.

8-298

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.10 Stardelta mode

Danger
If synchronous motors are operated with speeds that require a VPM, the
stardelta contactors must be protected using a safe power supply so that in
case of fault, this contactor remains reliably switched on until the motor has
reached uncritical speeds (EMC voltage)!
This must be proved in a risk evaluation of the machine/plant constructor!

Connection
example

Connection diagram for Y/D changeover, 1PH Motor with SINUMERIK 840D

SIMODRIVE 611

U2

V2 W2 PE

Kx1)

K1
U1 V1 W1

K2
U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2

1PH
Y/D
Notes:
1) A safe standstill is not guaranteed by just opening K1 and K2.
This is the reason that for safetyrelated reasons, contactor Kx
should be used to provide electrical isolation. This contactor may only be opened/closed in the nocurrent
condition, i.e. the pulse enable must be withdrawn 40 ms before the contactor is opened (deenergized).
Refer to Sections 9.4.2 and 9.7. Circuit example =10.
Fig. 8-26

Connection diagram for Y/ changeover with SIMODRIVE 611

The connection diagram for Y/ changeover 611 universal HRS can be engineered, based on the previous examples. For a description of the function, refer to
the separate Configuration Manuals and documentation for SIMODRIVE 611
universal.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-299

8 Important Circuit Information

8.10 Stardelta mode

Dimensioning and
selecting the
contactors

Table 8-3

05.01

The main contactors must be dimensioned/selected, harmonized and coordinated with the rated motor current and the overload factor.
The following table showing the assignment between 1PM4/6 motor/main contactors and auxiliary contactors can be used to provide configuration support:

Dimensioning and selecting the main contactors for 1PM motors

Recommended
contactor type/K1/K2
duty Category AC 1

Recommended
auxiliary contactor type
K1h, K2h

13.0

3RT1023

3RH11

23.0

3RT1025

3RH11

11

41.0

3RT1026

3RH11

1PM41372LF8...

18.5

56.0

3RT1035

3RH11

1PM61012LF8...

3.7

13.0

3RT1023

3RH11

1PM61052LF8...

7.5

23.0

3RT1025

3RH11

1PM61332LF8...

11

41.0

3RT1026

3RH11

1PM61372LF8...

18.5

56.0

3RT1035

3RH11

1PM61382LF8...

22

58.0

3RT1035

3RH11

Power
[kW]

Irated

1PM41012LF8...

3.7

1PM41052LF8...

7.5

1PM41332LF8...

Threephase motor

[A]

8-300

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
02.12
05.01

8.11

8 Important Circuit Information

8.11 Series reactor in the motor lead

Series reactor in the motor lead

General

Selection/
calculations

For special motors with a low leakage inductance (where the controller settings
are not adequate) it may be necessary to provide a series reactor as 3arm iron
reactor (not a Corovac reactor) and/or increase the inverter clock cycle frequency of the converter. Motors with a low leakage inductance are, from experience, motors that can achieve high stator frequencies (maximum motor stator
frequency > 300 Hz) or motors with a high rated current (rated current > 85 A).

S The voltage rateofrise (gradient) of the drive converter has typical values
such as:
du/dt up to 7 kV/s
For thirdparty motors where the insulation is unknown or not designed for
this voltage rateofrise, a series reactor should be used, independent of
the selected pulse frequency.

S In the IM mode, motors can be used with a maximum rated torque of:
Mn =

Pn 60

2 nn

 650 Nm

The inductance value of a series reactor or the necessary drive converter

pulse frequency can be estimated using the following formula. However, it
must be taken into account that when the inverter clock cycle frequency is
increased, the module current must be reduced; or, a module with a higher
current rating must be selected:
Lseries [

UDC link nmax

30 fT nFS I0

Ls1 + Ls2
2

Ls1
Ls2
Lseries

Stator leakage inductance of the motor in H

Rotor leakage inductance of the motor in H
Inductance of the series reactor in H (=0, if a
series reactor is not used)1)
VDC link Voltage
(=600 V or 625 V for a regulated infeed,
= rectified line supply voltage for a nonregulated infeed
e.g. 570 V at 400 Vrms line supply voltage)
fT
Inverter clock cycle frequency of the converter in Hz,
refer to Chapter 5.4.1
nmax
Max. motor speed
nFS
Speed at the start of field weakening
An approximate value can
VDC link nn
be calculated with nFS [
1.6 Vnmot
I0
Vnmot
nn

Motor noload current in Arms

Rated motor voltage in Vrms
Rated motor speed

1) For calculated/theoretical inductance values less than 0.1 mH, a series reactor is not required.
For calculated inductance values u 0.4 mH, 0.4 mH must always be assumed as maximum value.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-301

8 Important Circuit Information

8.11 Series reactor

11.05
05.01

If the motor data are not known, then for motors with a high current (rated
current > 85 A), the converter current should be dimensioned for a pulse
frequency of 4950 Hz. This means that a drive converter reduction factor of
approx. 83% is obtained.

S For motors that require a higher motor frequency than 500 Hz, the drive converter pulse frequency must be increased.
The following formula applies:
fT w 6 fmax mot
fT
Inverter clock cycle frequency of the drive converter in Hz,
refer to Chapter 5.4.1
fmax mot Max. motor stator frequency
It should be noted that for inverter clock cycle frequencies above 3200 Hz,
the module current rating must be reduced or, if required, a module with a
highercurrent rating must be selected.

S The max. fieldweakening range for induction motor operation is limited.

The following relationships apply:
2 for highspeed motors (max. output frequency > 300 Hz),
nmax
Standard motors
v
nFS
5 for widerange motors
nmax
nFS

Max. motor speed

Speed at the start of field weakening for the motor

An approximate value can

be calculated with nFS [

UDC link nn
1.6 Vnmot

(refer above)

If a motor is changedover from delta to star operation and vice versa, and
auxiliary and main contactors are required for each motor. The motor contactors must be mutually interlocked. The changeover is only made when
the pulses are inhibited using select terminal signals. When the changeover
command is issued, the motor data set is reloaded and the auxiliary contactors are controlled via the selector relay.
Parallel operation of several induction motors, refer to Chapter 8.12.1.

S The voltage drop across a series reactor depends on the motor current and
the motor frequency. If an unregulated infeed is used, the maximum rated
motor voltage depends on the line supply voltage available.
If these guide values are not observed, then this can have a negative impact
on the power (lower power) in the upper speed range.

8-302

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
10.04
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.12 Induction motor operation

8.12

Induction motor operation

8.12.1

Operating several induction motors in parallel

Several motors can also be operated in parallel on a power module, for each
axis. When selecting the motor and drive module, several engineering guidelines must be observed.
When expanded to the maximum, a drive configuration for parallel operation
can comprise up to eight motors. Motors connected to a drive module in parallel
must have the same V/f characteristics. Further, we recommend that the motors
have the same number of poles. If more than two motors are connected to a
drive module, then these should essentially have the same power ratings.
For a 2motor configuration, the difference between the power ratings of the
motors should not exceed a ratio of 1:10.
The following engineering guidelines must be carefully observed:

S Selecting the size of the drive module

Steadystate operation of the motors connected in parallel namely in

the closedloop controlled range (> nmin1)) and preferably in the rated
speed range:

rated motor currents v rated current of the drive module

Operation of motors connected in parallel with dynamic load (where the

load condition changes quickly) and in the openloop controlled range
require an additional dimensioning:
1.2 ( rated motor currents) v rated current of the drive module

The current limit of the drive module must be increased to 150% of the
rated current when commissioning the system.

S The motors should not be subject to torques that exceed their rated torque.
S For special highspeed induction motors, e.g. for woodworking, a series
reactor must always be located between the drive module and the motor
group:
Rated reactor current: rms current of the motor group2)
When the above information and instructions are taken into consideration, the
individual motors are able to correct even for dynamic load and speed steps.
Stable operation without stalling also for individual motors is achieved
when following the dimensioning guidelines specified above. The speeds of the
individual motors depend on the load. The currently set speeds can drift apart
by several percent due to the closedloop group slip control.

1) Standard motor:

Special motors:

2-pin! > 600 RPM

4-pin! > 300 RPM
6-pin! > 200 RPM
8-pin! > 150 RPM
40 V nrated
nmin >
Urated motor

>

600 RPM
No. of pole pairs

2) Rated motor currents, or when taking into account the load duty cycles, the total rms current of the motor group.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-303

8 Important Circuit Information

8.12 Induction motor operation

10.04
05.01

Load surges and overload conditions in the fieldweakening range can result in
oscillation and should be avoided.
The drive module cannot detect if an individual motor is overloaded.
Individual thermal monitoring functions must be provided to ensure that each
individual motor has overload protection. We recommend that the motor is monitored using a PTC thermistor evaluation circuit.

3ph. 400 V AC
50/60 Hz

Infeed module

Drive module

I/R

1)

PTC

M1
3
Motor 1

PTC

M2
3

PTC

M3
3

Motor 2

PTC

Motor 3

M8
3
Motor 8

Notes:
1) Rated motor currents, or when taking into account the load duty cycles, the total rms current of the
motor group

Fig. 8-27

Motors connected in parallel to SIMODRIVE 611

Notice
For parallel operation, all of the motors must always be operated
simultaneously. The motor data set must be adapted, e.g. by using a motor
changeover function, when a motor is shutdown, e.g. when a fault condition
develops.

When motors are connected in parallel, motor cable protection must be implemented outside the drive converter.

8-304

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10.04
05.01

8.12.2

8 Important Circuit Information

8.12 Induction motor operation

Selecting individual induction motors 611

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS drive allows up to four different motors to
be selected. Every motor has its own motor parameter set.

K1
K2
K3
K4

Pulse enable

SIMODRIVE 611
universal HRS
T. 663

O81)

P24

O9

Input terminals
I8
1st input
2nd input

Motor selection

Output terminals

O10

I9

O11

4
U2

V2

W2
K1H

K2H

K2

K1H
K2
K3
K4

M1
3~

PTC

K3

K2H

Motor 1

K1
K3
K4

M2
3~

PTC

Motor 2

K4H

0V

2)

K1

K3H

K4

K3H
K1
K2
K4

M3
3~

PTC

Motor 3

K4H
K1
K2
K3

M4
3~

PTC

Motor 4

Notes:
1) Several motors cannot be simultaneously selected as this is interlocked per software.
The recommended contactor interlocking additionally guarantees that only one motor
can be operated at any one time.
2) This is only required for special high speed motors.
Fig. 8-28

Motor changeover at SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

For the motor selection circuit, one 3RH11 auxiliary contactor and one 3RT10
main contactor are required for each motor.

Readers note
For additional information and possibilities for selecting and changingover
induction motors, refer to:
References: /FBU/

SIMODRIVE 611 universal, Description of Functions

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-305

8 Important Circuit Information

8.12 Induction motor operation

Overload
protection

05.08
05.01

Individual thermal monitoring functions must be provided for overload protection

of the individual induction motors. We recommend that the motor is monitored
using a PTC thermistor temperature sensor (embedded in the motor) and a
3RN1 thermistor motor protection evaluation unit.
If motor feeder cables have to be protected where the rated drive converter current is significantly greater than the rated motor current then this must be implemented outside the drive converter.

Notice
Motors may only be changed over using the power contactors in the motor
circuit when terminal 663 pulse enable/start inhibit is inhibited
(deenergized). This means that the power contactor may only be switched
when the motor circuit is in a nocurrent condition.
For additional information also refer to circuit examples =9 in Section 9.7

8-306

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.13 Operation when the power fails

8.13

Operation when the power fails

8.13.1

Application and mode of operation

The function operation with the power fails (power failure buffering) is used, for
example, for machines where personnel could be in danger or significant machine damage could occur due to a danger of collision when machining due to
power failure or for internal control fault signals. Further, the function is used for
machines with complex machining operations. For example, when machining
gear wheels (hobbing, roller grinding) where expensive tools and workpieces
are used and which should be protected from possible damage if power failures
were to occur.
For operation when the power fails, stopping and/or retracting drive motion, the
energy stored in the capacitors of the power DC link and the kinetic energy of
the moved masses stored when the drives regenerate into the line supply can
be briefly used. To do this, a connection must be established from the power DC
link P600/M600 to the auxiliary power supply via the terminals P500/M500 in
the NE module or in the monitoring module.
Further, additional circuit measures are required. For example, the control voltages must be buffered and a power failure and/or DC link monitoring function to
initiate the appropriate control functions.
After a hazard analysis, the machinery construction OEM must evaluate these
risks and requirements and apply appropriate
measures to avoid such hazards or damage.
The requirements placed on the power failure concepts differ significantly depending on the user and machine and must therefore be individually engineered.

8.13.2

Functions
An essential criterion when implementing power failure concepts is to be able to
quickly detect a line supply fault (power failure, line supply undervoltage or
phase failure).
When a line supply fault occurs, the DC link voltage quickly dips/fails due to the
power drawn by the drives and the connected power supplies for the drive and
control components. The discharge time depends on the DC link capacity, the
charge (voltage) and the loading after the power failure.
Operation when the power fails with initiation of the regenerative feedback of
one or more drives into the DC link must become effective before the DC link
voltage decreases below the rated voltage, e.g. 600 V DC to 350 V DC. At
approx. 350 V, the pulses are internally inhibited in the drive group, and the
drives coast down.
The DC link voltage of 600 V DC is proportionally emulated at the control level
and can be evaluated in the 611 digital and 611 universal control units via the
equipment bus. The DC link voltage can be monitored to provide a fast response using parameterizable limit value stages, e.g. to 450 500 V. This
therefore allows indirectly, an immediate response to be made to a line supply
fault, e.g. power failure.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-307

8 Important Circuit Information

8.13 Operation when the power fails

05.08
05.01

The ready signal via terminals 7274 in the NE module also responds when a
line supply fault occurs and inhibits the pulses in the NE module. The response
time is, among other things, dependant on the line supply impedances and
other quantities and can therefore not be precisely calculated in advance. Generally, the power failure detection time is >30 ms and is alone not sufficient to
initiate functions for operation when the power fails (line supply failure).
Operation when the power fails with the SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS
Example:
The DC link voltage is monitored using the limit value stage of a 611 universal
HRS control board in the SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS. When a selectable
limit value is undershot, e.g. a DC link voltage of 550 V, the limit value stage
responds and switches a positive output signal from +24 V to 0 V via a digital
output stage. For example, terminal 64 drive enable can be inhibited in an
AND logic operation with the relay contact of the ready signal of terminals
7273.1 of the NE module. The drives are braked and stopped as quickly as
possible at the current limit.
In addition, for example, via a second digital output of the 611 universal module,
the setpoint polarity of a drive can be changedover and retraction motion initiated for a drive before the other remaining drives are braked, delayed via terminal 64.
The safetyrelevant circuit examples in Section 8.7 for the drive control must be
appropriately adapted by the user for operation when the power fails (line supply fault).

Additional possibilities for braking when the power fails:

Braking using armature shortcircuit braking for permanentmagnet servomotors, refer to circuit example =8 in Section 8.7.

Note
The power failure monitoring device must directly interrupt the coil circuit of the
armature shortcircuit contactor as a buffered +24 V power supply will either
respond too late or not even respond at all.

Braking by quickly applying the holding brake, bypassing the PLC cycle time,
refer to circuit example =8 in Section 8.7.

Note
The holding brake is not an operating brake and can only be conditionally used
for such braking operations.

8-308

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
10.04
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.13 Operation when the power fails

Operation when the power fails with SIMODRIVE 611 digital in conjunction
with SINUMERIK 840D
Extended stopping and retraction: ESR
These more complex functions can be used in conjunction with the optional
software NC functions that can be used in SINUMERIK 840D and the digital
drives 611D with High Performance controls.
For certain machining technologies where several drives, for example, interpolate with one another using electronic gear functions, when the power fails,
these drives must be stopped or retracted in a coordinated fashion using special NC functions.
The user must engineer these functions for the special requirements of the particular machining process or technology.
Also here, the DC link voltage is monitored for a lower threshold value that can
be parameterized. When a limit value, selected using a machine data is fallen
below, within just a few interpolation clock cycles, the NC quickly responds via
the digital drive bus and stops the drives in a controlled fashion and/or raises,
retracts the tool from the machining contour.
Further, for example, when a connection between the NC and the drives is interrupted, for a signoflife failure of the NC or other selected fault signals in the
drive system, the drives can be stopped/retracted using a drivebased function,
i.e. a function that runs autonomously in the drives.
When the power fails, the energy required to stop/retract the drives is supplied
from the energy stored in the capacitors of the power DC link.
If the energy is not sufficient, the DC link capacitance can be increased by adding additional capacitor modules, refer to Chapter 6. However, the charging limit
of the I/R module must not exceeded.
However, for cases where the energy stored in the DC link is still not sufficient to
stop/retract the drives, an additional energy storage device can be activated
through regenerative operation. As an autonomous drive mode when line supply faults occur, it provides the necessary energy for the drive DC link.
A detailed description of Extended stopping and retraction ESR is contained
in the following reference:
References: /FB3/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Special Functions Part 3 Axis couplings and ESR.

Dynamic energy management enables I/RF unit dimensioning to be adapted to

the plant concept in accordance with requirements.
A detailed description of Dynamic Energy Management is contained in the
following reference:
Reference:

/FBA/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D
Drive Functions, Function Manual (DE1)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-309

8 Important Circuit Information

8.13 Operation when the power fails

05.08
05.01

The following control and secondary conditions/limitations must be carefully taken into consideration when engineering and configuring power
failure concepts:

S The braking energy must be converted into heat using one or more pulsed
resistor module(s) or for unregulated infeed units, using the internal pulsed
resistor (it may be necessary to use, in addition, an external resistor). When
the drives brake, the DC link voltage may not fall below or exceed the max.
set monitoring thresholds.

S The safetyrelevant hardware control must, when the power fails, e.g. briefly
maintain the enable signals via terminals 48, 63, 64, NS1, NS2 and 663.
Further, the internal axisspecific enable signals of the NC/PLC interface via
the digital drive bus must also be maintained until the drives come to a
standstill.

S For controlled retraction motion, holding brakes must remain energized, if

required, until the operation has been completed and clamping operations
must be released.

S The external +24 V power supply for the control voltage must be buffered
using power supply units, e.g. SITOP power with capacitor or battery
backup. This maintains the drive enable signals, the PLC functions, and
the control and machine functions on the user side.

S During the braking and retraction phase, it is not permissible that the NC and

PLC controls generate fault signals that inhibit the drives.

S The power supply of the SINUMERIK 840 D with the integrated PLCCPU is
supplied through the DC link of the NE module when the power fails.

8.13.3

DC link buffering
The energy stored in the DC link of the drive units can be used when the power
fails. Capacitor modules are used to increase the DC link capacitance. This
means that on one hand, a brief power failure can be buffered and on the other
hand, it is also possible to store the braking energy.

Note
Examples to calculate and select a capacitor module, refer to Chapter 6.7.1.

Energy balance

8-310

When configuring the emergency retraction, it is always necessary to consider

the energy flow (balance) to find out whether you can do without an additional
capacitor module or a generator axis/spindle (with correspondingly dimensioned
flywheel effect).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
11.05
05.01

8.14

8 Important Circuit Information

8.14 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

General
information

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated offers typetested safety functions which allow

highly effective personnel and machine protection to be implemented inline
with that required in practice.
All safety functions satisfy the requirements specified in 9541, Category 3,
Performance Level d in accordance with EN ISO 138491, SIL 2 in accordance
with EN 61508 and are a standard part of the base system.
Neither additional sensors nor evaluation units are required; this means lower
installation time and costs at the machine and a low profile electrical cabinet.
The function scope includes, e.g.:

S Safetyrelevant monitoring of velocity and standstill (zero speed)

S Safetyrelevant traversing range demarcation and range identification/
detection

Reference

Please refer to the following documentation for a detailed description of

SINUMERIK Safety Integrated:
Readers note
References: /FBSI/

Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

/HBSI/ Application Manual, Safety Integrated

Direct connection
of twochannel I/O
signals

Using the additional, integrated functions in the safety package Safety Integrated for SINUMERIK 840D/611D, for the first time, it is also possible to directly
connect twochannel I/O signals for example, an Emergency Stop button or
light barriers. Logic operations and responses are performed internally using
safetyrelated technology.

Mastering extreme
conditions
professionally

All safetyrelevant faults/errors in the system always cause potentially hazardous movement to be brought to a standstill or the motor to be contactlessly disconnected from the line supply. The drives are brought to a standstill in the optimum way, adapted to the operating conditions of the machine. This means, for
example, in the settingup mode with the protective door opened it is possible
to stop axes as quickly as possible pathrelated and also in the automatic
mode with closed protective door.
This means: High degree of protection for personnel in the settingup mode and
additional protection for the machine, tool and workpiece in the automatic mode.

Highly effective
safety concept

The safety functions provide a previously unknown, intelligent and direct link
right through the system to the electric drives and measuring system. Reliable
operation, fast response and wide acceptance mean that this certified safety
concept is extremely effective.

Safety functions
incorporated
redundantly

A twochannel, diverse system structure has been formed on the basis of the
existing multiprocessor structure. The safety functions have been configured
redundantly in the NC, drive and internal PLC. A feature of this safety concept is
that a measuring system, the standard motor measuring system, can already
satisfy the safety requirements. A second sensor is not necessary but can be
added as an additional, direct measuring system, e.g. linear scale.

Innovative safety
technology setting
new standards

It has been clearly seen that new practical machine operation concepts can be
implemented with this innovative safety technology. The result is a new standard for machines which makes them safer and more flexible to use and which
increases the availability of the entire plant.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-311

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

05.08
05.01

8.15

Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

to the line supply

8.15.1

Threeconductor connection to the line supply

Note
S All X181 connections of a drive group must be electrically switched in
parallel!
S A maximum of four monitoring modules may be connected at X181 of an
NE module.
S If a DC link is buffered (DC link connection), the voltage must always be
taken from between the reactor (LK) and the line supply infeed (NE).
S For all of the following examples, cables must be routed so that they are
shortcircuit and groundfault proof (or fuse)!

Correct!

Schematic diagram
NE
X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

e.g. NCU PMxx

Monitoring module (MM)

PMxx

n.c.
n.c.

Twisted
cable

P600

PMxx

v4 MM

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

M600
Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK1)

V1 W1

PE

Threeconductor connection
to the line supply
Incorrect!

L1
L2
L3

U1

PE
NE
X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

e.g. NCU PMxx

MM

PMxx

PMxx

v4 MM

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

n.c.
n.c.

P600
M600

L1
L2
L3
PE

FN (T10 A)

U1

V1 W1

PE

Filter (5 kW)

3) Consequences when
incorrectly connected to
the line supply:

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK1)

3)

2)
1) Note: Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore in this case not necessary here!
2) Cable protection fuses
Fig. 8-29

8-312

S
S

Possibly damage to the

hardware
Possible errors on the
drive bus

Examples of correctly/incorrectly connecting up the unit using a threeconductor connection with a maximum
of four monitoring modules connected to a line infeed module (NE module)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

05.01

Correct!
Schematic diagram
NE

e.g. NCU PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

PMxx

PMxx

v4 MM

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

n.c.
n.c.

Twisted
cable

P600

MM

M600
Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK1)

V1 W1

PE

Threeconductor connection
to the line supply with more
than four monitoring modules

L1
L2
L3

U1

PE

FN (10 A)

5th MM PMxx
X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

P600

PMxx

Twisted
cable

PMxx

MM

PMxx

9th MM

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

M600

Connection
+10. MM...x. MM
Note:
1) Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not necessary here!

Fig. 8-30

Examples of correctly connecting up the unit using a threeconductor connection for more than four
monitoring modules connected to a line infeed module (NE module)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-313

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

05.01

Incorrect!

Schematic diagram
NE

2)

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

1)

e.g. NCU PMxx

PMxx

PMxx

PMxx

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

n.c.
n.c.

Twisted
cable

P600

MM

M600

U1

V1 W1

PE

LK5)

3)

FN (X A)
L1
L2
L3

L1 L2 L3

Threeconductor connection
to the line supply
Incorrect!

PE
Filter (X kW)

e.g. NCU PMxx

NE
X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

Twisted
cable

P600

MM

PMxx

PMxx

X181
n.c. M500
n.c. P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

n.c.
n.c.

4)

PMxx

M600

U1

V1 W1

PE

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK5)
L1
L2
L3
PE

Consequences when incorrectly connected to the

line supply:
1)/2) Connected in front of the reactor (choke):
S Burnt PC board tracks/connectors
3)

Another connection to the line supply in front of

the reactor (choke):
S Defective DC link electrolytic capacitors

Fig. 8-31

8-314

The following burn:

Connector in the power supply
Rectifier diodes
Precharging decoupling, diodes

4)

Shortcircuit due to phase interchange with

jumper X181 > the following will burn:

S
S
S

PC board tracks of the internal power supply

Varistor module at X181
Connector in the power supply

5) Note:
Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not
necessary here!
Possibility of faults, essentially the same as 1) to 4)

Examples of threeconductor connection to the line supply that are absolutely prohibited

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

05.01

Correct!

Schematic diagram

e.g. NCU PMxx

NE
X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

PMxx

4)

Twisted
cable

P600

4)

MM

PMxx

v4 MM

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

M600

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK3)

U1

V1 W1

PE

L1

Threeconductor connection
to the line supply with DC
link buffering

L2
L3
PE

Incorrect!
e.g. NCU PMxx

NE

1)

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

L1
L2
L3

MM

PMxx

PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

Twisted
cable

P600

PMxx

M600

2)

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)

U1

V1 W1

PE

LK3)

L1
L2
L3
PE
Consequences when incorrectly connected to
the line supply:
1) Another supply, e.g. UPS:
S Defective DC link electrolytic capacitors at
the power supply

The following burn:

DC link decoupling diodes
PC board tracks of the power supply

2) Another connection to the line supply in front of

the reactor (choke):

S
S

Defective DC link electrolytic capacitors at

the power supply
The following will burn in the power supply
Connector
Decoupling diodes
PC board tracks
Precharging circuit, printed circuit board

Note:
3) Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not necessary here!
4) P500/M500 connection at X181 either loopthrough at X181 or connect directly to the DC link.

Fig. 8-32

Examples for correct and prohibited threeconductor connection to the line supply + DC link connection

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-315

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

8.15.2

05.08
05.01

Sixconductor connection to the line supply

Note

S All X181 connections of a drive group must be electrically switched in

parallel!

S All of the jumpers at X181 must be removed!

S A maximum of four monitoring modules may be connected at X181 of an
NE module.

S If a DC link is buffered (DC link connection), the voltage must always be

taken from between the reactor (LK) and the line supply infeed (NE).

S Different line supplies may be used, e.g. using UPS.

S For all of the following examples, cables must be routed so that they are
shortcircuit and groundfault proof (or fuse)!

Schematic diagram

Correct!
NE

Filter (5 kW)
FN (T10 A)

2L2

e.g. NCU PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

2L1
2L3
2)

PMxx

MM

PMxx

v4 MM

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

Twisted
cable

P600
M600
Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK1)

U1

V1 W1

PE

1L1
1L2
1L3
PE

Sixconductor connection
to the line supply

Note:
1) Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not necessary here!
2) DC link connection not permissible for sixconductor connection to the line supply!

Fig. 8-33

8-316

Examples for correct sixconductor connection to the line supply with a maximum of four monitoring modules
connected to a line infeed module (NE module)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

FN (X A)

Filter (X kW)
LK1)

FN (T10 A)3)

U1

V1 W1

M600

2)
P600

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

NE

Cable
twisted!

PE

Connection per line

maximum five
monitoring modules
FN (T10 A)3)

FN (T10 A)

Cable
twisted!

e.g. NCU

PMxx

Correct!
PMxx

PE

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

5th MM

9th MM

Example for
connection of
more than four monitoring modules

PMxx

Six-conductor connection to the line supply

for more than four monitoring modules

Note:
1) LK for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not necessary here!
2) DC link connection for six-conductor connection to the line supply is not permissible!
3) Cable protection fuses (PS fuses in the module)

PE

1L3

1L2

1L1

2L3

2L2

2L1

Filter (5 kW)

FN (T16 A)

Schematic
diagram

Fig. 8-34

05.01
8 Important Circuit Information
8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

Examples for correct sixconductor connection to the line supply with more than four monitoring modules
connected to a line infeed module (NE module)

8-317

8-318

PE

1L3

1L2

1L1

5 kW

t < 10 ms

Circuit-breaker

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
L 1)

+24 V

Note:
2) Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated,
therefore not necessary here!

Fig. 8-35
U1

V1 W1

M600

P600

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

NE

PE

Twisted
cable

z. B. NCU LTxx

LTxx

PE

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

v 4 W

Example for
connection of
more than four monitoring modules

LTxx

Three-conductor connction to the line supply

in operation with DC link buffering

Six-conductor to thr line supply with standstill

Schematic
diagram

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE
02.12
05.01

Examples for correct sixconductor connection to the line supply + DC link connectio (increase energy effisiency)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

Correct for NE w16 kW!

Schematic diagram

NE

e.g. NCU PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

PMxx

Twisted
cable

P600

MM
X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

M600

FN (T10 A)
Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK

U1

V1 W1

PE

L2

L1

L3
PE

Fig. 8-36

Sixconductor connection
to the line supply
with DC link buffering

Example for correct sixconductor connection to the line supply + DC link connection

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-319

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

Incorrect!

Schematic diagram
NE

Filter (5 kW)

e.g. NCU PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

FN (X A)

L1
L2
L3

Twisted
cable

P600
1)

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK2)

PMxx

MM

PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

PMxx

1)

M600

U1

V1 W1

L1
L2

05.01

L3
PE

PE

Illegal (forbidden)
sixconductor connection
to the line supply with DC
link buffering

Consequences when incorrectly connected to the line supply:

1) For a sixconductor connection to the line supply with DC link connection, the following can occur
immediately or over the medium term:
S DC link electrolytic capacitors on the power supply will be destroyed

S
S

Arcing occurs
The following burn:
DC link decoupling diodes
PC board tracks

Note:
2) Lk for 5 kW and 10 kW integrated, therefore not necessary here!

Fig. 8-37

8-320

Examples of illegal (forbidden) sixconductor connection to the line supply + DC link connection

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8 Important Circuit Information

8.15 Examples of correctly and incorrectly connecting NE

05.01

Schematic diagram
1)

Connection
e.g. overvoltage
limiting module (this
is mandatory for UL)

NE

Filter (X kW)
FN (T10 A)

e.g. NCU PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

L1
L2

4)

Incorrect!

L3

PMxx

MM

PMxx

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

Twisted
cable

P600

1)

+ MM 5
+ MM 6
+ MM 7
+ MM 3 /
+ MM 4

M600

Filter (X kW)
FN (X A)
LK

U1

V1 W1

PE

L1
L2

24 V DC

L3

e.g.
SITOP
20 A

e.g.
2)

PE

3)

M
3

Consequences when incorrectly connected to the line supply:

1) Arcing with respect to PE in the power supply
Refer to the use of HF/HFD commutating reactor to prevent system oscillations in Chapter 6.5.
Consequences when the system oscillates: Burned overvoltage limiting module
2)/3)/4):
S More than four monitoring modules:

Additional loads:
Consequence: Burnt PC board tracks on the line infeed module (NE module) power supply

Fig. 8-38

Additional examples for frequent faults/mistakes when connecting to the line supply

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-321

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

05.08
02.12
05.01

8.16

VPM Voltage Protection Module

8.16.1

General information
The Voltage Protection Module VPM (voltage limiting module) is used for permanentmagnet synchronous motors with an EMF of 800 Vrms up to 2000
Vrms in order to limit the DC link voltage at the converter in the case of a fault.
The Voltage Protection Module is connected between the power module and
motor in the motor cable. If, at maximum speed, the line voltage fails, or if as a
consequence of this, the converter pulses are deleted, the synchronous motor
feeds back the full voltage into the DC link.
The VPM identifies an excessively high DC link voltage (> 800 V) and shortcircuits the three motor feeder cables. The energy remaining in the motor is converted into heat as a result of the shortcircuit between the VPM and the motor
feeder cables.
The Voltage Protection Module is available in 3 different versions.
Table 8-4

Overview of the Voltage Protection Modules that are available

Designation

Rated current

VPM 120

120 A

VPM 200

200 A

VPM 200 Dynamik

200 A

When using thirdparty synchronous motors (generally, with higher inductances

then 1FE motors), when combining a thirdparty synchronous motor with a series reactor as well as the combination of 1FE motor with series reactor, then
the VPM 200 Dynamik should be used.
The reason for this is the higher operational inductances and as a consequence, higher voltage rates rise, which can effect of the VPM.
Table 8-5

Interface overview of the Voltage Protection Module

Number of VPM
120/VPM 200

Number of VPM 200

Dynamik

Signal interface

PE connection

Load connection studs, input

Load connection studs, output

Type

8-322

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Table 8-6

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Technical data VPM

Technical specifications
Order No.:

VPM 120

VPM 200

6SN11131AA001JAj

Type of voltage

VPM 200 Dynamik

6SN11131AA001KAj

6SN11131AA001KCj

3phase pulsed AC voltage, EMF motor

Powerup time of the VPM

1 s (from puls enabling)

Normal range of the DC link

voltage

Slower limit
Supper limit

490 V DC
795 V DC

Operating range of the VPM

830 ... 2000 V (peak amplitude)

Lower limit, DC link voltage

490 V DC

Inverter clock cycle frequency

3.2...8 kHz

Rated current

Max. 120 A rms

Max. 200 A rms

Permissible shortcircuit current

Time range
0...10 ms
10...500 ms
500...2 min
u2 min

Maximum
1500 A
255 A
90 A
0A

Permissible rated current

Electrical separation

Maximum
2000 A
600 A
200 A
0A
120 s

Safe electrical separation between the signaling contact and the motor cables U, V, W
according to DIN VDE 0160/pr EN 50178, UL 508

Degree of protection to
EN 60529 (IEC 60529)

IP20

Permissible humidity
Humidity classification
according to
DIN EN 6072133

< 90 %
Cl. 3K5 condensation and formation of ice excluded.
Low air temperature 0 C

Permiss. ambient temperature

S
S

25...+55 C

Storage and transport

0...+55 C

Operation

Cooler
Weight

Aircooled, free convection

approx. 6 kg

Clearance required on the

outside at the sides of the
cable glands
Dimensions (W x H x D) [mm]

approx. 11 kg

approx. 13 kg

200 mm
300 x 150 x 180

Connection U, V, W, PE
Torque
Cable crosssection
Cable entry
Screwed connection

Screw connection, 8 x M6
10 Nm
v50 mm2
approx. 40 mm
2 x M50

Conn. X3 (signaling contact)

Cable crosssection
Cable entry
Screwed connection

Terminal, type 226111 Wago

v1.5 mm2
approx. 9 mm
M16

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

300 x 250 x 190

Screw connection, 8 x M8
25 Nm
2 x v50 mm2
approx. 40 mm
4 x M50

300 x 250 x 260

Screw connection, 14 x M8
25 Nm
2 x v50 mm2
approx. 40 mm
4 x M50

Terminal, type 226111 Wago

v1.5 mm2
approx. 9 mm
M16

8-323

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

8.16.2

02.12
05.01

Integration
It must be installed according to the connection schematic VPM 120 (Fig. 8-42)
or VPM 200/200 Dynamic (Fig. 8-43).
Series reactors may only be connected between the VPM and motor.
Clearances of approx. 200 mm must be provided above and below the unit for
cable entry.
It can be mounted in any position.
It is not permissible that switching elements are inserted in the connecting
cables U, V ,W between the drive, VPM and motor!
The air intake temperature, measured 10 mm below the unit, may not exceed
55 C.
Caution
After switching off all of the voltages, hazardous voltages are present for up to
4 minutes (capacitance of the 611 converter capacitor). The voltage must be
measured to ensure that there are no hazardous voltages present!

Notice
The unit is a safetyrelevant piece of equipment and may only be used as
specified. Other application, e.g. armature shortcircuit in operation and others
are not permissible.
The warning information on the unit must be carefully observed!
Operation with VPM is only permitted in conjunction with the
SIMODRIVE 611 digital, SIMODRIVE 611 universal, converter system,
shielded Motion-Connect 800 motor supply cables, and enabled
permanentmagnet induction motors.

Warning
Motors with an EMF that can achieve a DC link voltage > 2 kV (EMF = 1.4 kV
eff) at the highest speed are not permitted to be connected to the SIMODRIVE
611. In this case, the insulating voltage could be exceeded, resulting in
personal injury due to electric shock.
Voltages U v 2 kV can occur at cables/conductors that are cut or damaged.
In the event of an error, the terminal voltage of the permanentmagnet
induction motors can assume values U v 2 kV.
Hazardous voltage is still present approximately 4 minutes after all voltages
have been shut down (capacitor capacity of the SIMODRIVE 611 converter). In
order to ensure that no hazardous voltages are present, the voltage must first
be measured.

8-324

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Interface
description

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Die folgenden Zeichnungen zeigen die prinzipielle Lage der Schnittstellen und
der Gehusedurchlsse der Voltage Protection Modules VPM 120, VPM 200
und VPM 200 Dynamik.

Cable gland
To the power module

X3
X3 signal contact
Connecting bars
U
V
W

PE connection

Cable gland

To the motor

Fig. 8-39

Voltage Protection Modules VPM 120 (without cover)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-325

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

02.12
05.01

Cable gland
To the power module

X3
X3 signal contact

Connecting
bars
U

PE connections

V
W
Cable gland

To the motor

Fig. 8-40

Voltage Protection Modules VPM 200 (without cover)

Cable gland
To the power module

X3 signal contact
X3
Connecting
bars
U

PE connection

V
W

Cable gland

To the motor

Fig. 8-41

Voltage Protection Modules VPM 200 Dynamik (without cover)

In operation, the housing is closed so that the electrical connection points are
covered.

8-326

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

Connection,
VPM 120

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

For the power connections to the power module and for the motor, the cables
are routed through the cable glands of the Voltage Protection Module and connected to the connecting bars inside the device.

Terminal 663: pulse enabling

Terminal 9: enable voltage

SIMODRIVE 611
Cable length, max. 1.5 m

U2 V2 W2

PE

U3 V3 W3
U4

V4 W4

PE
X3

VPM 120

Cable length, max. 50 m

MOTOR
M
PE

Fig. 8-42

Connection, VPM 120

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-327

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Connection
VPM 200/
VPM 200 Dynamik

01.12
05.01

For the power connections to the power module and for the motor, the cables
are routed through the cable glands of the Voltage Protection Module and connected to the connecting bars inside the device.

S Wiring diagram

Terminal 9:

SIMODRIVE 611 digital

U2

W2

Terminal 663: Pulse enable

Series reactormotor connection
not permitted!

PE

Cable length, max. 1.5 m

V2

Enable voltage

8
X3

W
PE
VPM 200/VPM 200 Dynamik
For VPM 200 Dynamik,
connect series reactor here
Cable length, max. 50 m
Motor

PE

Fig. 8-43

8-328

Connection VPM 200/VPM 200 Dynamik

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

S Connection of internal cable routing and VPM 200 Dynamik

Wiring sequence
VS1

VS2
W1

U1
U2
V1

PE1
X3
W2
PE2

V2
U3

W3
PE3

U4

W4
PE4

VS3

VS4

VS1 +
K1

VS2 +

S
S
S
S
S

K2

S
S
S

K3 +

K4 +

VS3

VS4

Attaching the four cable glands

Strip cable to approx. 300 mm, based on the
cable glands you are using, and expose the
shield connection
Apply the cable lug
Connect the cables to X3 and secure them
with the cable tie (see Fig. 8-46)
Insert K1 and K2 into VS1 and VS2 and pull
taught, making sure that the black cable (L1)
and the protective cable are on top.
Connect the individual cables in the following
order:
K1 blue (L2) V1
K2 blue (L2) V1
K2 green/yellow (PE) PE1
K1 brown (L3) W2
K2 black (L1) U2
For the time being, do not connect the
remaining three cables
Insert K3 and K4 into VS3 and VS4 and pull
tight, making sure that the black cable (L1)
and the protective cable are on top.
Connect the individual cables in the following
order:
K3 blue (L2) V2
K4 blue (L2) V2
K3 brown (L3) W3
K4 green/yellow (PE) PE4
K4 black (L1) U3
K1 black (L1) U4
K3 black (L1) U1
K2 brown (L3) W4
K4 brown (L3) W1
K3 green/yellow (PE) PE3
K1 green/yellow (PE) PE2

Where:
K1: Cable 1 (from the converter)
K2: Cable 2 (from the converter)
K3: Cable 3 (from the motor)
K4: Cable 4 (from the motor)
VS1 to VS4: Cable glands 1 to 4
U1 to U4: Terminal studs 1 to 4, phase U
V1 and V2: Terminal studs 1 and 2, phase V
W1 to W4: Terminal studs 1 to 4, phase W
PE1 to PE4: Terminal studs 1 to 4, busbar PE
U: Busbar, phase U
V: Busbar, phase V
W: Busbar, phase W
PE: Busbar PE

Fig. 8-44

Connection of internal cable routing and VPM 200 Dynamik

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-329

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Signal contact X3

02.07
05.01

When the VPM is tripped or in the event of a temperature fault, signaling contact
X3 opens and interrupts the pulse enable of the SIMODRIVE converter
(see Fig. 8-45).

Warning
The signaling contact X3 closes autonomously after t > 2 min or after the
temperature switch has been reset. Therefore, measures must be adopted to
prevent the drive from starting by itself!

X3

u2 min

Fig. 8-45

Signaling contact X3 of the VPM

Table 8-7

Technical data, signaling contact X3

Designation

off w 60 _C
on v 55 _C

Technical specifications

Contact
1.Operating message
2. Operating voltage +24 V (from external)

NC contact, floating

Switch rating

30 V DC at 0.1 A

Switching voltage/switching current

min 19 V/10 mA

Interrupts when the housing temperature

w80 $2.5 _C

Switches back

v55 _C

Interruption time after the start of shortcircuit operation

u2 min
Note:
This value is valid 15 s after the drive and
pulse enable

Terminal type:
Spring loaded terminal WAGO, type 226111, cable crosssectionmax.: 1,5 mm2 ,shielded cable
Cable gland: max. 9 mm .
Types VPM 120, VPM 200 and VPM 200 Dynamik
S Screwed connection: 1 x M16, z. B. Fa. Pflitsch, Order No.: UNI DICHT
EMV 2165211S05
S counter nut: M16: GM216PA.

Caution
When a VPM is tripped, the shortcircuit thyristor must be safely cleared before
the connected drive can be switched on again. This is only ensured if the motor
has first come to a standstill.
An X3 signal contact that has closed again is not an explicit indication that
this has occurred.
Be especially cautious of this in the event of servicing.

8-330

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Note
Signal contact X3 of the VPM is routed via a bistable relay. Very significant
shocks that occur during transport and installation can cause the relay to go
into the other switching state. As a consequence, it cannot be guaranteed that
the system will start.
To resolve the fault:
1. Connect terminal 9 and terminal 663 (pulse enable)
2. Switchon SIMODRIVE 611D
3. Allow the spindle to rotate at an average speed for at least 2 seconds
4. Switchoff SIMODRIVE 611D; the relay is reset when the internal 24 V
supply is switched off
5. Remove the jumper between terminal 9 and terminal 663

Cable lengths

The maximum length of the power cable between the power module and Voltage Protection Module is 1.5 m. It is not permissible that this module includes
any switching elements.
The power cable between the Voltage Protection Module and the motor must
not exceed a length of 50 m.
The maximum length of the signal cable is 10 m.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-331

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

05.08
05.01

Connecting the X3
signaling contact

X3

Fig. 8-46

Cable tie

Connecting the X3 signaling contact for VPM 200 and VPM 200 Dynamik

To check the function of the VPM, operate the motor at a speed for which the
EMC of the motor would be approx. 650 V eff. An oscilloscope is used to measure the motor voltage. This requires that a pulse inhibit is initiated on the converter system and on the I/R unit. When the VPM is activated, the motor voltage
must fall to just a few volts, if not, the VPM is defect!

Note
To measure the EMC:
Perform the measurement with the oscilloscope. For the measurement, either
potentialseparate active voltage dividers for high voltages or passive probes
explicitly suitable for voltages above 1.5 kV must be used. Multimeters, also not
effective value multimeters, cannot be used.
No standard probes may be used for the oscilloscope measurement. For
measurement with passive probe, the ground clip must be set to ground, under
no circumstances to the converter terminal. Then use the oscilloscope to
subtract two channels, e.g. U voltage to ground and V voltage to ground, from
each other and display the result on the screen.

8-332

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

8.16.3

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

Mounting
The Voltage Protection Module is mounted in the cabinet close to the drive.

Danger
It is only permissible to connect motor reactors between the Voltage Protection
Module and the motor.

ca. 200 (7.87) 2)

From the power module

284 (11.18) 1)

300 (11.81)

w700 (27.56)

ca. 200 (7.87) 2)

125 (4.92) 1)

From the motor

1) Hole size for the mounting plate, screw mounting with 4 x M5

2) Mounting clearance for routing cables, dependent on the cable type

Fig. 8-47

Mounting dimensions for a Voltage Protection Module VPM120

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

8-333

02.12
05.01

286 (11.26) 1)

From the power module

300 (11.81)

w700 (27.56)

ca. 200 (7.87) 2)

8 Important Circuit Information

8.16 VPM Voltage Protection Module

ca. 200 (7.87) 2)

8
225 (8.86) 1)

From the motor

1) Hole size for the mounting plate, screw mounting with 4 x M5

2) Mounting clearance for routing cables, dependent on the cable type

Fig. 8-48

Mounting dimensions for a Voltage Protection Module VPM200

8-334

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1

Installation and connectingup regulations

Note
The SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS S120 EMC Directive
(Order No.: 6FC52970AD300APV) must always be observed; refer to the
documentation overview on the cover page.
Chapter 9 contains only productspecific additions!

Caution
Carefully ensure that the line filter is connected to the line supply inline with
the specifications/regulations:
LINE L1, L2, L3 for line filters for the UI module and I/R module for sinusoidal
current mode.
If this is not observed, the line filter could be damaged. Also refer to the
connection diagram 9-1.

Caution
The line filters listed conduct a high leakage current over the PE conductor.
A permanent PE connection for the filter or control cabinet is required due to
the high leakage current of the line filters.
Measures according to EN 50178/94 Part 5.3.2.1 must be taken, e.g. a PE
conductor (10 mm2 Cu) or a second conductor must be routed electrically
parallel to the PE conductor via separate terminals. This conductor must also
fully meet the requirements for PE conductors according to IEC 603645543.

Applications

The line filters described have been dimensioned to suppress SIMODRIVE 611
drive converters; they have not been designed to suppress (noise/interference
suppression) other loads in the electrical cabinet. A dedicated filter must be provided for other loads in the electrical cabinet.
If the electronics power supply is connected to a separate line supply, then the
feeder cable must be routed through a second filter. The feeder cable to the
electronics power supply (connector X181) must be shielded and the shield
must be connected at both ends at the connector side as close as possible to
connector X181 on the cabinet mounting panel.
The line supply connection for fan units must also be routed through a second
filter.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-335

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

Mounting in the
electrical cabinet

05.08
05.01

The line filter must be located in the same cabinet field close to the NE modules; the cable (shielded above 1 m) connecting the line filter to the NE module
should be kept as short as possible. The incoming and outgoing cables to/from
the line filter must be routed separately from one another.
Recommended configuration, refer to Fig. 9-1.

Note
If the system is subject to a highvoltage test using AC voltage, a line filter
must be disconnected in order to obtain a correct measurement result.

Connection
cable shield

A permanent strain relief for the cables must be present. These cables must not
pass strain forces to the cable shielding!
Shield connecting plates with a clamp connection are provided on the NE and
PM modules to connect the shields of shielded powered cables; mounting locations are also provided for brake terminals (Order No., refer to Table 9-1. Also
refer to the dimension drawing EMC measures, Chapter 12).
Table 9-1

Order Nos. for the shield connecting plates

Module width [mm]

50

Shield connecting plate for modules with

internal cooling
6SN11620EA00

external cooling
6SN11620EB00

0AA0

0AA0

100

0BA0

0BA0

150

0CA0

0CA0

200

0JA0

0JA0

300

0DA0

0DA0

300 for fan/hose

0KA0

If the motor is equipped with a brake, then the shield of the brake feeder cable
must be connected at both ends to the shield of the power cable.
If there is no possibility of connecting a shield on the motor side, a gland must
be incorporated in the terminal box with the possibility of establishing a shield
motor connection through the largest possible surface area.

Warning
Cable shields and cores/conductors of power cables which are not used, e.g.
brake conductors, must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge
charges arising from capacitive coupling.
Nonobservance can cause lethal shock voltages.

9-336

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

Encoder cables

Cabinet mounting panel

Functional
cables

Fuses
3

3
1)

I/R module
or
UI module

1)

Main switches

1)

LINE

Filter

Input terminals

U1 V1 W1 PE

1)

2)

PE

U2 V2 W2 PE

2)

2)

Reactor
1)

1)
4)

PE

L1 L2 L3 PE

Supply
system

U2 V2 W2

LOAD

1)

1)

FD module

P600
M600

1)

PE

MSD module

9
PE rail electrically connected over a large surface area to the cabinet mounting panel3)

Cables longer than 1 m must be shielded. If unshielded connections are used, an adequate
separation > 20 cm must be observed for cables subject to coupling!
1) Shield connection through the largest possible surface area to the cabinet mounting panel.
2) Shield connection at the modulespecific connecting plate.
3) PE cables can be, alternatively, connected using a PE rail also observing EN50178
(protective connections).
4) Permissible commutating reactors for I/R module, sinusoidal operation refer to Sections 3.4.2 and 3.1
Permissible commutating reactor for 28 kW UI module, refer to Section 3.4.2
When routing cables into the cabinet, a clearance of > 100 mm must be maintained around the HFD reactor or
measures must be taken to discharge the heat/appropriately guide the air.
Note:
The filter may only be mounted with the line supply connection at the bottom (downwards).
Fig. 9-1

Connecting diagram for line filters for 5 kW and 10 kW U/I modules and for 16 kW to 120 kW I/R modules.
The connecting diagram also applies to 28 kW UI, however as a result of the unregulated infeed, 6pulse
squarewave current is drawn.

Note
1. The EMC measures described above ensure CE compliance with the EMC
Directive.
2. Alternative measures can be applied, e.g. routing behind mounting plates,
suitable clearances, under the assumption that they have similar results.
3. This excludes measures that relate to the design, installation, and routing of
motor power cables and signal cables.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-337

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

9.1.1

10.04
05.08
05.01

Shielded connecting plates

SIMODRIVE

Shield connecting plates are available that can be retrofitted for the infeed and
power modules. These plates also have mounting points for brake connecting
terminals.

The shield plates should be mounted after the

devices have been mounted/installed in the
electrical cabinet.
The screw(s) 1 below should be loosened
so that the keyhole can be engaged in the
shield plate, and then mounting is continued
in the sequence 2, 3, 4.
When removing the module, proceed in the
inverse sequence.

1
4

3
2

Fig. 9-2

Shield connection
cables

Mounting the shielding plate

The shield connection is used to ensure that cables for electronics, e.g. incremental shaftangle encoders for SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS, are connected to the ground potential of the module housing in compliance with EMC
(for Siemens encoder cables, the shield is connected in the encoder connector).
The shield connection is mounted above the control units using the screws supplied above the threaded sockets at the power modules.
Order No. (MLFB): 6SN11620FA000AAV
Note
For SIMODRIVE 611, the 6SN11620FA000AA2 shield connection can be
used for inhouse assembled sensor lines, e.g. for TTL encoder to
SIMODRIVE 611 universal.

9-338

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

Shield connection (6SN11620FA000AA1)

Retaining clip for the shield

Terminal clamp for busbars 10x3 mm

4fold shield connection (6SN11620FA000AA2)

9
Refer to
Chapter 12
Fig. 9-3

Shield connection 6SN11620FA000AA1

The shields of original preassembled cables are automatically connected

when the cable is pluggedin.
Exceptions:

Setpoint cable from the analog NC

Here, the shields of the setpoint pairs must be connected to the upper
side of the module. The threaded sockets provided can be used for this
purpose (M5x10/3 Nm).

Drive bus cable from SINUMERIK 840C

Here, the shield is connected to the threaded socket mentioned above
using the clamp provided.

Drive bus and equipment bus extension cables for 2tier configurations.
Here, shields are connected at both ends of the cables to the above
mentioned threaded sockets using the clamps provided.
Motor power cables
The shields of the motor feeder cables are connected, using the hose
connectors provided, to the shield connecting plates (accessories) of the
modules.

Shield connection
front panel

In order to ensure a good connection between the front panel and the housing,
the screws at the front panel must be tightened with a torque of 0.8 Nm.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-339

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

02.03
05.01

Connection,
electronics ground

Terminal X131 (electronics ground) at the NC.

Protection against
overvoltages

In order to provide protection against overvoltage (for line supplies that are not
in compliance with VDE), an overvoltage limiter module (Order No.:
6SN11110AB000AA0) can be inserted at connector X181 on the NE module
(this is not necessary for UI 5 kW and monitoring module).

Maximum
cable lengths

Using nonshielded signal and direct current supply cables

(e.g. 24 V infeed with external supply):

S DC power supply cables:

S Nonshielded signal cables:

Length p 9.90 m permissible.

Length, max. 30 m permissible without

any additional circuitry
For longer lengths, the user must connect suitable circuitry to provide overvoltage protection, e.g. the following type:
TERMITRABUK5/ 24DC
Article no. 27 94 69 9 from
Fa. Phoenix Contact GmbH & Co
32823 Blomberg, Germany
Tel. +49 (0)5235/300
Fax +49 (0)5235/341200
http://www.phoenixcontact.com
Note

We recommend that prefabricated cables are used, as correct shielding is

necessary to ensure an EMCsafe connection.
Further, the appropriate cable parameters are required in order to ensure
optimum signal transfer characteristics. The function will only be guaranteed
when using the original cables.
Reference:

9-340

/EMC/

EMC Configuring Guidelines

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

9.1.2

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

Mounting conditions, internal cooling

Note
The regulations described in the SINAMICS S120 Booksize / SIMODRIVE
System Manual switchgear cabinet integration system manual
Order No.: 6SL30970AT000APV must be observed for the heat dissipation!

General
information

If the guidelines for installing/mounting SIMODRIVE 611 equipment in the cabinet are not carefully observed, this can significantly reduce the service life of the
equipment and result in premature component failure.
The following specifications must be carefully observed when mounting/installing a SIMODRIVE 611 drive group:

S Cooling clearance
S Cable routing
S Air flow, climatecontrol equipment
Cooling clearance

Minimum 100 mm clearance at the top and bottom for cooling.

Incorrect

80 mm

40 mm

Correct

100 mm

SIMODRIVE 611

SIMODRIVE 611

Channel cable

40 mm

Fig. 9-4

100 mm

Cooling clearance
top and bottom
100 mm

Cooling clearance

Air intake temperature, max 40 C, at higher temperatures (max 55 C), the

power must be reduced (derating).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-341

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

02.12
05.01

Mounting surface

Warm discharged air

100 mm
100 mm

9
Cooling air

Fig. 9-5

Air flow in the electrical cabinet

Notice
For modules that generate a significant amount of heat, pulsed resistor module,
5 kW and 10 kW UI module, a heat deflecting plate (100 mm wide) should be
used to protect the cable from excessive temperature. (For the pulsed resistor
module, 50 mm wide, mounted so that they overlap.)

9-342

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

Air intake when

arranging power
modules

Measures are shown in the following diagram if the following conditions/arrangements simultaneously exist in the cabinet:

S Number of power modules (50 mm wide) N >10

S Shield plate
S Channel cable

N >10
50 mm

Infeed module

Power modules

A
>200 mm

Channel cable
Shield plate

C
Supplementary fan

Supplementary fan

The following measures must be applied as a minimum in order to ensure adequate air intake:

A
Fig. 9-6

or

or

Measures when building the cabinet

Cable routing

Cables may not be routed over modules; the ventilation grilles may not be covered. The 50 mm wide devices are especially critical.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-343

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

9.1.3

02.12
05.01

Twotier equipment configuration

Arrangement

The modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system can also be arranged in two tiers one above the other or next to each other.
The distance between the rows of modules may not be less than 200 mm to
ensure unrestricted cooling. In this case it must be ensured that the cooling air
for the upper lineup does not exceed 40 _C or with derating does not reach
55 _C. Otherwise, measures must be taken, for example an air baffle plate must
be used or offset mounting, see Fig 9-8. As a result of the equipment bus cable,
dependent on the design, the maximum clearance is specified
When arranging the cable ducts that may be required for the wiring it must be
ensured that the required minimum clearance to the SIMODRIVE 611 converter
system is not fallen below.
The modules with the higher power ratings as well as the infeed module
must be located in the upper row of modules.
The maximum expansion phase of a drive group is limited by the power rating
of the infeed module. Only one equipment bus extension is permissible: Either
to the left, e.g. for a second tier; or to the right, e.g. to bypass a cubicle panel.

Connecting cable

For the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system, for a twotier equipment configuration, a connecting cable is required for the equipment and drive bus.
In the twotier equipment configuration, the DC link is connected using
parallel cables (max. length, 5 m; in conjunction with
SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA, the guidelines correspond to the User Manual
SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA).

The required cable cross-section of the connecting cable for the downstream
modules can be obtained from the dimension drawing in Fig. 12-60. The three
cables should be tied together. These cables are not included with the equipment.
The dimensions, specified in the diagram 9-7 apply for the DC link connection of
components that are separately located next to each other, e.g. extending over
several electrical cabinets.

Adapter terminals
to connect the DC
link

Adapter terminals are available to connect the DC link.

The DC link voltage can be connected further using these adapter terminals,
e.g. to connect the DC link for twotier configurations.
The following adapter terminals are available (refer to Fig. 9-7):

S Package with two double terminals 50 mm2 for a module width 50...200 mm
(to 100 A also for a module width of 300 mm)
(Order No.: 6SN11611AA010BA0)

S Package with two double terminals 95 mm2 for a module width of 300 mm
(Order No.: 6SN11611AA010AA0)

9-344

Danger
Notice! Order No.: 6SN11611AA010AA0 Do not use for
module widths 50 200 mm. Danger of death because the contact safety is
endangered!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.1 Installation and connectingup regulations

For the NC control system

Round cable

Schematic
diagram

Adapter terminals, Order No.

For module width, 50 200 mm
6SN11611AA010BA0
For module width, 300 mm
6SN11611AA010AA02)
2) Danger notice!

Do not use for module

widths 50 200 mm.
Danger of death
because the contact
safety is endangered!
Pay attention to the
cooling!

Equipment bus cable

Connection: shortcircuit resistant,
cable/busbar

Cable length, max. 5 m

Length of cable
Twisted, shielded
above 1 m cable length

Terminating connector
for the drive bus

max 5 m! (in
conjunction with
SIMODRIVE POSMO
SI/CD/CA, the
guidelines correspond
to the User Manual
SIMODRIVE POSMO
Equipotential bonding cable is routed along SI/CD/CA)
the mounting panel close to the
P600/M600 conductors.

1) The drive group has more than six drive axes. This is the reason that round drive bus cables are used
in the complete group. Further, the shields of those round drive bus cables that are used to jumper/bridge
Gaps in the module group must be clamped/connected to the associated module housing!
Fig. 9-7

Connection example, twotier configuration

Data on the
system design

1. The continuous equipment bus cable of a drive group at one input module or
monitoring module may be a maximum of 2.1 m long (from the supply point).
For a twotier configuration, two equipment bus branches, each with
max. 2.1 m length from the branching point (supply point) can be used at the
infeed.
2. 1500 mm equipment bus extension for a twotier configuration with a branch
at the supply/infeed point (Order No.: 6SN11611AA000AA1).
3. The drive bus length may not exceed 11 m.
For more than six modules, control units, round cables must be used
instead of ribbon cables.

Note
Connection details for the DC link adapter set, refer to the dimension drawing in
Fig. 1259.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-345

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.2 Highvoltage test in the system

02.03
05.01

Air supply

Equipment
combination

Cooling unit
Air baffle plate

Equipment
combination

Mounting panel at approx.

100 mm separation

9
Fig. 9-8

9.2

Example of a twotier cooling construction

Highvoltage test in the system

It is permissible to perform a highvoltage test on SIMODRIVE 611 drive converters.
The components are designed/dimensioned in compliance with DIN EN 50178.
The following secondary conditions/limitations must be carefully observed when
the system is subject to a highvoltage test:
1. Powerdown the unit.
2. Withdraw the overvoltage module in order to prevent the voltage limiting
responding.
3. Disconnect the line filter so that the test voltage does not dip.
4. Connect M600 to PE through resistor 100 k (the grounding clip in the NE
modules is open). In the factory, the units are subject to a highvoltage test
at 2.25 kVDC phasePE. The NE modules are shipped with the grounding
clip open.
5. The maximum permissible voltage for a highvoltage system test is
1.8 kVDC phasePE.
If these points are not carefully observed, then the modules can be damaged
(preliminary damage).

9-346

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
05.01
9.3Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

9.3
Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls
according to EN ISO 138491:2008
9.3.1

General information
With the introduction of EN 62061 and EN ISO 138491 as successor to the EN
9451 standard, several things have changed regarding the assessment of
suitable safety technology. Not only is the structure of a safetyrelated circuit
taken into consideration, as was previously the case according to EN 9541,
but beyond this, the performance of the safety technology is also assessed
along with the reliability; and if necessary, the software and many other related
issues.

9.3.2

Safetyrelated stop functions of electric drive systems according to DIN EN 6180052

Safety function STO Safe Torque Off

Function

The Safe Torque Off (STO) function is a safety function to avoid unexpected
starting. This function prevents the unexpected starting of a motor, connected to
the drive control unit, from standstill. When the Safe Torque Off function is activated, the motor shaft cannot generate a torque.

Activation

This safety function should only be activated after the drive has come to a
standstill, otherwise it loses its braking capability.
The standstill of the drive as well as the activation of the Safe Torque Off function must be realized and secured using an external machine control. If the
drive is at a standstill and the Safe Torque Off function is active, additional brakes may be required for dangers due to the fact that the drive shaft is subject to
an external torque.
For SIMODRIVE 611, the Safe Torque Off function is a Device to shut down
and avoid unexpected starting according to EN 602041 Section 5.4. This behavior corresponds to stop Category 0, according to EN 602041:2006.
There is no electrical isolation from the line supply with the Safe Torque Off
function. As a consequence, this function does not represent a protective
device against electric shock.

Safety function SS1 safe stop (time controlled)

Function

Initiates that the motor decelerates, and after an applicationspecific delay, initiates the STO function.
This behavior corresponds to stop Category 1, according to EN 602041:2006.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-347

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

02.12
05.01
9.3 Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

Implementation for the drive system SIMODRIVE 611

digital and universal
Closedloop
control

On the control modules, which are inserted into the power module, each control
module is equipped with a safety relay to implement the STO function. For
doubleaxis modules, the safety relay acts on both axes.

Line infeed

Everyline infeed includes an integrated main contactor, which can be used for
the Safe Torque Off function (STO).

9.3.3

Control modules safetyrelated circuit

P600
U2
V2
W2

M
3~

M600
1

Power module

P5
AS1
AS2
K1

663
19

ASIC
mit
Ansteuerlogik

uP

Fig. 9-9

9-348

control mudule
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

Control amplifier (SIDU-ASIC)

K1 Safety relay

Optocoupler

SIMODRIVE 611 internal block diagram of the STO function

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
05.01
9.3Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

Function

The power unit controls the power feed to the individual motor windings.
The gating logic on the control module clocks the 6 power transistors using a
specific pattern to generate a rotating field. An optocoupler is connected between the gating logic and each control amplifier of a power transistor to provide
electrical isolation. Power supply P5 of the optocoupler is fed via the NO contact
of safety relay K1. When the Safe Torque Off function is activated, the NO contact of the safety relay is opened and the NC contact (= feedback contact) is
closed. The NO and NC contacts in the safety relay are positively driven. The
state of the safety relay (NO contact) must be evaluated via the feedback signal
contact AS1/AS2.

Control

When the Safe Torque Off function is active (in the normal state without fault)
the contacts of the NO contact K1 are open and the power supply to the optocouplers is interrupted.
In order that the control module of the SIMODRIVE 611 identifies the state Safe
Torque Off, and processes it in the sequence control, the logical signal level of
terminal 663 is signaled to the control module via an optocoupler. If the Safe
Torque Off function is active, this input immediately generates a pulse inhibit via
the control logic.
The feedback signal contact of the safety relay must be evaluated in every case
and must be used to directly control a second shut off signal path.

AS1
AS2
9
663
19

FR+
P5LT

FR

Supply
Optocoupler/LWL

Fig. 9-10

Table 9-2
Terminal

SIMODRIVE closedloop control STO control block diagram

Value integrated safety relay

Designation

Description

AS1

Contact 1

Relay feedback signal contact

AS2

Contact 2

Start inhibit

663

Control input start inhibit

Nominal resistance of the excitation coil at 20 _C

w 500

9
19

Type

Area
30 V DC/ max. 2 A
250 V AC/ max. 1 A

21 ... 30 V DC, maximum

switching frequency: 6/min operating cycles: min. 20000 mechanical lifetime: 10 million operating cycles

Enable voltage FR+ (internal)

+24 V

Reference FR (external)

Ground

B10d value of the integrated safety relay: 20,000,000 operating cycles,

service life: 20 years

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-349

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

02.12
05.01
9.3 Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

9.3.4

Function

Safetyrelated circuit infeed modules

Every line infeed has an integrated main contactor, which can be used for the
Safe Torque Off function (STO).

Line
supply
Main switch -Q0

Line infeed:
Uncontrolled: UI module
Controlled: I/R module
111
113
213
NS1
NS2
Integrated
line contactor K29
48
63
64
64

S
S

A10

Fig. 9-11

U1V1 W1

FR+
FR+
Start
IF
AF
FR
SIMODRIVE NE

Line infeed control line contactor, block diagram

The internal circuit of the line contactor via terminal 48 is shown symbolically.
The control logic of the line and precharging contactors has a somewhat complex design, in order to guarantee a defined switchon and switchsequence.
Before interrupting the connection NS1NS2, the line contactor must always be
opened via terminal 48, or must be opened at the same time. The jumper between NS1 and NS2 when the unit is shipped must be removed.
B10d value of the integrated line contactor: 1,333,333 operating cycles
Service life: 20 years

9-350

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
05.01
9.3Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

9.3.5

Safety functions

Description

Table 9-3

With the SIMODRIVE 611 converter system, using the appropriate circuit, the
following safety stop functions can be implemented:
Safe stop functions
Designation according
to IEC 6180052

Function
Safe standstill

Safe stop 1

Safe torque off

Safe stop 1
(time controlled)

STO

SS1

Previous
designation

Previous
description

SH

Safe standstill

STOP A

Pulse inhibit/
start inhibit

ext. STOP B

Stop Category 1
Fast stop

It should be noted that the safety functions only represent a very small part of
the device functions.
A twochannel structure with suitable fault identification for the safety functions
can be configured by using an appropriate circuit.
In order to implement the Safe Torque Off safety function in two channels, the
line contactor integrated in the infeed modules as well as the safety relay integrated in the control modules should be used. The positively driven NC contacts
of the line contactor and the safety relay should be evaluated as feedback signal.
The line fuses and feeder components should be selected and dimensioned
according to the regulations as specified in Catalog NC60 as well as the Configuration Manual.
Main switch Q0 is used as line disconnection device according to EN
602041:2006 and is not considered in the sense of functional safety.
There is no electrical isolation from the line supply with the Safe Torque Off
function. As a consequence, this function does not represent a protective device against electric shock.
The safety functions integrated in the SINUMERIK 840D pl (SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated) in conjunction with the SIMODRIVE 611D modules are not part of
this documentation.
The CNC control modules SINUMERIK 840D have no influence on the evaluation of the safety functions.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-351

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

02.12
05.01
9.3 Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

9.3.6

Principle of STO in a safety function

K2
Line contactor

Line infeed

K1
M
Safety relay
SRP/CSa

SENSE

SRP/CSb

EVALUATE

RF
Control module
Power module
M
3
SRP/CSc

Fig. 9-12

RESPOND

Principle of STO, twochannel structure

A safety function essentially comprises two subsystems:

S SENSE
S EVALUATE
S RESPOND
Every safety function must be configured using suitable sensors, logic units and
actuators.

SENSE,
EVALUATE

The SENSE and EVALUATE subsystems are not considered in any more depth
here. The selection and installation of the components must conform to the requirements of the safety function to be implemented.

RESPOND

DThe RESPOND subsystem in principle has a two channel structure. The first
channel includes the safety relay K1 of the drive. This operates according to
the pulse shutdown principle with monitoring.
Line contactor K2 forms the second channel, which is integrated in the line
infeed. The line contactor is monitored using positivelydriven NC contacts.
As an alternative to integrating the line contactor, it is also possible to use a motor contactor for each motor as the second safetyrelated channel. The calculation results of the following application examples can be analogously applied.

9-352

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
05.01
9.3Safety of machinery safetyrelated parts of controls according to EN ISO 138491:2008

9.3.7

Principle of SS1 in a safety function

K2
Line contactor

tv

Line infeed

K1
M
Safety relay
RF
Control module
Power module
M
3
SRP/CSa

Fig. 9-13

SENSE

SRP/CSb

EVALUATE

SRP/CSc

RESPOND

Principle of SS1, twochannel structure

The SS1 safety function can also be achieved by using the STO safety function
as basis and then adding a supplementary circuit. Also in this case, a basic
twochannel architecture is configured.

SENSE

The SENSOR subsystem can have the same structure as described in

Chapter 9.3.6.
Activating the safety function using the SENSE subsystem immediately initiates
that the drive is stopped through a single channel. At the same time, a safe timer is started in EVALUATE.
The drives can be stopped, for example, by rampingdown the drives in a controlled fashion via the NC program, by inhibiting the drive enable terminal 64 or
the axesspecific control enable, terminal 65.
The OFF delay of the timer should be set so that the drive has come to a standstill along the fast stopping ramp before this delay time has expired. After the
timer has expired, the drive is safely switched into a notorque condition according to Chapter 9.3.6.

EVALUATE

The EVALUATE subsystem must be expanded by a safetyrelated OFFdelay.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-353

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

9.4

02.12
05.01

Application examples

General

For all SIMODRIVE devices the basic principle of the safetyrelated circuit is
the same. However, the different devices can have different terminal designations. The following circuit examples can be used, in an adapted form, for all
SIMODRIVE infeeds and drives. The specifications to prove the Performance
Level can be kept.
For reasons of transparency, in the following examples, only the safetyrelated
terminals are connected. To move the drives, all of the necessary enable terminals must be supplied.
In the following examples, power contactors with mirror contacts as well as contactor relays with positivelydriven contacts are used. For reasons of simplicity,
the mirror contacts of the power contactors are designated as standard as positivelydriven contacts.
Table 9-4

Parameter definition acc. to EN ISO 138491:2008

Definition

9.4.1

Description

B10d

Lifetime of products where up to 10 % of the product range fails in a

dangerous fashion (dangerous failure)

CCF

Common cause failure

DC

Diagnostic coverage level

DCavg

Average diagnostic coverage level

dop

Average operating time in days per annum

MTTFd

Mean time to a dangerous failure

nop

Average frequency of actuation per annum

PFHd

Probability of a dangerous failure per hour for continuous use

PL

Performance Level, which specifies the capability of the safetyrelated

parts of a control

SRP/CS

Part of a control, which responds to safetyrelated input signals and

generates safetyrelated output signals

EMERGENCY STOP at a converter SS1

Requirement

The supplementary safety function EMERGENCY STOP results in the drive

being safely stopped in a controlled fashion. After the stopping time has expired, the drive is safely switched into a notorque condition.

Assumption

The EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton is actuated 1x per month.

. As a result of the risk assessment, the required Performance Level for the safety function is defined to be PLr = d.

9-354

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Line supply
+ 24 V

Mains switch -Q0

Emergency
Stop
S3
U1V1 W1
111
A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31

47 57

113
213
NS1 FR+
3TK2827

NS2
9
48

A1
Y33Y34

S1

PE

A2

14 24 32

48 58

FR+
Start

K2

FR
Integrated
line contactor

SIMODRIVE NE
A10
AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF
Safety relay
19

FR

PV

K1
M

KL65 RF

A11

Control module

Power module
U2V2 W2

M
3

Fig. 9-14

EMERGENCY STOP at a SIMODRIVE 611 converter SS1 at the drive

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-355

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Prerequisite

02.12
05.01

Is required to charge the DC link and move the drive:

S EMERGENCY STOP is released and the safety relay A1 is reset via pushbutton S1.

S Safety relay K1 and line contactor K2 are controlled by the contacts of

safety relay A1.

Actuating
EMERGENCY
STOP

S The instantaneous contacts of safety relay A1 are opened. The axisspecific control enable RF (terminal 65) is switched to low. The drive is immediately braked to zero speed at the current limit.

S After the delay time of A1 has expired, safety relay K1 and line contactor
K2 are switched into a novoltage state. The NO contacts open, and the
motor is disconnected from the torquegenerating power supply through two
channels.

S This behavior corresponds to stop Category 1, according to EN

602041:2006.

Limitations

S If the pulses are canceled before the drive comes to a standstill, then it coasts down.

S Suspended/hanging axes must be secured using holding brakes or similar.

9
Block diagram

K2
S3

A1
K1

Fig. 9-15

Block diagram of the supplementary EMERGENCY STOP safety function

SENSE subsystem
The safety functions are initiated by the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton,
which can be released by turning, and which is connected through two channels. This has positively opening contacts.
Fault exclusion is assumed for the positively opening contacts as well as for the
mechanical system of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton. An accumulation of
faults between two consecutive actuations of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton can result in the safety function being lost. This behavior corresponds to
Category 3.

9-356

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Table 9-5

Parameters for the SENSE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton S3

B10 value

100.000

Manufacturers data

Percentage of dangerous
failures

20 %

Manufacturers data

B10d value

500.000

nop

12 per year

MTTFd

416.666 years
high

DC

B10
B10d =
percentage of dangerous failures
assumed actuations per year
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

99 %

Plausibility monitoring using A1

PFHd

4,29 x 10-8 /h

EN ISO 138491:2008, Anhang K

Performance Level

PLe

with Category 3

Result

EVALUATE subsystem
In this example, the EVALUATE subsystem is implemented in the form of a SIRIUS 3TK3827 safety relay. The safety relay has instantaneous and delayed
electromechanical enable circuits.
Table 9-6

Parameters for the EVALUATE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

Safety relay 3TK2827 A1

PFHd

2,7 x 10-9 /h

Manufacturers data

Service life

T1 = 20 years

Manufacturers data

Instantaneous enable circuit

Performance Level

PLe

with Category 4

PLd

with Category 3

PFHd

2,7 x 10-9 /h

PFHd = PFHd(A1)

Performance Level

PLd

with Category 3

Delayed enable circuit

Performance Level
Result

RESPOND subsystem
The RESPOND subsystem has a two channel structure. The first channel is
implemented using safety relay K1. The line contactor in the line infeed forms
the second channel. Both channels are simultaneously controlled from safety
relay A1. The positively opening NC contacts of the contactor and relay are
tested as feedback signal contacts by A1 at each start.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-357

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

An accumulation of faults between two consecutive actuations of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton is not detected:

S Basic as well as wellproven safety principles such as the requirements

regarding Category B are maintained. Protective circuits are provided.

S When a component fails, the safety function is always maintained.

The failure is detected.
This structure corresponds to Category 3, according to EN 138491:2008.

Determining
MTTF d
Table 9-7
Parameter

Determining MTTFd
Value

Comment

Channel 1
Safety relay K1 on the control module
B10d value

20.000.000

Manufacturers data

nop

12 pro Jahr

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K1)

16.666.666 years
capped to
100 years

MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Channel 2
Line contactor K2 in the line infeed

B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

12 pro Jahr

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K2)

1.111.111 years
capped to
100 years

MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate results, RESPOND (channels 1 and 2)

MTTFd
(REAGIEREN)

9-358

100 Jahre
hoch

MTTFd values for both channels were capped at

100 years it is not necessary to symmetrize
both channels

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Determining DC
Table 9-8

Determining the diagnostic coverage level (DC)

Parameter

Determining the
Performance Level

Value

Comment

DC (channel 1)

90 %

Testing K1 in the feedback circuit of A1

DC (channel 2)

90 %

Testing K2 in the feedback circuit of A1

DCavg

90 % average

DCavg = DC (channel 1) = DC (channel 2)

S Structure of the SRP/CS corresponding to Category 3

S MTTFd is high
S DCavg is average
S sufficient measures against common cause failures
Acc. to EN ISO 138491:2008 Annex K, PLe with PFHd = 4.29 x 108 / h is
attained.

Measures against common cause failures CCF of the

safety function
According to EN ISO 138491 Annex F, for SRP/CS from Category 2, a minimum of 65 points is required.
Table 9-9

Measures according to EN ISO 138491 to attain SRP/CS from Category 2 and higher
Measure

Physical separation between the signal paths:

Points
15

S Separate wiring in the control cabinet

S Sufficient creepages and clearances on printed circuits
Protection against overvoltage, overcurrent

15

Using wellproven components

Diversity regarding the technology is applied as a result of the internal structure of the elements to evaluate
and respond.

20

The requirements regarding sensitivity to all of the relevant ambient conditions, such as temperature, shock,
vibration, humidity (for example as defined in the applicable standards) have been taken into account.

10

The design engineers have been trained to identify the reasons and effects of failures as a result of common
causes.

Total

70

In total, the adequate number of 65 points is reached.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-359

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Checking the PFH value of the complete safety function

Table 9-10
Parameter

PFH value of the complete safety function

PFH value

PL

Comment

SENSE

4,29 x 10-8 / h

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton S3

EVALUATE

2,7 x 10-9 / h

Safety relay A1

10-8

RESPOND

4,29 x

/h

Switching elements K1 and K2

Total

8,85 x 10-8 / h

<1 x 10-6 / h

As a consequence, the requirements regarding PLd with Category 3 for the supplementary EMERGENCY STOP safety function are fulfilled.

9.4.2

EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a converter SS1

Requirement
a) Opening the protective door stops the drive in a controlled fashion.
After the stopping time has expired, the drive is safely switched into a
notorque condition.

b) The supplementary safety function Emergency Stop results in the drive being
safely stopped in a controlled fashion. After the stopping time has expired,
the drive is safely switched into a notorque condition
As a result of the risk assessment, the required Performance Level for both safety functions is defined to be PLr = d.
When the protective door is open, in normal operation, the DC link voltage
should be kept.

9-360

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 9-16

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

A2

zu

auf

A1

S3

Y35

Y34

14

Y35

K3

A2 Y32

Y34

3TK2842
14

A1 Y32 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 1

S5

S4

Ein
S1

K5

K3

A2 Y32

3TK2842

A1 Y32 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 1

NOT-HALT

+ 24 V

tv

28

tv

28

A3
M

A2 Y32

K6

K4

Y35

K6

Y34

3TK2842

K4

14

A1 Y32 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 1

T
28V

K5

K4

K3

K3
Hilfsschtz

K5

K5

K5

A11

K1

Regelungsbaugruppe

KL65 RF

FR

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

A10

SIMODRIVE NE

FR

Start

48

19
Sicherheitsrelais

integriertes
Netzschtz

FR+

NS2

113
213
NS1 FR+

111

PV

K2

Hauptschalter Q0

M
3

U2V2 W2

U1V1 W1

Netz

02.12
05.01
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
9.4 Application examples

EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a SIMODRIVE 611 universal converter SS1 at the
drive

9-361

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Preconditions to
operate/move the
drive

02.12
05.01

S EMERGENCY STOP has been released and safety relay A1 has been
reset.

S Protective door is closed (position switch contacts S4 and S5 are closed).

S Safety relay A2 is automatically started.
S _ Safety relay K1 is controlled via the NO contact of K6, from the instantaneous output (14) of safety relay A3.

S Line contactor K2 is controlled via the contacts of K5 using contactor relay K4, from the delayed output (28) of safety relay A3. The drive DC link
is charged.

S The control enable on the control module has a high signal from safety relay
A2.

The protective
door is opened

S EMERGENCY STOP has been released and safety relay A1 has been
reset.

S The cascading input of A2 has a high signal.

S When the protective door is opened, the position switch contacts S4 and
S5 are opened.

S The instantaneous output (14) from A2 supplies a low signal at the drive

controller enable. > The motor is stopped at the current limit.

S After the selected time at A2 has expired, the delayed output (28) switches
the cascading input (1) from A3 to a low signal level.

S The instantaneous output (14) of A3 switchesout (deenergizes) safety

relay K1 via K6. (the drive pulses are canceled and in turn the energy
feed to the motor is interrupted).

S The NC contact of K1 controls contactor relay K3. The NO contact of K3

in parallel with K4 closes and keeps line contactor K2 connected to the
power supply via K5.

S After the time selected in A3 expires, the delayed output (28) switchesout
(deenergizes) contactor relay K4. Line contactor K2 remains controlled
(energized) from K5 via K3. The DC link remains charged via terminal 4.

Closing the
protective door

S K1 is automatically controlled (energized) from K6 via A3.

S K2 is again controlled (energized) from K5 using K4 via A3.
S High signal at the controller enable input of the drive. > motor can be operated again.

9-362

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Actuating
EMERGENCY
STOP

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

S The instantaneous output (14) of safety relay A1 is deenergized, and therefore the cascading input (1) of A2 is deactivated. A2 behaves just the
same as when opening the protective door.

S After the selected time at A2 has expired, the delayed output (28) switches
the cascading input (1) from A3 to a low signal level.

S The instantaneous output (14) of A3 switchesout (deenergizes) safety

relay K1 via K6. (the drive pulses are canceled and in turn the energy
feed to the motor is interrupted).

S The delayed output (28) of A1 switchesout (deenergizes) line contactor

K2 after the selected time.
This behavior corresponds to stop Category 1, according to EN 602041:2006.

Secondary
conditions

S The drive must be stopped within the delay time set at A2. If the pulses are
canceled before the drive comes to a standstill, then the drive will coast
down.

S The time at A3 should be set as short as possible, however so that K3

pulls in before K4 drops out in order to avoid that line contactor K2 drops
out.

S The delay time at A1 should be set the same as the time of A2.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-363

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Safety function, protective door

If the protective door is opened, the drive should be safely stopped and after a
safely monitored time, should be shut down.

Assumption

In twoshift operation, the protective door is opened every 10 min. The plant is
operational from Monday to Friday. The number of actuations is as follows:
6 1/h 16 h/d 260d = 24960 per yearh.

S4
A2

A1

A1

K4

K3

K5

K2

K6

K1

A3

S5

Fig. 9-17

A1

Block diagram of the safety function, protective door

Safety relay A1 is used for the diagnostics of K2, K3 and K5. It is not included in the calculation for the protective door safety function.

SENSE subsystem

The protective door is monitored using two independent position switches S4

and S5. Both position switches have a positively opening contact.
Table 9-11

Parameters for the SENSE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

Position switches S4 and S5

B10 value

10.000.000

Manufacturers data

Percentage of
dangerous failures

20 %

Manufacturers data

B10d value

50.000.000

nop

24960 per years

MTTFd

20.032 years,
capped to 100
years

DC

99 %

B10
B10d =
Percentage of dangerous failures
assumed actuations per year
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Plausibility monitoring using A2

Intermediate results, RESPOND (channels 1 and 2)

MTTFd (RESPOND)

100 years
high

DCavg

90 % average DCavg = DC (channel 1) = DC (channel 2)

MTTFd values for both channels were

capped at 100 years it is not necessary
to symmetrize both channels

Ergebnisse ERFASSEN

9-364

PFHd

2,47 x 10-8 /h

EN ISO 138491:2008, Annex K

Performance Level

PLe

with Category 4

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

EVALUATE subsystem
In this example, the EVALUATE subsystem is implemented in the form of two
SIRIUS 3TK2842 safety relays. The safety relays have instantaneous and delayed electromechanical enable circuits.
Device A3 is used to provide a safetyrelated time delay when switching off
and is controlled via the cascading input, terminal 1. Both devices A2 and A3,
are used to evaluate the door switch and the feedback signals from the contactor relays.
Table 9-12

Parameters for the EVALUATE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

Safety relays 3TK2842 A2 and A3

PFHd

5,4 x 10-11 /h

Manufacturers data

Service life

T1 = 20 Jahre

Manufacturers data

Performance Level

PLe

with Category 4

PFHd

1,08 x 10-10 /h

PFHd = PFHd(A2) + PFHd(A3)

Performance Level

PLd

with Category 4

Result

RESPOND subsystem
The RESPOND subsystem has a two channel structure. The first channel comprises safety relay K1 and contactor relay K6. Line contactor K2 and contactor relays K3, K4 and K5 form the second channel.
In this example, the RESPOND subsystem has a two channel structure with
different demand rates per channel. A dangerous fault in channel 1 means that
channel 2 is immediately called with its monitoring options.
Components K1, K3, K4 and K6 are tested by A2 or A3 at each start.
Contactor K2 and contactor relay K5 are tested by A1 at each start.
An accumulation of faults in channel 2 between two consecutive actuations of
the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton is not detected.

S Basic as well as wellproven safety principles such as the requirements

regarding Category B are maintained. Protective circuits are provided.
Protective circuits are provided.

S When a component fails, the safety function is always maintained.

The failure is detected.
This structure corresponds to Category 3, according to EN ISO 138491:2008.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-365

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Determining
MTTF d
Table 9-13

Determining MTTFd

Parameter

Value

Comment

Channel 1
Safety relay K1
B10d value

20.000.000

Manufacturers data

nop

24972 per years

24960 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K1)

8008 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Contactor relay K6
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

24972 per year

24960 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K6)

534 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate result, channel 1

MTTFd (channel 1)

501 years
Capped to 100
years

1
MTTFd(Channel 1)

1
MTTFd(K1, K6)

Channel 2

Line contactor K2
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

12 per year

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K2)

1.111.111 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Auxiliary contactors K3, K4 and K5

B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

24972 per year

24960 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (contactor
relay)

534 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate result, channel 2

MTTFd
(RESPOND)

9-366

100 years
high

MTTFd values for both channels were capped

at 100 years it is not necessary to symmetrize both channels

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Determining DC
Table 9-14

Determining the diagnostic coverage level (DC)

Parameter

Value

Comment

DC (channel 1)

99 %

Testing K1 via K3 in the feedback circuit of A2, as

well as K6 at A3 each time the protective door is closed.

DC (channe 2)

90 %

Testing K2 and K3 in the feedback circuit of A1

when EMERGENCY STOP is requested.
Undetected accumulation of faults is possible between
the requests.
Testing K4 in the feedback circuit of A2 each time the
protective door is closed.

DCavg

94,50 %
avergage

DC1
MTTFd(channel 1)
DCavg =

1
MTTFd(channel 1)

Determining the
Performance Level

DC2
MTTFd(channel 2)
1
MTTFd(channel 2)

S Structure of the SRP/CS corresponding to Category 3

S MTTFd is high
S DCavg is average
S sufficient measures against common cause failures
Acc. to EN ISO 138491:2008 Annex K PLe mit PFHd = 4,29 x 10-8 / h is
attained.

Measures against common cause failures CCF of the

safety function
According to EN ISO 138491 Annex F, for SRP/CS from Category 2, a minimum of 65 points is required.
The considerations according to Chapter 9.4.1 Table 9-9.
This means that in total, the adequate number of 65 points is reached.

Checking the PFH value of the complete safety function

Table 9-15
Parameter

PFH value of the complete safety function

PFH value
10-8

/h

PL

Comment

SENSE

2,47 x

Position switches S4 and S5

EVALUATE

2 x 5,4 x 10-11 / h

Safety relays A2 and A3

RESPOND

4,29 x

10-8

/h

Switching elements K1, K2, K3,

K4, K5 and K6

Total

8,59 x 10-8 / h

<1 x 10-6 / h

As a consequence, the requirements regarding PLd with Category 3 for the protective door safety function are fulfilled.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-367

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Supplementary safety function, EMERGENCY STOP

If EMERGENCY STOP is actuated, then the drive should be safely stopped and
shut down.

Assumption

The EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton is actuated 1x per month.

The consideration for this safety function can be basically realized corresponding to the description in Chapter 9.4.2 Protective door safety function.
However, the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton as well as safety relay A1 must
also be taken into account for this safety function.
The position switches to monitor the protective door do not play a role when
considering/analyzing EMERGENCY STOP.

S3

Fig. 9-18

A1

A2

K5

K2

K6

K1

A3

Block diagram of the supplementary EMERGENCY STOP safety function

SENSE subsystem

The safety functions are initiated by the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton,

which can be released by turning, and which is connected through two channels. This has positively opening contacts.
Fault exclusion is assumed for the positively opening contacts as well as for the
mechanical system of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton. An accumulation of
faults between two consecutive actuations of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton can result in the safety function being lost. This behavior corresponds to
Category 3.
Table 9-16

Parameters for the SENSE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton S3

B10 value

100.000

Manufacturers data

Percentage of dangerous
failures

20 %

Manufacturers data

B10d value

500.000

nop

12per years

MTTFd

416.666 years
high

DC

B10
B10d =
Percentage of dangerous failures
assumed actuations per year
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

99 %

Plausibility monitoring using A1

PFHd

4,29 x 10-8 /h

EN ISO 138491:2008, AnnexK

Performance Level

PLe

with Category 3

Result

9-368

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

EVALUATE subsystem
The EVALUATE subsystem of the supplementary EMERGENCY STOP safety
function is in this case realized using three SIRIUS 3TK3842 safety relays. The
safety relays have instantaneous and delayed enable circuits.
Safety relay A1 is used to evaluate the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton. Devices A2 and A3 are used to provide a safetyrelated time delay when switching off and are controlled from A1 via the cascading input, terminal 1.
Table 9-17

Parameters for the EVALUATE subsystem

Parameter

Value

Comment

Safety relays 3TK2842 A1, A2 and A3

PFHd

5,4 x 10-11 /h

Manufacturers data

Service life

T1 = 20 years

Manufacturers data

Performance Level

PLe

No differences between instantaneous

and delayed enable circuits

PFHd

1,62 x 10-10 /h

PFHd = PFHd(A1) +PFHd(A2) + PFHd(A3)

Performance Level

PLe

Result

RESPOND subsystem
When actuating EMERGENCY STOP, the power supply of line contactor K2 as
well as contactor relay K1 are shutdown (deenergized) via the delayed output
(28) from A1. When requesting EMERGENCY STOP, contactor relays K3 and
K4 therefore have no influence on the correct function of K1 and K2.
Component K1 is tested by A2 via K3 at each start. Contactor K2 is tested
by A1 at each start.
An accumulation of faults in channel 2 between two consecutive actuations of
the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton is not detected.

S Basic as well as wellproven safety principles such as the requirements

regarding Category B are maintained. Protective circuits are provided.
Protective circuits are provided.

S When a component fails, the safety function is always maintained.

The failure is detected.
This structure corresponds to Category 3, according to EN ISO 138491:2008.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-369

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Determining
MTTF d
Table 9-18

Determining MTTFd

Parameter

Value

Comment

Channel 1
Safety relay K1
B10d value

20.000.000

Manufacturers data

nop

24972 per years

24960 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K1)

8008 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Contactor relay K6
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

24972 per year

24960 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (contactor
relay)

534 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate result, channel 1

MTTFd (channel 1)

501 years
Capped to 100
years

1
MTTFd(Channel 1)

1
MTTFd(K1, K6)

Channel 2

Line contactor K2
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

12 per year

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K2)

1.111.111 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Contactor relay K5
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

12 per year

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (contactor
relay)

1.111.111 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate result, channel 2

MTTFd (Kanal 2)

555.555 years
Capped to 100
years

1
MTTFd(Kanal 1)

1
MTTFd(K2, K5)

Intermediate result, RESPOND (channel 1 and 2)

MTTFd
(RESPOND)

9-370

100 years
high

MTTFd values for both channels were capped

at 100 years it is not necessary to symmetrize both channels

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Determining DC
Table 9-19

Determining the diagnostic coverage level (DC)

Parameter

Determining the
Performance Level

Value

Comment

DC (channel 1)

99 %

Testing K1 via K3 in the feedback circuit of

A1

DC (channel 2)

99 %

Testing K2 in the feedback circuit of A1 when

EMERGENCY STOP is requested

DCavg

99 % high

DCavg = DC (channel 1) = DC (channel 2)

S Structure of the SRP/CS corresponding to Category 3

S MTTFd is high
S DCavg is high
S sufficient measures against common cause failures
Acc. to EN ISO 138491:2008 Annex K, PLe mit PFHd = 4,29 x 10-8 / h is
attained.

Measures against common cause failures CCF of the

safety function
According to EN ISO 138491 Annex F, for SRP/CS from Category 2, a minimum of 65 points is required.
The considerations according to Chapter 9.4.1 Table 9-9.
This means that in total, the adequate number of 65 points is reached.

Checking the PFH value of the complete safety function

Table 9-20
Parameter

PFH value of the complete safety function

PFH value

PL

Comment

SENSE

4,29 x 10-8 / h

EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton S3

EVALUATE

3 x 5,4 x 10-11 / h

Safety relays A1, A2 and A3

RESPOND

4,29 x

10-8

Switching elements K1 and K2, K6 and

K5

Total

8,6 x 10-8 / h

<1 x 10-6 / h

/h

As a consequence, the requirements regarding PLd with Category 3 for the protective door safety function are fulfilled.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-371

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

9.4.3

02.12
05.01

EMERGENCY STOP and protective door at several converters

SS1

Requirement
a) Opening the protective door stops quickly stops the drives.
After the stopping time has expired, the drives are safely switched into a
notorque condition.
b) The supplementary safety function EMERGENCY STOP results in the drives
being quickly stopped. After the stopping time has expired, the drives are
safely switched into a notorque condition
As a result of the risk assessment, the required Performance Level for both safety functions is defined to be PLr = d.
When the protective door is open, in normal operation, the DC link should be
kept.

9-372

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Fig. 9-19

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

A2

zu

auf

A1

K3

A2 Y32 Y35 Y34

28

M
K6

K4

K6

A2 Y32 Y35 Y34

K4

14

3TK2842
tv

3TK2842
14

tv
28

A1 Y32Y11Y12Y21 Y22 1

S5

S4

Ein
S1

K5

K3

14

A1 Y32Y11Y12Y21 Y22

A2 Y32 Y35 Y34

3TK2842

A1
A1 Y32Y11Y12
Y11Y12Y21 Y22
Y22 11

NOT-HALT
S3

+ 24 V

28

tv

K3
Hilfsschtz

K5

K4 K3
K5

A11

KL 65

K2

M
3

U2 V2 W2

Regelungs- SIMODRIVE 611

baugruppe Leistungsbaugruppe

RF

FR K1

PV

SIMODRIVE NE

FR

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

Sicherheits19
relais

K6

integriertes
Hilfsschtz
A10

K5

111
113
213
NS1 FR+
NS2
9
FR+
48 Start

Hauptschalter Q0

Netz

A12

KL 65

19

PV

M
3

U2 V2 W2

Regelungs- SIMODRIVE 611

baugruppe Leistungsbaugruppe

RF

FR K1
M

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

Regelungs-

RF

K1

A16 baugruppe

KL 65

19 FR
M

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

M
3

U2 V2 W2

SIMODRIVE 611
Leistungsbaugruppe

PV

02.12
05.01
9 Cabinet Design and EMC
9.4 Application examples

EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at several SIMODRIVE 611 universal converters SS1
at the drives

9-373

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Safety function, protective door

If the protective door is opened, the drive should be safely stopped and after a
safely monitored time, should be shut down.

Assumption

In threeshift operation, the protective door is opened every minute. The plant is
operational from Monday to Sunday. The number of actuations is as follows:
60 1/h 24 h/d 365d = 525600 per year.

S4
A2

A1

A1

K4

K3

K5

K2

K6

K1
(A11)

A3

S5

Fig. 9-20

A1

K1
(A12)

...

K1
(A16)

Block diagram of the safety function, protective door for six axes

Safety relay A1 is used for the diagnostics of K2, K3 and K5. It is not included in the calculation for the protective door safety function.

SENSE subsystem

The evaluation of the SENSOR subsystem is explained in Chapter 9.4.2

EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a converter SS1
The higher number of switching cycles has no influence on the evaluation of
this subsystem.
The results are taken over and used.

EVALUATE subsystem
The evaluation of the EVALUATE subsystem is explained in Chapter 9.4.2
EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a converter SS1.
The results are taken over and used.

RESPOND subsystem
The RESPONSE subsystem is essentially structured as described in Chapter
9.4.2 EMERGENCY STOP and protective door monitoring at a converter
SS1. Only the additional safety relays in channel 1 must still be taken into consideration.

9-374

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

Determining
MTTF d
Table 9-21

Determining MTTFd

Parameter

Value

Comment

Channel 1
Safety relay K1
B10d value

20.000.000

Manufacturers data

nop

525612 per
year

525600 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K1)

951 Jahre
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Contactor relay K6
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

525612 per
year

525600 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (contactor
relay)

25,3 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Zwischenergebnis Kanal 1
MTTFd (channel 1)

21,8 years

MTTFd(channel 1)
1
=
MTTFd(K1[A11...A16], K6)
Channel 2
Line contactor K2 and contactor relay K5
B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

12 per
year

12 actuations per year as a result of

EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (K2)

1.111.111 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Contactor relays K3, K4

B10d value

1.333.333

Manufacturers data

nop

525612 per
year

525600 per year by the protective door + 12 per

year by EMERGENCY STOP

MTTFd (contactor
relay)

25,3 years
MTTFd =

B10d
0,1 x nop

Intermediate result, channel 2

MTTFd (channel 2)

12,6 years

1
MTTFd(Kanal 1)
=

1
MTTFd(K2, K3, K4, K5)

Intermediate result, RESPOND (channel 1 and 2)

MTTFd
(RESPOND)

17,6 years
average

Symmetrization of both channels is not necessary

2
MTTFd =

1
MTTFd1 (channel 1) + MTTFd (channel 2)
1
1
3
+
MTTFd (channel 1) MTTFd (channel 2)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-375

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.4 Application examples

02.12
05.01

Determining DC
Table 9-22

Determining the diagnostic coverage level (DC)

Parameter

Value

Comment

DC (channell 1)

99 %

Testing K1 (A11...A16) via K3 in the feedback circuit of A2, as well as K6 at A3 each time the protective door is closed.

DC (channel 2)

90 %

Testing K2 and K3 in the feedback circuit of A1

when EMERGENCY STOP is requested.
Undetected fault accumulation is possible between the
demands.
Testing K4 in the feedback circuit of A2 each time the
protective door is closed.

DCavg

93,3 %
average

DC1
MTTFd(channel 1)
DCavg =

1
MTTFd(channel 1)

Determining
Performance Level

DC2
MTTFd(channel 2)
1
MTTFd(channel 2)

S Structure of the SRP/CS corresponding to Category 3

S MTTFd is average
S DCavg is average

S Sufficient measures against common cause failures

Acc. to EN ISO 138491:2008 Annex K PLd with PFHd = 5,5 x 10-7 / h is attained.

Note
Contactor relays K3, K4 and K6 should be replaced in plenty of time.
Operating time T10d = B10d / nop = 2,54 years.

Measures against common cause failures CCF of the

safety function
According to EN ISO 138491 Annex F, for SRP/CS from Category 2, a minimum of 65 points is required.
The considerations according to Chapter 9.4.1 Table 9-9 apply.
This means that in total, the adequate number of 65 points is reached.

9-376

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.5 Using programmable safety components

Checking the PFH value of the complete safety function

Table 9-23

PFH value of the complete safety function

Parameter

PFH value
10-8

PL

SENSE

2,47 x

EVALUATE

2 x 5,4 x 10-11 / h
10-7

/h

RESPOND

5,5 x

/h

Total

5,74 x 10-7 / h

Comment

Position switches S4 and S5

Safety relays A2 and A3

Switching elements K1(A11...A16),

K2, K3, K4, K5 and K6

<1 x 10-6 / h

As a consequence, the requirements regarding PLd with Category 3 for the protective door safety function are fulfilled.

EMERGENCY STOP safety function

This safety function corresponds, regarding its implementation, the explanation
and information given in Chapter 9.4.2 Supplementary safety function EMERGENCY STOP for an axis. Only in the RESPOND area, in channel 1, the additional safety relay K1 has been added. This must also be taken into account
when calculating the RESPOND subsystem.
The SENSE and EVALUATE subsystems are not affected by this.

9
S3

Fig. 9-21

9.5

A1

A2

K5

K2

K6

K1
(A11)

A3
K1
(A12)

...

K1
(A16)

Block diagram of the safety function, EMERGENCY STOP for six axes

Using programmable safety components

The circuit examples in Chapter 9.4 Application examples are, for reasons of
transparency, configured using separate safety relays.
The logic component of the described safety functions can be implemented
using programmable safety components, such as a failsafe PLC systems, or
the modular MSS safety system.
The safety relays can be monitored using software in the logic section. This
means that the contactor relays can be eliminated.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

9-377

Fig. 9-22

9-378
K5
M

F-DO

F-DI

S5

S4

Ein
S1

DO

DI

K5

A11

KL 65

K1

Regelungsbaugruppe

RF

FR

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

Sicherheits19
relais

K6

K2

Netz

M
3

U2 V2 W2

SIMODRIVE 611
Leistungsbaugruppe

PV

SIMODRIVE NE

FR

111
113
213
NS1 FR+
NS2
9
FR+
48 Start

Hauptschalter Q0

integriertes
Hilfsschtz
A10

K5

F-CPU

NOT-HALT
S3

zu

auf

+ 24 V

A12

KL 65

19

PV

M
3

U2 V2 W2

Regelungs- SIMODRIVE 611

baugruppe Leistungsbaugruppe

RF

FR K1
M

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

Regelungs-

RF

A16 baugruppe

KL 65

19 FR K1
M

AS1
AS2
9
FR+
663 IF

M
3

U2 V2 W2

SIMODRIVE 611
Leistungsbaugruppe

PV

9 Cabinet Design and EMC

9.5 Using programmable safety components
02.12
05.01

Design with the safe programmable logic

The safety functions are calculated analogously to the previous examples using
discrete safety relays.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Connection Diagrams

10

Note
The following connection diagrams only show the terminal connections.
Further, external components are not completely shown. Refer to Chapter 8.
The following comments should be observed in the connection diagrams:
1. The jumper may only be removed in conjunction with the start inhibit.
2. Not available for unregulated infeed.
3. Connect with terminal 19 of the NE module.
4. Drive bus round cable
5. Drive bus ribbon cable
6. Drive bus terminating connector
7. For an external pulsed resistor, remove jumper 1R/2R.

10

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

10-379

10-380

LK

Filter
F
L1 N
L2
L3
PE

L3

L2

L1

U1

SPP
EXT

EN+
Setup operation
Contactor control

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET

5V
UNIT
VDC link>> X
3
5
X181
1
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
X
1
3
V1 W1 1 PE

X171
NS1
1
NS2
X172
Signaling contact AS1
Start inhibit
AS2

X141
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
X161
9
112
48
111
Feedback
213
Line contactor 113

Group message
I2t, temperature
monitoring
Interpulse
enable
Drive
enable

72
X121
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
EN+
9
64
19 EN

Alarm
73.1
Ready for operation73.2

Fig. 10-1

X111
74

M
3

M600

2R 3R

P600

V2 W2

IR M

M600

U2

X
1
5
1

X
1
4
1

P600

X
3
5
1

External
Pulsed resistor

1R

X
1
5
1

to/from NC

DC link fast
discharge X221
50
19

Reverse
alarm
Start inhibit
X431
AS1
AS2
663
EN+
9
Interpulse P24 P24
enable
BI1 Brake
DA1 DA2
X35
X34

X
4
6
1

BERO input

X
4
2
1

Spindle encoder

X
4
1
1

Motor Encoder

X
3
5
1

X
3
4
1

9
EN+
M24 M24

X432
B1 BERO
19 EN

M600
P600

SPP
EXT

Group message
I2t, temperature
monitoring
Interpulse
enable
Drive
enable

EN+
Settingup

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET

P600 M600

X
1
3
P600 M600 1 PE1

X
3
5
1

5V
UNIT
VDC link>>

M600

P600

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

X141
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
X161
9
112

72
X121
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
EN+
9
64
19 EN 3

Alarm
73.1
Ready for operation73.2

X111
74

PR module MSD module (High Stand./High Perf.)Monitoring module

10

NE module
(not UI 5 kW)

U1

X
1
5
1

X
1
4
1

M
3

V1 W1

DA3 M

U1

M600

P600

Reverse
alarm
Start inhibit
X431
AS1
AS2
663
EN+
9
Interpulse P24
P24
enable
BI1 Brake 1
DA1 DA2
X35
X34

X
4
6
1

BERO input 1

X
4
2
1

Direct position 1

X
4
1
1

Motor encoder 1

M
3

V1 W1

X432
B1
19
B2
9
M24
BI2

X
4
6
2

X
3
5
1

X
3
4
1

BERO 1
EN
BERO 2
EN+
M24
Brake 2

BERO input 2

X
4
2
2

Direct position 2

X
4
1
2

Motor encoder 2

X
1
5
1

X
1
4
1

U2

M
3

V2 W2

M600

P600

Reverse
alarm
Start inhibit
X431
AS1
AS2
663
EN+
9
Pulse
P24 P24
enable
BI1 Brake
DA1 DA2
X35
X34
5
DA3 M

X
4
6
1

BERO input

X
4
2
1

Direct position

X
4
1
1

Motor Encoder

X
3
5
1

X
3
4
1

EN+
9
M24 M24

X432
B1 BERO
19 EN

2axis FD module
1axis FD module
(High Standard/High Performance)

10 Connection Diagrams
05.08
05.01

Terminal overview SIMODRIVE 611 digital (High Standard and High Performance)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

LK

Filter
FN
L1
L2
L3
PE

L3

L2

L1

U1

SPP
EXT

EN+
Setup operation
Contactor control

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET

5V
UNIT
VDC link>> X
3
5
X181
1
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
X
1
3
V1 W1 1 PE

X171
NS1
1
NS2
X172
Signaling contact AS1
Start inhibit
AS2

X141
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
X161
9
112
48
111
Feedback
213
Line contactor 113

Group message
I2t, temperature
monitoring
Interpulse
enable
Drive
enable

72
X121
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
EN+
9
64
19 EN

Alarm
73.1
Ready for operation73.2

Fig. 10-2

X111
74

NE module
(not UI 5 kW)

V2 W2
M
3

M600

2R 3R

P600

M600

U2

X
1
5
1

GSG

X
3
5
1

e.g. MSD module (High Standard/High Performance)

P600

X
3
5
1

External
Pulsed resistor

1R

X
1
5
1

DC link fast
discharge X221
50
19

PR module

M600
P600

SPP
EXT

Group message
I2t, temperature
monitoring
Interpulse
enable
Drive
enable

V2 W2

PE

P600 M600

X
1
3
P600 M600 1 PE1

Drive A (motor 1)

M
3

PE

DAC1
Test sockets X34

Drive B (motor 2)

M
3

V2 W2

to X412

X
3
5
1

DAC2
X452
56.B
Analog input 1
14.B
24.B
Analog input 2
20.B
RF
65.B
EN+
9
I0.B
Digital Inputs
I1.B
(I: Input)
I2.B
I3.B
X462
A+.B
A.B
B+.B
B.B Ang. inc. enc. interf.
R+.B
R.B
15
O0.B
Digital Outputs
O1.B
(O: Output)
O2.B
O3.B

Motor Encoder
Drive B

IF: Pulse enable

RF: Controller enable
FR+: Enable voltage

X
4
1
1

PE U2

X471

M600

U2

Serial interface

P600

to X411

X
1
5
1

M600

X
3
5
1

5V
UNIT
VDC link>>

EN+
Settingup

P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET

X
4
1
1

X421
AS1
AS2
X431
External
P24
Power supply
M24
EN+
9
IF
663
EN
19
X441
AO1
75.A
AO2
16.A
Analog75.B
outputs
AO1
16.B
AO2
Reference 15
X451
0...+10 V
56.A
(e.g. nset1 )
14.A
24.A
Analog input 2
20.A
RF
65.A
EN+
9
I0.A
Digital Inputs
I1.A
(I: Input)
I2.A
I3.A
X461
A+.A
A.A
B+.A
Ang. inc. enc. interf. B.A
R+.A
R.A
15
O0.A
Digital Outputs
O1.A
(O: Output)
O2.A
O3.A
Feedback
Pulse enable

Motor Encoder
Drive A

FD module with control unit

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HR for two axes

P600

X181
M500
P500
2U1
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1

X141
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
X161
9
112

72
X121
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
EN+
9
64
19 EN 3

Alarm
73.1
Ready for operation73.2

X111
74

Monitoring module

05.08
05.01
10 Connection Diagrams

10

Terminal overview, SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

10-381

10 Connection Diagrams

05.08
05.01

10

10-382

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11

Spare Parts and Service

11.1

Fan
Notice
When replacing the fan, you must observe the ESD regulations.
Spare parts must always be replaced by properly trained personnel!

Replacement
options
Table 11-1

Fan replacement with spare parts is possible for the following modules:

Fan replacement options

Designation

Order No. (MLFB)

Module
width
[mm]

Fan spare parts

(Order No.)

I/R module, 16 kW internal

6SN11451BA010BAV1)

100

6SL31620AD000AAV

I/R module, 16 kW external

6SN11461BB010BAV1)

100

6SL31620AD000AAV

I/R module, 36 kW internal

6SN11451BA020CAV1)

200

6SL31620AF000AAV

I/R module, 36 kW external

6SN11461BB020CAV1)

200

6SL31620AF000AAV

I/R module, 55 kW internal

6SN11451BA010DAV

300

2)

I/R module, 55 kW external

6SN11461BB000DAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

I/R module, 55 kW internal/Schlauchentwrmung

6SN11451BB000DAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

I/R module, 80 kW internalSchlauchentwrmung

6SN11451BB000EAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

I/R module 80, kW external

6SN11461BB000EAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

I/R module, 120 kW internalSchlauchentwrmung

6SN11451BB000FAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

I/R module, 120 kW external

6SN11461BB000FAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

PM module, 25 A internal

6SN11231AA000BAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 25 A external

6SN11241AA000BAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 50 A internal

6SN11231AA000CAV1)

50

6SL31620AB000AAV

PM module, 50 A external

6SN11241AA000CAV1)

50

6SL31620AB000AAV

PM module, 2x8 A internal

6SN11231AB000HAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 2x8 A external

6SN11241AB000HAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 2x15 A internal

6SN11231AB000AAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 2x15 A external

6SN11241AB000AAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 2x25 A internal

6SN11231AB000BAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

PM module, 2x25 A external

6SN11241AB000BAV1)

50

6SL31620AB011AAV

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11-383

11

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.1 Fan

Table 11-1

02.12
05.01

Fan replacement options, continued

Designation

Order No. (MLFB)

Module
width
[mm]

Fan spare parts

(Order No.)

PM module, 2x50 A internal

6SN11231AB000CAV1)

100

6SL31620AD000AAV

PM module, 2x50 A external

6SN11241AB000CAV1)

100

6SL31620AB000AAV4)

PM module, 80 A internal

6SN11231AA000DAV1)

100

6SL31620AD000AAV

PM module, 80 A external

6SN11241AA000DAV1)

100

6SL31620AD000AAV

PM module, 108 A internal

6SN11231AA000LAV1)

150

6SL31620AF000AAV

PM module, 108 A external

6SN11241AA000LAV1)

150

6SL31620AF000AAV

PM module, 160 A internal

6SN11231AA000EAV

150

6SL31620AF000AAV

PM module, 160 A external

6SN11241AA000EAV

150

6SL31620AF000AAV

PM module, 200 A external

6SN11231AA010FAV

300

2)

PM module, 200 A Extern

6SN11241AA010FAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

PM module, 200 A internal/pipe cooling

6SN11231AA020FAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

PM module, 300 A internalpipe cooling

6SN11231AA000JAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

PM module, 300 A external

6SN11241AA000JAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

PM module, 400 A internal/pipe cooling

6SN11231AA000KAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV3)

PM module, 400 A external

6SN11241AA000KAV

300

6SL31620BA020AAV

1) Fan replacement possible from MLFBs with final number 2 and higher. MLFB final number < 2 means that the fan must
be replaced by Siemens service!
2) Fan cannot be replaced
3) MLFB for standard mounting fans. Order designation for replacement fans, pipe cooling: GWE000000587915. For additional spare/replacement parts of the pipe cooling, refer to the dimension drawings.
4) 2x are required

11

11-384

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.1 Fan

Removing the fan

1. Switch off the line current supplies (I/R module) or DC link voltage (PM module). Wait at least 30 minutes for the DC link energy to discharge!
2. Verify that the fan is isolated from the supply (line supply input and DC link)!
3. Remove the components from the drive group.
4. Open the fan cover
Module width: 50 mm

Module width: 100 mm

Module width: 150 mm and 200 mm

5. Taking out the fan

6. Loosen the cable connector

Module width: 50 mm

Module width: 100 mm

Module width: 150 mm and 200 mm

11

Installing the fan

1. Before installing the fan, check the air flow direction (the arrow on the fan
must point towards the cooling ribs).
2. Insert the cable connector until it fully engages.
3. Introduce the fan until it fully engages.
The connecting cables must not be interchanged!
4. Close the fan cover.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11-385

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.3 DC link covers

11.2

05.08
05.01

Terminals

Table 11-2

Terminals for SIMODRIVE 611

Designation

Terminal

available in

MLFB

X421

2pin

X431

5pin

6SY9908

X451, X452, X461, X462

10pin

6SY9910

X461, X462 X453, X454

11pin

6SY9913

X441

5pin

X422, X432

8pin

Power connector, motor

connection

3pin

6SY9904

Power connector, pulsed resistor

3pin

6SY9905

X161, X171, X172

2pin

Module I/R, UI, monitoring module

6SY9433

X121

4pin

UI module

6SY9432

X111, X161, X431, X432

6pin

Module I/R, High Performance/High Standard module

6SY9896

X141

7pin

I/R module

6SY9898

X121, X431, X432

8pin

Module I/R, HLA/ANS module

6SY9897

X181 electronics power supply

8pin

I/R module

6SY9900

11.3

SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS

6SY9907

6SY9911
611 universal HRS option module terminals

6SY9912

DC link covers
Damaged DC link covers must be replaced without delay!

11

Table 11-3

DC link cover
Designation

11-386

Order Number

50 mm, DC link cover

GWE462018701000

100 mm, DC link cover

GWE462018701100

150 mm, DC link cover

GWE462018701201

300 mm, DC link cover

GWE462018701300

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
05.01

11.4

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.4 Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules

Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules

Date of manufacture

Caution
After the devices have been nonoperational in a novoltage condition for
more than two years, the DC link capacitors must be reformed. If this is not
done, when the devices are switched on they can be damaged.

The production date can be derived from the following assignment to the serial
number (e.g. S T-S9VVVVVVV fr 2004, September):
Table 11-4
Key

Production year a und Production month

Production year

Key

Production month

1990, 2010

January

1991, 2011

February

1992, 2012

March

1993, 2013

April

1994, 2014

May

1995, 2015

June

1996, 2016

July

1997, 2017

August

1998, 2018

September

1999, 2019

October

2000, 2020

November

2001, 2021

December

2002, 2022

2003, 2023

2004, 2024

2005, 2025

2006, 2026

2007, 2027

2008, 2028

2009, 2029

11

The serial number is stamped on the type plate.

When forming, the DC link capacitors are subject to a defined voltage
and a limited current. This means that the internal relationships required for the DC link capacitors to function are restored.
Note
It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture
and not from the date that the equipment was shipped.

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11-387

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.4 Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules

Forming circuit

02.12
05.01

The forming circuit is configured using incandescent lamps, or alternatively using PTC resistors.
Components required (recommendation):

S 1 fuse switch 3x 400 V / 10 A

S Cable, 1,5 mm2
S 3 PTC resistors 350 R / 35 W
(Recommended: PTC35W PTC800620350 Ohm, company, Michael Koch
GmbH; www.kochmk.de

S 3 incandescent lamps 230 V / 100 W

S Various small parts, such as lamp sockets, etc.

Danger
As a result of the DC link capacitors, after the device has been disconnected
from the supply, voltages are present in the device for up to 5 min. It is only
permissible to work on the device or the DC link terminals at the earliest after
this wait time has expired!

3 AC 400 V
L1

L2

L3

PE

Fuse switch

Incandescent lamps

11

Motor connection

Power module
U2
V2
PE

W2

Power module to be formed

Fig. 11-1

11-388

Forming circuit comprising power modules with incandescent lamps

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.4 Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules

3 AC 400 V
L1

L2

L3

PE

Fuse switch

PTC resistor
Motor connection

Power module
U2
V2
PE

W2

Power module to be formed

Fig. 11-2

Forming circuit comprising power modules with PTC resistors

Procedure

S Before forming the DC link capacitors, it is imperative that the DC link bridge
is removed.

S Ensure that the power module does not receive a switchon command.
S Connect the forming circuit.
S Over the course of the forming time, the incandescent lamps must become
darker/go out completely. If the incandescent lamps are continually lit, then
there is a fault in the power module the wiring.

S When forming using PTC resistors, the modules must remain in the circuit
for approximately 1 hour. If there is a fault in the power module, then the
resistors will become very hot (surface temperature > 80 C).

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11-389

11

11 Spare Parts and Service

11.4 Inspection of the DC link capacitors of the PM modules

05.01

11

11-390

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Dimension Drawings
Fig. 12-1
Fig. 12-2
Fig. 12-3
Fig. 12-4
Fig. 12-5
Fig. 12-6
Fig. 12-7
Fig. 12-8
Fig. 12-9
Fig. 12-10
Fig. 12-11
Fig. 12-12
Fig. 12-13
Fig. 12-14
Fig. 12-15
Fig. 12-16
Fig. 12-17
Fig. 12-18
Fig. 12-19
Fig. 12-20
Fig. 12-21
Fig. 12-22
Fig. 12-23
Fig. 12-24
Fig. 12-25
Fig. 12-26
Fig. 12-27
Fig. 12-28

12

Empty housing, Order No.: 6SN11621AA000AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 16 kW,
6SL30000BE216AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 36 kW,
6SL30000BE236AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 55 kW,
6SL30000BE255AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 80 kW,
6SL30000BE280AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 120 kW,
6SL30000BE312AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 16 kW,
6SL30000BE216DAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 36 kW,
6SL30000BE236DAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 55 kW,
6SL30000BE255DAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line filter for UI modules, 5 kW, 6SN11110AA011BA1 . . . . . . . . .
Line filter for UI modules, 10 kW, 6SN11110AA011AA1 . . . . . . . .
Line filter for UI modules, 28 kW, 6SN11110AA011CA1 . . . . . . . .
Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 16 kW, 6SL30601FE216AAx;
dimension drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 16 kW, 6SL30601FE216AAx;
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 36 kW, 6SN11620GA000CAx;
dimension drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 36 kW, 6SN11620GA000CAx;
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 16 kW,
6SL30000DE216AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 36 kW,
6SL30000DE236AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 55 kW,
6SL30000DE255AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 80 kW,
6SL30000DE280AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 120 kW,
6SL30000DE312AAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal cooling, module width 50/100/150/200/300 mm . . . . . . . . . .
Internal cooling, I/R modules 80 kW/120 kW and
PW mdules 300 A/400 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Builton fan, 6SN11620BA020AA2; dimension drawing . . . . . . . .
Builton fan, 6SN11620BA020AA2; connection diagram . . . . . . .
Hose cooling for individual modules, 6SN11620BA030AA1 . . . . .
Hose cooling for 2tier configuration, 6SN11620BA030CA1 . . . .
EMC measures, Sheet 1
(example shield connection plate width 150 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-394
12-395
12-396
12-397
12-398
12-399
12-400
12-400
12-401
12-402
12-403
12-404
12-405
12-406
12-407
12-408
12-409
12-410
12-411
12-412
12-413
12-414
12-415
12-416
12-417
12-418
12-419
12-420

12-391

12

12 Dimension Drawings

12

02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-29 EMC measures, Sheet 2 (shield connection plate,

6SN1162-0EA00-0AA0; -0BA0; -0CA0; -0JA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-421
Fig. 12-30 EMC measures, Sheet 3 (shield connection plate,
6SN1162-0EA00-0DA0; -0KA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-422
Fig. 12-31 EMC measures, Sheet 4 (shield connection plate,
6SN1162-0EB00-0AA0; -0BA0; -0CA0; -0JA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-423
Fig. 12-32 EMC measures, Sheet 5 (shield connection plate,
6SN1162-0EB0-0DA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-424
Fig. 12-33 External cooling, module width 50...200 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-425
Fig. 12-34 External cooling, 50 mm 12 axes; PM module 6SN1124-1AA00-0xAx,
6SN1124-1AB00-0xA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-426
Fig. 12-35 External cooling, 50 mm 1 axis; PM module 6SN1124-1AA00-0CA1
12-427
Fig. 12-36 External cooling, 100 mm 1 axis; PM module 6SN11241AA000DA2
and I/R module 6SN11461BB010BA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-428
Fig. 12-37 External cooling, 100 mm 2 axes; PM modul
6SN11241AB000CA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-429
Fig. 12-38 External cooling, 150 mm 1 axis; PM module
6SN11241AA000EA2/0LA3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-430
Fig. 12-39 External cooling, 200 mm; I/R module 6SN11461BB020CA2 . . .
12-431
Fig. 12-40 External cooling, 300 mm PM module 6SN11241AA0x0xA1 and
I/R module 6SN11461BB000xA1; Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-432
Fig. 12-41 Interneal/external cooling, 50 mm UI module (6SN11461AB000BAx);
pulse resistor module (6SN11131AB010BAx); monitoring module
(6SN11121AC010AAx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-433
Fig. 12-42 Internal/externa cooling, 100 mm UI module;
6SN11451AA010AA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-434
Fig. 12-43 External cooling, 200 mm UI-Modul; 6SN11461AB000CA0 . . . . .
12-435
Fig. 12-44 External cooling, installation cutout for installation frames . . . . . . . .
12-436
Fig. 12-45 External cooling, module 300 mm mounting plane, PM module
6SN11241AA0x0xA1 and I/R module 6SN11461BB000xA1 . .
12-437
Fig. 12-46 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-438
Fig. 12-47 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040FA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-439
Fig. 12-48 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040JA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-440
Fig. 12-49 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
100 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040BA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-441
Fig. 12-50 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
100 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040GA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-442
Fig. 12-51 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation module
width 100 mm, 6SN11620BA040HA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-443
Fig. 12-52 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
150 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040CA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-444
Fig. 12-53 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
200 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040DA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-445
Fig. 12-54 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation,
300 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040EA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-446
Fig. 12-55 Signal amplifier electronics SVE, 6SN11150AA120AA0 . . . . . . . .
12-447
Fig. 12-56 External pulsed resistor for 28kW for UI module,
SN11131AA000DA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-448
Fig. 12-57 External pulsed resistor Plus, 6SL31001BE225AA0 . . . . . . . . . . .
12-449

12-392

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.08
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-58 Damping resistor for 3-phase HFD line/commutating reactors,

6SL31001BE213AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12-59 Distributed capacitor modules, 6SN11121AB001xA0 . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12-60 DC link adapter set 16...50 mm2 and 35...95 mm2
6SN11611AA010BA0/ 0AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12-61 Shield connection 6SN11620FA000AA1 (dimension drawing) . . .
Fig. 12-62 Shield connection 6SN11620FA000AA2 (dimension drawing) . . .
Fig. 12-63 Thermally conductive plate 6SN11620BA010AAx
(dimension drawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12-64 VPM 120, dimension drawing 6SN11131AA001JAx . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12-65 VPM 200/VPM 200 DYNAMIK, dimension drawing
6SN11131AA001xAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-450
12-451
12-452
12-453
12-454
12-455
12-456
12-457

12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-393

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
05.01

12

Fig. 12-1

12-394

Empty housing, Order No.: 6SN11621AA000AA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

12.5

100

12.5
j13

Connection terminal 10 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M4 thread
Tightening torque 1.5 1.8 Nm

Load connection

6.5

19"1

489
440

480477
465.5

10.8
1.5

Terminal studs M5/3 Nm

Connection terminals 10 mm2
Terminal sleeve: M4 thread
Tightening torque 1.5 1.8 Nm

Fig. 12-2

149.52

2x45_
4x45_

Line supply
connection

100
12

12

12.5

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 16 kW, 6SL30000BE216AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-395

02.07
02.12
05.01

Connection terminal 50 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M6 thread
Tightening torque 6 8 Nm

Load connection

12,5

100

12,5

6,5

13

12 Dimension Drawings

29"1

526
440

480477
465,5

10,8
0

1,5
244,5-3
PE
Terminal studs M8/13 Nm
Connection terminals 50 mm2
Terminal sleeve: M6 thread
Tightening torque 6 8 Nm

12

Fig. 12-3

12-396

2x45_

6,5
4x45_
100

Line supply
connection
12,5

12,5

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 36 kW, 6SL30000BE236AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12 Dimension Drawings

Connection terminal 50 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M6 thread
Tightening torque 6 8 Nm

Load connection

12,5

100

12,5

13

02.12
02.07
05.01

6,5

29"1

526
440

480
477
465,5

10,8
0
1,5
259,5-4

PE
Terminal studs M8/13 Nm

Line supply
connection

Connection terminals 50 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M6 thread
Tightening torque 6 8 Nm

Fig. 12-4

6,5

2x45_
4x45_
100
12,5

12

12,5

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 55 kW, 6SL30000BE255AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-397

12

Fig. 12-5

12-398

440

Connection terminals 95 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M8 thread
Tightening torque 15 20 Nm

29"1
PE
Terminal studs M8/13 Nm

Connection terminal 95 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M8 thread
Tightening torque 15 20 Nm

1,5

Line supply
connection

259,5-4

Load connection

2x45_

22,5

22,5
6,5

150

150

4x45_
22,5

13

10,8
0

480477
465,5

6,5

22,5

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 80 kW, 6SL30000BE280AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

542 max.

2x

300

120
60
30

25

25

PE M10 x 33
Anzugsmoment 10 $ 1 Nm

12 Dimension Drawings

2 x M4

02.12
02.07
05.01

13

85 $1.5

Connection terminal 95 mm2

Terminal sleeve: M8 thread
Tightening torque 15 20 Nm
75

5 x 50 (= 250)
Load connection

20

6,5 (6 x)
2

13 (6 x)

Marking

480
477
465,5

539

U
V
W
L1
L2
L3

480
440

Load
Line

25
0 10,8
54,7

300

74

(142)
Connection terminals 95 mm2
Terminal sleeve: M8 thread
Tightening torque 15 20 Nm

6,5 (x 6)
Line supply
connection

4 x 45_

5 x 50 (= 250)

30

120

60

25

+0.5
259 3.5

Fig. 12-6

All dimensions in mm. General tolerance

conform to ISO 2768-C.

Line filter Wideband line filter for I/R modules, 120 kW, 6SL30000BE312AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-399

12

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
02.12
05.01

Connection terminal 10 mm2

Tightening torque 1,5 1,8 Nm

1)Tightening torque 3 $ 0.15 Nm

Fig. 12-7

Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 16 kW, 6SL30000BE216DAx

12

Connection terminal 35 mm2

Tightening torque 3,2 3,7 Nm

1)Tightening torque 3 $ 0.15 Nm

Fig. 12-8

12-400

Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 36 kW, 6SL30000BE236DAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

Connection terminal 50 mm2

Tightening torque 6 8 Nm

1)Tightening torque 6 $ 0.3 Nm

Fig. 12-9

Line filter Basic line filter for I/R modules 55 kW, 6SL30000BE255DAx

12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-401

02.07
02.12
05.01

max. 39

max. 125,8

30"1

22,5"1

12 Dimension Drawings

1"0,1

Marking

max. 81

Connection terminal VDFK4

Tightening torque 0,5 ... 0,8 Nm

36"1

24,5"1

6,6"0,2
max. 171

LINE

12

115"0,2

max. 193

LOAD

20,5"0,5

140"0,3
max. 156
M6
Tightening torque 3 "0,15 Nm

Fig. 12-10 Line filter for UI modules, 5 kW, 6SN11110AA011BA1

12-402

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12 Dimension Drawings

57"0,5

max. 42

max. 125,8

30"1

22,5"1

02.12
02.07
05.01

1"0,1

max. 91

Connection terminal HDFK10

Tightening torque 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm

46"1
31"0,5

24"1

max. 231

6,6"0,2

LINE

115"0,2

max. 281

LOAD

Marking

140"0,3
M6
Tightening torque
3 "0,15 Nm

max. 156

Fig. 12-11 Line filter for UI modules, 10 kW, 6SN11110AA011AA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-403

12

02.07
02.12
05.01

max. 141

65"0,8

18"0,5

12 Dimension Drawings

1,0"0,1

Connection terminal HDFK50-VP-Z

Tightening torque 6 ... 8 Nm

max. 141
Marking

115"0,2

max. 261

max. 348

LOAD

97"1
54"0,5

38,5"1

6,6"0,2

LINE

12

M10
Tightening torque 10 "1 Nm

155"0,3
max. 171

Fig. 12-12 Line filter for UI modules, 28 kW, 6SN11110AA011CA1

12-404

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

4800.5

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

36

6.5

14,5
2xM5

6.5
14.5

4
10.8

12

283

10

(2)

Netz-Filter
Line-Filter

11

AB

3-Phasen-Drossel
3-phase-choke
12

U1,V1,W1W

(3)

13

2)

16
1

13
14
15

5
4
3

62
20
16
15
14
13
12
11
10

2
1
Item No.

Tightening torque for M4 = 1.8 Nm (16 in lb)

Tightening torque for M6 = 6 Nm (54 in lb)

Anzugsdrehmoment fr M4 = 1,8 Nm
Anzugsdrehmoment fr M6 = 6 Nm

Mains filter and reactor

are not included in the
scope of supply

20

AA

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for colling air flow

Barcode label

62

WW

75

88

171
6SL30601FE216AA0

Adapter set line filter

for 16 kW I/R

462008.0343.00
A5E00808761
Cable set, 16 kW
Ring, spring 6
000000064444
Washer A 6.4
000000068221
Nut, hexagonal-6
000000060491
000000571414
SHR, counter-sunk M6x16
SHR, Combination lenses M4x8000000380808
SHR, Combination lenses M6x16
000000393324
000000588970
Terminal HDFK 10
L-Profile
2
462008.0510.01
1
U plate, lower
A5E00205963
U
plate,
upper
1
A5E00205962
Mounting plate, front
1
A5E00205949
Mounting plate, rear
1
462018.0106.00
amount
Designation
Item No./Designation

1
1
4
4
4
8
4
4
1

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for colling air flow

1) Anzugsdrehmoment 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm

Tightening torque 1.5 ... 1.8 Nm
2) Netzfilter und Drossel
sind nicht Bestandteile
des Lieferumfangs

1)

1)

100
100

149.50.3
100"0.2

05.08
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-13 Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 16 kW, 6SL30601FE216AAx; dimension drawing

12-405

489

584.5

12-406

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

13(8x)

AB
4

AB

12(2x)

10 2
AB

15(4x) 16(4x)

14(4x)

12(2x)

U
V
W

1U1
1U2
1V1
1V2
1W1
1W2

Drossel
Reactor

Anschlussplan
Wiring diagram

U1
V1
W1

Ausgangsklemme
Output terminal

6SL30601FE216AA0

Adapter set line filter

for 16 kW I/R

Schutzleiteranschluss von Netzfilter verwenden.

Use protective conductor connection of mains filter.

11

Netzfilter
MainsFilter

11

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

12

Fig. 12-14 Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 16 kW, 6SL30601FE216AAx; mounting

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

480

526

603

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

1)
3)

249,5

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling
air flow
100

20

2)

10
4

10

12, 15, 16, 17

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling
air flow

100

11

1)

2)

11

11

12, 15, 16, 17

3) Fuer die Klemmenschrauben (Netzfilter)

kurzen Schraubendreher verwenden
Use short screwdriver for the terminal screws
(mains filter)

Mains filter and reactor

are not included in the
scope of supply

Tightening torque for M4 = 1.8 Nm (16 in lb)

Tightening torque for M6 = 6 Nm (54 in lb)
2) Netzfilter und Drossel
sind nicht Bestandteile
des Lieferumfangs

1) Anzugsdrehmoment 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm

Tightening torque 1.5 ... 1.8 Nm
Anzugsdrehmoment fr M4 = 1,8 Nm
Anzugsdrehmoment fr M6 = 6 Nm

310

1
8
8
8
8
8
4
1
2
1
1
1
Item No. amount

20
17
16
15
12
11
10
5
4
3
2
1

36

200

72

4662

266,5

121,5

Designation

Cable set, 16 kW
Ring, spring 6
Washer A 6.4
Nut, hexagonal-6
SHR, counter-sunk M6x16
SHR, counter-sunk M5x12
SHR, Combination lenses M4x10
Terminal HDFK 50
L-Profile
Console, lower
Console, upper
Mounting plate

2xM5

x
175,5

6SN11620GA000CA0

Adapter set line filter

for 36 kW I/R

Item No./Designation

A5E00808765
000000064444
000000068221
000000060491
000000571414
000000571380
000000565648
000000588988
462008.0510.01
462018.0122.00
462018.0121.00
462018.0120.00

05.08
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-15 Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 36 kW, 6SN11620GA000CAx; dimension drawing

12-407

12-408

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

15, 16, 17

15, 16, 17

11

press

10

U
V
W

Netzfilter
MainsFilter

1U1
1U2
1V1
1V2
1W1
1W2

Drossel
Reactor

Anschlussplan
Wiring diagram

U1
V1
W1

Ausgangsklemme
Output terminal

6SN11620GA000CA0

Adapter set line filter

for 36 kW I/R

Schutzleiteranschluss von Netzfilter verwenden.

Use protective conductor connection of mains filter.

12

13

12

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

12

Fig. 12-16 Adapter set, line filter for I/R module 36 kW, 6SN11620GA000CAx; mounting

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Rating plate

Single conductor
connection

150

CONFIADO COMO SECRETO INDUSTRIAL

RESERVADOS TODOS LOS DERECHOS

ALS BETRIEBSGEHEIMNIS ANVERTRAUT

ALLE RECHTE VORBEHALTEN

ca. 125

136"0.5

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

PROPRIETARY DATA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

51
10...16

71

2,5...16

10...25

2,5...16

8WA1 001-1PK00

10...25

1...16

8WA1 304

mm2

mm2

mm2

Current carrying
capacity
VDE, UL, CSA

Warning plate

Typ

Cross-section

Marking

PE 1U1 1U2 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2 PE

to 40 _C
to 55 _C
Ambient temperature
A
A

mehrdrhtig feindrhtig

eindrhtig

8x15

Fa. Siemens

Connection terminal

PE

175"0.5

330

Weight: ca. 13 kg

HFD line/commutating reactor 16 kW

6SL30000DE216AAx

Not true to scale

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-17 3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 16 kW, 6SL30000DE216AAx

12-409

12

12-410

CONFIADO COMO SECRETO INDUSTRIAL

RESERVADOS TODOS LOS DERECHOS

PROPRIETARY DATA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

ALS BETRIEBSGEHEIMNIS ANVERTRAUT

ALLE RECHTE VORBEHALTEN

Warning
plate

Marking terminal

max. 235

Terminal assignment

12
175"0.5

330

Rating plate

PE 3 2 1 PE 1U1 1U2 1V1 1V2 1W11W2 PE

8x15

Weight: ca. 20,6 kg

HFD line/commutating
reactor 36 kW
6SL30000DE236AAx

Not true to scale

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-18 3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 36 kW, 6SL30000DE236AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
136"0.5
150

12 Dimension Drawings

Not true to scale

HFD line/commutationg
reactor 55 kW
6SL30000DE255AAx

Weight: ca. 27 kg

02.07
05.01

150
330

175"0.5

Marking terminal

Terminal assignment

Rating plate

8x15

136"0.5

12

max. 290
PROPRIETARY DATA
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

ALS BETRIEBSGEHEIMNIS ANVERTRAUT

ALLE RECHTE VORBEHALTEN

CONFIADO COMO SECRETO INDUSTRIAL

RESERVADOS TODOS LOS DERECHOS

Fig. 12-19 3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 55 kW, 6SL30000DE255AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-411

Type plate 2

Type plate 1

170

12-412

156 "0,5

27

75

1W2 1W1

79

104

379

175 "0,5

325 "0,5

1V2 1V1

12
1U2 1U1

Warning plate

Marking terminal

PE 3 2 1

15

End halter

Terminal assignment

25

175 "0,5

325 "0,5

Mounting hole

SIEMENS

max 185

HFD line/commutating reactor 80 kW

with terminal
MLFB 6SL30000DE280AA1

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.08
05.01

Fig. 12-20 3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 80 kW, 6SL30000DE280AAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

ca. 250

max 325
156 "0,5

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Type plate 1

Type plate 2

Lifing eyebolts
10x25

75,5

75

1W21W1

(175)

(325)

476

1V2 1V1

11

1U2 1U1

Warning plate

1 2 3 PE

Marking terminal

110 "5

23

75 "5

285
206 "0,5

25

12
(206)

33 "5

SIEMENS

175 "0,5

325 "0,5

Mounting hole

230

HFD line/commutating reactor 120 kW

with terminal
MLFB 6SL30000DE312AA1

max. 20

05.08
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-21 3phase HFD line/commutating reactor 120 kW, 6SL30000DE312AAx

12-413

max. 360
230

5)

1)

97

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

3)

7) 11)

6)

12)

77
115

max. 57

max. 20
50
100
150
200
300

a [mm]

Module width
Modulbreite

288

50
100
150
250

100

50

[mm] [mm] [mm]

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

90

9)

100
443
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6

PE

20

268

480
100

50

10)

Y"0.3

U, V, W
4 bzw. 6 13)
10 bzw. 16 13)
50
50
95

[mm2]

16 13)

16 13)
16 13)

X131

Max. conductor cross-section 3)

Max. Anschlussquerschnitt 3)

2)

25"0.15

316

12-414
8)

4)

5.5"0.1

4,8
10,5

15,5
23,5

7,5
9,5
13

19,5

E/R-modules Axis modules

E/R-Module Achsmodule

Module weight
Modulgewicht [kg]

a"0.3

3)

M600

P600

Z"0.3

X"0.3

466"0.3
e

8"0.15

12
Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

2GE.462008.9000.00 MB e

SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
interne Entwaermung

Umgebungstemperatur: 0 _C bis 40 _C
Ambient temperature: 0 _C to 40 _C
Schutzart: IP20
(Bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstellen oder HSA-Regelung: IP00)
Type of protection: IP20
(Spindle-Modules or modules with pulse-interface: IP00)

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly
Screws M3:
(7 in lb)
Screws M4:
(16 in lb)
Screws M5:
(26 in lb)
Screws M6:
(52 in lb)
Screws M8:
(112 in lb)

Control board inserted screwed in

Attention! Screw in to ensure the galvanic
contact for PE-and encoder cable shield
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Terminal block area
Terminal U, V, W: Tightening torques see Chapter 5.6.2 and 6.2.3
Tightening torque for X131: 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
PE-connection
Combicon-terminal (plugged for delivery)
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Additional connection possible for cable screening M5x10
(encoder, reference value)
Cover engaged
Cut out for fastening screw M5 or 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Material: Metal sheet DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Front cover: plastic
Cover: plastic
Hot-air deflector plate (Option with UI-Modules 5 kW, 10 kW and PR-Module)
Only applicable with pin terminal

Regelung gesteckt und verschraubt

Achtung! Verschraubung gewhrleistet PE- und Schirmverbindung
fr Geber- und Sollwert
(Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Anschlussklemmenbereich
Anschlussbereich U, V, W: Anzugsdrehmomente siehe Kapitel 5.6.2 und 6.2.3
Anzugsdrehmoment fr X131: 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
PE-Anschluss
Combicon-Klemmen (Anlieferzustand gesteckt)
(Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Zustzliche Anschlussmglichkeit fr Schirmauflage M5x10
(Geber, Sollwert)
Abdeckung eingerastet
Bohrung fr Befestigungsgewinde M5 bzw. 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Gehuse: Blech DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Frontplatte: Kunststoff
Abdeckung: Kunststoff
Warmluftableitblech (Option bei UE-Modul 5 kW, 10 kW und PW-Modul)
Nur unter Verwendung von Stiftkabelschuhen mglich

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente
Schrauben M3:
0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4:
1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5:
3,0 Nm
Schrauben M6:
6,0 Nm
Schrauben M8:
13 Nm

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

6)

4)
5)

2)
3)

1)

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

6)

4)
5)

2)
3)

1)

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Fig. 12-22 Internal cooling, module width 50/100/150/200/300 mm

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

5)

7) 11)

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

min. 57

1)

6)

14)

288

13)

E/R 120/156 kW
LT 300 A
LT 400 A

E/R 80/104 kW

Modul

Module

min. 187

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

9)

4)

10)

316

2)

228

16
16

150
95
150

29
21
24

26

kg

Gewicht

120

50

3)

M600

P600

50"0.3

250"0.3

92

L1, L2, X131 4)

95

U, V, W 3)

Weight

100"0.3

L1L2X131

50

50

Max. conductor cross-section [mm2]

Max. Anschlussquerschnitt [mm2]

20

100
443
min. 170

25"0.15

480

300 0,5

8)

12)

min. 40

466"0.3
8"0.15

268

Umgebungstemperatur: 0 _C bis 40 _C
Ambient temperature: 0 _C to 40 _C
Schutzart: IP20
(Bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstellen: IP00)
Type of protection: IP20
(Modules with pulse-interface: IP00)

2GE.462008.9001.00 MB c

SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt Module 300 mm

interne Entwaermung

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly
Screws M3: 0.8 Nm
(7 in lb)
Screws M4: 1.8 Nm
(16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3.0 Nm
(26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6.0 Nm
(52 in lb)
Screws M8: 13 Nm
(112 in lb)

Control board inserted screwed in

Attention! Screw in to ensure the galvanic contact for PE-and encoder cable shield
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Terminal block area
Terminal U, V, W; Tightening torques see Chapter 5.6.2 and 6.2.3
Terminal L1, L2, X131: tightening torque 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
Max. cross-section with pin terminal
Combicon-terminal (plugged for delivery)
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Additional connection possible for cable screening M5x10
(encoder, reference value)
Cover engaged
Cut out for fastening screw M5 or 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Material: Metal sheet DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Front cover: plastic
Cover: plastic
PE-connection (M6)
Fan fastened with 4 screws M5x16
Fan weight: 4 kg

Regelung gesteckt und verschraubt

Achtung! Verschraubung gewhrleistet PE- und Schirmverbindung
fr Geber- und Sollwert (Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Anschlussklemmenbereich
Anschlussklemmenbereich U, V, W:
Anzugsdrehmomente siehe Kapitel 5.6.2 und 6.2.3
Anschlussklemmenbereich L1, L2, X131: Anzugsdrehmoment 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
Max. Anschlussquerschnitt unter Verwendung von Stiftkabelschuhen mglich
Combicon-Klemmen (Anlieferzustand gesteckt)
(Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Zustzliche Anschlussmglichkeit fr Schirmauflage M5x10
(Geber, Sollwert)
Abdeckung eingerastet
Bohrung fr Befestigungsgewinde M5 bzw. 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Gehuse: Blech DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Frontplatte: Kunststoff
Abdeckung: Kunststoff
PE-Anschluss (M6)
Lfter verschraubt mit Schraube M5x16
Lftergewicht: 4 kg

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente
Schrauben M3:
0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4:
1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5:
3,0 Nm
Schrauben M6:
6,0 Nm
Schrauben M8:
13 Nm

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

6)

5)

2)
3)
4)

1)

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)

6)

5)

4)

2)
3)

1)

02.12
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-23 Internal cooling, I/R modules 80 kW/120 kW and PW mdules 300 A/400 A

12-415

12

12-416

8.5 "0.1

26.5 "0.2

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

grn/gelb (PE)

schwarz (W1)

braun (V1)
blau (U1)

241.8 "0.1

258 "0.2

215

ca. 20

12
ca. 20

17 "0.1
5.4
52 "0.1
83"021

170.5
Drehrichtungspfeil

punktgeschweit
spot-welde

1
1

1) 006
005

Radialgeblse

Stecker-Gehuse

Crimp-Kontakt

Schutzgitter

Lfterblech

Stecker-Gehuse

Crimp-Kontakt

Typenschild

Pos Menge Benennung

1) 002
001

1) 003

004

008

1) 007

B1 DIN EN 10143 FE PO 3G Z140 MB-0-1.5

Bezeichnung/Bestell-Nr .

D2D 133 AB06-27

AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK 350780-1

AMP 926885-1

9500-2-4039

Technische Daten

6SN11620BA020AA2

480 V/60 Hz
360 V/50 Hz...480+30 V/60 Hz
bei 480 V/60 Hz:
250 mA
bei 400 V/50 Hz:
200 mA
Leistungsaufnahme Pnenn bei 480 V/60 Hz:
195 W
bei 400 V/50 Hz:
120 W
Volumenstrom
bei 480 V/60 Hz/330 Pa:455 m3/h
bei 400 V/50 Hz/250 Pa:400 m3/h
Drehzahl nnenn
bei 480 V/60 Hz:
2850 min-1
bei 400 V/50 Hz:
2500 min-1
Lagersystem
Kugellager
Zul. Umgebungstemperatur bei 50 Hz:
100 _C
bei 60 Hz:
80 _C
Lebensdauer bei 55 _C
ca. 40000 h
Gewicht
4,5 kg
Lieferant: Fa. EBM, Art.-Nr. D2D 133 AB06-30
Motor UL gelistet
Motorbezeichnung: M2D068-DF

af

Nennspannung
zul. Spannungsbereich
Stromaufnahme Inenn

AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK 350779-4

AMP 926884-1

GWE-Snr. 462008.0128.50

1) Pos. 2, 3, 6, 7 und 10 im Beipack mitgeliefert und mit

Klebstreifen am Lfter befestigt
Crimp-Kontakt
AMP 350654-1
1) 010 1
009 2
Produktverpak - GWE-Snr. 462008.0231.00
kungsschild

180

Leitungslnge: 1050 "20 mm

cable length: 1050 "20 mm

Anlieferzustand:
Geblse versandfertig einzeln im Karton verpackt.
Klebe-Etikette GWE-Snr. 462008.0128.50 auf Geblse geklebt und
Klebe-Etikette GWE-Snr. 462008.0231.00 auf Verpackung
geklebt (kostenlose Beistellung)
Beschriftung mit:
SIMODRIVE
Radialgeblaese
A5E00107336
6SN11620BA020AA2
Version: A
Drehrichtungspfeil (Grund: rotes Leuchtpapier) und
Etiketten-Anschlussplan wie dargestellt auf Lfter-gehuse
angebracht.

Etiketten-Anschlussplan
wie auf Blatt 2 dargestellt

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
11.05
05.01

Fig. 12-24 Builton fan, 6SN11620BA020AA2; dimension drawing

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

11.05
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

50

Sternschaltung
Star connected
Couplage toile

Drehstrommotor
Three phase motor
Moteur tiphas
L1

L2

V1 W1
40

U1

L3

U2

V2 W2

L1 = schwarz/black
L2 = blau/blue
L3 = braun/brown

= grngelb/greenyellow
Drehrichtungsnderung durch Vertauschen von zwei Phasen
Change of direction of rotation by interchanging of two phases
Changement du sens de rotation par inversion de deux phases

Label - Connection diagram

Paper label self-adhesive

Basic: withe
Overprint: black

12
A5E00107336A

Centrifugal blower
Special type 360...510 V

6SN11620BA020AA2

TA

af

Fig. 12-25 Builton fan, 6SN11620BA020AA2; connection diagram

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-417

* PRO/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

1),4)

1),4)

97
443
97

99

300

133

162

138.5

67

237.5

7
5

27.5

3)

ac

2)

1)
2)
3)
4)

142

142

278

238

238

260
6

Maximum total length for hose: 2 m

Fan weight: 5 kg
ab
Degree of protection for filter: IP54
Minimum bending radius for hose: R = 125 mm

1)
2)
3)
4)

ac

7.5

215
9

4.5

10

35

5.5

37

11

5.5

130

200

215

BB
1:2

162

110
88

CC
1:2

5.5

11

5.5

4.5

4.5

120

12

Date

12.10.95
29.03.95
10.01.95

501744

Name

Fe
Kn

Sch.

Tolerances:

ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

Allg.Toleranz

500544
500019

aa
Rev. Modification

ac
ab

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:
.
.
.

E 245
Erlangen

Dep.:
Site:

Industry Sector

Knauer
Masatz

Surface:
20.12.94
Author:
Check:

Date:

.
.

1:4

kg/piece:
A1

Replacement for / replaced by:

Article:

Doc.type

Revision

462008.7017.00 MB ac

Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Name:

Sheetsize

1
Sheets:

Sheet:

MASSBLA TT
SCHLAUCHENTW AERMUNG

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number: A5E........A

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende Anzugsdrehmomente

Schrauben M3: 0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4: 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5: 3 Nm
Schrauben M6: 6 Nm
Adhere to following tightening torques for module assembly
Screws M3: 0.8 Nm
(7 inlb)
Screws M4: 1.8 Nm
(16 inlb)
Screws M5: 3 Nm
(26 inlb)
Screws M6: 6 Nm
(52 inlb)

55
Maximale Gesamtlnge fr Schlauch: 2 m
Lftergewicht: 5 kg
Schutzart fr Filter: IP54
Mindestbiegeradius fr Schlauch: R = 125 mm

200
7.5

130
35

110
5

12-418
PRO/ECAD

12

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-26 Hose cooling for individual modules, 6SN11620BA030AA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

1),4)

1),4)

* PRO/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

97
2)

LT 200 A

300

E/R
55 kW

99

133

162

138.5

67

3)

min 300

27.5

142

142

278

238

215
7

130
35

443

97

97

443

97

200
7.5

7.5

35

ac

ab

ac

130

BB
1:2

200

215

4.5

10

4.5

37

5.5

11

162

5.5

88

110

CC
1:2

11

5.5

5.5

4.5

12

1)
2)
3)
4)

12.10.95
23.05.95

501744
500854

FE
Name

KN

Sch.

Tolerances:

ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

Allg.Toleranz

500019
20.03.95
aa
Rev. Modification
Date

ac
ab

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

.
.

Industry Sector

E 245
Erlangen

Knauer
Masatz

Author:
Check:
Dep.:
Site:

08.03.95

Surface:
Date:

.
.

1:5

kg/piece:

120
Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Name:

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

Doc.type

Revision

462008.7018.00 MB ac

A1

Sheets:

Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

Ext.Schlauchentwaermung
2zeiliger Aufbau

.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number: A5E........A

Maximale Gesamtlnge fr Schlauch: 2 m

Lftergewicht: 5 kg
Schutzart fr Filter: IP54
Mindestbiegeradius fr Schlauch: R = 125 mm

1) Maximum total length for hose: 2 m

2) Fan weight: 5 kg
3) Degree of protection for filter: IP54
4) Minimum bending radius for hose: R = 125 mm

Adhere to following tigtening torques for module assembly

Screws M3: 0.8 Nm
(7 inlb)
Screws M4: 1.8 Nm
(16 inlb)
Screws M5: 3 Nm
(26 inlb)
Screws M6: 6 Nm
(52 inlb)

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende Anzugsdrehmomente

Schrauben M3: 0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4: 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5: 3 Nm
Schrauben M6: 6 Nm

110
5

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

237.5

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
PRO/ECAD

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-27 Hose cooling for 2tier configuration, 6SN11620BA030CA1

12-419

238

260

12-420
Schraube 2,5x8
Screw M2.5x8

Schirmanschlussblech
Shield Connection Plate

Achtung! Die Schirmauflage

ist keine Zugentlastung!
Attention! The shield
connection is no
strain-relief!

Schlauchschelle fr Schirm
Hose-clamp for shield

Steckverbindung
Motorbremse
Connector
motor brake

Schraube M5 fr
Modulbefestigung
Screw M5 for
module attachment

Haken zum Einhngen im Gitterbereich

Hooks for engaging in grille

Schirmanschlussblech
Shield Connection Plate

Montage:
Das Schirmblech wird in den Gitterbereich
des Moduls eingehngt und mit den
Modulbefestigungsschrauben angeschraubt.
Mounting:
Hinge shield connection plate in the
module grille and secure with
module mounting screws.

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

462008.9000.10

Name:
Typ/MLFB: SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
EMV-Manahme

Doc-Number: 462008900010MB

MB

AF

Required tightening torques

for module assembly:
Screws M3: 0,8 Nm (7 inlb)
Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 inlb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 inlb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 inlb)

X
1:1

Auflagepunkt fr Kabelschirme
(z. B. Ansteuerleitung der Funktionsklemmen)
seat for cable screens
(e.g. control line for function terminals)

Die Schlauchschellen sind entsprechend dem Kabelschirmauendurchmesser festgelegt.

Nachfolgend eine Auflistung mglicher Schlauchschlellen fr den Kabelschirmanschluss.
The hose-clamps match the outside diameter of the cable screen.
1) Schlauchschellen, z. B. von Fa. Norma Germany GmbH
The details are given in the table below.
Hose-clamps, e.g. made by Norma Germany GmbH
Schlauchschellen fr Schirm
in D-63461 Maintal
(Im Lieferumfang unserer konfektionierten
Leitungsquerschnitt
Postfach / Po Box 1149
SIEMENS Motoranschlussleitungen enthalten)
2 x M5x10
Hose-Clamps for Shield
Conductor cross-section
Achtung! Schraubenlnge
Tel.: 06181/403-0
(Hose-clamp for shield is included with
nicht berschreiten!
Fax.: 06181/403-210
SIEMENS preassembled motor cables)
Important!
Do not exeed screw length!
2) Steckverbinder Motorbremse
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL816 W11
4 x 1,5 mm2
2
2
Hose-clamp
DIN
3017AL816
W11
4
x
1,5
mm
+
2
x
1
mm
connectors for motor brake
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL816 W11
4 x 2,5 mm2
Bestell-Nr.: / Order No.:
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL816 W11
Bei der Montage einzuhaltende
MSTB 2,5/2STF5,08
Anzugsdrehmomente:
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL1220 W11
4 x 2,5 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
MVSTBU 2,5/2GFB5,08
Schraube M3: 0,8 Nm
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL1220 W11
Fa. Phoenix Contact
2
Schraube M4: 1,8 Nm
Schlauchschelle
DIN
3017AL1220
W11
4
x
4
mm
Postfach 1341, D32819 Blomberg Steckverbinder und Schlauchschelle
Schraube M5: 3,0 Nm
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL1220 W11
4 x 4 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
Phoenix Contact Co.
Schraube M6: 6,0 Nm
gehren zum Lieferumfang unserer
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL1625 W11
4 x 6 mm2
PO Box 1341, D32819 Blomberg geschirmten, konfektionierten
2
2
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL1625 W11
4 x 6 mm + 2 x 1 mm
SIEMENS Motoranschlussleitungen:
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL1625 W11
4 x 10 mm2
Connector and hose-clamp are
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL1625 W11
4 x 10 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
included with SIEMENS
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AL1625 W11
4 x 16 mm2
preassembled, shielded motor cables: 4 x 16 mm2 + 2 x 1 mm2
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AL1625 W11
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AS2540 W11
4 x 25 mm2 + 2 x 1,5 mm2
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AS2540 W11
6FX20025DAVV1VV0
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AS2540 W11
4 x 35 mm2 + 2 x 1,5 mm2
6FX20025CAVV1VV0
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AS2540 W11
6FX40025DAVV1VV0
Schlauchschelle DIN 3017AS3250 W11
4 x 50 mm2 + 2 x 1,5 mm2
6FX40025CAVV1VV0
Hose-clamp DIN 3017AS3250 W11

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

12

Beispiel fr die Montage des Schirmanschlussblechs und Anschluss des Kabelschirms bei einem 150 mm Modul
Example of shield connection plate mounting and connection of cable screen for a 150 mm module

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Fig. 12-28 EMC measures, Sheet 1 (example shield connection plate width 150 mm)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

120

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

MLFB:
6SN11620EA000JA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 200 mm internal
IR 36 kW

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 200 mm intern
ER 36 kW

MLFB:
6SN11620EA000CA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 150 mm internal
PM 108 A/160 A

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 150 mm intern
LT 108 A/160 A

MLFB:
6SN11620EA000AA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 50 mm internal

185

185

43.5

6SN11620EA000AA0
Made in Germany

167.8

167.8

MLFB:
6SN11620EA000BA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 100 mm internal

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 100 mm intern

Mazeichnungen fr Schirmanschlussbleche von 50 mm - 200 mm Breite, interne Entwrmung

Dimensional drawings for shield connecting plates from 50 mm - 200 mm width, internal colling

6SN11620EA000JA0
Made in Germany

193.5
158.5

6SN11620EA000CA0
Made in Germany

143.5
112.5

128

120

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 50 mm intern

93
63
148

462008.9000.10

Name:
Typ/MLFB: SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
EMV-Manahme

Doc-Number: 462008900010MB

MB AF

02.12
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-29 EMC measures, Sheet 2 (shield connection plate, 6SN1162-0EA00-0AA0; -0BA0; -0CA0; -0JA0)

12-421

12

6SN11620EA000BA0
Made in Germany

12-422

200

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

MLFB: 6SN11620EA000KA0

6SN11620EA000KA0
Made in Germany

223.5

293.5

6SN11620EA000DA0
Made in Germany

293.5

193.4

188.5

143

153

Mazeichnungen fr Schirmanschlussbleche von 300 mm, interne Entwrmung

Dimensional drawings shield connecting plates 300 mm, internal colling

Shield Connecting Plate for modules 300 mm internal

with attached fan/hose cooling

Schirmanschlussblech fr Gerte 300 mm intern

mit Anbaulfter/Schlauchentwrmung

MLFB: 6SN11620EA000DA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for IR 55 kW/LT 200 A internal
62

12

Schirmanschlussblech
fr ER 55 kW/LT 200 A intern

462008.9000.10

Name:
Typ/MLFB: SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
EMV-Manahme

Doc-Number: 462008900010MB

MB AF

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Fig. 12-30 EMC measures, Sheet 3 (shield connection plate, 6SN1162-0EA00-0DA0; -0KA0)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

120

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

MLFB: 6SN11620EB000JA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 200 mm external

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 200 mm extern

185

MLFB: 6SN11620EB000CA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 150 mm external

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 150 mm extern

MLFB: 6SN11620EB000AA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for all modules 50 mm external
plus UI 5 kW, Monitoring Modul
and Pulsed Resistor Module

Schirmanschlussblech
fr alle Gerte 50 mm extern
sowie UE 5 kW, berwachungsmodul und Pulswiderstandsmodul
6SN11620EB000AA0
Made in Germany

107.8

107.8

MLFB: 6SN11620EB000BA0

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 100 mm external
plus UI 10 kW

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 100 mm extern
sowie UE 10 kW

Mazeichnungen Schirmanschlussbleche 50 mm - 200 mm, externe Entwrmung

Dimensional drawings shield connecting plates 50 mm - 200 mm, external colling

6SN11620EB000JA0
Made in Germany

193.5

6SN11620EB000CA
Made in Germany

143.5

71

6SN11620EB000BA0
Made in Germany

93.5
111

462008.9000.10

Name:
Typ/MLFB: SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
EMV-Manahme

Doc-Number: 462008900010MB

MB AF

02.12
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-31 EMC measures, Sheet 4 (shield connection plate, 6SN1162-0EB00-0AA0; -0BA0; -0CA0; -0JA0)

12-423

12

120

185

MLFB: 6SN11620EB000DA0

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

6SN11620EB000DA0
Made in Germany

128.5
95

Mazeichnungen Schirmanschlussbleche 300 mm, externe Entwrmung

Dimensional drawings shield connecting plates 300 mm, external colling

293.5

12

200

12-424

Shield Connecting Plate

for modules 300 mm external

Schirmanschlussblech
fr Gerte 300 mm extern

462008.9000.10

Name:
Typ/MLFB: SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Mablatt
EMV-Manahme

Doc-Number: 462008900010MB

MB AF

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Fig. 12-32 EMC measures, Sheet 5 (shield connection plate, 6SN1162-0EB0-0DA0)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

7), 11)

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

* Pro/E *

5)

1)

100

100
10

211

3)

50
100
150
200

a [mm]

Modulbreite
Module width

231

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

100

6)

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

max.60

U, V, W
4 bzw. 6 12)
10 bzw. 16 12)
50
50

50
100
150

M5
M5
M6
M6

PE

[mm]

10)

2)

24.8 0.15

16 12)

16 12)

X131

Max. Anschlussquerschnitt [mm2] 3)

Max. conductor cross-section [mm2] 3)

Dichtung
Seal

9)

Khlkrper
Heat sink

IP54

389

13)

443
20

IP20

316

466 0.3
8 0.15

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
4)

480
Achsmodule
Axis modules
7,5
9,5
13

Modulgewichte [kg]
Module weight

50

8)

6.5 0.1

E/RModule
E/Rmodules
4,8
10,5

15,5

3)

a0.5
x 0.3

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

4)
5)
6)

2)
3)

1)

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

4)
5)
6)

2)
3)

1)

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
19.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

Schrauben M3 : 0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4 : 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5 : 3,0 Nm

1:1

Mablatt
Externe Entwrmung

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

Doc.type

462118900005_MB1 MB

I DT MC R&D 9Name:
6
Erl. F80
Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Surface:
19.11.97
Spaeth
Masatz

.
.
.

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Date:
Author:
Check:

.
.
.

Revision

AA

kg/piece:

Umgebungstemperatur: 0 _C bis 40 _C
Ambient temperature: 0 _C to 40 _C

Screws M3 : 0,8 Nm ( 7 inlb)

Screws M4 : 1,8 Nm (16 inlb)
Screws M5 : 3,0 Nm (26 inlb)

Bei Modulmontage einzu

Adhere to following tightening
haltende Anzugsdrehmomente
torques for module assembly

Control board inserted screwed in

Attention! Screw in to ensure the galvanic
contact for PE-and encoder cable shield
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Terminal block area
Terminal U, V, W: Tightening torques see Chapter 5.6.2 and 6.2.3
Tightening torque for X131: 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
PE-connection
Combicon-terminal (plugged for delivery)
Additional connection possible for cable screening M5x10
(encoder, reference value)
Cover engaged
Cut out for fastening screw M5 or 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Material: Metal sheet DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Front cover: plastic
Cover: plastic
Only applicable with pin terminal
Modules with pulse interface: IP00

Regelung gesteckt und verschraubt

Achtung! Verschraubung gewhrleistet PE- und Schirmverbindung
fr Geber- und Sollwert
(Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Anschlussklemmenbereich
Anschlussbereich U, V, W: Anzugsdrehmomente siehe Kapitel 5.6.2 und 6.2.3
Anzugsdrehmoment fr X131: 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
PE-Anschluss
Combicon-Klemmen (Anlieferzustand gesteckt)
Zustzliche Anschlussmglichkeit fr Schirmauflage M5x10
(Geber, Sollwert)
Abdeckung eingerastet
Bohrung fr Befestigungsgewinde M5 bzw. 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Gehuse: Blech DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Frontplatte: Kunststoff
Abdeckung: Kunststoff
Nur unter Verwendung von Stiftkabelschuhen mglich
Bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle: IP00

A2

1
Sheet:
1
Sheets:

Sheetsize

PRO/ECAD

1
CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

02.12
02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-33 External cooling, module width 50...200 mm

12-425

41.5
24.8
7
0

50
44.75

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

20
8
0

480
474
463

3.75
0

MLFB
6SN11241AA000HAV
6SN11241AA000AAV
6SN11241AA000BAV
6SN11241AB000HAV
6SN11241AB000AAV
6SN11241AB000ABV

Leistungsteil 1/2Achs

Power module 1/2axis

prohibited

33

83

381.8

466
5

21.8

18.5

42.5

36

(fr Khlkrper)
(for heat sink)

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

298.8
52

12-426
Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

24

12
.
.
.

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

Doc.type

462118900000_MB2 MB

Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

I DT MC R&D 9 6 Name:

Erl. F80

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

2:5

( 7 inlb)
(16 inlb)
(26 inlb)
(52 inlb)

Mablatt ext. Entw.

50mm LT 1/2Achs

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

Screws M3 : 0,8 Nm
Screws M4 : 1,8 Nm
Screws M5 : 3,0 Nm
Screws M6 : 6,0 Nm

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

Schrauben M3 : 0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4 : 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5 : 3,0 Nm
Schrauben M6 : 6,0 Nm

Surface:
Date:
25.03.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

.
.
.

Revision

AA

kg/piece:

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

A2

PRO/ECAD

CADDrawing
Manual modification

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-34 External cooling, 50 mm 12 axes; PM module 6SN1124-1AA00-0xAx, 6SN1124-1AB00-0xA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
300

231

* Pro/E *

20
8
0

480
474
463

50

41.5
24.8
7
0
3.75

44.75

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

MLFB
6SN11241AA000CAV

Leistungsteil 1Achs

Power module 1axis

33

83

421.7

21.8

18.5

42.5

36

(for heat sink)

(fr Khlkrper)

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

338.8
52

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

24

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
.
.
.

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

462118900000

Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

I DT MC R&D 9 6 Name:

Erl. F80

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

2:5

( 7 inlb)
(16 inlb)
(26 inlb)
(52 inlb)

Doc.type

MB

Mablatt ext. Entw.

50mm LT 1Achs

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

Screws M3 : 0,8 Nm
Screws M4 : 1,8 Nm
Screws M5 : 3,0 Nm
Screws M6 : 6,0 Nm

Adhere to folowing tightening

torques for module assembly

Schrauben M3 : 0,8 Nm
Schrauben M4 : 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5 : 3,0 Nm
Schrauben M6 : 6,0 Nm

Surface:
Date:
11.08.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

.
.
.

Revision

AA

kg/piece:

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

A2

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

PRO/ECAD

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-35 External cooling, 50 mm 1 axis; PM module 6SN1124-1AA00-0CA1

12-427

466
300

231

100
92
75

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

20
8
0

480
474
463

25
7
0
2

6.5

Leistungsteil 1Achs
MLFB
6SN11241AA000DAV
6SN11461BB010BAV

Power module 1axis

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

231

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

300

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

32

82

421.7

.
.
.

.
.
.

(18)

M5

2:5

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

462118900001_MB3

SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Doc.type

MB

Mablatt ext. Entw.

100mm LT 1Achs

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

I DT MC R&D 9Name:
6
Erl. F80
Typ/MLFB:

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Surface:
Date:
25.03.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

50

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

18.5

86.5

(fr Khlkrper)
(for heat sink)

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

391.7
23

12-428
Revision

AA

kg/piece:

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

A2

PRO/ECAD

466

12

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-36 External cooling, 100 mm 1 axis; PM module 6SN11241AA000DA2 and I/R module
6SN11461BB010BA2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

20
8
0

480
474
463

100

57
41.5
75
53.75
44.75

91.5

94.75

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

7
0
3.75
0
2

6.5

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

MLFB
6SN11241AB000CA V

Leistungsteil 2Achs

Power module 2axis

300

231

33

83

421.7

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

93
.
.
.

2:5

Mablatt ext. Entw.

100mm LT 2Achs

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

Doc.type

462118900002_MB4 MB
Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

Revision

AA

kg/piece:

(for heat sink)

(fr Khlkrper)

I DT MC R&D 9Name:
6
Erl. F80
Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Surface:
Date:
26.03.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

.
.
.

21
43

17.7

36.5

43
50

50

22

18.8

36.5

86.5

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

Belonging to this:

M5

466

338.8
52
24

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
A2

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

PRO/ECAD

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-37 External cooling, 100 mm 2 axes; PM modul 6SN11241AB000CA2

12-429

25

20
8
0

463

480
474

138.5

150

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

0
3

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

MLFB
6SN11241AA000EA V
6SN11241AA000LA V

Leistungsteil 1Achs

Power module 1axis

10.5

25

Manual modification
prohibited

300

231

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

33

83

421.7

466

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455 18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

15.3

.
.
.

14.7

2:5

M5

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

462118.9000.00

Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Doc.type

AB

Mablatt ext. Entw.

150mm LT 1Achs

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

I DT MC R&D 9 6 Name:

Erl. F80

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Surface:
Date:
26.03.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

.
.
.

100

130

(fr Khlkrper)
(for heat sink)

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

390.8
23.9

12-430
Revision

AA

kg/piece:
A2

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

PRO/ECAD

125

12

CADDrawing

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-38 External cooling, 150 mm 1 axis; PM module 6SN11241AA000EA2/0LA3

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

200
188.5
175

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

20
8

464

480
474

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

MLFB
6SN11241BB020CA V

E/R Modul 36kW

E/R module 36kW

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

231

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

300

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

25

60.5

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

33

83

421.7

466

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
18.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:
.
.
.

150

14.7

2:5

M5

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

462118900004_MB

Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Doc.type

MB

Mablatt ext. Entw.

200mm E/R 36 KW

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

I DT MC R&D 9 6 Name:

Erl. F80

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Surface:
Date:
26.03.97
Author: Spaeth
Check: Masatz

.
.
.

34.7

130

(fr Khlkrper)
(for heat sink)

Assembly Cutout
Montagedurchbruch

390.8
23.9

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
Revision

AA

kg/piece:

Sheets:

1
Sheet:
1

Sheetsize

A2

PRO/ECAD

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-39 External cooling, 200 mm; I/R module 6SN11461BB020CA2

12-431

100

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

7),11)

5)

100
18

1)

56
12.2

Module
Modul

233

E/R55/71kW
E/R80/104kW
E/R120/156kW
LT200A
LT300A
LT400A

128

90

6)

213

IP20

12)

186

24.8 0.15

14)

9)

13)

2)

Montagerahmen 300mm
Mounting frame 300mm

250 0.3
100 0.3

92

300

8)

21.5
22
25
18
18
20

Module weight
Modulgewicht
[kg]

120

150 0.3

Module widthMax. conductor cross-section [mm2]

Modulbreite Max. Anschlussquerschnitt [mm2]
[ mm ]
U, V, W 3)
L1, L2, X131 13)
16
300
95
300
95
16
300
150
16
300
95

300
95

300
150

79.5

IP54

Montageebene
Mounting plane

480

Lftungsfreiraum
Free space for cooling air

20

3)

4)

10)

466 0.3
8 0.15

Manuel modification
prohibited

ad

14)

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

6)

2)
3)
4)
5)

1)

14)

500997
500375
500011

ac
ab
aa

Message

501744

ad

Cond.

506685

ae

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

Schrauben M3: 0,8 Nm

SchraubenM4: 1,8 Nm
Schrauben M5: 3 Nm
Schrauben M6: 6 Nm
Schrauben M8: 13 Nm
Schrauben M10: 20 Nm

Date

07.02.95

07.03.95

20.06.98

13.10.95

12.11.98

Sch

Name

Kn

Kn

Kn

Fe

Masatz

Equipment Plant Erlangen

A&D

Siemens AG

Dept.

MC E45

Knauer

03.02.95

Tested by
Standard

Handled by

Date

ISO 8015

.
.
.

Tolerierung

Surface:
.
.

ISO 2768mk

Allg.Toleranz

Scale:

1:4

(7
(16
(26
(52
(112
(173

in
in
in
in
in
in

lb)
lb)
lb)
lb)
lb)
lb)
kg/piece:

SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Replacement for / replaced by:

2 GE. 462108.9001.00

Type/MLFB:

ae

Mablatt Module 300 mm

externe Entwrmung

.
.

M3: 0.8 Nm
M4: 1.8 Nm
M5: 3 Nm
M6: 6 Nm
M8: 13 Nm
M10: 20 Nm

Required tightening torque

for module assembly

Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws

ad

1
3

Page:

Control board inserted screwed in

Attention! Screw in to ensure the galvanic contact for PE-and encoder cable shield
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Terminal block area
Terminal U, V, W: Tightening torques see Chapter 5.6.2 and 6.2.3
PE-connection
Combicon-terminal (plugged for delivery)
(Not included in modules with pulse-interface)
Additional connection possible for cable screening M5x10
(encoder, reference value)
Cover engaged
Cut out for fastening screw M5 or 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Material: Metal sheet DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Front cover: plastic
Cover: plastic
Modules with pulse-interface: IP00
Terminal L1, L2, X131: tightening torque 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
Max. cross-section only applicable with pin terminal
Fan weight: 4 kg

Regelung gesteckt und verschraubt

Achtung! Verschraubung gewhrleistet PE- und Schirmverbindung
fr Geber- und Sollwert (Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Anschlussklemmenbereich
Anschlussklemmenbereich U, V, W:
Anzugsdrehmomente siehe Kapitel 5.6.2 und 6.2.3
PE-Anschluss
Combicon-Klemmen (Anlieferzustand gesteckt)
(Entfllt bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle)
Zustzliche Anschlussmglichkeit fr Schirmauflage M5x10
(Geber, Sollwert)
Abdeckung eingerastet
Bohrung fr Befestigungsgewinde M5 bzw. 10-24 UNC-2A 10-32 UNF-2A
Gehuse: Blech DIN EN 10143 FE P0 3G Z140 M8-0-1.5
Frontplatte: Kunststoff
Abdeckung: Kunststoff
Bei Modulen mit Impulsschnittstelle: IP00
Anschlussbereich L1, L2, X131: Anzugsdrehmoment 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm
Max. Anschlussquerschnitt unter Verwendung von Stiftkabelschuhen mglich
Lftergewicht: 4 kg

Umgebungstemperatur: 0 C bis 40 C
Ambient temperature: 0 C until 40 C

ad

7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)

6)

4)
5)

2)
3)

1)

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmoment

506 0.1
520

12-432
8 0.1

12
P.

PRO/ECAD

CADDrawing

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
05.01

Fig. 12-40 External cooling, 300 mm PM module 6SN11241AA0x0xA1 and I/R module 6SN11461BB000xA1;
Sheet 1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

289

231

480
466
50
2)

3)

289

231

1)

480
1)

3) max. Leiterquerschnitt 4 mm2 (mit Stiftkabelschuh 6 mm2)/Anzugsdrehmoment 0,7 ... 0,8 Nm

max. conductor cross-section 4 mm2 (with pin terminal 6 mm2)/tightening torque 0.7 ... 0.8 Nm

2) max. Leiterquerschnitt 10 mm2 (mit Stiftkabelschuh 16 mm2)/Anzugsdrehmoment 1,5 ... 1,8 Nm

max. conductor cross-section 10 mm2 (with pin terminal 16 mm2)/tightening torque 1.5 ... 1.8 Nm

1) Fr externe Entwrmung Montagewinkel entfernen

for external cooling, remove mounting brackets

1)

1)

466

3)

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly
Screws M3: 0,8 Nm
(7 in lb)
Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

289

231

UI 5kW/UE 5kW
6SN11461AB000BAV

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente
Schraube M3: 0,8 Nm
Schraube M4: 1,8 Nm
Schraube M5: 3,0 Nm
Schraube M6: 6,0 Nm

50

Pulse resistor module/Pulswiderstandsmodul

6SN11131AB010BAV
1)

466

50

Mablatt int./ext. Entwrmung

UE 5kW, PW-Modul, W-Modul

1)

480

Monitoring module/berwachungsmodul
6SN11121AC010AAV

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-41 Interneal/external cooling, 50 mm UI module (6SN11461AB000BAx); pulse resistor module

(6SN11131AB010BAx); monitoring module (6SN11121AC010AAx)

12-433

12

12-434

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

1) Fr externe Entwrmung Montagewinkel entfernen

For external cooling, remove mounting brackets

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

12
Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende
Anzugsdrehmomente

UI-Module 10 kW
UE-Modul 10 kW
MLFB: 6SN11451AA010AAV

Mablatt int./ext. Entwrmung

100 mm UE 10 kW

Mounting Cutout
Montagedurchbruch
(for heat sink and braking resistor)
(fr Khlkrper und Bremswiderstand)

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
02.12
01.12
05.01

Fig. 12-42 Internal/externa cooling, 100 mm UI module; 6SN11451AA010AA2

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

20

480
474
463

200

188.5
175
167

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

Monitoring module 28 kW
UE-Modul 28 kW
MLFB:
6SN11451AB000CA0

33

83

421.7

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm
4

Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)

Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

231

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

300

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

CADDrawing
Manual modification
prohibited

Sp
Name

Tolerances:

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

aa
504455
19.11.97
Rev. Modification Date

First angle
projection

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

2:5

Mablatt ext. Entw.

200 mm UE 28 kW

.
.
Material:

Scale:

Doc.number:

14.7

M5

Article:
Replacement for / replaced by:

Doc.type

462118900008_MB9 MB

I DT MC R&D 9Name:
6
Erl. F80
Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE 6SN11 Version3

Surface:
26.03.97
Zahorsky/Bae
Masatz

.
.
.

Industry Sector

Dep.:
Site:

Date:
Author:
Check:

.
.
.

150

34.7

130

Mounting Cutout
Montagedurchbruch
(for heat sink and braking resistor)
(fr Khlkrper und Bremswiderstand)

390.8
23.9

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
Revision

AA

kg/piece:

1
Sheet:
1
Sheets:

Sheetsize

A2

PRO/ECAD

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-43 External cooling, 200 mm UI-Modul; 6SN11461AB000CA0

12-435

466
25

62

12-436

478.5 +0.5

506 +0.2

11.5 +0.2

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

50 "0.2

Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben
Schrauben

M3:
M4:
M5:
M6:

0,8
1,8
3,0
6,0

Nm
Nm
Nm
Nm

Bei Modulmontage einzuhaltende

Anzugsdrehmomente

25.3 +0.2

12
Screws M3: 0,8 Nm ( 7 in lb)
Screws M4: 1,8 Nm (16 in lb)
Screws M5: 3,0 Nm (26 in lb)
Screws M6: 6,0 Nm (52 in lb)

Adhere to following tightening

torques for module assembly

M5 (or 10-24 UNC-2A , 10-32 UNF-2A) threaded holes spaced 50 mm "0.2

M5 (bzw. 10-24 UNC-2A , 10-32 UNF-2A) Gewindebohrungen im Raster 50 mm "0.2

Mounting Cutout for mounting frame

Montagedurchbruch fr Montagerahmen

25.3 +0.2

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-44 External cooling, installation cutout for installation frames

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

* Pro/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

25.3 "0.2

+0.5
2

478.5

100 "0.2

325.3 "0.2

150 "0.2

250 "0.2

250 "0.2

150 "0.2

100 "0.2

M5
I0 - 24 UNC - 2A
I0 - 32 UNF - 2A
25.3 "0.2

500997
500375
500011

ac
ab
aa

Message

501744

ad

Cond.

506685

ae

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

Date

07.02.95

07.03.95

20.06.98

13.10.95

12.11.98

Sch

Name

Kn

Kn

Kn

Fe

ISO 8015

Knauer
Masatz
Tested by

Equipment Plant Erlangen

A&D

Siemens AG

Dept.

MC E45

03.02.95
Handled by

Standard

Date

.
.
.

Tolerierung

Surface:
.
.

ISO 2768mk

Allg.Toleranz

Working dimensions for assembly location (e. g. Cabinet back wall)

(This representation corresponds to the constructions of two assembly racks 300 mm wide)

Bearbeitungsmae fr Montageebene (z. B. Schaltschrankrckwand)

(Die Darstellung entspricht dem Einbau von zwei Montagerahmen 300 mm breit)

506 "0.2

Manuel modification
prohibited

11.5

CADDrawing

Scale:

1:4

kg/piece:

SIMODRIVE 6SN11

Replacement for / replaced by:

2 GE. 462108.9001.00

Type/MLFB:

ae

Mablatt Module 300 mm

externe Entwrmung

.
.

Page:

2
3

P.

PRO/ECAD

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-45 External cooling, module 300 mm mounting plane, PM module 6SN11241AA0x0xA1 and I/R module
6SN11461BB000xA1

12-437

506 "0.2

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

ac

1)

1)

1) Sealing strip 10 x 1 self-adhesive ac

PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi-Jger co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface ac
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040AA1 tamped
ac
Lettering DIN 14513E3

ac
1) Dichtstreifen 10 x 1 selbstklebend
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi-Jger
ac
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche
3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040AA1 eingestempelt
Schrift DIN 14513E3

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

3)

6SN11620BA040AA1

12

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

512

2x45_

20 "2

2x45_

40 "2

486 "0.2

12-438
394.2 +0.2

6 (2x)

2)

ac

8 .5 +1

12 $0.2

0
8 $0.15
20 $0.15
44.7 -0.2

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

2)

Dichtplatte 50
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

Gratseite

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

0
18 +0.2
21.3 +0.2
21.5 $0.1
24.5

24.5
21.5 $0.1
20.2 +0.2
17 +0.2

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-46 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040AA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
95.4 +0.2

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

2x45_

23-2

486 "0.2

489 "0.2

30 "2
512
506 "0.2

3)

6SN11620BA040FA1

1)

ac

1)

2)

ac
1) Sealing strip 10 x 1 self-adhesive
PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi-Jger co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040F A1 tamped
Lettering DIN 14513E3

ac
1) Dichtstreifen 10 x 1 selbstklebend
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi-Jger
ac
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche
3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040F A1 eingestempelt
Schrift DIN 14513E3

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

434.2 +0.2

6 (2x)

2x45_

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
ac

ac

ac

8 .5 +1

0
8 $0.15
20 $0.15
12 $0.2
44.7 -0.2

21.5 $0.1
24.5

0
18 +0.2
21.3 +0.2

24.5
21.5 $0.1
20.2 +0.2
17 +0.2

Gratseite

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

2)

Dichtplatte 50
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

8 .5 +1

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-47 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040FA1

12-439

95.4 +0.2

6 (2x)

* PRO/E1 *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

ab

2x45_

512
506 "0.2

20 "2

2x45_

ab

40 "2

489 "0.2

3) ab

6SN1162-0BA04-0JA0

1)

ab

1)

2)

ab

ab

ab

ab

3) MLFBnr. 6SN11620BA040JA0 stamped

lettering DIN 14513E3

ab

ab

2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface

1) Sealing strip 10x1 selfadhesive

PEfoam qual. GJ 2861
GummiJger co.

3) MLFBNr. 6SN11620BA040JA0 eingestempelt

Schrift DIN 14513E3

2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche

PESchaum Qual. GJ 2861

Fa. GummiJger

1) Dichtstreifen 10x1 selbstklebend

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

20 $0.15
12 $0.2

0
8 $0.15
9

Bending radius R1

Biegeradius R1

Tolerance for developed dimensions

1mm to each other

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae
zueinander $1 mm

10

ab

ab

24.5

0
21.5 $0.1

24.5
21.5 $0.1

ab

Dichtplatte 50

Gratseite

11

2)

12

ab

Replacement for / replaced by:

Belonging to this:
Allg.Toleranz . Oberfl . che
DIN 6
0,51
kg/St ck
Scale: 1:1
ISO 2768mk.
.
Tolerierung .
.
Bl. DIN EN 10143 FE PO 3G Z140 MB02
.
ISO 8015
Date 02.04.97
HandledSpaeth
by
Tested Masatz
by
. Type/MLFB:
6SN11620BA040JA0
Standard
Dept. E 245
Page:
ab 79A52691 25.03.04LA
1
29.09.95Sch Siemens AG 1 GE.
462108.0029.00
Z ab
aa 501248
1 P.
A& D
Cond.Message Date NameEquipment Plant Erlangen

8 .5 +1

486 "0.2

12-440
PRO/ECAD

12

CADDrawing
Manuel modification
prohibited

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-48 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 50 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040JA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 (2x)

2x45_

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

3)

6SN11620BA040BA1

ac

1)

1)

1) Sealing strip 10 x 1 self-adhesive ac

PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi-Jger co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040BA1 tamped
Lettering DIN 14513E3

ac
1) Dichtstreifen 10 x 1 selbstklebend
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi-Jger
ac
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche
3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040BA1 eingestempelt
Schrift DIN 14513E3

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

435.1 "0.2

486 "0.2

489 "0.2

20 "2

2x45_

50 "2

512
506 "0.2

ac

ac

ac

2)

Gratseite

8.5 +1

0
8 $0.15
20 $0.15
12 $0.2

43.7 -0.2

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

24.5

18 +0.2
21.5 $0.1

67.5 +0.2

74.5
71.5 $0.1

Dichtplatte 100
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

2)

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-49 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 100 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040BA1

12-441

2x45_

6 (4x)

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

ac

1)

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig ac

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

3)

12

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

ac

489 "0.2

45 "2

2x45_

512
506 "0.2

25 "2

486 "0.2

ac

434.2 +0.2

12-442
2)

ac

95.4 +0.2

1) Sealing strip 10 x 1 self-adhesiveac

PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi-Jger co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040GA1 tamped
Lettering DIN 14513E3

ac

ac

1) Dichtstreifen 10 x 1 selbstklebend ac
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi-Jger
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche ac
3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040GA1 eingestempelt ac
Schrift DIN 14513E3

1)

ac

0
8 $0.15
20 $0.15
12 $0.2

44.7 -0.2

ac

24.5

18 +0.2
21.3
+0.2
21.5 $0.1

32 -0.2
28.7 -0.2
20.2 +0.2
17 +0.2
0

70.2 +0.2
67
+0.2
50 $0.15

74.5
71.5 $0.1

ac
Gratseite

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

2)

Dichtplatte 100
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

8.5 +1

6SN11620BA040GA1

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-50 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 100 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040GA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

 Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

6 (4x)

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

ac

489.5 "0.2

20 "2

2x45_

2x45_

512
506 "0.2

40 "2

486 "0.2

ac
ac

1)

1)

151.2 -0.2

252.7 -0.2

272 -0.2

462.7 +0.2
1)

1) Sealing strip 10 x 1 self-adhesive ac

PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi-Jger co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with bearing surface ac
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040HA1 tamped
ac
Lettering DIN 14513E3

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig ac

2) ac
Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.
1) Dichtstreifen 10 x 1 selbstklebend ac
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi-Jger
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche ac
3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040HA1 eingestempelt ac
Schrift DIN 14513E3

3)

8.5 +1

0
8 $0.15
20 $0.15
12 $0.2

Gratseite

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

2)

Dichtplatte 100
externe Entw.

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

0
15.1 +0.2
18.3 +0.2
21.5 $0.1
24.5

70.2 +0.2
67.2 +0.2
65.4 +0.2
50 $0.15

74.5
71.5 $0.1

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-51 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation module width 100 mm, 6SN11620BA040HA1

12-443

6SN11620BA040HA1

ac

2x45_

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

434.1 +0.2

6SN11620BA040CA1

ac

Gewindebolzen M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig ac

Threaded bolt M5 x 15 Typ FH-M5-15 Knig co.

3)

12

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

6 (4x)

45 "2

2x45_

512
506 "0.2
489.5 "0.2

50 "2

486 "0.2

12-444
1)

1)

ac

44.6 -0.2
Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm zueinander

Tolerance for developed dimensions "1 mm to each other

2)

ac
8.5 +1

ac

ac
Gratseite

Dichtplatte 150
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

ac

ac

2) Sealing strip to be flush with

bearing surface
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040CA1
stamped Lettering DIN 14513E3

ac

ac
1) Sealing strip 10x1 self-adhesive
PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi - Jger Co.

ac

ac

ac

3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040CA1
eingestempelt Schrift DIN 14513E3

2)

2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche

0
14.8 +0.2
21.5 "0.1
24.5 1) Dichtstreifen 10x1 selbstklebend
ac
PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi - Jger

124.5
121.5 "0.1
114.2 +0.2
100 "0.15

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-52 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 150 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040CA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12 "0.2
0
8 "0.15

20 "0.15

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

512
506 "0.2

2x45_

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

ac

ac

50 "2

489 "0.2
486 "0.2

70 "2

6 (4x)

2x45_

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
434.1 +0.2

6SN11620BA040DA1
Threaded bolt M5x15, Typ FH-M5-15 Koenig co.

Gewindebolzen M5x15, Typ FH-M5-15 Fa. Knig

3) ac

ac

1)

2) ac

1)

ac

0
8 "0.15
8.5 +1

ac

ac

ac

ac
gratseite

2)

Biegeradius R1
Bending radius R1

Dichtplatte 200
ext. Entw. mit Lfter

Tolerance for developed dimensions

"1 mm to each other

Toleranz fr Abwicklungsmae "1 mm

zueinander

24.5

21.5 "0.1

35.2 -0.2

174.5
171.5 "0.1
164.2 +0.2
150 "0.15

1) Sealing strip 10x1 self-adhesive ac

PE-foam qual. GJ 2861
Gummi - Jger Co.
2) Sealing strip to be flush with
ac
bearing surface
3) MLFB-nr. 6SN11620BA040DA1 ac
stamped
Lettering DIN 14513E3

3) MLFB-Nr. 6SN11620BA040DA1 ac
eingestempelt
Schrift DIN 14513E3

1) Dichtstreifen 10x1 selbstklebend

PE-Schaum Qual. GJ 2861
Fa. Gummi - Jger
2) Dichtstreifen bndig an Flche

ac

02.07
05.01
12 Dimension Drawings

Fig. 12-53 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 200 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040DA1

12-445

12

20 "0.15

12 "0.2

44.6 -0.2

* PRO/E *

Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung, Verbreitung und/oder Bearbeitung

dieses Dokumentes, Verwertung und Mitteilung seines Inhaltes sind
verboten, soweit nicht ausdrcklich gestattet. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte fr den Fall der Patenterteilung, Gebrauchsmuster- oder Geschmacksmustereintragung vorbehalten.

Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document

as well as utilization of its contents and communication thereof to
others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders will be
held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant
or registration of a utility model or design patent are reserved.

Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Resrevados todos os direitos.

Confiado como segreto de empresa. Nos reservamos todos los derechos.

Confi titre de secret dentreprise. Tous droits rservs.

ab

145 "2

255.5

175.5

95.5

15.5

ab

1) ab

punktgeschweit ( 8x )

40 "2

12-446
8

18

10

11

12

BB

2)
3

Flaechen buendig zueinander

AA

SIEMENS
Montagerahmen 300mm
Sach.Nr.462108.7015.01
MLFB: 6SN11620BA040EA0

79A52691
507923
Cond. Message

ab
aa

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

Date

25.03.04
23.05.00

LA
Ku
Name

ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

Allg.Toleranz

E 45
Siemens AG
A&D
Equipment Plant Erlangen

Dept.

Tested by Masatz
Standard

.
.
Fe/Zn 13 cB
n.DIN 50960
23.05.2000
Date
Handled byKunick

Surface:

ab

kg/piece:

3,0

Type/MLFB:

Replacement for / replaced by:

P.

Page:

6SN11620BA040EA0

1:1

Montagerahmen 300mm
komplett

Scale:

ab

1 GE.462108.7015.01 Z ab

.
.

Bestellzeichnung

2) Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm

1) MLFBnr. 6SN11620BA040EA0 stamped

lettering DIN 14513E3

1) MLFBNr. 6SN11620BA040EA0 eingestempelt

ab
Schrift DIN 14513E3
Verpackung mit Typenschild versehen 2) Anzugsdrehmoment: 1.8 Nm ab
Typenschild beschriftet mit:

Anlieferzustand:
Fertigteil einzeln im Karton verpackt,

PRO/ECAD

12

CADDrawing
Manuel modification
prohibited

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-54 External cooling, mounting frame for cabinet installation, 300 mm module width, 6SN11620BA040EA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition
6SN11620BA040EA0

05.08
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

Housing Cover
1)

52

Fastening with two screws

1)

M6

63

75

SIEMENS

or
DIN 912M4

M6

1)

or
DIN 912M4

80

1)

54

121

1) To fasten the housing, two M69.5 deep threads are present on the base
M6 screw for fastening externally or DIN 912M4 screw for fastening internally.

Fig. 12-55 Signal amplifier electronics SVE, 6SN11150AA120AA0

12

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-447

* Pro/E *

160

196
210

210

Cond.

ab
aa

Message

504737
504397

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

Date

31.07.97
10.06.97

Surface:

Standard
Dept.

.
.
.

E245

.
.
.
30.07.97
Date
Handled byLehner/Kno.
Tested by Masatz

80
Siemens AG
Kno
Automation & Group
Bm Equipment Plant Erlangen
Name

ISO 2768mk
Tolerance
ISO 8015

General tolerance

52.8

7
66

12-448
.
.

1:1

72

80

kg/piece:

Replacement for/replaced by:

Pulsed resistor for 28 kW

0.3/25 kW
MRPD:. 6SN11131AA000DA0

Scale:

Page:
2
3
P.

PRO/ECAD

12

CAD Drawing
Manual modification
prohibited

12 Dimension Drawings
02.07
05.01

Fig. 12-56 External pulsed resistor for 28kW for UI module, SN11131AA000DA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

410

179.5

240

143

PG 13.5 with
shield connection

7.5
155
193

4xO6.5
120

240

Cable 6FX50081BB21xxxx
Power cable 4x2.5 C UL/CSA
5 m long connected at the resistor

12

Note:
The 5 m long cable to connect the resistor
may be shortened but not extended!

Fig. 12-57 External pulsed resistor Plus, 6SL31001BE225AA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-449

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
02.12
05.01

251

150

Power cable 4 x 1,5 mm2

200

552

200

(inlying cable before mounting to conduct)

Cable entry 11,5 mm

277

12

70
75

267
A (1:2)

6,5

10

Note:
The 5 m long cable to connect the resistor may be shortened but not extended!

Mounting position:
Flat on the control cabinet (IP51) or any position in the control cabinet!
Schematic diagram

Fig. 12-58 Damping resistor for 3-phase HFD line/commutating reactors, 6SL31001BE213AA0

12-450

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

101.5

6.5

14.5

Air outlet
min. 100 clearance

Stand-by mode
LED green

320

334

25

Rating plate

211
25

Air intake
min. 100 clearance

Cable
outlet

50
225.7
100

12

Rated capacitance: 2,8 mF (4,1 mF)

Rated voltage: 600 V DC
Cable outlet downwards
Connection flexible AWG 20 to AWG 6
Mounting position as drawn
Degree of protection IP20
Case is sheet steel zinc plated
M1:2

Distributed capacitor modules dimensions and mounting dimensions

Order No.:

Distributed capacitor modules 2,8 mF/600 V

Distributed capacitor modules 4,1 mF/600 V

6SN11121AB001AA0
6SN11121AB001BA0

Siemens AG
A&D SE WKC BFA Version: 04.07.2001

Fig. 12-59 Distributed capacitor modules, 6SN11121AB001xA0

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-451

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
02.12
05.01

Montagewand
Installation wall

2
DC-Link Adaptor 95 mm
(6SN1161-1AA01-0BA0)
The illustration shows the DClink Adaptor
mounted on a 50mm power module.

20

2
DC-Link Adaptor 95 mm
(6SN1161-1AA01-0AA0)
Attention, only use with 300mm modules!
The illustration shows the DClink adaptor
mounted on an IRModule.
1) Before mounting of Pos. 2 remove grounding bar,
and screw on provided grounding cable instead
of grounding bar after mounting.
(not applicable when mounted on power modules)

54

ZK-Adapter 95 mm (6SN1161-1AA01-0AA0)
Achtung, nur mit 300mm Modulen verwenden!
Die Darstellung zeigt den Anschluss an einem ERModul.
1) Vor der Montage von Pos. 2 Erdungsbgel entfernen und
nach der Montage beiliegende Erdungsleitung anstelle
des Erdungsbgels anschrauben
(entf
(entfllt bei Montage an LT-Modulen)

* PRO/E *

ZK-Adapter 95 mm (6SN1161-1AA01-0BA0)
Die Darstellung zeigt den Anschluss
an ein 50mm Leistungsmodul.

45
3

B
4)

1
B
1:1

3)
4
74

32

59

5
5

5)

50

65

4)

4)

2)

1)

Schutzleiteranschluss
protective conductor connection

6)

Potentialausgleichsanschluss
equipotential bonding connection
8

3)

C
1:1
C

9
9

12

Allg.Toleranz
ISO 2768mk
Tolerierung
ISO 8015

Tolerances:

.
.
.
Doc.number:
462008703100MZ

Scale: 1:1

.
.
Material:

Potentialausgleichsanschluss
equipotential bonding connection

Schutzleiteranschluss
protective conductor connection

ZKAdapterset 3595 mm2

6SN11611AA010AA0

ZKAdapterset 1650 mm2

6SN11611AA010BA0

kg/piece:

Pos. Menge
Qty.

Bennenung

MLFB

Description

MLFB

PRO/ECAD

A1
Sheetsize

Item

12

Install DCLink cables seperately from system bus

and drive bus cables. For DCLink cables longer than
0.5m, we recommend the use of shielded cables.
2) Install the equipotential bonding conductor between
the DClink cables. Use highly flexible braided copper
tape 10 x 1 mm2 , e.g. Druseidt Elektrotechnik co, order
no.:13012 with cable lugs similar DIN46234410
3) Example of high surface area shield contact when
using shielded DCLink cables.
4) Tightening torque 1.8 Nm
5) Hex socket M5, tightening torque 6 Nm
6) Hex socket M6, tightening torque 13 Nm

11

.
.
.

Surface:
Date: 01.03.96
Author: Knauer
Check: Hecht

2)

10

DIN 6

Belonging to this:

First angle
projection

462008703100

ZKAdaptersatz 50mm / 95mm

DC Link Adaptor Kit 50mm / 95mm

Dep.: I DT MC R&D
Name:
96
Site:
Erlangen F80
Typ/MLFB:
SIMODRIVE
1
AD 79C9502602.09.2011
Nie ner
AC 79B31577 04.12.06 GF
Sheet:
MZ
AD
ab 505339 15.01.97 Fe
1
Industry Sector
aa 504206 20.06.97 Fe
Article:
Doc.type Revision Sheets:
Rev. Modification Date
Name
Replacement for / replaced by:

Gertebus- und Antriebsbusleitung rumlich getrennt

von der Zwischenkreisverbindungsleitung verlegen.
Bei Verbindungsleitungen die lnger als 0,5 m sind,
wird der Einsatz von geschirmten Leitungen empfohlen.
empfohle
2) Potentialausgleichsleitung zwischen den
Zwischenkreisverbindungsleitungen verlegen;
2
Hochflexibles E-Cu Gewebeband 10 x 1mm
z.B. Fa. Druseidt Elektrotechnik, Bestellnr.:13012
mit Kabelschuh hnlich DIN 46234-4-10 verwenden.
3) Beispiel fr flchige Schirmauflage bei
Verwendung geschirmter Zwischenkreisleitungen
4) Anzugsdrehmoment 1.8 Nm
5) Innensechskant SW 5, Anzugsdrehmoment 6 Nm
6) Innensechskant SW 6, Anzugsdrehmoment 13 Nm

Fig. 12-60 DC link adapter set 16...50 mm2 and 35...95 mm2 6SN11611AA010BA0/ 0AA0

12-452

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

05.08
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

25

5,5

3, 5, 7, 10

20,2

64

12

Shield connection

6SN1162-0FA00-0AA1

aa

Fig. 12-61 Shield connection 6SN11620FA000AA1 (dimension drawing)

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-453

02.07
05.08
05.01

5,2

25

9,4

6SN11620FA000AA2

12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-62 Shield connection 6SN11620FA000AA2 (dimension drawing)

12-454

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Mounting instructions
The thermally conductive plate can be mounted at any position on the device group.
Ensure that the plate is approx. 100 mm wide and so extends over a neighboring device.
It does not matter whether the plate extends to the right or the left.
The division of the rearside breakouts to fasten the thermally conductive plate take account of this.
The thermally conductive plate together with the device fastening is screwed to the rear wall.
This does not impair the bus lines and DC link connections.

05.08
02.07
05.01

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12 Dimension Drawings

12

Fig. 12-63 Thermally conductive plate 6SN11620BA010AAx (dimension drawing)

12-455

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
05.01

147 (5.79)
168,5 (6.63)

8 (0.31)

268 (10.55)

300 (11.81)

144 (5.67)

6,4 (0.25)

9,5 (0.37)

10 (0.39)

150 (4.92)

172 (6.77)

16,5 (0.65)

50,5 (1.99)

12

Fig. 12-64 VPM 120, dimension drawing 6SN11131AA001JAx

12-456

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
02.07
05.01

12 Dimension Drawings

248,5 (9.78)2)
178,5 (7.03)1)

250 (9.84)
244 (9.61)
6,4 (0.25)

8 (0.31)

300 (11.81)
268 (10.55)

10 (0.39)

9,5 (0.37)

182 (7.17)1)
252 (9.92)2)

16,5 (0.65)

12
50,5 (1.99)

1) VPM 200
2) VPM 200 Dynamik

Fig. 12-65 VPM 200/VPM 200 DYNAMIK, dimension drawing 6SN11131AA001xAx

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

12-457

12 Dimension Drawings

02.07
05.01

12

12-458

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Abbreviations and Terminology

611 D

D for digital (SIMODRIVE 611 digital)

611 U

U for universal (SIMODRIVE 611 universal)

611 UE

UE for universal eco (SIMODRIVE 611 universal E)

611 U HR

HR for High Resolution

ABS

Absolute

ADC

Analogtodigital converter

AIE

Angular incremental encoder interface

Analog control

Control board with analog interface

AO

Analog output

ARM

Rotating induction motor

ASM

Induction motor

COM

Communications module

Commissioning

Commissioning

CPU

Central processing unit

DAC

Digitaltoanalog converter

DC link

DC link

Digital control

Control board with digital interface

DM

Direct measuring system (encoder 2)

DMS

Direct measuring system

DP

Distributed periphery (I/O)

Drive module

General term for main spindle and feed module

DSC

Dynamic servo control

EMC

Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF

Electromotive force

EN+

Enable voltage +24 V

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

A-459

A Abbreviations and Terminology

02.07
05.01

EN

Reference for the enable voltage

EnDat

Encoder-data interface (bidirectional synchronousserial interface)

EP

Electronic assessment factor

ESD

Modules/components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge

ET 200

Peripheral devices (I/O) from the SIMATIC range which can be coupled via
PROFIBUS

External cooling

Module with heatsink that extends beyond the rear panel, cooling on the
customer side

FDD

Feed drive

FD module

Feed module

FG

Function generator

Hardware

Hardware

HEX

Abbreviation for a hexadecimal number

HFD

Highfrequency damping

HGL

Highresolution actual position value (rampfunction generator)

HWE

Hardware limit switch

Input

Id

Fieldgenerating current

IF

Pulse enable

IM

Induction motor without encoder (IM operation)

IM

Indirect measuring system (motor measuring system)

Internal cooling

Modules with integrated heatsink, in some cases with hose connection

IPO

Interpolator

Iq

Torquegenerating current

I/R module

Infeed/regenerative feedback module with regulated DC link voltage

KL

Terminal

Kv

Position loop gain (Kv factor)

L2DP

L2 distributed I/O

LED

Light emitting diode

MCU

Motion Control Unit (singleaxis positioning board)

A-460

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.07
05.01

A Abbreviations and Terminology

MLFB

Machine readable product designation (Order No.)

Monitoring module

Monitoring module

MPI

Multi Point Interface

MSD module

Main spindle module

MSD option

Option module, main spindle options for FD module

MSR

Dimension system grid: Smallest position unit

MT

Machine tool

Nominal values = rated value (index)

nact

Actual speed value

Line values (index)

NC

Numerical control

NCU

Numerical control unit

NE

Line infeed

NE module

Line supply infeed module (general term for UI and I/R modules)

nset

Speed setpoint

Output

OC

Operating condition

OPI

Operator panel interface

PELV

Protective extra low voltage

PG

Programming device

PLC

Programmable logic controller

PLI

Pole position identification

PM module

Power module

PO

POWER ON

PPU

Protected power unit

PR module

Pulsed resistor module

PROFIBUS

Process field bus: Serial data bus

PU

Packaging unit

RCCB

Residual current circuit breaker

RF

Controller enable

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

A-461

A Abbreviations and Terminology

02.07
05.01

RLI

Rotor position identification, corresponds to the pole position identification (PLI)

SLM

Synchronous linear motor

SRM

Synchronous rotating motor

SS

Interface

SSI

Synchronous serial interface

SVE

Current amplification electronics

SW

Software

SWE

Software limit switch

UDC link

DC link voltage

UI

Uncontrolled infeed

UI module

Infeed module with nonregulated DC link voltage and pulsed resistor

VPM

VP module, module to limit the DC link voltage when a fault condition occurs
(VPM: Voltage Protection Module)

VPM

Voltage protection module

Vpp

Peaktopeak voltage

xact

Actual position value

xset

Position setpoint value

A-462

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

References
General Documentation
/BU/

SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE

Catalog NC 60 S 2009
Order No.: E86060K4460A101B3
Order No.: E86060K4460A101B3 7600 (English)

/KT101/

SITOP power/LOGO!power power supplies

Catalog NC 10.1S 2009
Order No.: E86060K2410A101A7

/KT654/

SIMODRIVE and POSMO

Catalog NC 65.4 S 2005
Order No.: E86060K5165A401A2

/Z/

MOTIONCONNECT
Connections & System Components for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK,
MASTERDRIVES, and SIMOTION
Catalog NC Z
Order No.: E86060K4490A101B1
Order No.: E86060K4490A101B17600 (English)

/NSK/

LowVoltage Switchgear
Automation and Drives
Catalog NS K
Order No.: E86060K1002A101A1

/PD10/

Transformers SIDACT
Catalog PD 10 2001
Order No.: E86060K2801A101A1

/HBSI/

Safety Integrated
The Safety Program for Industries of the World
Application Manual
Order No.: 6ZB50000AA010BA1

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

B-463

B References

11.05
02.07
05.01

User Documentation
/PI/

PCIN 4.4
Software for the data transfer to/from MMC module
Order No.: 6FX2 060 4AA004XB0 (German, English, French)
Ordering location: WK Frth

Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Note
A list of additional documents, updated on a monthly basis, is available on the
Internet for the available languages at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu items Support > Technical Documentation >
Ordering Documentation > Printed Documentation.

B-464

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

You can find the EC declaration of conformance for the EMC directive in the
Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There, as search term, enter the number 15257461 or contact the local Siemens office in your region.
You can find the EC declaration of conformance for the Low-Voltage-Directive in
the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There, as search term, enter the number 22383669.

Note
Listing and file names regarding UL/CSA/FM certification of SIEMENS
SIMODRIVE products can be found under:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There, as search term enter SIMODRIVE certificates.

Note
Certificates, Declarations of Conformity, test certificates, such as CE, UL,
Safety Integrated, etc., are valid only when the components described in the
associated catalogs and this configuration guide are used, and installed in
accordance with the configuring guidelines and used properly!
In other cases, such documents must be prepared again by the vendor of
these products!

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-465

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

Fig. C-1

C-466

Certificate, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

Fig. C-2

Safety Manufacturers Declaration SIMODRIVE

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-467

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

Fig. C-3

C-468

Safety Manufacturers Declaration SIMODRIVE, continued

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

Fig. C-4

Safety Manufacturers Declaration SIMODRIVE, continued

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-469

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

Fig. C-5

C-470

Safety Manufacturers Declaration SIMODRIVE, continued

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

Fig. C-6

Safety Manufacturers Declaration SIMODRIVE, continued

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-471

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

Extract, following

C-472

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-473

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

C-474

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-475

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

C-476

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

EMC limit values in

South Korea

The EMC limit values to be maintained for Korea correspond to the limit values
of the EMC product standard for variablespeed electric drives EN 618003,
Category C2all or limit value class A, Group 1 according to EN55011.
With suitable supplementary measures, the limit values according to Category
C2 or to limit value class A, Group 1 are maintained.
In addition, other measures, for example the use of an additional radio interference suppression filter (EMC filter) may be required. Further, measures for
EMCcompliant installation of the system are described in detail in this manual
or in the Configuration Manual EMC Installation Guideline.
It should be noted that the label attached to the device is always decisive regarding statements made about the standards that are complied with.
J

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

C-477

C Certificates/Declarations of Conformity

02.12
05.01

C-478

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

Index
Numbers
1-axis drive control, 4-83
1FT6 motors, 4-83
1PH motors, 4-83
2-axis drive control
High Performance, 4-83
High Standard, 4-83
Performance, 4-83
2-tier configuration, Control cabinet design, 9-344
3phase fans, 6-173

A
Adapter set, 7-238
Ambient conditions, 2-46
Armature shortcircuit, 8-293
Arrangement of the modules, 2-42
Autotransformer, 7-220

B
Braking module, 6-141, 6-191
Connection, 6-192
Technical specifications, 6-191

C
Cabinet, 1-28
Cabinet wiring, 9-335
Cable shield, 9-336
Capacitor module, 1-26, 6-183
Charge/discharge times, 6-190
Configuration, 6-188
Connectable, 6-189
Technical specifications, 6-186
CD, 4-91
Certificates, vi
Charge times, 6-190
Circuit breakers, 7-215

Circuit information
Display elements (LEDs), 6-160
Switch S1, 6-154
Terminal 112, 6-157
Terminal 19, 6-154
Terminal 48, 6-154
Terminal 63, 6-154
Terminal 64, 6-155
Terminal 9, 6-154
Terminal P500, M500, 6-158
Terminal R, 6-156
Terminal X131, 6-157
Terminals 111, 113, 213, 6-158
Terminals 2U1, 2V1, 2W1, 6-157
Terminals 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 6-159
Terminals 7, 45, 44, 10, 15, 6-157
Terminals 72, 73.1, 73.2, 74, 6-158
Terminals AS1, AS2, 6-157
Terminals L1, L2, 6-156
Terminals NS1, NS2, 6-154
Closedloop Control Module
1-axis for resolvers, 4-91
2-axis for resolvers, 4-91
Closedloop control module
2axis for encoders with sin/cos 1 Vpp, 4-93
2axis for resolvers, 4-93
Closedloop drive control, 4-83
Commutating reactor(s), 6-174, 6-175
Configuration
Description, 1-28
Engineering a drive, 1-31
Engineering sheet, 1-36
Phases, 1-30
Procedure, 1-29
Selection, 1-30
Configurator, 1-29
Connectingup, 1-30
Connection regulations, 9-335
Control Units, 1-27, 4-81
ANA module, 4-112
Closedloop drive control, digital, 4-83
HLA module, 4-104
Overview, 4-81
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS, 4-91
Cooling components, 6-172
Cooling types, 1-28, 2-57
Current reduction, 5-128

D
DAC assignment, 4-111
Danger information, viii
Data volume, 4-91

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

D-479

D Index

DC link
Braking module, 6-191
Buffering, 8-310
Capacitor module, 6-183
Charge/discharge times, 6-190
Energy balance, 8-310
External pulsed resistors, 6-194
Overvoltage limiter module, 6-190, 7-203
DC link voltage, 8-244
Definition
of the currents, 5-124
of the load duty cycles, 5-127
of the power ratings, 5-124
Derating, 6-171
Inverter clock cycle frequency, 5-129
Dimension drawings, 12-391
Direct position sensing, 3-68
Discharge times, 6-190
Discharge voltage, 6-190
Disposal of devices, 8-266
Drive bus, 2-45, 4-83
Drive lineup, 2-41

E
EMC Design Guidelines, 9-335
EMC legislation, 7-230
EMC measures, Grounding, electronics ground,
9-340
Encoder cables, Ordering notes, 3-80
Encoder power supply
Motor measuring system, 3-72
SSI encoder, 3-74
EnDat interface, 4-83
Engineering steps, 1-29
Environmentallyfriendly disposal of devices,
8-266
Equipment bus, 2-45
ESDS information and instructions, xiv
Example
Motor changeover, 8-305
Motor parallel operation, 8-303
Star-delta operation, 8-298
Typical circuit diagram, 8-268
Explanation of symbols, viii
External cooling, 2-60
External pulsed resistors, 6-194

02.12
05.01

Fundamental principles when engineering a drive

Braking module, 2-44
Checking the DC link capacitance, 1-31
DC link capacitance, 1-31
Dimensioning, 1-31
Drive bus, 2-44
Equipment bus, 2-44
Feed axes, 1-31
Length of cable, 2-44
Power supply rating, 1-31

H
Help for the reader, viii
HFD commutating reactor, 6-174
Highvoltage test, 9-346
HLA module
Connectingup, 4-106
System components, 4-105, 4-113
Holding brake, 3-63, 4-90, 8-293
Hose package, 6-172
Hotline, vi

I
I/R module
Autotransformer, 7-220
Technical specifications, 6-165
Transformer, 7-224
I/R module with HFD reactor, 6-141
Indirect position sensing, 3-68
Induction motor
Motor changeover, 8-305
Parallel operation, 8-303
Series reactor, 8-301
Star-delta operation, 8-298
Infeed modules, 1-26, 6-141
Installation altitude, 2-46
Installation conditions, 9-341
Installation regulations, 9-335
Interface overview, Bus interfaces, 4-119
Internal cooling, 2-59, 9-341
Internal pulsed resistors, 6-191
Inverter clock cycle frequency, Derating, 5-129

L
F

Leading contact, 7-226

Line choke, 6-175

Fan, 6-173
Fieldweakening range, 8-302
Folder
of dimension drawings, 12-391
of references, B-463

D-480

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

02.12
05.01

Line filter
Basic Line Filter, 7-231, 7-235
For I/R modules, 7-231
For UI modules, 7-231
Wideband Line Filter, 7-231
Wideband line filter, 7-232
Line fuses, 7-215
Line infeed, 6-141
Line supply connection, 1-26, 4-107, 4-115, 7-201
Line system configurations, 7-205
IT-line supply, 7-208
TN-C line supply, 7-206
TT line supply, 7-207
Load duty cycle definitions, 5-127

M
Main Spindle Drive
Master drive, 8-297
Slave drive, 8-297
Main switches, 7-226, 8-239
Master/slave operation, 8-297
Minimum crosssection for PE, 7-209
Module
ANA module, 4-112
Braking module, 1-26
Capacitor module, 1-26, 6-183
HLA module, 4-104
Infeed module, 1-26
Monitoring module, 1-26, 6-179
Overvoltage limiter module, 7-203
Power module, 1-26
VP module, 2-48
Modules
Braking module, 6-191
Overvoltage limiter module, 6-190, 7-203
Power module, 5-121
Monitoring module, 1-26, 6-142, 6-179
LED display, 6-181
Mode of operation, 6-181
Motor
Encoder, 3-64
Overview, 1-27
Protection, 3-63
Selection, 2-48, 3-63
with holding brake, 3-63
Motor changeover, 8-302
Motor encoder, 3-64
Motor holding brake, 4-90
Motor rotor position sensing, 3-68
Motor speed sensing, 3-68
Mounting and installing the modules, 2-45

N
NCSD Configurator, 1-29

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

D Index

NE module
Block diagram, 6-146
Interface overview, 6-147
Nominal load duty cycles, 6-169
Settings, 6-162
Network failure, 8-244
Method of operation, 8-307
No ground faults, 7-202
Nominal load duty cycles
FDD, 5-127
MSD-IM, 5-127
MSD-SRM, 5-127
Notes
Danger and warning information, viii
Hotline, vi
regarding the danger of electrostatic
discharge, xiv
Target group, vi
Technical, ix
Technical Support, vi

O
One-axis drive control, 4-83
Operation when the power fails, 8-307
Optional module
PROFIBUS-DP, 4-91
TERMINALS, 4-91
Ordering notes, 1-29
Overload protection, 8-306
Overview, 1-25
Overvoltage limiter module, 6-190, 7-203
Overvoltage limiting module, 6-141

P
Parallel operation, 8-302, 8-303
PC-Tools, 1-29
Personnel Qualified?, vii
Position sensing, 2-49, 3-78
Direct, 3-68
Indirect, 3-68
Position sensing, direct, 3-68
Positioning, 3-68
Possible arrangements, 2-41
Power module, 5-121
Internal cooling, 2-52, 5-122
Technical specifications, 5-124
Power modules, 1-26
PROFIBUS DP
When can the modules be used?, 4-97
Which modules are available?, 4-96
PROFIBUS-DP, Which modules are available?,
4-91
Proper use, vii
Pulse enable, 8-246

D-481

D Index

Pulse frequency power modules, 5-128

Pulsed resistor, external, 6-194

Q
Qualified personnel, vii

R
Radial fan, 6-172
Ready for operation, 8-244
Reference, B-463
Remote/sense operation, 3-73

02.12
05.01

Typical circuit diagram

with SIMODRIVE 611 digital, 8-295
with SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS, 8-296

U
UI module, 6-141
5 kW, 6-150
Commutating reactor(s), 6-175
Line choke, 6-175
Technical specifications, 6-168
Using the manual, viii

V
S
Safe standstill, 4-92, 8-252
Safe start inhibit, 4-92
Safety information, viii
Safety Integrated, 8-311
Selecting components, 1-30
Series reactor, 8-301
Setup operation, 8-244
Shield connecting plate, 9-338
Shield contact, 9-338
Shielding, 9-336
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS, 4-91
SINUMERIK, 4-83
SSI encoder, 3-74
Star-delta operation, 8-298
Start inhibit, 4-92, 8-252
Supplementary components, Technical specifications, 6-172
Support, vi
SVE (signal amplification electronics), Ordering
notes, 3-80
Switching element, 7-226
System structure, 1-25

T
Technical Support, vi
Terminal overview
SIMODRIVE 611 digital, 10-380
SIMODRIVE 611 universal HRS, 10-381
Tightening torque for screws retaining electrical
connections, 2-41
Toolbox, 4-91
Toothedwheel encoder, Ordering notes, 3-80
Transformers, 7-210

D-482

Variants
of the control board, 4-91
of the option modules, 4-91
Voltage limiting module, 8-322
VP module, 2-48
VPM, 2-48
VPM 120, 8-322
VPM 200, 8-322

W
Warnings, viii
Warranty, 1-28

X
X101, 4-107, 4-115
X102, 4-107, 4-115
X111, 4-108, 4-116
X112, 4-108, 4-116
X121, 4-109, 4-117
X122, 4-109, 4-117
X141, 4-119
X151, 4-119
X181, 9-335
X302, 4-93, 4-94
X341, 4-119
X411, 4-88, 4-102, 4-103
X412, 4-88, 4-102, 4-103
X421, 4-89
X422, 4-89
X431, 4-110, 4-118
X432, 4-110, 4-118

Siemens AG 2012 All Rights Reserved

SIMODRIVE 611 Configuration Manual (PJU) 02/2012 Edition

SIMODRIVE Documentation Overview

General Documentation/Catalogs
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SIMODRIVE

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE

Accessories

Catalog NC 60
Automation Systems
Machine Tools

for

Catalog DA 65.4
SIMODRIVE 611 universal
and POSMO

Catalog NC Z

Catalog CA 01

Connection
Technology and
System Components

Components for
Automation & Drives

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SIMOTICS S

SIMODRIVE

SIMOTICS M

SIMOTICS

611

Configuration
Manual

Converter

Configuration Manual

Configuration Manual

Configuration Manual

AC Servomotors for Feed

and Main Spindle Drives

AC Induction Motors
for Main Spindle Drives

Hollow Shaft Motors for

Main Spindle Drives

1FT, 1FK

1PH

1PM, 2SP

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SIMODRIVE

SIMODRIVE

SIMODRIVE

Configuration Manual

Configuration Manual

Configuration Manual

AC Motors
for Main Spindle Drives

Linear Motors
1FN

Builtin Torque Motors

1FW

Synchronous
BuiltIn Motors 1FE1

EMC
Design Guideline

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY

lterations reserved
Siemens AG 201

www.siemens.com/motioncontrol